(Heb. DANIYEL)
ΔΑΝΙΗΛ (A-Daniêl)
κατα Θεοδοτιωνα (Down to-a-Theodotiôn)
DANIEL (Theodotion)
Inscr Δανιηλ. BA seq in BA (? Γ) historia Susannae (cui subscr A ορασις α´) Susannae autem sine intervallo succedit Daniel
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:1 ΕΝ ἔτει τρίτῳ τῆς βασιλείας Ἰωακεὶμ βασιλέως Ἰούδα ἦλθεν Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ βασιλεὺς Βαβυλῶνος εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ καὶ ἐπολιόρκει αὐτήν.
In unto-a-yeareedness unto-third of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-an-Iôakeim of-a-ruler-of of-an-Ioudas it-had-came, a-Nabouchodonosor a-ruler-of of-a-Babulôn, into to-an-Ierousalêm and it-was-city-fenceeing-to to-it.
1:1 superscr ορασις β´ A | ηλθε BbAa
ΔΑΝΙΗΛ (A-Daniêl)
κατα τους Ό (Down to-the-ones of-an-O)
DANIEL (O)
Inscr Δανιηλ κατα τους ό 87 προφητεια Δ. κατα την εκδοσιν των ό Syr
(O) ΕΠΙ βασιλέως Ἰωακεὶμ τῆς Ἰουδαίας ἔτους τρίτου παραγενόμενος Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ βασιλεὺς Βαβυλῶνος εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ ἐπολιόρκει αὐτήν.
Upon of-a-ruler-of of-an-Iôakeim of-the-one of-an-Ioudaia of-a-yeareedness of-third having-had-became-beside, a-Nabouchodonosor a-ruler-of of-a-Babulôn, into to-an-Ierousalêm it-was-city-fenceeing-to to-it.
1:1 pr tit εκλεγονται οι περι τον Δανιηλ και παραδιδονται τω αρχιευνουχω και σιτουνται σπερματα· και παρασταντες τω βασιλει παντων απεδειχθεισαν σοφωτεροι 87 Syr
*Nebuchadnezzar begins to rule in 496; d. 452.
*Darius the Mede b. 488; began reign over Media 474; issued command to Nehemiah to restore Jerusalem 454; d. 426 shortly after Cyrus took Babylon.
*Cyrus b. 466.
*Rebuilding began under Cyrus in 426; followed by 15 yrs. of opposition (425-410); (1) 425-419 (Cyrus distracted by wars); (2) 419-411 (Cambyses); (3) 411 (Darius Hystaspis); rebuilding begins again unfettered under Darius Hystaspis in 410.
*Darius Hystaspis b. 439 d. 375 (See Companion Bible Neh_5:14 & Neh_13:4) (See Companion Bible App. 50. VI.).
*Hystaspis was made a Satrap over Bactia and Persis under Cyrus and continued under Cambyses.
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:2 καὶ ἔδωκεν Κύριος ἐν χειρὶ αὐτοῦ τὸν Ἰωακεὶμ βασιλέα Ἰούδα καὶ ἀπὸ μέρους τῶν σκευῶν οἴκου τοῦ θεοῦ, καὶ ἤνεγκεν αὐτὰ εἰς γῆν Σενναὰρ οἶκου τοῦ θεοῦ αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὰ σκεύη εἰσήνεγκεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον θησαυροῦ τοῦ θεοῦ αὐτοῦ.
And it-gave, Authority-belonged(Yahveh), in unto-a-hand of-it to-the-one to-an-Iôakeim to-a-ruler-of of-an-Ioudas and off of-a-portioneedness of-the-ones of-equipeednesses of-a-house of-the-one of-a-Deity(haElohim), and it-beared to-them into to-a-soil of-a-Sennaar of-a-house of-the-one of-a-deity(elohim) of-it, and to-the-ones to-equipeednesses it-beared-into into to-the-one to-a-house of-an-en-placing of-the-one of-a-deity(elohim) of-it.
Note: Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
1:2 ουκου 2°] οικον A | om θησαυρου A | θεου 2°] pr του Bab (vid)(mg) AΓ
(O) καὶ παρέδωκεν αὐτὴν Κύριος εἰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ καὶ Ἰωακεὶμ τὸν βασιλέα τῆς Ἰουδαίας καὶ μέρος τι τῶν ἱερῶν σκευῶν τοῦ κυρίου, καὶ ἀπήνεγκεν αὐτὰ εἰς Βαβυλῶνα εἰς γῆν Σεναὰρ εἰς οἶκον τοῦ θεοῦ αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὰ σκεύη· καὶ ἀπηρείσατο αὐτὰ ἐν τῷ εἰδωλείῳ αὐτοῦ.
And it-gave-beside to-it, Authority-belonged(Yahveh), into to-a-hand of-it and to-an-Iôakeim to-the-one to-a-ruler-of of-the-one of-an-Ioudaia and to-a-portioneedness to-a-one of-the-ones of-sacred of-equipeednesses of-the-one of-Authority-belonged, and it-beared-off to-them into to-a-Babulôn into to-a-soil of-a-Senaar into to-a-house of-the-one of-a-deity(elohim) of-it, and to-the-ones to-equipeednesses; and it-propped-off to-them in unto-the-one unto-an-imagelet of-it.
1:2 om εις γην Σενααρ Syr | ϗ εις οικον του θεου αυτου και τα σκευη 87 (deest ϗ ins V post αυτου et post σκευη) Syr (om εις 4°)
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:3 καὶ εἶπεν ὁ βασιλεὺς τῷ Ἀσφανὲζ τῷ ἀρχιευνούχῳ αὐτοῦ εἰσαγαγεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν τῆς αἰχμαλωσίας Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος τῆς βασιλείας καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν φορθομμείν,
And it-had-said, the-one a-ruler-of, unto-the-one unto-an-Asfanez unto-the-one unto-a-first-bed-holder of-it to-have-had-led-into off of-the-ones of-sons of-the-one of-a-spear-capturing-unto of-an-Israêl and off of-the-one of-a-whorling-to of-the-one of-a-ruling-of and off of-the-ones of-forthommein',
Note: of-forthommein' : transliterated from Hebrew, a Persian word meaning reckoned-in.
1:3 Ασφανεζ] pr τω A | βασιλειας] ει supras Aa? | φορθομμειν (-μι[ν] Γ)] πορθομμειν A
(O) καὶ εἶπεν ὁ βασιλεὺς Ἀβιεσδρὶ τῷ ἑαυτοῦ ἀρχιευνούχῳ ἀγαγεῖν αὐτῷ ἐκ τῶν υἱῶν τῶν μεγιστάνων τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἐκ τοῦ βασιλικοῦ γένους καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἐπιλέκτων,
And it-had-said, the-one a-ruler-of, unto-an-Abiesdri unto-the-one of-self unto-a-first-bed-holder to-have-had-led-up unto-it out of-the-ones of-sons of-the-ones of-most-greats of-the-one of-an-Israêl and out of-the-one of-ruler-belonged-of of-a-becomeedness and out of-the-ones of-forthed-upon,
1:3 αρχιευνουχω] διδασκαλω ευνουχων Syrmg
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:4 νεανίσκους οἷς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτοῖς μῶμος καὶ καλοὺς τῇ ὄψει, καὶ συνιέντας ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ γιγνώσκοντας γνῶσιν καὶ διανοουμένους φρόνησιν, καὶ οἷς ἐστιν ἰσχὺς ἐν αὐτοῖς ἑστάναι ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ τοῦ βασιλέως, καὶ διδάξαι αὐτοὺς γράμματα καὶ γλῶσσαν Χαλδαίων.
to-new-belongings-of unto-which not it-be in unto-them a-blemish and to-seemly unto-the-one unto-a-beholding, and to-sending-together in unto-all unto-a-wisdoming-unto and to-acquainting to-an-acquainting and to-en-mulling-through-unto to-a-centering, and unto-which it-be a-force-holding in unto-them to-have-had-come-to-stand in unto-the-one unto-a-house of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, and to-have-veer-veerated to-them to-scribings-to and to-a-tongue of-Chaldee-belonged.
1:4 αυτοις I°] pr εν Bab vidAΓ | μωμος] pr πας Γ | καλους] καλοι A*(improb Aa?) | γινωσκοντας A (? Γ) | om εν τω οικω A | του βασιλεως] pr ενωπιον BabAΓ
(O) νεανίσκους ἀμώμους καὶ εὐειδεῖς καὶ ἐπιστήμονας ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ καὶ γραμματικοὺς καὶ συνετοὺς καὶ σοφούς, καὶ ἰσχύοντας ὥστε εἶναι ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ τοῦ βασιλέως, καὶ διδάξαι αὐτοὺς γράμματα καὶ διάλεκτον Χαλδαικήν·
to-new-belongings-of to-un-blemished and to-goodly-seeinged and to-standinged-upon-of in unto-all unto-a-wisdoming-unto and to-scribing-toer-belonged-of and to-sent-together and to-wisdomed, and to-force-holding as-also to-be in unto-the-one unto-a-house of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, and to-have-veer-veerated to-them to-scribings-to and to-forthed-through to-Chaldee-belonged-of;
1:4 οικω] α´ς´ ναω Syrmg | γραμματα] α´ βιβλιον Syrmg
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:5 καὶ διέταξεν αὐτοῖς ὁ βασιλεὺς τὸ τῆς ἡμέρας καθ' ἡμέραν ἀπὸ τῆς τραπέζης τοῦ βασιλέως καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ οἴνου τοῦ πότου αὐτοῦ, καὶ θρέψαι αὐτοὺς ἔτη τρία, καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα στῆναι ἐνώπιον τοῦ βασιλέως.
And it-arranged-through unto-them, the-one a-ruler-of, to-the-one of-the-one of-a-dayedness down to-a-dayedness off of-the-one of-a-four-footedness of-the-one of-a-ruler-of and off of-the-one of-a-wine of-the-one of-a-drinkation of-it, and to-have-nourished to-them to-yeareednesses to-three, and with to-the-ones-these to-have-had-stood to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-ruler-of.
1:5 καθ] εις Γ
(O) καὶ δίδοσθαι αὐτοῖς ἔκθεσιν ἐκ τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ βασιλέως καθ' ἑκάστην ἡμέραν καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς τραπέζης καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ οἴνου οὗ πίνει ὁ βασιλεύς, καὶ ἐκπαιδεῦσαι αὐτοὺς ἔτη τρία, καὶ ἐκ τούτων στῆσαι ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βασιλέως.
and to-have-been-veer-veerated unto-them to-a-placing-out out of-the-one of-a-house of-the-one of-a-ruler-of down to-each to-a-dayedness and off of-the-one of-ruler-belonged-of of-a-four-footedness and off of-the-one of-a-wine of-which it-drinketh, the-one a-ruler-of, and to-have-childed-out-of to-them to-yeareednesses to-three, and out of-the-ones-these to-have-had-stood in-toward-from of-the-one of-a-ruler-of.
1:5 ΕΚΘΕΣΙΝ Syrmg | του βαιλεως] pr παρα (? απο) Syr
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:6 καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν αὐτοῖς ἐκ τῶν υἱῶν Ἰούδα Δανιὴλ καὶ Ἁνανίας καὶ Μεισαὴλ καὶ Ἀζαρίας.
And it-had-became in unto-them out of-the-ones of-sons of-an-Ioudas a-Daniêl and an-Hananias and a-Meisaêl and an-Azarais.
1:6 om εν A | Μισαηλ BbAΓ : item 7, 11, et (sed hiat Γ) 19 | και Αζ. και M. Γvid
(O) καὶ ἦσαν ἐκ τοῦ γένους τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας Δανιήλ, Ἁνανίας, Μισαήλ, Ἀζαρίας.
And they-were out of-the-one of-a-becomeedness of-the-ones of-sons of-an-Israêl of-the-ones off of-the-one of-an-Ioudaia a-Daniêl, a-Hananias, a-Misaêl, an-Azarias.
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:7 καὶ ἐπέθηκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ ἀρχιευνοῦχος ὀνόματα, τῷ Δανιὴλ Βαλτασάρ, καὶ τῷ Ἁνανίᾳ Σεδράχ, καὶ τῷ Μεισαὴλ Μεισάχ, καὶ τῷ Ἀζαρίᾳ Ἀβδεναγώ.
And it-placed-upon unto-them, the-one a-first-bed-holder, to-namings-to, unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl to-a-Baltasar, and unto-the-one unto-a-Hananias to-a-Sedrach, and unto-the-one unto-a-Meisaêl to-a-Meisach, and unto-the-one unto-an-Azarias to-an-Abdenagô.
1:7 Βαλτασαρ] Βαρτασαρ Aa? (mg) (om A*) | Μισαχ Bb Μισακ A Μισα . . . Γ
(O) καὶ ἐπέθηκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ ἀρχιευνοῦχος ὀνόματα, τῷ μὲν Δανιὴλ Βαλτασάρ, τῷ δὲ Ἁνανίᾳ Σεδράχ, καὶ τῷ Μισαὴλ Μισάχ, καὶ τῷ Ἀζαρία Ἀβδεναγώ.
And it-placed-upon unto-them, the-one a-first-bed-holder, to-namings-to, unto-the-one indeed unto-a-Daniêl to-a-Baltasar, unto-the-one then-also unto-a-Hananias to-a-Sedrach, and unto-the-one unto-a-Misaêl to-a-Misach, and unto-the-one unto-an-Azarias to-an-Abdenagô.
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:8 καὶ ἔθετο Δανιὴλ ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ ὡς οὐ μὴ ἀλισγηθῇ ἐν τῇ τραπέζῃ τοῦ βασιλέως καὶ ἐν τῷ οἴνῳ τοῦ πότου αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἠξίωσε τὸν ἀρχιευνοῦχον ὡς οὐ μὴ ἀλισγηθῇ.
And it-had-placed, a-Daniêl, upon to-the-one to-a-heart of-it as not lest it-might-been-polluted-unto in unto-the-one unto-a-four-footedness of-the-one of-a-ruler-of and in unto-the-one unto-a-wine of-the-one of-a-drinkation of-it, and it-en-deem-belonged to-the-one to-a-first-bed-holder as not lest it-might-have-been-polluted-unto.
1:8 ηξιωσεν AΓ
(O) καὶ ἐνεθυμήθη Δανιὴλ ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ὅπως μὴ ἀλισγηθῇ ἐν τῷ δείπνῳ τοῦ βασιλέως καὶ ἐν ᾧ πίνει οἴνῳ, καὶ ἠξίωσε τὸν ἀρχιευνοῦχον ἵνα μὴ συμμολυνθῇ.
And it-was-passioned-in-unto a-Daniêl in unto-the-one unto-a-heart unto-which-whither lest it-might-have-been-polluted-unto in unto-the-one unto-a-meal of-the-one of-a-ruler-of and in unto-which it-drinketh unto-a-wine, and it-en-deem-belonged to-the-one to-a-first-bed-holder so lest it-might-have-been-polluted-unto.
1:8 οπως μη αλισγηθη εν τω δειπνω τ. βασ.] ς´ ινα μη μιανθη δια της τροφης τ. βασ. Syrmg
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:9 καὶ ἔδωκεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν Δανιὴλ εἰς ἔλεον καὶ εἰς οἰκτειρμὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ ἀρχιευνούχου.
And it-gave, the-one a-Deity(haElohim), to-the-one to-a-Daniêl into to-a-besectionation and into to-pitieringed-of to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-first-bed-holder.
Note: to-a-besectionation : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc., as having been applied.
1:9 οικτειρμον (-κτιρμ. BbA)] pr εις A | αρχευνουχ. B* (αρχιευνουχ. BabAΓvid) : item 11, 18
(O) καὶ ἔδωκε Κύριος τῷ Δανιὴλ τιμὴν καὶ χάριν ἐναντίον τοῦ ἀρχιευνούχου.
And it-gave, Authority-belonged, unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl to-a-valuation and to-a-granting to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-first-bed-holder.
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:10 καὶ εἶπεν ὁ ἀρχιευνοῦχος τῷ Δανιὴλ Φοβοῦμαι ἐγὼ τὸν κύριόν μου τὸν βασιλέα τὸν ἐκτάξαντα τὴν βρῶσιν ὑμῶν καὶ τὴν πόσιν ὑμῶν, μή ποτε ἴδῃ τὰ πρόσωπα ὑμῶν σκυθρωπὰ παρὰ τὰ παιδάρια τὰ συνήλικα ὑμῶν, καὶ καταδικάσητε τὴν κεφαλήν μου τῷ βασιλεῖ.
And it-had-said, the-one a-first-bed-holder, unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl, I-fearee-unto I to-the-one to-authority-belonged(adon) of-me to-the-one to-a-ruler-of to-the-one to-having-arranged-out to-the-one to-a-feedeeing of-ye and to-the-one to-a-drinking of-ye, lest whither-also it-might-have-had-seen to-the-ones to-looked-toward of-ye to-sullen-looked beside to-the-ones to-childlings to-the-ones to-statured-together of-ye, and ye-might-have-down-coursed-to to-the-one to-a-head of-me unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of.
1:10 συνηλικα] συν ηλικεια A
(O) καὶ εἶπεν ὁ ἀρχιευνοῦχος τῷ Δανιήλ Ἀγωνιῶ τὸν κύριόν μου τὸν βασιλέα τὸν ἐκτάξαντα τὴν βρῶσιν ὑμῶν καὶ τὴν πόσιν ὑμῶν, ἵνα μὴ ἴδῃ τὰ πρόσωπα ὑμῶν διατετραμμένα καὶ ἀσθενῆ παρὰ τοὺς συντρεφομένους ὑμῖν νεανίας τῶν ἀλλογενῶν, καὶ κινδυνεύσω τῷ ἰδίῳ τραχήλῳ.
And it-had-said, the-one a-first-bed-holder, unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl, I-shall-struggle-belong-unto to-the-one to-authority-belonged(adon) of-me to-the-one to-a-ruler-of to-the-one to-having-arranged-out to-the-one to-a-feedeeing of-ye and to-the-one to-a-drinking of-ye, so lest it-might-have-had-seen to-the-ones to-looked-toward of-ye to-having-had-come-to-be-beturned-through and to-un-vigoringed beside to-the-ones to-being-nourished-together unto-ye to-new-belongings of-the-ones of-other-becominged, and I-shall-peril-of unto-the-one unto-private-belonged unto-a-throat.
1:10 διατετραμμενα] α´ κατεστραμμενα Syrmg | om των αλλογενων Syr
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:11 καὶ εἶπεν Δανιὴλ πρὸς Ἁμελσάδ, ὃν κατέστησεν ὁ ἀρχιευνοῦχος ἐπὶ Δανιήλ, Ἁνανίαν, Μεισαήλ, Ἀζαρίαν
And it-had-said, a-Daniêl, toward to-a-Hamelsad, to-which it-stood-down, the-one a-bed-holder, upon to-a-Daniêl, to-a-Hananias, to-a-Meisaêl, to-an-Azarias,
1:11 Αμελσαδ] Αμερσαρ A | Ανανιαν] pr και A | Μεισαηλ] pr και A | Αζαριαν] pr και A
(O) καὶ εἶπεν Δανιὴλ Ἀβιεσδρὶ τῷ ἀναδειχθέντι ἀρχιευνούχῳ ἐπὶ τὸν Δανιήλ, Ἁνανίαν, Μισαήλ, Ἀζαρίαν
And it-had-said, a-Daniêl, unto-an-Abiesdri unto-the-one unto-having-been-en-showed-up unto-a-first-bed-holder upon to-the-one to-a-Daniêl, to-a-Hananias, to-a-Misaêl, to-an-Azarias,
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:12 Πείρασον δὴ τοὺς παῖδάς σου ἡμέρας δέκα, καὶ δότωσαν ἡμῖν ἀπὸ τῶν σπερμάτων καὶ φαγόμεθα, καὶ ὕδωρ πιόμεθα·
Thou-should-have-across-belonged-to then to-the-ones to-children of-thee to-dayednesses to-ten, and they-should-have-had-given unto-us off of-the-ones of-whorlings-to and we-shall-devour, and to-a-water we-shall-drink;
1:12 σπερματων] + της γης A
(O) Πείρασον δὴ τοὺς παῖδάς σου ἐφ' ἡμέρας δέκα, καὶ δοθήτω ἡμῖν ἀπὸ τῶν ὀσπρίων τῆς γῆς, ὥστε κάπτειν καὶ ὑδροποτεῖν·
Thou-should-have-across-belonged-to then to-the-ones to-children of-thee upon to-dayednesses to-ten, and it-should-have-been-given unto-us off of-the-ones of-podlets of-the-one of-a-soil, as-also to-gulp and to-water-drinkation-unto;
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:13 καὶ ὀφθήτωσαν ἐνώπιόν σου αἱ εἰδέαι ἡμῶν καὶ αἱ εἰδέαι τῶν παιδαρίων τῶν ἐσθόντων τὴν τράπεζαν τοῦ βασιλέως, καὶ καθὼς ἂν ἴδῃς ποίησον μετὰ τῶν παίδων σου.
and they-should-have-been-beheld to-in-look-belonged of-thee the-ones sightednesses of-us and the-ones sightednesses of-the-ones of-childlings of-the-ones of-eating to-the-one to-a-four-footedness of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, and down-as ever thou-might-have-had-seen thou-should-have-done-unto with of-the-ones of-children of-thee.
1:13 εσιοντων A | αν] εαν A | παιδων] παιδαριων A
(O) καὶ ἐὰν φανῇ ἡ ὄψις ἡμῶν διατετραμμένη παρὰ τοὺς ἄλλους νεανίσκους τοὺς ἐσθίοντας ἀπὸ τοῦ βασιλικοῦ δείπνου, καθὼς ἐὰν θέλῃς οὕτω χρῆσαι τοῖς παισί σου.
and if-ever it-might-have-had-been-manifested the-one a-beholding of-us having-had-come-to-be-turned-through beside to-the-ones to-other to-new-belongings-of to-the-ones to-eat-belonging off of-the-one of-ruler-belonged-of of-a-meal, down-as if-ever thou-might-determine of-which-unto-the-one thou-should-have-afforded-unto unto-the-ones unto-children of-thee.
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:14 καὶ εἰσήκουσεν αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐπείρασεν αὐτοὺς ἡμέρας δέκα.
And it-heard-into of-them, and it-across-belonged-to to-them to-dayednesses to-ten.
(O) καὶ ἐχρήσατο αὐτοῖς τὸν τρόπον τοῦτον, καὶ ἐπείρασεν αὐτοὺς ἡμέρας δέκα.
And it-afforded-unto unto-them to-the-one to-a-turn to-the-one-this, and it-across-belonged-to to-them to-dayednesses to-ten.
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:15 καὶ μετὰ τὸ τέλος τῶν δέκα ἡμερῶν ὡράθησαν αἱ εἰδέαι αὐτῶν ἀγαθαὶ καὶ ἰσχυροὶ ταῖς σαρξὶν ὑπὲρ τὰ παιδάρια τὰ ἔσθοντα τὴν τράπεζαν τοῦ βασιλέως.
And with to-the-one to-a-finisheedness of-the-ones of-ten of-dayednesses they-were-beheld the-ones sightednesses of-them excess-placed and force-held unto-the-ones unto-fleshes over to-the-ones to-childlings to-the-ones to-eating to-the-one to-a-four-footedness of-the-one of-a-ruler-of.
Note: to-eating in 03 : to-eat-belonging in 02 is correct.
1:15 ισχυραι Bab | εσθιοντα A
(O) μετὰ δὲ τὰς δέκα ἡμέρας ἐφάνη ἡ ὄψις αὐτῶν καλὴ καὶ ἡ ἕξις τοῦ σώματος κρείσσων τῶν ἄλλων νεανίσκων τῶν ἐσθιόντων τὸ βασιλικὸν δεῖπνον.
With then-also to-the-ones to-ten to-dayednesses it-had-been-manifested the-one a-beholding of-them seemly and the-one a-holdeeing of-the-one of-an-en-capsuling-to more-securinged-of of-the-ones of-other of-new-belongings-of of-the-ones of-eat-belonging to-the-one to-ruler-belonged-of to-a-meal.
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:16 καὶ ἐγένετο Ἁμελσὰδ ἀναιρούμενος τὸ δεῖπνον αὐτῶν καὶ τὸν οἶνον τοῦ πόματος αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐδίδου αὐτοῖς σπέρματα.
And it-had-became a-Hamelsad sectioning-along-up-unto to-the-one to-a-meal of-them and to-the-one to-a-wine of-the-one of-a-drinking-to of-them, and it-was-giving unto-them to-whorlings-to.
1:16 Αμελσαδ] Αμερσαρ A
(O) καὶ ἦν Ἀβιεσδρὶ ἀναιρούμενος τὸ δεῖπνον αὐτῶν καὶ τὸν οἶνον αὐτῶν, καὶ ἀντεδίδου αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ὀσπρίων.
And it-was an-Abiesdri sectioning-along-up-unto to-the-one to-a-meal of-them and to-the-one to-a-wine of-them, and it-was-ever-a-one-giving unto-them off of-the-ones of-pods.
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:17 καὶ τὰ παιδάρια ταῦτα, οἱ τέσσαρες αὐτοί, ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ θεὸς σύνεσιν καὶ φρόνησιν ἐν πάσῃ γραμματικῇ καὶ σοφίᾳ· καὶ Δανιὴλ συνῆκεν ἐν πάσῃ ὁράσει καὶ ἐνυπνίοις.
And the-ones childlings the-ones-these, the-ones four them, it-gave unto-them, the-one a-Deity(haElohim), to-a-sending-together and to-a-centering in unto-all unto-scribing-toer-belonged-of and unto-a-wisdoming-unto; and unto-a-Daniêl it-sent-together in unto-all unto-a-seeeeing and unto-in-sleeplets.
1:17 και τα παιδαρια ταυτα οι τεσσαρες αυτοι] τοις τεσσαρσιν παιδαριοις· και A
(O) καὶ τοῖς νεανίσκοις ἔδωκεν ὁ κύριος ἐπιστήμην καὶ σύνεσιν καὶ φρόνησιν ἐν πάσῃ γραμματικῇ τέχνῃ, καὶ τῷ Δανιὴλ ἔδωκε σύνεσιν ἐν παντὶ ῥήματι καὶ ὁράματι καὶ ἐνυπνίοις καὶ ἐν πάσῃ σοφίᾳ.
And unto-the-ones unto-new-belongings-of it-gave, the-one Authority-belonged, to-a-standing-upon and to-a-sending-together and to-a-centering in unto-all unto-scribing-toer-belonged-of unto-a-crafting, and unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl it-gave to-a-sending-together in unto-all unto-an-uttering-to and unto-a-seeeeing-to and unto-in-sleeplets and in unto-all unto-a-wisdoming-unto.
1:17 εν παση γραμματικη τεχνη] α´ εν παντι βιβλιω Syrmg | ÷ και εν παση σοφια 87 (deest ÷) Syr
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:18 καὶ μετὰ τὸ τέλος τῶν ἡμερῶν ὧν εἶπεν ὁ βασιλεὺς εἰσαγαγεῖν αὐτούς, καὶ εἰσήγαγεν αὐτοὺς ὁ ἀρχιευνοῦχος ἐναντίον Ναβουχοδονοσόρ.
And with to-the-one to-a-finisheedness of-the-ones of-dayednesses of-which it-had-said, the-one a-ruler-of, to-have-had-led-into to-them, and it-had-led-into to-them, the-one a-first-bed-holder, to-ever-a-oned-in of-a-Nabouchodonosor.
1:18 om και 2° B* | om εισηγαγεν αυτους B*(hab Bab mg)
(O) μετὰ δὲ τὰς ἡμέρας ταύτας ἐπέταξεν ὁ βασιλεὺς εἰσαγαγεῖν αὐτούς, καὶ εἰσήχθησαν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀρχιευνούχου πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα Ναβουχοδονοσόρ.
With then-also to-the-ones to-dayednesses to-the-ones-these it-arranged-upon, the-one a-ruler-of, to-have-had-led-into to-them, and they-were-led-into off of-the-one of-a-first-bed-holder toward to-the-one to-a-ruler-of to-a-Nabouchodonosor.
1:18 ΚΑΙ ΕΙΣΗΧΘΗΣΑΝ Syrmg
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:19 καὶ ἐλάλησεν μετ' αὐτῶν ὁ βασιλεύς, καὶ οὐχ εὑρέθησαν ἐκ πάντων αὐτῶν ὅμοιοι Δανιὴλ καὶ Ἁνανίᾳ καὶ Μεισαὴλ καὶ Ἀζαρίᾳ· καὶ ἔστησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ βασιλέως.
And it-spoke-unto with of-them, the-one a-ruler-of, and not they-were-found out of-all of-them along-belonged unto-a-Daniêl and unto-a-Hananias and unto-a-Meisaêl and unto-an-Azarias; and they-had-stood to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-ruler-of.
1:19 ομοιο A* (superscr i Aa?)
(O) καὶ ὡμίλησεν αὐτοῖς ὁ βασιλεύς, καὶ οὐχ εὑρέθη ἐν τοῖς σοφοῖς ὅμοιος τῷ Δανιὴλ καὶ Ἁνανίᾳ καὶ Μισαὴλ καὶ Ἀζαρίᾳ· καὶ ἦσαν παρὰ τῷ βασιλεῖ,
And it-grouped-along-unto unto-them, the-one a-ruler-of, and not it-was-found in unto-the-ones unto-wisdomed along-belonged unto-a-Daniêl and unto-a-Hananias and unto-a-Misaêl and unto-an-Azarias; and they-were beside unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of,
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:20 καὶ ἐν παντὶ ῥήματι σοφίας καὶ ἐπιστήμης ὧν ἐζήτησεν παρ' αὐτῶν ὁ βασιλεύς, εὗρεν αὐτοὺς δεκαπλασίονας παρὰ πάντας τοὺς ἐπαοιδοὺς καὶ τοὺς μάγους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν πάσῃ τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ.
And in unto-all unto-an-uttering-to of-a-wisdoming-unto and of-a-standing-upon-of of-which it-sought-unto beside of-them, the-one a-ruler-off, it-had-found to-them to-ten-fold-belonged beside to-all to-the-ones to-chanters-upon and to-the-ones to-magos' to-the-ones to-being in unto-all unto-the-one unto-a-ruling-of of-it.
Note: to-magos' : used to refer to educated men from the east usually specializing in astronomy.
1:20 om παση A
(O) καὶ ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ καὶ συνέσει καὶ παιδείᾳ, ὅσα ἐζήτησε παρ' αὐτῶν ὁ βασιλεύς, κατέλαβεν αὐτοὺς σοφωτέρους δεκαπλασίως ὑπὲρ τοὺς σοφιστὰς καὶ τοὺς φιλοσόφους τοὺς ἐν πάσῃ τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ· καὶ ἐδόξασεν αὐτοὺς ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ κατέστησεν αὐτοὺς ἄρχοντας, καὶ ἀνέδειξεν αὐτοὺς σοφοὺς παρὰ πάντας τοὺς αὐτοῦ ἐν πράγμασιν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ.
and in unto-all unto-a-forthee and unto-a-sending-together and unto-a-childing-of, to-which-a-which it-sought-unto beside of-them, the-one a-ruler-of, it-had-taken-down to-them to-more-wisdomed to-ten-fold over to-the-ones to-wisdom-belongers and to-the-ones to-wisdom-cared to-the-ones in unto-all unto-the-one unto-a-ruling-of of-it; and it-reckoned-to to-them, the-one a-ruler-of, and it-stood-down to-them to-firsting, and it-en-showed-up to-them to-wisdomed beside to-all to-the-ones of-it in unto-practicings-to in unto-all unto-the-one unto-a-soil of-it and in unto-the-one unto-a-ruling-of of-it.
1:20 ÷ σοφωτερους 87 Syr | ÷ και εδοξασεν αυτους . . . βασιλεια αυτου 87 (ins ÷ ante εν παση τη γη) Syr
(496 B.C.)
Dan 1:21 καὶ ἐγένετο Δανιὴλ ἕως ἔτους ἑνὸς Κύρου τοῦ βασιλέως.
And it-had-became a-Daniêl unto-if-which of-a-yeareedness of-one of-a-Kuros of-the-one of-a-ruler-of.
1:21 subsrc ορασις _ A
(O) καὶ ἦν Δανιὴλ ἕως τοῦ πρώτου ἔτους τῆς βασιλείας Κύρου βασιλέως Περσῶν.
And it-was a-Daniêl unto-if-which of-the-one of-most-before of-a-yeareedness of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-a-Kuros of-a-ruler-of of-a-Persians.
1:21 ΚΥΡΟΣ (sic) Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:1 Ἐν τῷ ἔτει τῷ δευτέρῳ τῆς βασιλείας ἠνυπνιάσθη Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ἐνύπνιον, καὶ ἐξέστη τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ὁ ὕπνος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο ἀπ' αὐτοῦ.
In unto-the-one unto-a-yeareedness unto-the-one unto-second of-the-one of-a-ruling-of it-was-in-slept-to a-Nabouchodonosor to-an-in-sleeplet, and it-had-stood-out, the-one a-currenting-to of-it, and the-one a-sleep of-it it-had-became off of-it.
2:1 superscr ορασις _ A | βασιλειας] + Ναβουχοδονοσορ A | ενυπνιασθη A | εξεστη rescr Aa?
(O) Καὶ ἐν τῷ ἔτει τῷ δευτέρῳ τῆς βασιλείας Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ συνέβη εἰς ὁράματα καὶ ἐνύπνια ἐμπεσεῖν τὸν βασιλέα καὶ ταραχθῆναι ἐν τῷ ἐνυπνίῳ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ὁ ὕπνος αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο ἀπ' αὐτοῦ.
And in unto-the-one unto-a-yeareedness unto-the-one unto-second of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-a-Nabouchodonosor it-had-stepped-together into to-seeeeings-to and to-in-sleeplets to-have-had-fallen-in to-the-one to-a-ruler-of and to-have-been-stirred in unto-the-one unto-an-in-sleeplet of-it, and the-one a-sleep of-it it-had-became off of-it.
2:1 pr tit ορα το ενυπνιον Ναβουχοδονοσορ και τους μαγους απορησαντας (ΑΠΟΡΗΣΑΝΤΑΣ Syrmg) γνωρισαι και επιλυσαι αυτο κελευει σφαγηναι κινδυνευοντας δε και τους περι Δανιηλ εσωσεν ο θεος αποκαλυψας αυτω τω Δανιη; την ειδησιν του ενυπνιου 87 Syr | και ταραχθηναι . . . απ αυτου] ς´ και διηπορει το πνευμα αυτου και υπνος απεστη απ αυτου γνωναι το εν. Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:2 καὶ εἶπεν ὁ βασιλεὺς καλέσαι τοὺς ἐπαοιδοὺς καὶ τοὺς μάγους καὶ τοὺς φαρμάκους καὶ τοὺς Χαλδαίους τοῦ ἀναγγεῖλαι τῷ βασιλεῖ τὰ ἐνύπνια αὐτοῦ· καὶ ἦλθαν καὶ ἔστησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ βασιλέως.
And it-had-said, the-one a-ruler-of, to-have-called-unto to-the-ones to-chanters-upon and to-the-ones to-magos' and to-the-ones to-dosers and to-the-ones to-Chaldee-belonged of-the-one to-have-leadeeered-up unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of to-the-ones to-in-sleeplets of-it; and they-came and they-had-stood to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-ruler-of.
Note: to-magos' : used to refer to educated men from the east usually specializing in astronomy.
2:2 ηλθαν] ηλθον A
(O) καὶ ἐπέταξεν ὁ βασιλεὺς εἰσενεχθῆναι τοὺς ἐπαοιδοὺς καὶ τοὺς μάγους καὶ τοὺς φαρμακοὺς τῶν Χαλδαίων ἀναγγεῖλαι τῷ βασιλεῖ τὰ ἐνύπνια αὐτοῦ· καὶ παραγενόμενοι ἔστησαν παρὰ τῷ βασιλεῖ.
And it-arranged-upon, the-one a-ruler-of, to-have-been-beared-into to-the-ones to-chanters-upon and to-the-ones to-magos' and to-the-ones to-dosers of-the-ones of-Chaldee-belonged to-have-leadeeered-up unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of to-the-ones to-in-sleeplets of-it; and having-had-became-beside they-had-stood beside unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of.
Note: to-magos' : used to refer to educated men from the east usually specializing in astronomy.
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:3 καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ βασιλεύς Ἠνυπνιάσθην, καὶ ἐξέστη τὸ πνεῦμά μου τοῦ γνῶναι τὸ ἐνύπνιον.
And it-had-said unto-them, the-one a-ruler-of, I-was-in-slept-to, and it-had-stood-out, the-one a-currenting-to of-me, of-the-one to-have-had-acquainted to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet.
2:3 ηνυπνιασθην] ενυπν. A
(O) καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ βασιλεύς Ἐνύπνιον ἑώρακα καὶ ἐκινήθη μου τὸ πνεῦμα· ἐπιγνῶναι οὖν θέλω τὸ ἐνύπνιον.
And it-had-said unto-them, the-one a-ruler-of, To-an-in-sleeplet I-had-come-to-seeee-unto and it-was-moved-unto of-me, the-one a-currenting-to; to-have-had-acquainted-upon accordingly I-determine to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet.
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:4 καὶ ἐλάλησαν οἱ Χαλδαῖοι τῷ βασιλεῖ Συριστί Βασιλεῦ, εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας ζῆθι· σὺ εἰπὸν τὸ ἐνύπνιον τοῖς παισίν σου, καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν ἀναγγελοῦμεν.
And they-spoke-unto, the-ones Chaldee-belonged, unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of, unto-Syrian, Ruler-of, into to-the-ones to-ages thou-should-life-unto; thou thou-should-have-said to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet unto-the-ones unto-children of-thee, and to-the-one to-a-separating-together we-shall-leadeeer-up.
2:4 ελαλησαν] ειπον A | παισι Bb | συγκρισιν] not adpinxit Aa?
(O) καὶ ἐλάλησαν οἱ Χαλδαῖοι πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα Συριστί Κύριε βασιλεῦ, τὸν αἰῶνα ζῆθι· ἀνάγγειλον τὸ ἐνύπνιόν σου τοῖς παισί σου, καὶ ἡμεῖς σοι φράσομεν τὴν σύγκρισιν αὐτοῦ.
And they-spoke-unto, the-ones Chaldee-belonged, toward to-the-one to-a-ruler-of unto-Syrian, Authority-belonged Ruler-of, to-the-one to-an-age thou-should-life-unto; thou-should-have-leadeeered-up to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet of-thee unto-the-ones unto-children of-thee, and we unto-thee we-shall-evince-to to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-it.
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:5 ἀπεκρίθη ὁ βασιλεὺς τοῖς Χαλδαίοις Ὁ λόγος ἀπ' ἐμοῦ ἀπέστη· ἐὰν μὴ γνωρίσητέ μοι τὸ ἐνύπνιον καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν, εἰς ἀπωλίαν ἔσεσθε, καὶ οἱ οἶκοι ὑμῶν διαρπαγήσονται.
It-was-separated-off the-one a-ruler-of unto-the-ones unto-Chaldee-belonged, The-one a-forthee off of-ME it-had-stood-off; if-ever lest ye-might-have-acquainted-to unto-me to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet and to-the-one to-a-separating-together, into to-a-destructing-off-unto ye-shall-be, and the-ones houses of-ye they-shall-be-through-snatched-to.
2:5 βασιλευς] + και ειπε̅| A | εαν] + ουν A | συγκρισιν] + αυτου A | απωλειαν BabA
(O) ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ βασιλεὺς εἶπε τοῖς Χαλδαίοις Ὁ λόγος ἀπ' ἐμοῦ ἀπέστη· διότι ἐὰν μὴ ἀπαγγείλητέ μοι ἐπ' ἀληθείας τὸ ἐνύπνιον καὶ τὴν τούτου σύνκρισιν δηλώσητέ μοι, παραδειγματισθήσεσθε, καὶ ἀναληφθήσεται ὑμῶν τὰ ὑπάρχοντα εἰς τὸ βασιλικόν.
Having-been-separated-off then-also the-one a-ruler-of it-had-said unto-the-ones unto-Chaldee-belonged, The-one a-forthee off of-ME it-had-stood-off; through-to-which-a-one if-ever lest ye-might-have-leadeeered-off unto-me upon of-an-un-secluding-of to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet and to-the-one of-the-one-this to-a-separating-together ye-might-have-en-distincted unto-me, ye-shall-be-showing-beside-toed-to, and it-shall-be-taken-up of-ye the-ones firstings-under into to-the-one to-ruler-belonged-of.
Note: ye-shall-be-showing-beside-toed-to : Greek PARADEIGMATIZW, PARADEIGMA (a-showing-beside-to) incorporated into a Verb; used to refer to applying a showing-beside-to; i.e. in Active voice to show something by ensample, in Passive voice to be shown by ensample, in Middle voice to show by ensample to oneself.
2:5 ϗ ο λογος απ εμου (ϗ 87) απεστη 87 Syr
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:6 ἐὰν δὲ τὸ ἐνύπνιον καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν αὐτοῦ γνωρίσητέ μοι, δόματα καὶ δωρεὰς καὶ τιμὴν πολλὴν λήμψεσθε παρ' ἐμοῦ· πλὴν τὸ ἐνύπνιον καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν αὐτοῦ ἀπαγγείλατέ μοι.
If-ever then-also to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet and to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-it ye-might-have-acquainted-to unto-me, to-givings-to and to-giftednesses and to-a-valuation to-much ye-shall-take beside of-ME; to-beyond, to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet and to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-it ye-should-have-leadeeered-off unto-me.
2:6 δοματα και δωρεας] δομ. κ. δωρεαν A | ληψεσθε Bb
(O) ἐὰν δὲ τὸ ἐνύπνιον διασαφήσητέ μοι καὶ τὴν τούτου σύγκρισιν ἀναγγείλητε, λήψεσθε δόματα παντοῖα καὶ δοξασθήσεσθε ὑπ' ἐμοῦ· δηλώσατέ μοι τὸ ἐνύπνιον καὶ κρίνατε.
If-ever then-also to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet ye-might-have-evidented-through-to unto-me and to-the-one of-the-one-this to-a-separating-together ye-might-have-leadeeered-up, ye-shall-take to-givings-to to-all-belonged and ye-shall-be-reckoned-to under of-ME; ye-should-have-en-distincted unto-me to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet and ye-should-have-separated.
2:6 μοι 2°] + ουν Syr
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:7 ἀπεκρίθησαν δεύτερον καὶ εἶπαν Ὁ βασιλεὺς εἰπάτω τὸ ἐνύπνιον τοῖς παισὶν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν αὐτοῦ ἀναγγελοῦμεν.
They-were-separated-off to-second and they-said, The-one a-ruler-of it-should-have-said to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet unto-the-ones unto-children of-it, and to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-it we-shall-leadeeer-up.
2:7 απεκριθησαν] + οι Χαλδαιοι A | δευτερον και ειπαν] + αυτω Bab mg και ειπαν εκ δευτερου A
(O) ἀπεκρίθησαν δὲ ἐκ δευτέρου λέγοντες Βασιλεῦ, τὸ ὅραμα εἰπόν, καὶ οἱ παῖδές σου κρινοῦσι πρὸς ταῦτα.
They-were-separated-off then-also out of-second forthing, Ruler-of, to-the-one to-a-seeeeing-to thou-should-have-said, and the-ones children of-thee they-shall-separate toward to-the-ones-these.
2:7 ΕΚ ΔΕΥΤΕΡΟΥ Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:8 καὶ ἀπεκρίθη ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ εἶπεν Ἐπ' ἀληθείας οἶδα ἐγὼ ὅτι καιρὸν ὑμεῖς ἐξαγοράζετε, καθότι εἴδετε ὅτι ἀπέστη ἀπ' ἐμοῦ τὸ ῥῆμα.
And it-was-separated-off the-one a-ruler-of and it-had-said, Upon of-an-un-secluding-of I-had-come-to-see I to-which-a-one to-a-time ye ye-out-lead-alongedness-to, down-to-which-a-one ye-had-seen to-which-a-one it-had-stood-off off of-ME, the-one an-uttering-to.
2:8 om και I° A | αληθιας B* (-θειας Bb) | ειδετε] οιδατε A
(O) καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ βασιλεύς Ἐπ' ἀληθείας οἶδα ὅτι καιρὸν ὑμεῖς ἐξαγοράζετε, καθάπερ ἑωράκατε ὅτι ἀπέστη ἀπ' ἐμοῦ τὸ πρᾶγμα· καθάπερ οὖν προστέταχα, οὕτως ἔσται.
And it-had-said, the-one a-ruler-of, Upon of-an-un-secluding-of I-had-come-to-see to-which-a-one to-a-time ye ye-out-lead-alongedness-to, down-to-which-very ye-had-come-to-seeee-unto to-which-a-one it-had-stood-off off of-ME, the-one a-practicing-to; down-to-which-very accordingly I-had-come-to-arrange-toward, unto-the-one-this it-shall-be.
2:8 ÷ καθαπερ ουν (÷ 87) προστεταχα ουτως εσται 87 Syr
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:9 ἐὰν οὖν τὸ ἐνύπνιον μὴ ἀναγγείλητέ μοι, οἶδα ὅτι ῥῆμα ψευδὲς καὶ διεφθαρμένον συνέθεσθε εἰπεῖν ἐνώπιόν μου, ἕως οὗ ὁ καιρὸς παρέλθῃ· τὸ ἐνύπνιόν μου εἴπατέ μοι, καὶ γνώσομαι ὅτι τὴν σύγκρισιν αὐτοῦ ἀναγγελεῖτέ μοι.
If-ever accordingly to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet lest ye-might-have-leadeeered-up unto-me, I-had-come-to-see to-which-a-one to-an-uttering-to to-falsinged and to-having-had-come-to-be-degraded-through ye-had-placed-together to-have-had-said to-in-look-belonged of-me, unto-if-which of-which the-one a-time it-might-have-had-came-beside; to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet of-me ye-should-have-said unto-me, and I-shall-acquaint to-which-a-one to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-it ye-shall-leadeeer-up unto-me.
2:9 αναγγειλητε] απαγγειληται A | μου I°] εμου A
(O) ἐὰν μὴ τὸ ἐνύπνιον ἀπαγγείλητέ μοι ἐπ' ἀληθείας καὶ τὴν τούτου σύγκρισιν δηλώσητε, θανάτῳ περιπεσεῖσθε· συνείπασθε γὰρ λόγους ψευδεῖς ποιήσασθαι ἐπ' ἐμοῦ, ἕως ἂν ὁ καιρὸς ἀλλοιωθῇ. νῦν οὖν ἐὰν τὸ ῥῆμα εἴπητέ μοι ὃ τὴν νύκτα ἑώρακα, γνώσομαι ὅτι καὶ τὴν τούτου κρίσιν δηλώσητε.
If-ever lest to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet ye-might-have-leadeeered-off unto-me upon of-an-un-secluding-of and to-the-one of-the-one-this to-separating-together ye-might-have-en-distincted, unto-a-death ye-shall-fall-about; ye-said-together too-thus to-forthees to-falsinged to-have-done-unto upon of-ME, unto-if-which ever the-one a-time it-might-have-been-en-othered. Now accordingly if-ever to-the-one to-an-uttering-to ye-might-have-had-said unto-me to-which to-the-one to-a-night I-had-come-to-seeee-unto, I-shall-acquaint to-which-a-one and to-the-one of-the-one-this to-a-separating ye-might-have-en-distincted.
2:9 ÷ και την τουτου συγκρισιν δηλωσητε 87 Syr | ÷ την νυκτα εωρακα 87 Syr | γνωσομαι] pr τοτε Syr
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:10 ἀπεκρίθησαν οἱ Χαλδαῖοι ἐνώπιον τοῦ βασιλέως καὶ λέγουσιν Οὐκ ἔστιν ἄνθρωπος ἐπὶ τῆς ξηρᾶς ὅστις τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦ βασιλέως δυνήσεται γνωρίσαι, καθότι πᾶς βασιλεὺς μέγας καὶ ἄρχων ῥῆμα τοιοῦτο οὐκ ἐπερωτᾷ ἐπαοιδόν, μάγον καὶ Χαλδαῖον·
They-were-separated-off the-ones Chaldee-belonged to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-ruler-of and they-forth, Not it-be a-mankind upon of-the-one of-dried which-a-one to-the-one to-an-uttering-to of-the-one of-a-ruler-of it-shall-able to-have-acquainted-to, down-to-which-a-one all a-ruler-of great and firsting to-an-uttering-to to-the-one-unto-the-one-this not it-upon-entreateth-unto to-a-chanter-upon, to-a-magos and to-Chaldee-belonged;
Note: to-a-magos : used to refer to educated men from the east usually specializing in astronomy.
2:10 απεκριθησαν] + παλιν A | om και 3° A
(O) καὶ ἀπεκρίθησαν οἱ Χαλδαῖοι ἐπὶ τοῦ βασιλέως ὅτι Οὐδεὶς τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς δυνήσεται εἰπεῖν τῷ βασιλεῖ ὃ ἑώρακε, καθάπερ σὺ ἐρωτᾷς, καὶ πᾶς βασιλεὺς καὶ πᾶς δυνάστης τοιοῦτο πρᾶγμα οὐκ ἐπερωτᾷ πάντα σοφὸν καὶ μάγον καὶ Χαλδαῖον·
And they-were-separated-off the-ones Chaldee-belonged upon of-the-one of-a-ruler-of to-which-a-one, Not-then-also-one of-the-ones upon of-the-one of-a-soil it-shall-able to-have-had-said unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of to-which it-had-come-to-seeee-unto, down-to-which-very thou thou-had-come-to-seeee-unto, and all a-ruler-of and all an-abler to-the-one-unto-the-one-this to-a-practicing-to not it-upon-entreateth-unto to-all to-wisdomed and to-a-magos and to-Chaldee-belonged;
Note: to-a-magos : used to refer to educated men from the east usually specializing in astronomy.
2:10 και πας βασιλευς . . . ουκ επερωτα] ς´ αλλ ουδε τις βασιλευς η μεγας η εξουσιαστης ρημα τοιουτον ερωτα Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:11 ὅτι ὁ λόγος ὃν ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐπερωτᾷ βαρύς, καὶ ἕτερος οὐκ ἔστιν ὃς ἀναγγελεῖ αὐτὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ βασιλέως ἀλλ' ἢ θεοί, ὧν οὐκ ἔστιν ἡ κατοικία μετὰ πάσης σαρκός.
to-which-a-one the-one a-forthee to-which the-one a-ruler-of it-upon-entreateth-unto weighted, and different not it-be which it-shall-leadeeer-up to-it to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-ruler-of other or deities(elah), of-which not it-be the-one a-housing-down-unto with of-all of-a-flesh.
(O) καὶ ὁ λόγος ὃν ζητεῖς, βασιλεῦ, βαρύς ἐστι καὶ ἐπίδοξος, καὶ οὐδείς ἐστιν ὃς δηλώσει ταῦτα τῷ βασιλεῖ, εἰ μή τι ἄγγελος, οὗ οὐκ ἔστι κατοικητήριον μετὰ πάσης σαρκός· ὅθεν οὐκ ἐνδέχεται γενέσθαι καθάπερ οἴει.
and the-one a-forthee to-which thou-seek-unto, Ruler-of, weighted it-be and reckoned-upon, and not-then-also-one it-be which it-shall-en-distinct to-the-ones-these unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of, if lest a-one a-messenger, of-which not it-be a-houser-downlet with of-all of-a-flesh; which-from not it-be-received-in to-have-had-became down-to-which-very thou-which-belongeth.
2:11 ÷ και επιδοξος 87 Syr
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:12 τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐν θυμῷ καὶ ὀργῇ εἶπεν ἀπολέσαι πάντας τοὺς σοφοὺς Βαβυλῶνος.
To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruler-of in unto-a-passion and unto-a-stressing it-had-said to-have-destructed-off to-all to-the-ones to-wisdomed of-a-Babulôn.
2:12 οργη] + πολλη Bab
(O) τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς στυγνὸς γενόμενος καὶ περίλυπος προσέταξεν ἐξαγαγεῖν πάντας τοὺς σοφοὺς τῆς Βαβυλωνίας.
To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruler-of hostiled having-had-became and throed-about it-arranged-toward to-have-had-led-out to-all to-the-ones to-wisdomed of-the-one of-a-Babulônia.
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:13 καὶ τὸ δόγμα ἐξῆλθεν, καὶ οἱ σοφοὶ ἀπεκτέννοντο· καὶ ἐζήτησαν Δανιὴλ καὶ τοὺς φίλους αὐτοῦ ἀνελεῖν.
And the-one a-thinking-to it-had-came-out, and the-ones wisdomed they-were-being-killed-off; and they-sought-unto to-a-Daniêl and to-the-ones to-cared of-it to-have-had-sectioned-up.
(O) καὶ ἐδογματίσθη πάντας ἀποκτεῖναι, ἐζητήθη δὲ ὁ Δανιὴλ καὶ πάντες οἱ μετ' αὐτοῦ χάριν τοῦ συναπολέσθαι.
And it-was-thinking-toed-to to-all to-have-killed-off, it-was-sought-unto then-also the-one a-Daniêl and all the-ones with of-it to-a-granting of-the-one to-have-had-destructed-off-together.
Note: it-was-thinking-toed-to : Greek DOGMATIZW, DOGMA (thinking-to) incorporated into a Verb; used to refer to applying a thinking-to; i.e. in Active voice to decree to others, in Passive voice to be decreed to, in Middle voice to decree to oneself.
2:13 ΕΔΟΓΜΑΤΙΣΘΗ Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:14 τότε Δανιὴλ ἀπεκρίθη βουλὴν καὶ γνώμην τῷ Ἀριὼχ τῷ ἀρχιμαγείρῳ τοῦ βασιλέως, ὃς ἐξῆλθεν ἀναιρεῖν τοὺς σοφοὺς Βαβυλῶνος
To-the-one-which-also a-Daniêl it-was-separated-off to-a-purposing and to-an-acquaintance unto-the-one unto-an-Ariôch unto-the-one unto-a-first-cook of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, which it-had-came-out to-section-along-up-unto to-the-ones to-wisdomed of-a-Babulôn,
2:14 αναιρειν] ανελειν A
(O) τότε Δανιὴλ εἶπεν βουλὴν καὶ γνώμην ἣν εἶχεν Ἀριώχῃ τῷ ἀρχιμαγείρῳ τοῦ βασιλέως, ᾧ προσέταξεν ἐξαγαγεῖν τοὺς σοφιστὰς τῆς Βαβυλωνίας,
To-the-one-which-also a-Daniêl it-had-said to-a-purposing and to-an-acquaintance to-which it-was-holding unto-an-Ariôchês unto-the-one unto-a-first-cook of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, unto-which it-arranged-toward to-have-had-led-out to-the-ones to-wisdom-belongers of-the-one of-a-Babulônia,
2:14 τω αρχιμαγειρω] α´ διδασκαλω σφακτων Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:15 Ἄρχων τοῦ βασιλέως, περὶ τίνος ἐξῆλθεν ἡ γνώμη ἡ ἀναιδὴς ἐκ προσώπου τοῦ βασιλέως; ἐγνώρισεν δὲ τὸ ῥῆμα Ἀριὼχ τῷ Δανιήλ.
firsting of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, about of-what-one it-had-came-out, the-one an-acquaintance the-one un-un-sightinged, out of-looked-toward of-the-one of-a-ruler-of? It-acquainted-to then-also to-the-one to-an-uttering-to, an-Ariôch, unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl.
Note: un-un-sightinged (ANAIDHS): un-un intended; from AN=un and AIDEW; AIDEW is from A and EIDOS, to-un-sight-unto, i.e., a desire to be unseen (because of shame); so, lacking a desire to be unseen, i.e., un-ashamed.
2:15 αρχων] pr και επυνθανετο αυτου λεγων A | περι τινος bis scr (usque τιν) B* | αναιδης] + αυτη A | Δανιηλ] βασιλει A
(O) καὶ ἐπυνθάνετο αὐτοῦ λέγων Ἄρχων τοῦ βασιλέως, περὶ τίνος δογματίζεται πικρῶς παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως; τότε τὸ πρόσταγμα ἐσήμανεν ὁ Ἀριώχης τῷ Δανιήλ.
and it-was-ascertaining of-it forthing, Firsting of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, about of-what-one it-be-thinking-toed-to unto-bittered beside of-the-one of-a-ruler-of? To-the-one-which-also to-the-one to-an-arranging-toward-to it-signified, the-one an-Ariôchês, unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl.
Note: it-be-thinking-toed-to : Greek DOGMATIZW, DOGMA (thinking-to) incorporated into a Verb; used to refer to applying a thinking-to; i.e. in Active voice to decree to others, in Passive voice to be decreed to, in Middle voice to decree to oneself.
2:15 και επυνθαντο . . . του βασιλεως] ς´ ειπε δε τω Αριωχ ω επετραπη η εξουσια παρα του βασ. Syrmg | ϗ αρχων του βασιλεως 87 Syr
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:16 καὶ Δανιὴλ ἠξίωσεν τὸν βασιλέα ὅπως χρόνον δῷ αὐτῷ, καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν αὐτοῦ ἀναγγείλῃ τῷ βασιλεῖ.
And a-Daniêl it-en-deem-belonged to-the-one to-a-ruler-of unto-which-whither to-a-while it-might-have-had-given unto-it, and to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-it it-might-have-leadeeered-up unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of.
2:16 Δανιηλ ηξιωσεν τον βασιλεα] εισηλθεν Δ. και ηξ. απο του βασιλεως A | αναγγειλη] απαγγ. A
(O) ὁ δὲ Δανιὴλ εἰσῆλθε ταχέως πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα, καὶ ἠξίωσεν ἵνα δοθῇ αὐτῷ χρόνος παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως, καὶ δηλώσῃ πάντα ἐπὶ τοῦ βασιλέως.
The-one then-also a-Daniêl it-had-came-into unto-quick toward to-the-one to-a-ruler-of, and it-en-deem-belonged so it-might-have-been-given unto-it a-while beside of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, and it-might-have-en-distincted to-all upon of-the-one of-a-ruler-of.
2:16 δηλωσει Syr
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:17 Καὶ εἰσῆλθεν Δανιὴλ εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῷ Ἁνανίᾳ καὶ τῷ Μεισαὴλ καὶ τῷ Ἀζαρίᾳ τοῖς φίλοις αὐτοῦ ἐγνώρισεν τὸ ῥῆμα.
And it-had-came-into, a-Daniêl, into to-the-one to-a-house of-it, and unto-the-one unto-a-Hananias and unto-the-one unto-a-Meisaêl and unto-the-one unto-an-Azarias unto-the-ones unto-cared of-it it-acquainted-to to-the-one to-an-uttering-to.
2:17 Μισαηλ BbA | το ρημα εγνωρισεν A
(O) Τότε ἀπελθὼν Δανιὴλ εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ τῷ Ἁνανίᾳ καὶ Μισαὴλ καὶ Ἀζαρίᾳ τοῖς συνεταίροις ὑπέδειξε πάντα,
To-the-one-which-also having-had-came-off, a-Daniêl, into to-the-one to-a-house of-it unto-the-one unto-a-Hananias and unto-a-Misaêl and unto-an-Azarias unto-the-ones unto-comrades-together it-en-showed-under to-all,
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:18 καὶ οἰκτειρμοὺς ἐζήτουν παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ὑπὲρ τοῦ μυστηρίου τούτου, ὅπως ἂν μὴ ἀπόλωνται Δανιὴλ καὶ οἱ φίλοι αὐτοῦ μετὰ τῶν ἐπιλοίπων σοφῶν Βαβυλῶνος.
And to-pitierings-of they-were-seeking-unto beside of-the-one of-a-Deity(Elah) of-the-one of-a-sky over of-the-one of-a-flexerlet of-the-one-this, unto-which-whither ever lest they-might-have-had-destructed-off, a-Daniêl and the-ones cared of-it, with of-the-ones of-remaindered-upon of-wisdomed of-a-Babulôn.
Note: of-a-flexerlet : used to refer to things requiring thought flex to understand.
2:18 οικτιρμους Bb | om αν A
(O) καὶ παρήγγειλε νηστείαν καὶ δέησιν καὶ τιμωρίαν ζητῆσαι παρὰ τοῦ κυρίου τοῦ ὑψίστου περὶ τοῦ μυστηρίου τούτου, ὅπως μὴ ἐκδοθῶσι Δανιὴλ καὶ οἱ μετ' αὐτοῦ εἰς ἀπώλειαν ἅμα τοῖς σοφισταῖς Βαβυλῶνος.
and it-leadeeered-beside to-a-non-eating-of and to-a-binding and to-a-value-warding-unto to-have-sought-unto beside of-the-one of-Authority-belonged of-the-one of-most-lofteed about of-the-one of-a-flexerlet of-the-one-this, unto-which-whither lest they-might-have-been-given-out a-Daniêl and the-ones with of-it into to-a-destructing-off-of along unto-the-ones unto-wisdom-belongers of-a-Babulôn.
Note: of-a-flexerlet : used to refer to things requiring thought flex to understand.
2:18 και παρηγγειλε . . . ζητησαι] ς´ υπερ του ερωτησαι οικτιρμους Syrmg | ÷ και τιμωριαν (superscr ÷ 87) ζητησαι 87 Syr
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:19 τότε τῷ Δανιὴλ ἐν ὁράματι τῆς νυκτὸς τὸ μυστήριον ἀπεκαλύφθη. καὶ εὐλόγησεν τὸν θεὸν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ (Dan 2:20) Δανιὴλ
To-the-one-which-also unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl in unto-a-seeeeing-to of-the-one of-a-night the-one a-flexerlet it-was-shrouded-off. And it-goodly-fortheed-unto to-the-one to-a-Deity(Elah) of-the-one of-a-sky, (Dan 2:20) a-Daniêl,
Note: a-flexerlet : used to refer to things requiring thought flex to understand.
2:19 τοτε τω Δ.] τω δε Δ. A (improb. vid Aa?) | ηυλογησεν A
(O) τότε τῷ Δανιὴλ ἐν ὁράματι ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ νυκτὶ τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ βασιλέως ἐξεφάνθη εὐσήμως. τότε Δανιὴλ εὐλόγησε τὸν κύριον τὸν ὕψιστον, (Dan 2:20) καὶ ἐκφωνήσας εἶπεν
To-the-one-which-also unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl in unto-a-seeeeing-to in unto-it unto-the-one unto-a-night the-one a-flexerlet of-the-one of-a-ruler-of it-was-manifested-out unto-goodly-signified-of. To-the-one-which-also a-Daniêl it-goodly-fortheed-unto to-the-one to-Authority-belonged to-the-one to-most-lofteed, (Dan 2:20) and having-sounded-out-unto it-had-said,
Note: a-flexerlet : used to refer to things requiring thought flex to understand.
2:19 και εκφωνησας ειπεν] ς´ και λαλων Δανιηλ ειπεν Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:20 καὶ εἶπεν Εἴη τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ εὐλογημένον ἀπὸ τοῦ αἰῶνος καὶ ἕως τοῦ αἰῶνος, ὅτι ἡ σοφία καὶ ἡ σύνεσις αὐτοῦ ἐστιν·
and it-had-said, It-may-be the-one a-naming-to of-the-one of-a-Deity(Elah) having-had-come-to-be-goodly-fortheed-unto off of-the-one of-an-age and unto-if-which of-the-one of-an-age, to-which-a-one the-one a-wisdoming-unto and the-one a-sending-together of-it it-be;
2:20 αυτου] pr και η ισχυς A
(O) Ἔσται τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ κυρίου τοῦ μεγάλου εὐλογημένον εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ὅτι ἡ σοφία καὶ ἡ μεγαλωσύνη αὐτοῦ ἐστι·
It-shall-be the-one a-naming-to of-the-one of-Authority-belonged of-the-one of-great having-had-come-to-be-goodly-fortheed-unto into to-the-one to-an-age, to-which-a-one the-one a-wisdoming-unto and the-one an-en-greateningedness of-it it-be;
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:21 καὶ αὐτὸς ἀλλοιοῖ καιροὺς καὶ χρόνους, καθιστᾷ βασιλεῖς καὶ μεθιστᾷ, διδοὺς σοφίαν τοῖς σοφοῖς καὶ φρόνησιν τοῖς εἰδόσιν σύνεσιν·
and it it-en-othereth to-times and to-whiles, it-standeth-down to-rulers-of and it-standeth-with, giving to-a-wisdoming-unto unto-the-ones unto-wisdomed and to-a-centering unto-the-ones unto-having-had-come-to-see to-a-sending-together;
2:21 ειδοσι BbA
(O) καὶ αὐτὸς ἀλλοιοῖ καιροὺς καὶ χρόνους, μεθιστῶν βασιλεῖς καὶ καθιστῶν, διδοὺς σοφοῖς σοφίαν καὶ σύνεσιν τοῖς ἐν ἐπιστήμῃ οὖσιν·
and it it-en-othereth to-times and to-whiles, standing-with to-rulers-of and standing-down, giving unto-wisdomed to-a-wisdoming-unto and to-a-sending-together unto-the-ones in unto-a-standing-upon unto-being;
2:21 διδους] pr και Syr
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:22 αὐτὸς ἀποκαλύπτει βαθέα καὶ ἀπόκρυφα, γινώσκων τὰ ἐν τῷ σκότει, καὶ τὸ φῶς μετ' αὐτοῦ ἐστιν.
it it-shroudeth-off to-depthed and to-hidened-off, acquainting to-the-ones in unto-the-one unto-a-dimmeedness, and the-one a-light with of-it it-be;
(O) ἀνακαλύπτων τὰ βαθέα καὶ σκοτεινὰ καὶ γινώσκων τὰ ἐν τῷ σκότει καὶ τὰ ἐν τῷ φωτί, καὶ παρ' αὐτῷ κατάλυσις.
shrouding-up to-the-ones to-depthed and to-dimmeed-belonged-to and acquainting to-the-ones in unto-the-one unto-a-dimmeedness and to-the-ones in unto-the-one unto-a-light, and beside unto-it a-loosing-down.
2:22 ΚΑΤΑΛΥΣΙΣ Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:23 σοί, ὁ θεὸς τῶν πατέρων μου, ἐξομολογοῦμαι καὶ αἰνῶ, ὅτι σοφίαν καὶ δύναμιν δέδωκάς μοι, καὶ ἐγνώρισάς μοι ἃ ἠξιώσαμεν παρὰ σοῦ, καὶ τὸ ὅραμα τοῦ βασιλέως ἐγνώρισάς μοι.
Unto-thee, the-one a-Deity(Elah) of-the-ones of-fathers of-me, I-along-forthee-out-unto and I-laud-unto, to-which-a-one to-a-wisdoming-unto and to-an-ability thou-had-come-to-give unto-me, and thou-acquainted-to unto-me to-which we-en-deem-belonged beside of-thee, and to-the-one to-a-seeeeing-to of-the-one of-a-ruler-of thou-acquainted-to unto-me.
2:23 δεδωκας] εδωκας A | και 3°] + νυν A
(O) σοί, κύριε τῶν πατέρων μου, ἐξομολογοῦμαι καὶ αἰνῶ, ὅτι σοφίαν καὶ φρόνησιν ἔδωκάς μοι, καὶ νῦν ἐσήμανάς μοι ὅσα ἠξίωσα, τοῦ δηλῶσαι τῷ βασιλεῖ πρὸς ταῦτα.
Unto-thee, Authority-belonged of-the-ones of-fathers of-me, I-along-forthee-out-unto and I-laud-unto, to-which-a-one to-a-wisdoming-unto and to-a-centering thou-gave unto-me, and now thou-signified unto-me to-which-a-which I-en-deem-belonged, of-the-one to-have-en-distincted unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of toward to-the-ones-these.
2:23 προσ] κατα Syrvid
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:24 καὶ ἦλθεν Δανιὴλ πρὸς Ἀριώχ, ὃν κατέστησεν ὁ βασιλεὺς ἀπολέσαι τοὺς σοφοὺς Βαβυλῶνος, καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ Τοὺς σοφοὺς Βαβυλῶνος μὴ ἀπολέσῃς, εἰσάγαγε δέ, με ἐνώπιον τοῦ βασιλέως, καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν τῷ βασιλεῖ ἀναγγελῶ.
And it-had-came, a-Daniêl, toward to-an-Ariôch, to-which it-stood-down, the-one a-ruler-of, to-have-destructed-off to-the-ones to-wisdomed of-a-Babulôn, and it-had-said unto-it, To-the-ones to-wisdomed of-a-Babulôn lest thou-might-have-destructed-off, thou-should-have-had-led-into then-also to-me to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, and to-the-one to-a-separating-together unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of I-shall-leadeeer-up.
2:24 τω βασιλει] του βασιλεως Bab
(O) εἰσελθὼν δὲ Δανιὴλ πρὸς τὸν Ἀριὼχ τὸν κατασταθέντα ὑπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως ἀποκτεῖναι πάντας τοὺς σοφιστὰς τῆς Βαβυλωνίας εἶπεν αὐτῷ Τοὺς μὲν σοφιστὰς τῆς Βαβυλωνίας μὴ ἀπολέσῃς, εἰσάγαγε δέ με πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα, καὶ ἕκαστα τῷ βασιλεῖ δηλώσω.
Having-had-came-into then-also, a-Daniêl, toward to-the-one to-an-Ariôch to-the-one to-having-been-stood-down under of-the-one of-a-ruler-of to-have-killed-off to-all to-the-ones to-wisdom-belongers of-the-one of-a-Babulônia it-had-said unto-it, To-the-ones indeed to-wisdom-belongers of-the-one of-a-Babulônia lest thou-might-have-destructed-off, thou-should-have-had-led-into then-also to-me toward to-the-one to-a-ruler-of, and to-each unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of I-shall-en-distinct.
2:24 εισελθων δε Δανιηλ] ς´ εκ τουτου Δανιηλ εισηλθε Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:25 Τότε Ἀριὼχ ἐν σπουδῇ εἰσήγαγεν τὸν Δανιὴλ ἐνώπιον τοῦ βασιλέως καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ Εὕρηκα ἄνδρα ἐκ τῶν υἱῶν τῆς αἰχμαλωσίας τῆς Ἰουδαίας, ὅστις τὸ σύγκριμα τῷ βασιλεῖ ἀναγγελεῖ.
To-the-one-which-also an-Ariôch in unto-a-hasteneeing it-had-led-into to-the-one to-a-Daniêl to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-ruler-of and it-had-said unto-it, I-had-come-to-find to-a-man out of-the-ones of-sons of-the-one of-a-spear-capturing-unto of-the-one of-an-Ioudaia, which-a-one to-the-one to-a-separating-together-to unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of it-shall-leadeeer-up.
(O) Τότε Ἀριὼχ κατὰ σπουδὴν εἰσήγαγεν τὸν Δανιὴλ πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὅτι Εὕρηκα ἄνθρωπον σοφὸν ἐκ τῆς αἰχμαλωσίας τῶν υἱῶν τῆς Ἰουδαίας, ὃς τῷ βασιλεῖ δηλώσει ἕκαστα.
To-the-one-which-also an-Ariôch down to-a-hasteneeing it-had-led-into to-the-one to-a-Daniêl toward to-the-one to-a-ruler-of and it-had-said unto-it to-which-a-one, I-had-come-to-find to-a-mankind to-wisdomed out of-the-one of-a-spear-capturing-unto of-the-ones of-sons of-the-one of-an-Ioudaia, which unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of it-shall-en-distinct to-each.
2:25 post ευρηκα ras aliq 87? | τω βασιλει δηλωσει εκαστα] ς´ την επιλυσιν σου βασιλευ δηλωσει Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:26 καὶ ἀπεκρίθη ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ εἶπεν τῷ Δανιήλ, οὗ τὸ ὄνομα Βαλτασάρ Εἰ δύνασαί μοι ἀναγγεῖλαι τὸ ἐνύπνιον ὃ ἴδον καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν αὐτοῦ;
And it-was-separated-off the-one a-ruler-of and it-had-said unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl, of-which the-one a-naming-to a-Baltasar, If thou-able unto-me to-have-leadeeered-up to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet to-which I-had-seen and to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-it?
2:26 Βαλτασαρ] Βαρτασαρ A | om ο ιδον A | ειδον Bab
(O) ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ βασιλεὺς εἶπε τῷ Δανιήλ, ἐπικαλουμένῳ δὲ Χαλδαιστὶ Βαλτασάρ Δυνήσῃ δηλῶσαί μοι τὸ ὅραμα ὃ εἶδον καὶ τὴν τούτου σύγκρισιν;
Having-been-separated-off then-also the-one a-ruler-of it-had-said unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl, unto-being-called-upon-unto then-also unto-Chaldee-belonginged unto-a-Baltasar, Thou-shall-able to-have-en-distincted unto-me to-the-one to-a-seeeeing-to to-which I-had-seen and to-the-one of-the-one-this to-a-separating-together?
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:27 καὶ ἀπεκρίθη Δανιὴλ ἐνώπιον τοῦ βασιλέως καὶ λέγει Τὸ μυστήριον ὃ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐρωτᾷ οὐκ ἔστιν σοφῶν, μάγων, ἐπαοιδῶν, γαζαρηνῶν ἀναγγεῖλαι τῷ βασιλεῖ,
And it-was-separated-off a-Daniêl to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-ruler-of and it-fortheth, The-one a-flexerlet to-which the-one a-ruler-of it-entreateth-unto not it-be of-wisdomed, of-magos', of-chanters-upon, of-gazarênians, to-have-leadeeered-up unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of,
Note: a-flexerlet : used to refer to things requiring thought flex to understand.
Note: of-magos' : used to refer to educated men from the east usually specializing in astronomy.
Note: of-gazarênians : Greek word formed from Hebrew, meaning cutters who divined through the resultant patterns of cutting things, probably gems and stones.
2:27 και λεγει] και ειπεν BabA | ερωτα] επερωτα A
(O) ἐκφωνήσας δὲ ὁ Δανιὴλ ἐπὶ τοῦ βασιλέως εἶπεν Τὸ μυστήριον ὃ ἑώρακεν ὁ βασιλεύς, οὐκ ἔστι σοφῶν καὶ φαρμακῶν καὶ ἐπαοιδῶν καὶ γαζαρηνῶν ἡ δήλωσις·
Having-sounded-out-unto then-also, the-one a-Daniêl, upon of-the-one of-a-ruler-of it-had-said, The-one a-flexerlet to-which it-had-come-to-seeee-unto, the-one a-ruler-of, not it-be of-wisdomed and of-dosers and of-chanters-upon and of-gazarênians the-one an-en-distincting;
Note: a-flexerlet : used to refer to things requiring thought flex to understand.
Note: of-gazarênians : Greek word formed from Hebrew, meaning cutters who divined through the resultant patterns of cutting things, probably gems and stones.
2:27 ΓΑΖΑΡΗΝΩΝ ς´ ουδε θυτων Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:28 ἀλλ' ἢ ἔστιν θεὸς ἐν οὐρανῷ ἀποκαλύπτων μυστήρια, καὶ ἐγνώρισεν τῷ βασιλεῖ Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ἃ δεῖ γενέσθαι ἐπ' ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν. τὸ ἐνύπνιόν σου καὶ αἱ ὁράσεις τῆς κεφαλῆς σου ἐπὶ τῆς κοίτης σου τοῦτό ἐστιν.
other or it-be a-Deity(Elah) in unto-a-sky shrouding-off to-flexerlets, and it-acquainted-to unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of unto-a-Nabouchodonosor to-which it-bindeth to-have-had-became upon of-most-bordered of-the-ones of-dayednesses. The-one an-in-sleeplet of-thee and the-ones seeeeings of-the-one of-a-head of-thee upon of-the-one of-a-situating of-thee the-one-this it-be.
Note: to-flexerlets : used to refer to things requiring thought flex to understand.
2:28 om η A | θεος] pr ο A
(O) ἀλλ' ἔστι θεὸς ἐν οὐρανῷ ἀνακαλύπτων μυστήρια, ὃς ἐδήλωσε τῷ βασιλεῖ Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ἃ δεῖ γενέσθαι ἐπ' ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν·
other it-be a-Deity(Elah) in unto-a-sky shrouding-up to-flexerlets, which it-en-distincted unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of unto-a-Nabouchodonosor to-which it-bindeth to-have-had-became upon of-most-bordered of-the-ones of-dayednesses;
Note: to-flexerlets : used to refer to things requiring thought flex to understand.
2:28 μυστηρια] α sup ras 87? | ημερων] + βασιλευ εις τον αιωνα ζηθι· το ενυπνιον και το οραμα της κεφαλης σου επι της κοιτης σου τουτο εστι· (29) συ βασιλευ κατακλιθεις επι της κοιτης σου εωρακας (ΕΟΡΑΚΑΣ Syrmg) παντα οσα δει γενεσθαι επ εσχατων των ημερων· Syr (pro κατακλιθεις . . . σου ς´ εν μεριμνη εγενου επι της κοιτης σου Syrmg)
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:29 βασιλεῦ, οἱ διαλογισμοί σου ἐπὶ τῆς κοίτης σου ἀνέβησαν τί δεῖ γενέσθαι μετὰ ταῦτα, καὶ ὁ ἀποκαλύπτων μυστήρια ἐγνώρισέν σοι ἃ δεῖ γενέσθαι.
Ruler-of, the-ones fortheeings-through-to-of of-thee upon of-the-one of-a-situating of-thee they-had-stepped-up to-what-one it-bindeth to-have-had-became with to-the-ones-these, and the-one shrouding-off to-flexerlets it-acquainted-to unto-thee to-which it-bindeth to-have-had-became.
Note: to-flexerlets : used to refer to things requiring thought flex to understand.
2:29 βασιλευ] συ βασιλευ εθεωρεις A
(O) καὶ ἀνακαλύπτων μυστήρια ἐδήλωσέ σοι ἃ δεῖ γενέσθαι.
and shrouding-up to-flexerlets it-en-distincted unto-thee to-which it-bindeth to-have-had-became.
Note: to-flexerlets : used to refer to things requiring thought flex to understand.
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:30 καὶ ἐμοὶ δὲ οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν ἐμοὶ παρὰ πάντας τοὺς ζῶντας τὸ μυστήριον τοῦτο ἀπεκαλύφθη, ἀλλ' ἕνεκεν τοῦ τὴν σύγκρισιν γνωρίσαι τῷ βασιλεῖ, ἵνα τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῆς καρδίας σου γνῷς.
And unto-ME then-also not in unto-a-wisdoming-unto unto-the-one unto-being in unto-ME beside to-all to-the-ones to-lifing-unto the-one a-flexerlet the-one-this it-was-shrouded-off, other in-out-in of-the-one to-the-one to-a-separating-together to-have-acquainted-to unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of, so to-the-ones to-fortheeings-through-to-of of-the-one of-a-heart of-thee thou-might-have-had-acquainted.
Note: a-flexerlet : used to refer to things requiring thought flex to understand.
2:30 om δε A | om τουτο A | τω βασ. γνωρισαι A | διαλογισμου (sic) A
(O) κἀμοὶ δὲ οὐ παρὰ τὴν σοφίαν τὴν οὖσαν ἐν ἐμοὶ ὑπὲρ πάντας τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τὸ μυστήριον τοῦτο ἐξεφάνθη, ἀλλ' ἕνεκεν τοῦ δηλωθῆναι τῷ βασιλεῖ ἐσημάνθη μοι ἃ ὑπέλαβες τῇ καρδίᾳ σου ἐν γνώσει.
Unto-and-me then-also not beside to-the-one to-a-wisdoming-unto to-the-one to-being in unto-ME over to-all to-the-ones to-mankinds the-one a-flexerlet the-one-this it-was-manifested-out, other in-out-in of-the-one to-have-been-en-distincted unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of it-was-signified unto-me to-which thou-had-taken-under unto-the-one unto-a-heart of-thee in unto-an-acquainting.
Note: a-flexerlet : used to refer to things requiring thought flex to understand.
2:30 α υπελαβες . . . εν γνωσει] α´ και η βουλη (? εννοια) της καρδιας σου ινα γνως Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:31 σύ, βασιλεῦ, ἐθεώρεις, καὶ ἰδοὺ εἰκὼν μία, μεγάλη ἡ εἰκὼν ἐκείνη, καὶ ἡ πρόσοψις αὐτῆς ὑπερφερής, ἑστῶσα πρὸ προσώπου σου· καὶ ἡ ὅρασις αὐτῆς φοβερά.
Thou, Ruler-of, thou-was-surveiling-unto, and thou-should-have-had-seen, a-resemblance one, great the-one a-resemblance the-one-thither, and the-one a-beholding-toward of-it bearinged-over, having-hath-had-come-to-stand before of-looked-toward of-thee; and the-one a-seeeeing of-it en-feareed.
2:31 προσοψις] οψεις A
(O) καὶ σύ, βασιλεῦ, ἑώρακας, καὶ ἰδοὺ εἰκὼν μία, καὶ ἦν ἡ εἰκὼν ἐκείνη μεγάλη σφόδρα, καὶ ἡ πρόσοψις αὐτῆς ὑπερφερὴς ἑστήκει ἐναντίον σου· καὶ ἡ πρόσοψις τῆς εἰκόνος φοβερά.
And thou, Ruler-of, thou-had-come-to-seeee-unto, and thou-should-have-had-seen, a-resemblance one, and it-was the-one a-resemblance the-one-thither great to-vehemented, and the-one a-beholding-toward of-it bearinged-over it-had-come-to-have-stood to-ever-a-oned-in of-thee; and the-one a-beholding-toward of-the-one of-a-resemblance en-feareed.
2:31 και ιδου εικων . . . σφοδρα] ς´ και ην ως αδριας εις μεγας ο ανδριας Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:32 εἰκὼν ἧς ἡ κεφαλὴ χρυσίου χρηστοῦ, αἱ χεῖρες καὶ τὸ στῆθος καὶ οἱ βραχίονες αὐτῆς ἀργυροῖ, ἡ κοιλία καὶ οἱ μηροὶ χαλκοῖ,
A-resemblance it-was the-one a-head of-a-goldlet of-afforded, the-ones hands and the-one a-chest and the-ones more-short of-it silvern, the-one a-hollowing-unto and the-ones thighs coppern,
2:32 εικων] pr η A | χρηστου] καθαρου Ba mg (non inst b) A
(O) καὶ ἦν ἡ κεφαλὴ αὐτῆς ἀπὸ χρυσίου χρηστοῦ, τὸ στῆθος καὶ οἱ βραχίονες ἀργυροῖ, ἡ κοιλία καὶ οἱ μηροὶ χαλκοῖ·
And it-was the-one a-head of-it off of-a-goldlet of-afforded, the-one a-chest and the-ones more-short silvern, the-one a-hollowing-unto and the-ones thighs coppern;
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:33 αἱ κνῆμαι σιδηραῖ, οἱ πόδες μέρος τι σιδηροῦν καὶ μέρος ὀστράκινον.
the-ones shins iron, the-ones feet a-portioneedness a-one iron and a-portioneedness shelled-belonged-to.
2:33 μερος I°] + μεν A | και μερος] μερος δε τι A
(O) τὰ δὲ σκέλη σιδηρᾶ, οἱ πόδες μέρος μέν τι σιδήρου, μέρος δέ τι ὀστράκινον.
the-ones then-also legs iron, the-ones feet a-portioneedness indeed a-one of-iron, a-portioneedness then-also a-one shelled-belonged-to.
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:34 ἐθεώρεις ἕως ἀπεσχίσθη λίθος ἐξ ὄρους ἄνευ χειρῶν, καὶ ἐπάταξεν τὴν εἰκόνα ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας τοὺς σιδηροῦς καὶ ὀστρακίνους, καὶ ἐλέπτυνεν εἰς τέλος.
Thou-was-surveiling-unto unto-if-which it-was-severed-off-to a-stone out of-a-jutteedness un-nodded of-hands, and it-smote to-the-one to-a-resemblance upon to-the-ones to-feet to-the-ones to-iron and to-shelled-belonged-to, and it-peelened into to-a-finisheedness.
Note: it-peelened : formed from peel.
2:34 εως] + ου A | απεσχισθη] ετμηθη A | ελεπτυνεν] + αυτους BabA
(O) ἑώρακας ἕως ὅτου ἐτμήθη λίθος ἐξ ὄρους ἄνευ χειρῶν, καὶ ἐπάταξε τὴν εἰκόνα ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας τοὺς σιδηροῦς καὶ ὀστρακίνους καὶ κατήλεσεν αὐτά.
Thou-had-come-to-seeee-unto unto-if-which of-which-a-one it-was-cut a-stone out of-a-jutteedness un-nodded of-hands, and it-smote to-the-one to-resemblance upon to-the-ones to-feet to-the-ones to-iron and to-shelled-belonged-to and it-grinded-down-unto to-them.
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:35 τότε ἐλεπτύνθησαν εἰς ἅπαξ τὸ ὄστρακον, ὁ σίδηρος, ὁ χαλκός, ὁ ἄργυρος, ὁ χρυσός, καὶ ἐγένοντο ὡσεὶ κονιορτὸς ἀπὸ ἅλωνος θερινῆς· καὶ ἐξῆρεν τὸ πλῆθος τοῦ πνεύματος, καὶ τόπος οὐχ εὑρέθη αὐτοῖς· καὶ ὁ λίθος ὁ πατάξας τὴν εἰκόνα ἐγενήθη ὄρος μέγα, καὶ ἐπλήρωσεν πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν.
To-the-one-which-also they-were-peelened into to-once the-one a-shell, the-one an-iron, the-one a-copper, the-one a-silver, the-one a-gold, and it-had-became as-if a-raise-belongedness-flailage off of-a-threshing of-summer-belonged-to; and it-lifted-out, the-one a-repleteedness of-the-one of-a-currenting-to, and an-occasion not it-was-found unto-them; and the-one a-stone the-one having-smote to-the-one to-a-resemblance it-was-became a-jutteedness great, and it-en-filled to-all to-the-one to-a-soil.
Note: I-peelened : formed from peel.
2:35 ο σιδηρος το οστρακο̅| A | εγενετο] εγενοντο A | εξηρεν] + αυτα A
(O) τότε λεπτὰ ἐγένετο ἅμα ὁ σίδηρος καὶ τὸ ὄστρακον καὶ ὁ χαλκὸς καὶ ὁ ἄργυρος καὶ τὸ χρυσίον, καὶ ἐγένετο ὡσεὶ λεπτότερον ἀχύρου ἐν ἅλωνι, καὶ ἐρρίπισεν αὐτὰ ὁ ἄνεμος ὥστε μηδὲν καταλειφθῆναι ἐξ αὐτῶν, καὶ ὁ λίθος ὁ πατάξας τὴν εἰκόνα ἐγένετο ὄρος μέγα, καὶ ἐπάταξε πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν.
To-the-one-which-also en-peeled it-had-became along the-one an-iron and the-one a-shell and the-one a-copper and the-one a-silver and the-one a-goldlet, and it-had-became as-if more-en-peeled of-an-en-pouring in unto-a-threshing, and it-fanned-to to-them, the-one a-wind, as-also to-lest-then-also-one to-have-been-remaindered-down out of-them, and the-one a-stone the-one having-smote to-the-one to-a-resemblance it-had-became a-jutteedness great, and it-smote to-all to-the-one to-a-soil.
2:35 ωσει λεπτοτερον αχυρου . . . ο ανεμος] α´ ως αχνη απο αλωνος θερινης και ηρεν αυτα το πνευμα Syrmg | και επαταξε] και επληρωσε Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:36 τοῦτό ἐστιν τὸ ἐνύπνιον· καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν αὐτοῦ ἐροῦμεν ἐνώπιον τοῦ βασιλέως.
The-one-this it-be the-one an-in-sleeplet; and to-the-one to-a-separating of-it we-shall-utter-unto to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-ruler-of.
(O) τοῦτο τὸ ὅραμα· καὶ τὴν κρίσιν δὲ ἐροῦμεν ἐπὶ τοῦ βασιλέως.
The-one-this the-one a-seeeeing-to; and to-the-one to-separating then-also we-shall-utter-unto upon of-the-one of-a-ruler-of.
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:37 σύ, βασιλεῦ, βασιλεὺς βασιλέων, ᾧ ὁ θεὸς τοῦ οὐρανοῦ βασιλείαν ἰσχυρὰν καὶ κραταιὰν καὶ ἔντιμον ἔδωκεν
Thou, Ruler-of, a-ruler-of of-rulers-of, unto-which the-one a-Deity(Elah) of-the-one of-a-sky to-a-ruling-of to-force-held and to-secure-belonged and to-valued-in it-gave,
(O) σύ, βασιλεῦ, βασιλεὺς βασιλέων, καὶ σοὶ ὁ κύριος τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τὴν ἀρχὴν καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν καὶ τὴν ἰσχὺν καὶ τὴν τιμὴν καὶ τὴν δόξαν ἔδωκεν·
Thou, Ruler-of, a-ruler-of of-rulers-of, and unto-thee the-one Authority-belonged of-the-one of-a-sky to-the-one to-a-firsting and to-the-one to-a-ruling-of and to-the-one to-a-force-holding and to-the-one to-a-valuation and to-the-one to-a-reckonedness it-gave;
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:38 ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ ὅπου κατοικοῦσιν οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων· θηρία τε ἀγροῦ καὶ πετεινὰ οὐρανοῦ ἔδωκεν ἐν τῇ χειρί σου, καὶ κατέστησέν κύριον πάντων· σὺ εἶ ἡ κεφαλὴ ἡ χρυσῆ.
in unto-all unto-an-occasion to-which-of-whither they-house-down-unto, the-ones sons of-the-ones of-mankinds; to-beastlets also of-a-field and to-flying-belonged-to of-a-sky it-gave in unto-the-one unto-a-hand of-thee, and it-stood-down to-authority-belonged(shelet) of-all; thou thou-be the-one a-head the-one golden.
2:38 ουρανου] pr του A + και ιχθυας της θαλασσης A | κατεστησεν] + σε A | κυριον plene scr B? (κν̅ ut vid B*)
(O) ἐν πάσῃ τῇ οἰκουμένῃ ἀπὸ ἀνθρώπων καὶ θηρίων ἀγρίων καὶ πετεινῶν οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῶν ἰχθύων τῆς θαλάσσης παρέδωκεν ὑπὸ τὰς χεῖράς σου, κυριεύειν πάντων· σὺ εἶ ἡ κεφαλὴ ἡ χρυσῆ.
in unto-all unto-the-one unto-being-housed-unto off of-mankinds and of-beastlets of-field-belonged and of-flying-belonged-to of-a-sky and of-the-ones of-fishes of-the-one of-a-flourisheredness it-gave-beside under to-the-ones to-hands of-thee, to-authority-belong-of of-all; thou thou-be the-one a-head the-one golden.
2:38 ÷ και των (÷ 87) ιχθυων της θαλασσης 87 Syr | κυριευειν παντων] α´ και εκυριευσε παντων Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:39 καὶ ὀπίσω σου ἀναστήσεται ἑτέρα βασιλεία ἥττων σου, καὶ βασιλεία τρίτη ἥτις ἐστὶν ὁ χαλκός, ἣ κυριεύσει πάσης τῆς γῆς·
And aback-unto-which of-thee it-shall-stand-up, different a-ruling-of, lessinged-of of-thee, and a-ruling-of third which-a-one it-be the-one a-copper, which it-shall-authority-belong-of of-all of-the-one of-a-soil;
2:39 βασιλεια ετερα A | σου 2°] + ητις εστιν ο αργυρος A | ητις] η A
(O) καὶ μετὰ σὲ ἀναστήσεται βασιλεία ἐλάττων σου, καὶ τρίτη βασιλεία ἄλλη χαλκῆ ἣ κυριεύσει πάσης τῆς γῆς·
And with to-thee it-shall-stand-up, a-ruling-of lackinged-of of-thee, and third a-ruling-of other coppern which it-shall-authority-belong-of of-all of-the-one of-a-soil;
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:40 καὶ βασιλεία τετάρτη ἔσται ἰσχυρὰ ὡς ὁ σίδηρος· ὃν τρόπον ὁ σίδηρος λεπτύνει καὶ δαμάζει πάντα, οὕτως πάντα λεπτυνεῖ καὶ δαμάσει.
and a-ruling-of fourth it-shall-be force-held as the-one an-iron; to-which to-a-turn the-one an-iron it-peeleneth and it-prevaileth-to to-all, unto-the-one-this to-all it-shall-peeleneth and it-shall-prevail-to;
Note: it-peeleneth : formed from peel.
2:40 δαμασει] δαμαζει A
(O) καὶ βασιλεία τετάρτη ἰσχυρὰ ὡς ὁ σίδηρος, ὥσπερ ὁ σίδηρος ὁ δαμάζων πάντα, καὶ ὡς ὁ σίδηρος πᾶν δένδρον ἐκκόπτων· καὶ σεισθήσεται πᾶσα ἡ γῆ.
and a-ruling-of fourth force-held as the-one an-iron, as-very the-one iron the-one prevailing-to to-all, and as the-one an-iron to-all to-an-en-treeing felling-out; and it-shall-be-shake-belonged all the-one a-soil.
2:40 ϗ ως ο σιδηρος (I°) 87 Syr | και ϗ ως ο σιδηρος (2°) 87 (deest V) ϗ και ο σιδηρος Syr
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:41 καὶ ὅτι ἴδες τοὺς πόδας καὶ τοὺς δακτύλους μέρος μέν τι ὀστράκινον, μέρος δέ τι σιδηροῦν, βασιλεία διῃρημένη ἔσται, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς ῥίζης τῆς σιδηρᾶς ἔσται ἐν αὐτῇ, ὃν τρόπον ἴδες τὸν σίδηρον ἀναμεμιγμένον τῷ ὀστράκῳ.
and to-which-a-one thou-had-seen to-the-ones to-feet and to-the-ones to-digits to-a-portioneedness indeed to-a-one to-shelled-belonged-to, to-a-portioneedness then-also to-a-one to-iron, a-ruling-of having-had-come-to-be-sectioned-along-through-unto it-shall-be, and off of-the-one of-a-rootedness of-the-one of-iron it-shall-be in unto-it, to-which to-a-turn thou-had-seen to-the-one to-an-iron to-having-had-come-to-be-en-mingled-up unto-the-one unto-a-shell.
2:41 ειδες bis Bab (item 43, 45) A (item 43) | οστρακινον] + κεραμεου Aa? (mg)
(O) καὶ ὡς ἑώρακας τοὺς πόδας αὐτῆς καὶ τοὺς δακτύλους μέρος μέν τι ὀστράκου κεραμικοῦ, μέρος δέ τι σιδήρου, βασιλεία ἄλλη διμερὴς ἔσται ἐν αὐτῇ, καθάπερ εἶδες τὸν σίδηρον ἀναμεμιγμένον ἅμα τῷ πηλίνῳ ὀστράκῳ.
And as thou-had-come-to-seeee-unto to-the-ones to-feet of-it and to-the-ones to-digits to-a-portioneedness indeed to-a-one of-a-shell of-pottery-belonged-of, to-a-portioneedness then-also to-a-one of-an-iron, a-ruling-of other two-portioninged-of it-shall-be in unto-it, down-to-which-very thou-had-seen to-the-one to-an-iron to-having-had-come-to-be-en-mingled-up along unto-the-one unto-clay-belonged-to unto-a-shell.
2:41 ϗ και τους δακτυλους 87 (deest V) Syr | κεραμεικου 87 | εν αυτη] pr απο της ριζης της της σιδηρας εσται Syr α´ς´ και εκ του φυτου του σιδηρου Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:42 καὶ οἱ δάκτυλοι τῶν ποδῶν μέρος μέν τι σιδηροῦν, μέρος δέ τι ὀστράκινον, μέρος τι τῆς βασιλείας ἔσται ἰσχυρόν, καὶ ἀπ' αὐτῆς ἔσται συντριβόμενον.
And the-ones digits of-the-ones of-feet a-portioneedness indeed a-one iron, a-portioneedness then-also a-one shelled-belonged-to, a-portioneedness a-one of-the-one of-a-ruling-of it-shall-be force-held, and off of-it it-shall-be being-rubbed-together;
2:42 απ] επ A
(O) καὶ οἱ δάκτυλοι τῶν ποδῶν μέρος μέν τι σιδηροῦν, μέρος δέ τι ὀστράκινον· μέρος δέ τι τῆς βασιλείας ἔσται ἰσχυρόν, καὶ μέρος τι ἔσται συντετριμμένον.
And the-ones digits of-the-ones of-feet a-portioneedness indeed a-one iron, a-portioneedness then-also a-one shelled-belonged-to; a-portioneedness then-also a-one of-the-one of-a-ruling-of it-shall-be force-held, and a-portioneedness a-one it-shall-be having-had-come-to-be-rubbed-together.
2:42 om δε 2° Syr
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:43 ὅτι ἴδες τὸν σίδηρον ἀναμεμιγμένον τῷ ὀστράκῳ, συμμιγεῖς ἔσονται ἐν σπέρματι ἀνθρώπων· καὶ οὐκ ἔσονται προσκολλώμενοι οὗτος μετὰ τούτου, καθὼς ὁ σίδηρος οὐκ ἀναμίγνυται μετὰ τοῦ ὀστράκου.
to-which-a-one thou-had-seen to-the-one to-an-iron to-having-had-come-to-be-en-mingled-up unto-the-one unto-a-shell, minglinged-together they-shall-be in unto-a-whorling-to of-mankinds; and not they-shall-be being-toward-togetherned-unto the-one-this with of-the-one-this, down-as the-one an-iron not it-be-en-mingled-up with of-the-one of-a-shell.
2:43 συμμιγεις Bb | προσκολλωμενος A | μετα του οστρακου] τω οστρακω A
(O) καὶ ὡς εἶδες τὸν σίδηρον ἀναμεμειγμένον ἅμα τῷ πηλίνῳ ὀστράκῳ, καὶ συμμειγεῖς ἔσονται εἰς γένεσιν ἀνθρώπων· οὐκ ἔσονται δὲ ὁμονοοῦντες οὔτε εὐνοοῦντες ἀλλήλοις, ὥσπερ οὐδὲ ὁ σίδηρος δύναται συγκραθῆναι τῷ ὀστράκῳ.
And as thou-had-seen to-the-one to-an-iron to-having-had-come-to-be-en-mingled-up along unto-the-one unto-clay-belonged-to unto-a-shell, and minglinged-together they-shall-be into to-a-becoming of-mankinds; not they-shall-be then-also en-mulling-along-unto not-also goodly-en-mulling-unto unto-other-to-other, as-very not-then-also the-one an-iron it-ableth to-have-been-en-mixed-together unto-the-one unto-a-shell.
2:43 om και 2° Syr | εις γενεσιν] εν σπερματι Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:44 καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν βασιλέων ἐκείνων ἀναστήσει ὁ θεὸς τοῦ οὐρανοῦ βασιλείαν, ἥτις εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας οὐ διαφθαρήσεται, καὶ ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ λαῷ ἑτέρῳ οὐχ ὑπολειφθήσεται· λεπτυνεῖ καὶ λικμήσει πάσας τὰς βασιλείας, καὶ αὐτὴ ἀναστήσεται εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας·
And in unto-the-ones unto-dayednesses of-the-ones of-rulers-of of-the-ones-thither it-shall-stand-up, the-one a-Deity(Elah) of-the-one of-a-sky, to-a-ruling-of, which-a-one into to-the-ones to-ages not it-shall-have-been-degraded-through, and the-one a-ruling-of of-it unto-a-people unto-different not it-shall-be-remaindered-under; it-shall-peelen and it-shall-winnow-unto to-all to-the-ones to-rulings-of, and the-one-this it-shall-stand-up into to-the-ones to-ages;
Note: it-shall-peelen : formed from peel.
2:44 τους αιωνας I°] τον αιωνα A | leptunei] + de A1fort
(O) καὶ ἐν τοῖς χρόνοις τῶν βασιλέων τούτων στήσει ὁ θεὸς τοῦ οὐρανοῦ βασιλείαν ἄλλην, ἥτις ἔσται εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας καὶ οὐ φθαρήσεται· καὶ αὕτη ἡ βασιλεία ἄλλο ἔθνος οὐ μὴ ἐάσῃ, πατάξει δὲ καὶ ἀφανίσει τὰς βασιλείας ταύτας, καὶ αὐτὴ στήσεται εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα·
And in unto-the-ones unto-whiles of-the-ones of-rulers-of of-the-ones-these it-shall-stand, the-one a-Deity(Elah) of-the-one of-a-sky, to-a-ruling-of to-other, which-a-one it-shall-be into to-the-ones to-ages and not it-shall-have-been-degraded; and the-one-this the-one a-ruling-of to-other to-a-placeedness-belonging-to not lest it-might-have-let-unto, it-shall-smite then-also and it-shall-un-manifest-to to-the-ones to-rulings-of to-the-ones-these, and the-one-this it-shall-stand into to-the-one to-an-age;
2:44 τους αιωνας] τον αιωνα Syr
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:45 ὃν τρόπον ἴδες ὅτι ἀπὸ ὄρους ἐτμήθη λίθος ἄνευ χειρῶν, καὶ ἐλέπτυνεν τὸ ὄστρακον τὸν σίδηρον, τὸν χαλκόν, τὸν ἄργυρον, τὸν χρυσόν. ὁ θεὸς ὁ μέγας ἐγνώρισεν τῷ βασιλεῖ ἃ δεῖ γενέσθαι μετὰ ταῦτα· καὶ ἀληθινὸν τὸ ἐνύπνιον, καὶ πιστὴ ἡ σύγκρισις αὐτοῦ.
to-which to-a-turn thou-had-seen to-which-a-one off of-a-jutteedness it-was-cut a-stone un-nodded of-hands, and it-peelened to-the-one to-a-shell, to-the-one to-an-iron, to-the-one to-a-copper, to-the-one to-a-silver, to-the-one to-a-gold. The-one a-Deity(Elah) the-one great it-acquainted-to unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of to-which it-bindeth to-have-had-became with to-the-ones-these; and un-secluded-belonged-to the-one an-in-sleeplet, and trusted the-one a-separating-together of-it.
Note: I-peelened : formed from peel.
(O) καθάπερ ἑώρακας ἐξ ὄρους τμηθῆναι λίθον ἄνευ χειρῶν, καὶ συνηλόησε τὸ ὄστρακον τὸν σίδηρον καὶ τὸν χαλκὸν καὶ τὸν ἄργυρον καὶ τὸν χρυσόν. ὁ θεὸς ὁ μέγας ἐσήμανε τῷ βασιλεῖ τὰ ἐσόμενα ἐπ' ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν· καὶ ἀκριβὲς τὸ ὅραμα, καὶ πιστὴ ἡ τούτου κρίσις.
down-to-which-very thou-had-come-to-seeee-unto out of-a-jutteedness to-have-been-cut to-a-stone un-nodded of-hands, and it-together-threshed-unto to-the-one to-a-shell, to-the-one to-an-iron and to-the-one to-a-copper and to-the-one to-a-silver and to-the-one to-a-gold. The-one a-Deity(Elah) great it-signified unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of to-the-ones to-shall-having-been upon of-most-bordered of-the-ones of-dayednesses; and exactinged the-one a-seeeeing-to, and trusted the-one of-the-one-this a-separating.
2:45 συνηλοησε] ΣΥΝΗΛΟΛΗΣΕΝ (sic) + ωσει αλοησις η εν αλωνι Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:46 Τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον καὶ τῷ Δανιὴλ προσεκύνησεν καὶ μαννὰ καὶ εὐωδίας εἶπεν σπεῖσαι αὐτῷ.
To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruler-of a-Nabouchodonosor it-had-fallen upon to-looked-toward and unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl it-kissed-toward-unto, and to-a-manna and to-goodly-odorings-unto it-had-said to-have-libationed unto-it.
Note: to-a-manna : transliterated from Hebrew, meaning a bestowing.
2:46 om και 2° B*vid (hab κ(αι) Ba?b? (mg))
(O) Τότε Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ βασιλεὺς πεσὼν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον χαμαὶ προσεκύνησεν τῷ Δανιήλ, καὶ ἐπέταξε θυσίας καὶ σπονδὰς ποιῆσαι αὐτῷ.
To-the-one-which-also a-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-ruler-of having-had-fallen upon to-looked-toward unto-ground it-kissed-toward-unto unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl, and it-arranged-upon to-surgings-unto and to-libationings to-have-done-unto unto-it.
2:46 om επι προσωπον Syr | θυσιας . . . αυτω] ς´ και δωρα και θρησκειας (α´ και δωρα ευωδιας) συντελεσαι αυτω Syrmg
(495 B.C.)
Dan 2:47 καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ βασιλεὺς εἶπεν τῷ Δανιὴλ Ἐπ' ἀληθείας ὁ θεὸς ὑμῶν αὐτός ἐστιν θεὸς θεῶν καὶ κύριος τῶν βασιλέων καὶ ἀποκαλύπτων μυστήρια· ὅτι ἠδυνήθης ἀποκαλύψαι τὸ μυστήριον τοῦτο.
And having-been-separated-off the-one a-ruler-of it-had-said unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl, Upon of-an-un-secluding-of the-one a-Deity(Elah) of-ye it it-be a-Deity(Elah) of-deities(elah) and Authority-belonged(Mare) of-the-ones of-rulers-of and shrouding-off to-flexerlets, to-which-a-one thou-was-abled to-have-shrouded-off to-the-one to-a-flexerlet to-the-one-this.
Note: to-flexerlets : used to refer to things requiring thought flex to understand.
2:47 κυριος] + των κυριων και βασιλευς A | om και 3° BabA | αποκαλυπτων] ο αποκ. Bab | εδυνηθης A
(O) καὶ ἐκφωνήσας ὁ βασιλεὺς πρὸς τὸν Δανιὴλ εἶπεν Ἐπ' ἀληθείας ἐστὶν ὁ θεὸς ὑμῶν θεὸς τῶν θεῶν καὶ κύριος τῶν βασιλέων, ὁ ἐκφαίνων μυστήρια κρυπτὰ μόνος· ὅτι ἐδυνάσθης δηλῶσαι τὸ μυστήριον τοῦτο.
And having-sounded-out-unto, the-one a-ruler-of, toward to-the-one to-a-Daniêl it-had-said, Upon of-an-un-secluding-of it-be the-one a-Deity(Elah) of-ye a-Deity(Elah) of-the-ones of-deities(elah) and Authority-belonged(Mare) of-the-ones of-rulers-of, the-one manifesting-out to-flexerlets to-hidened stayeed; to-which-a-one thou-was-abled to-have-en-distincted to-the-one to-a-flexerlet to-the-one-this.
Note: to-flexerlets : used to refer to things requiring thought flex to understand.
2:47 επ αληθει| 87 | κυριος] βασιλευς Syrmg | μυστηρια] ΘΡΗΣΚΙΑΣ Syrmg
(495-479 B.C.)
Dan 2:48 καὶ ἐμεγάλυνεν ὁ βασιλεὺς τὸν Δανιήλ, καὶ δόματα μεγάλα καὶ πολλὰ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ κατέστησεν αὐτὸν ἐπὶ πάσης χώρας Βαβυλῶνος καὶ ἄρχοντα σατραπῶν ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς σοφοὺς Βαβυλῶνος.
And it-greatened, the-one a-ruler-of, to-the-one to-a-Daniêl, and to-givings-to to-great and to-much it-gave unto-it, and it-stood-down to-it upon of-all of-a-spacedness of-a-Babulôn and to-firsting of-provincers upon to-all to-the-ones to-wisdomed of-a-Babulôn.
2:48 πολλα και μεγαλα A | επι 2°] pr και A
(O) τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ Δανιὴλ μεγαλύνας καὶ δοὺς δωρεὰς μεγάλας καὶ πολλὰς κατέστησεν ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων τῆς Βαβυλωνίας, καὶ ἀπέδειξεν αὐτὸν ἄρχοντα καὶ ἡγούμενον πάντων τῶν σοφιστῶν Βαβυλωνίας.
To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruler-of a-Nabouchodonosor to-a-Daniêl having-greatened and having-had-given to-giftednesses to-great and to-much it-stood-down upon of-the-ones of-practicings-to of-the-one of-a-Babulônia, and it-en-showed-off to-it to-firsting and to-leading-unto of-all of-the-ones of-wisdom-belongers of-a-Babulônia.
2:48 ÷ Ναβουχοδονοσορ 87 Syr | αρχονται . . . Βαβυλωνιας (2º)] ς´ υπαρχον των στρατηγων των επι των σοφων Βαβυλωνος Syrmg
(495-479 B.C.)
Dan 2:49 καὶ Δανιὴλ ᾐτήσατο παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως, καὶ κατέστησεν ἐπὶ τὰ ἔργα τῆς χώρας Βαβυλῶνος τὸν Σεδράχ, Μεισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ· καὶ Δανιὴλ ἦν ἐν τῇ αὐλῇ τοῦ βασιλέως.
And a-Daniêl it-appealed-unto beside of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, and it-stood-down upon to-the-ones to-works of-the-one of-a-spacedness of-a-Babulôn to-the-one to-a-Sedrach, to-a-Meisach, to-an-Abdenagô; and a-Daniêl it-was in unto-the-one unto-a-channeling of-the-one of-a-ruler-of.
2:49 Μισαχ Bb Μισακ A | subscr ορασις γ´ A
(O) καὶ Δανιὴλ ἠξίωσε τὸν βασιλέα ἵνα κατασταθῶσιν ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων τῆς Βαβυλωνίας Σεδράχ, Μισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ· καὶ Δανιὴλ ἦν ἐν τῇ βασιλικῇ αὐλῇ.
And a-Daniêl it-en-deem-belonged to-the-one to-a-ruler-of so they-might-have-been-stood-down upon of-the-ones of-practicings-to of-the-one of-a-Babulônia a-Sedrach, a-Misach, an-Abdenagô; and a-Daniêl it-was in unto-the-one unto-ruler-belonged-of unto-a-channeling.
(479-478 B.C.)
Dan 3:1 Ἔτους ὀκτωκαιδεκάτου Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐποίησεν εἰκόνα χρυσῆν, ὕψος αὐτῆς πήχεων ἑξήκοντα, εὖρος αὐτῆς πήχεων ἕξ· καὶ ἔστησεν αὐτὴν ἐν πεδίῳ Δεειρὰ ἐν χώρᾳ Βαβυλῶνος.
Of-a-yeareedness of-eight-and-tenth a-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-ruler-of it-did-unto to-a-resemblance to-golden, a-lofteedness of-it of-fores of-sixty, a-wideedness of-it of-fores of-six; and it-stood to-it in unto-a-footinglet of-a-Deeira in unto-a-spacedness of-a-Babulôn.
3:1 superscr ορασις _ A + ορασις. . Γ | om ο βασιλευς A | εξηκοντα (εξηκον sic A)
(O) Ἔτους ὀκτωκαιδεκάτου Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ βασιλεὺς διοικῶν πόλεις καὶ χώρας καὶ πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἀπὸ Ἰνδικῆς ἕως Αἰθιοπίας ἐποίησεν εἰκόνα χρυσῆν, τὸ ὕψος αὐτῆς πηχῶν ἑξήκοντα, καὶ τὸ πλάτος αὐτῆς πηχῶν ἕξ· καὶ ἔστησεν αὐτὴν ἐν πεδίῳ τοῦ περιβόλου χώρας Βαβυλωνίας.
Of-a-yeareedness of-eight-and-tenth a-Nabouchodonosor a-ruler-of housing-through-unto to-cities and to-spacednesses and to-all to-the-ones to-housing-down-unto upon of-the-one of-a-soil off of-an-Indikê unto-if-which of-an-Aithiopia it-did-unto to-a-resemblance to-golden, the-one a-lofteedness of-it of-fores of-sixty, and the-one a-broadeedness of-it of-fores of-six; and it-stood to-it in unto-a-footinglet of-the-one of-a-castee-about of-a-spacedness of-a-Babulônia.
Note: of-a-castee-about : a walled perimeter.
3:1 ÷ ετους οκτωκαιδ. 87 Syr | ÷ διοικων πολεις (÷ 87) και χωρας και παντας τους κατοικ. (superscr ÷ 87) . . . Αιθιοπιας 87 Syr | περιβολου] ΠΕΡΙΒΟΛΟΝ (sic) Syrmg
(478-477 B.C.)
Dan 3:2 καὶ ἀπέστειλεν συναγαγεῖν τοὺς ὑπάτους καὶ τοὺς στρατηγοὺς καὶ τοὺς τοπάρχας, ἡγουμένους καὶ τυράννους καὶ τοὺς ἐπ' ἐξουσιῶν καὶ πάντας τοὺς ἄρχοντας τῶν χωρῶν, ἐλθεῖν εἰς τὰ ἐνκαίνια τῆς εἰκόνος ἧς ἔστησεν.
And it-set-off to-have-had-led-together to-the-ones to-most-over and to-the-ones to-amass-leaders and to-the-ones to-occasion-firsters, to-leading-unto and to-tyrants and to-the-ones upon of-beings-out-unto and to-all to-the-ones to-firsting of-the-ones of-spacednesses, to-have-had-came into to-the-ones to-fresh-belonged-in of-the-one of-a-resemblance of-which it-stood.
3:2 om τους 2°, 3° Γ | τα ενκαινια (εγκ. BbAΓ)] τον αγκαινισμον A* (α I° improb Aa?) | εικονος] + της χρυσης Γ | εστησεν] + Ναβουχοδονοσορ ο βασιλευς AΓ
(O) καὶ Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ βασιλεὺς βασιλέων καὶ κυριεύων τῆς οἰκουμένης ὅλης ἀπέστειλεν ἐπισυναγαγεῖν πάντα τὰ ἔθνη καὶ φυλὰς καὶ γλώσσας, σατράπας, στρατηγούς, τοπάρχας καὶ ὑπάτους, διοικητὰς καὶ τοὺς ἐπ' ἐξουσιῶν κατὰ χώραν, καὶ πάντας τοὺς κατὰ τὴν οἰκουμένην, ἐλθεῖν εἰς τὸν ἐγκαινισμὸν τῆς εἰκόνος τῆς χρυσῆς ἣν ἔστησεν Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ βασιλεύς.
And a-Nabouchodonosor a-ruler-of of-rulers-of and authority-belonging-of of-the-one of-being-housed-unto of-whole it-set-off to-have-had-led-together-upon to-all to-the-ones to-placeedness-belongings-to and to-tribings and to-tongues, to-provincers, to-amass-leaders, to-occasion-firsters and to-most-over, to-housers-through and to-the-ones upon of-beings-out-unto down to-a-spacedness, and to-all to-the-ones down to-the-one to-being-housed-unto, to-have-had-came into to-the-one to-a-freshening-in-to-of of-the-one of-a-resemblance of-the-one of-golden to-which it-stood, a-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-ruler-of.
3:2 ÷ βασιλεων (-λευων Syr) και κυριευων της οικ. (÷ 87) ολης 87 Syr | ÷ παντα τα εθνη και φυλας (φυ ÷ λας 87) και γλωσσας 87 Syr | τοπαρχας . . . την οικουμενην] ς´ και τους αρχοντας τους επι της γνωσεως τους γαβδαρηνους τους θαβδαρηνους τους θαβθαιους και παντας τους εξουσιαζοντας των πολεων Syrmg | επι εξουσιων 87✱ (επεξ. sic 871(vid))
(478-477 B.C.)
Dan 3:3 καὶ συνήχθησαν οἱ τοπάρχαι, ὕπατοι, στρατηγοί, ἡγούμενοι, τύραννοι μεγάλοι οἱ ἐπ' ἐξουσιῶν, καὶ πάντες οἱ ἄρχοντες τῶν χωρῶν, εἰς τὸν ἐνκαινισμὸν τῆς εἰκόνος ἧς ἔστησεν Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ βασιλεύς. καὶ ἱστήκεισαν ἐνώπιον τῆς εἰκόνος.
And they-were-led-together the-ones occasion-firsters, most-over, amass-leaders, leading-unto, tyrants great the-ones upon of-beings-out-unto, and all the-ones firsting of-the-ones of-spacednesses, into to-the-one to-a-freshening-in-to-of of-the-one of-a-resemblance of-which it-stood, a-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-ruler-of. And they-had-come-to-have-had-stood to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-resemblance.
3:3 οι επ. εξ.] om οι Γ | εγκαινισμον BbA | και ιστ.] pr και συνηχθησαν οι τοπαρχαι A | ειστηκεισαν Bab | εικονος 2°] + ης εστησεν Ναβουχοδονοσορ AΓvid
(O) τότε συνήχθησαν ὕπατοι, στρατηγοί, τοπάρχαι, ἡγούμενοι, τύραννοι μεγάλοι ἐπ' ἐξουσιῶν, καὶ πάντες οἱ ἄρχοντες τῶν χωρῶν, τοῦ ἐλθεῖν εἰς τὸν ἐγκαινισμὸν τῆς εἰκόνος ἧς ἔστησε Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ βασιλεύς. καὶ ἔστησαν οἱ προσγεγραμμένοι κατέναντι τῆς εἰκόνος ἧς ἔστησε Ναβουχοδονοσόρ.
To-the-one-which-also they-were-led-together most-over, amass-leaders, occasion-firsters, leading-unto, tyrants great upon of-beings-out-unto, and all the-ones firsting of-the-ones of-spacednesses, of-the-one to-have-had-came into to-the-one to-a-freshening-in-to-of of-the-one of-a-resemblance of-which it-stood, a-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-ruler-of. And they-had-stood, the-ones having-had-come-to-be-scribed-toward, down-in-ever-a-one of-the-one of-a-resemblance of-which it-stood, a-Nabouchodonosor.
3:3 ϗ τοτε συνηχθησαν . . . του ελθειν (om τ. ελθ. Syr) . . . ο βασιλευς 87 Syr | επεξ. sic 87 | ÷ και εστησαν οι προγεγρ. 87 (deest V) ÷ οι προγεγρ. (seq V) και εστησαν Syr | ϗ ης εστησε Ναβ. (2°) 87 Syr
(478-477 B.C.)
Dan 3:4 καὶ ὁ κῆρυξ ἐβόα ἐν ἰσχύι Ὑμῖν λέγεται λαοῖς, φυλαί, γλῶσσαι,
And the-one a-heralder it-was-hollering-unto in unto-a-force-holding, Unto-ye it-be-forthed unto-peoples, Tribings, Tongues,
3:4 λαοις] εθνη λαοι AΓ
(O) καὶ ὁ κῆρυξ ἐκήρυξε τοῖς ὄχλοις Ὑμῖν παραγγέλλεται, ἔθνη καὶ χῶραι, λαοὶ καὶ γλῶσσαι,
And the-one a-heralder it-heraldered unto-the-ones unto-crowds, Unto-ye it-be-leadeeered-beside, Placeedness-belongings-to and Spacednesses, Peoples and Tongues,
(478-477 B.C.)
Dan 3:5 ᾗ ἂν ὥρᾳ ἀκούσητε φωνῆς σάλπιγγος, σύριγγός τε καὶ κιθάρας, σαμβύκης καὶ ψαλτηρίου καὶ συμφωνίας καὶ παντὸς γένους μουσικῶν, πίπτοντες προσκυνεῖτε τῇ εἰκόνι τῇ χρυσῇ ᾗ ἔστησεν Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ βασιλεύς·
unto-which ever unto-an-houredness ye-might-have-heard of-a-sound of-a-trumpet, of-a-pipe also and of-a-harp, of-a-sambukê and of-a-twangerlet and of-all of-a-becomeedness of-muse-belonged-of, falling ye-shall-kiss-toward-unto unto-the-one unto-a-resemblance unto-the-one unto-golden unto-which it-stood, a-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-ruler-of;
Note: of-a-sambukê : Greek word formed from Aramaic, referring to a triangular musical instrument with 4 strings.
3:5 φωνης σαλπιγγος] της φ. της σ. AΓ | και 2°] pr τε AΓ | ψαλτηριου] + και συμφωνιας AΓ | om τη χρυση A* (hab Aa? (mg))
(O) ὅταν ἀκούσητε τῆς φωνῆς τῆς σάλπιγγος, σύριγγος, καὶ κιθάρας, σαμβύκης καὶ ψαλτηρίου, συμφωνίας καὶ παντὸς γένους μουσικῶν, πεσόντες προσκυνήσατε τῇ εἰκόνι τῇ χρυσῇ ἣν ἔστησε Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ βασιλεύς·
which-also-ever ye-might-have-heard of-the-one of-a-sound of-the-one of-a-trumpet, of-a-pipe and of-a-harp, of-a-sambukê and of-a-twangerlet, of-a-sounding-together-unto and of-all of-a-becomeedness of-muse-belonged-of, falling ye-should-have-kissed-toward-unto unto-the-one unto-a-resemblance unto-the-one unto-golden to-which it-stood, a-Nabouchodonosor a-ruler-of;
Note: of-a-sambukê : Greek word formed from Aramaic, referring to a triangular musical instrument with 4 strings.
3:5 ΣΑΜΒΥΚΗΣ Syrmg
(478-477 B.C.)
Dan 3:6 καὶ ὃς ἂν μὴ προσκυνήσῃ, αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ ἐμβληθήσεται εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρὸς τὴν καιομένην.
and which ever lest it-might-have-kissed-toward-unto, unto-the-one-this unto-the-one unto-an-houredness it-shall-be-casted-in into to-the-one to-a-furnace of-the-one of-a-fire to-the-one to-being-burn-belonged.
(O) καὶ πᾶς ὃς ἂν μὴ πεσὼν προσκυνήσῃ, αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ ἐμβαλοῦσιν αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρὸς τὴν καιομένην.
and all which ever lest having-had-fallen it-might-have-kissed-toward-unto, unto-the-one-this unto-the-one unto-an-houredness they-shall-cast-in to-it into to-the-one to-a-furnace of-the-one of-a-fire to-the-one to-being-burn-belonged.
3:6 ϗ αυτη τη ωρα 87 (deest V) Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:7 καὶ ἐγένετο ὅταν ἤκουον οἱ λαοὶ τῆς φωνῆς τῆς σάλπιγγος, σύριγγός τε καὶ κιθάρας σαμβύκης καὶ ψαλτηρίου καὶ παντὸς γένους μουσικῶν, πίπτοντες πάντες οἱ λαοί, φυλαί, γλῶσσαι, προσεκύνουν τῇ εἰκόνι τῇ χρυσῇ ἣν ἔστησεν Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ βασιλεύς.
And it-had-became which-also-ever they-heard, the-ones peoples, of-the-one of-a-sound of-the-one of-a-trumpet, of-a-pipe also and of-a-harp, of-a-sambukê and of-a-twangerlet, and of-all of-a-becomeedness of-muse-belonged-of, falling, all the-ones peoples, tribings, tongues, they-were-kissing-toward-unto unto-the-one unto-a-resemblance unto-the-one unto-golden to-which it-stood, a-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-ruler-of.
Note: of-a-sambukê : Greek word formed from Aramaic, referring to a triangular musical instrument with 4 strings.
3:7 ηκουον] ηκουσαν A | και 3°] pr τε A | ψαλτηριου] + και συμφωνιας A | om φυλαι γλωσσαι A | ην] η A
(O) καὶ ἐν τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ, ὅτε ἤκουσαν πάντα τὰ ἔθνη τῆς φωνῆς τῆς σάλπιγγος, σύριγγός τε καὶ κιθάρας, σαμβύκης τε καὶ ψαλτηρίου καὶ παντὸς ἤχου μουσικῶν, πίπτοντα πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, φυλαί, καὶ γλῶσσαι προσεκύνησαν τῇ εἰκόνι τῇ χρυσῇ ἣν ἔστησε Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ βασιλεύς, κατέναντι τούτου.
And in unto-the-one unto-a-time unto-the-one-thither, which-also they-heard, all the-ones placeedness-belongings-to, of-the-one of-a-sound of-the-one of-a-trumpet, of-a-pipe also and of-a-harp, of-a-sambukê also and of-a-twangerlet and of-all of-a-reverberation of-muse-belonged-of, falling, all the-ones placeedness-belongings-to, tribings, and tongues, they-kissed-toward-unto unto-the-one unto-a-resemblance unto-the-one unto-golden to-which it-stood, a-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-ruler-of, down-in-ever-a-one of-the-one-this.
Note: of-a-sambukê : Greek word formed from Aramaic, referring to a triangular musical instrument with 4 strings.
3:7 ϗ συριγγος τε (om τε Syr) και κιθαρας σαμβυκης (ϗ 87) τε και ψαλτηριου 87 Syr | ϗ ο βασιλευς 87 (deest V) Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:8 τότε προσήλθοσαν ἄνδρες Χαλδαῖοι καὶ διέβαλλον τοὺς Ἰουδαίους
To-the-one-which-also they-hath-had-came-toward, men Chaldee-belonged, and they-were-casting-through to-the-ones to-Iouda-belonged
3:8 προσηλθαν A | διεβαλον Bab
(O) ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ προσελθόντες ἄνδρες Χαλδαῖοι διέβαλον τοὺς Ἰουδαίους·
In unto-the-one-thither unto-the-one unto-a-time having-had-came-toward, men Chaldee-belonged, they-had-casted-through to-the-ones to-Iouda-belonged;
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:9 τῷ βασιλεῖ Ναβουχοδονοσόρ Βασιλεῦ, εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας ζῆθι.
unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of unto-a-Nabouchodonosor, Ruler-of, into to-the-ones to-ages thou-should-life-unto.
3:9 τω βασιλει N.] και υποβαλοντες ειπον N. τω βασ. A
(O) καὶ ὑπολαβόντες εἶπον Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ τῷ βασιλεῖ Κύριε βασιλεῦ, εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα ζῆθι.
and having-had-taken-under they-had-said unto-a-Nabouchodonosor unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of, Authority-belonged Ruler-of, into to-the-one to-an-age thou-should-life-unto.
3:9 ϗ Ναβ. τω βασιλει 87 (deest V) Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:10 σύ, βασιλεῦ, ἔθηκας δόγμα, πάντα ἄνθρωπον ὃς ἂν ἀκούσῃ τῆς φωνῆς τῆς σάλπιγγος, σύριγγός τε καὶ κιθάρας σαμβύκης καὶ ψαλτηρίου καὶ παντὸς γένους μουσικῶν,
Thou, Ruler-of, thou-placed to-a-thinking-to, to-all to-a-mankind which ever it-might-have-heard of-the-one of-a-sound of-the-one of-a-trumpet, of-a-pipe also and of-a-harp, of-a-sambukê and of-a-twangerlet, and of-all of-a-becomeedness of-muse-belonged-of,
Note: of-a-sambukê : Greek word formed from Aramaic, referring to a triangular musical instrument with 4 strings.
3:10 και 2°] pr τε A | ψαλτηριου] + και συμφωνιας A
(O) σύ, βασιλεῦ, προσέταξας καὶ ἔκρινας, ἵνα πᾶς ἄνθρωπος ὃς ἂν ἀκούσῃ τῆς φωνῆς τῆς σάλπιγγος, σύριγγός τε καὶ σαμβύκης, κιθάρας καὶ ψαλτηρίου καὶ παντὸς ἤχου μουσικῶν, πεσὼν προσκυνήσῃ τῇ εἰκόνι τῇ χρυσῇ,
Thou, Ruler-of, thou-arranged-toward and thou-separated, so all a-mankind which ever it-might-have-heard of-the-one of-a-sound of-the-one of-a-trumpet, of-a-pipe also and of-a-sambukê, of-a-harp and of-a-twangerlet and of-all of-a-reverberation of-muse-belonged-of, having-had-fallen it-might-have-kissed-toward-unto unto-the-one unto-a-resemblance unto-the-one unto-golden,
Note: of-a-sambukê : Greek word formed from Aramaic, referring to a triangular musical instrument with 4 strings.
3:10 ϗ συριγγος τε και σαμβυκης (ϗ 87) κιθαρας και ψαλτηριου 87 Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:11 καὶ μὴ πεσὼν προσκυνήσῃ τῇ εἰκόνι τῇ χρυσῇ, ἐμβληθήσεται εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρὸς τὴν καιομένην.
and lest having-had-fallen it-might-have-kissed-toward-unto unto-the-one unto-a-resemblance unto-the-one unto-golden, it-shall-be-casted-in into to-the-one to-a-furnace of-the-one of-a-fire to-the-one to-being-burn-belonged.
(O) καὶ ὃς ἂν μὴ πεσὼν προσκυνήσῃ, ἐμβληθήσεται εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρὸς τὴν καιομένην.
and which ever lest having-had-fallen it-might-have-kissed-toward-unto, it-shall-be-casted-in into to-the-one to-a-furnace of-the-one of-a-fire to-the-one to-being-burn-belonged.
3:11 εις την καμινον] α´ εις μεσον της καμινου Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:12 εἰσὶν ἄνδρες Ἰουδαῖοι, οὓς κατέστησας ἐπὶ τὰ ἔργα τῆς χώρας Βαβυλῶνος, Σεδράχ, Μεισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ, οἳ οὐχ ὑπήκουσαν, βασιλεῦ, τῷ δόγματί σου, τοῖς θεοῖς σου οὐ λατρεύουσιν καὶ τῇ εἰκόνι τῇ χρυσῇ ᾗ ἔστησας οὐ προσκυνοῦσιν.
They-be men Iouda-belonged, to-which thou-stood-down upon to-the-ones to-works of-the-one of-a-spacedness of-a-Babulôn, a-Sedrach, a-Meisach, an-Abdenagô, which not they-heard-under, Ruler-of, unto-the-one unto-a-thinking-to of-thee, unto-the-ones unto-deities(elah) of-thee not they-serve-of and unto-the-one unto-a-resemblance unto-the-one unto-golden unto-which thou-stood not they-kiss-toward-unto.
3:12 Μισαχ Bb Μισακ A : item 13, 14, 16, 19, 20, 23 | οι] οι ανδρες εκεινοι A | τοις θεοις] pr και A
(O) εἰσὶ δέ τινες ἄνδρες Ἰουδαῖοι, οὓς κατέστησας ἐπὶ τῆς χώρας τῆς Βαβυλωνίας, Σεδράχ, Μισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ· οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκεῖνοι οὐκ ἐφοβήθησάν σου τὴν ἐντολὴν καὶ τῷ εἰδώλῳ σου οὐκ ἐλάτρευσαν καὶ τῇ εἰκόνι σου τῇ χρυσῇ ᾗ ἔστησας οὐ προσεκύνησαν.
They-be then-also ones men Iouda-belonged, to-which thou-stood-down upon of-the-one of-a-spacedness of-the-one of-a-Babulônia, a-Sedrach, a-Misach, an-Abdenagô; the-ones mankinds the-ones-thither not they-were-feareed-unto of-thee to-the-one to-a-finishing-in and unto-the-one unto-an-image of-thee not they-served-of and unto-the-one unto-a-resemblance of-thee unto-the-one unto-golden unto-which thou-stood not they-kissed-toward-unto.
3:12 επι της χωρας] α´ επι το εργον τ. χ. ς´ επι την διοικησιν τ. πολεως Syrmg | ουκ εφοβηθησαν σου την εντολην] α´ ουκ εθεντο επι σε βασιλευ γνωμην Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:13 τότε Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ἐν θυμῷ καὶ ὀργῇ εἶπεν ἀγαγεῖν τὸν Σεδράχ, Μισάχ, καὶ Ἀβδεναγώ· καὶ ἤχθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ βασιλέως.
To-the-one-which-also a-Nabouchodonosor in unto-a-passion and unto-a-stressing it-had-said to-have-had-led to-the-one to-a-Sedrach, to-a-Misach, and to-an-Abdenagô; and they-were-led to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-ruler-of.
Note: to-a-Misach in 02 03 : to-a-Meisach is correct, primitive assimilation.
3:13 Αβδεναγω] pr τον A
(O) τότε Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ θυμωθεὶς ὀργῇ προσέταξεν ἀγαγεῖν τὸν Σεδράχ, Μισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ, τότε οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἤχθησαν πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα.
To-the-one-which-also a-Nabouchodonosor having-been-en-passioned unto-a-stressing it-arranged-toward to-have-had-led to-the-one to-a-Sedrach, to-a-Misach, to-an-Abdenagô. To-the-one-which-also the-ones mankinds they-were-led toward to-the-one to-a-ruler-of,
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:14 καὶ ἀπεκρίθη Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς Εἰ ἀληθῶς, Σεδράχ, Μισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ, τοῖς θεοῖς μου οὐ λατρεύετε καὶ τῇ εἰκόνι τῇ χρυσῇ ᾗ ἔστησα οὐ προσκυνεῖτε;
And it-was-separated-off a-Nabouchodonosor and it-had-said unto-them, If unto-un-secludinged-of, Sedrach, Misach, Abdenagô, unto-the-ones unto-deities(elah) of-me not ye-serve-of and unto-the-one unto-a-resemblance unto-the-one unto-golden unto-which I-stood not ye-kiss-toward-unto?
Note: to-a-Misach in 02 03 : to-a-Meisach is correct, primitive assimilation.
3:14 Αβδεναγω] pr και A
(O) οὓς καὶ συνιδὼν Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ βασιλεὺς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς Διὰ τί, Σεδράχ, Μισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ, τοῖς θεοῖς μου οὐ λατρεύετε καὶ τῇ εἰκόνι τῇ χρυσῇ ἣν ἔστησα οὐ προσκυνεῖτε;
to-which and having-had-seen-together, a-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-ruler-of, it-had-said unto-them, Through to-what-one, Sedrach, Misach, Abdenagô, unto-the-ones unto-deities(elah) of-me not ye-serve-of and unto-the-one unto-a-resemblance unto-the-one unto-golden to-which I-stood not ye-kiss-toward-unto?
3:14 και τη εικονι] ς´ ουδε τω ανδριαντι Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:15 νῦν οὖν εἰ ἔχετε ἑτοίμως ἵνα ὡς ἂν ἀκούσητε τῆς φωνῆς τῆς σάλπιγγος, σύριγγός τε καὶ κιθάρας σαμβύκης καὶ ψαλτηρίου καὶ συμφωνίας καὶ παντὸς γένους μουσικῶν, πεσόντες προσκυνήσητε τῇ εἰκόνι ᾗ ἐποίησα· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ προσκυνήσητε, αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ ἐμβληθήσεσθε εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρὸς τὴν καιομένην· καὶ τίς ἐστιν θεὸς ὃς ἐξελεῖται ὑμᾶς ἐκ χειρός μου;
Now accordingly if ye-hold unto-readied-of so as ever ye-might-have-heard of-the-one of-a-sound of-the-one of-a-trumpet, of-a-pipe also and of-a-harp, of-a-sambukê and of-a-twangerlet and of-a-sounding-together-unto and of-all of-a-becomeedness of-muse-belonged-of, having-had-fallen ye-might-have-kissed-toward-unto unto-the-one unto-a-resemblance unto-which I-did-unto? If-ever then-also lest ye-might-have-kissed-toward-unto, unto-the-one-this unto-the-one unto-an-houredness ye-shall-be-casted-in into to-the-one to-a-furnace of-the-one of-a-fire to-the-one to-being-burn-belonged; and what-one it-be a-Deity(Elah) which it-shall-section-out to-ye out of-a-hand of-me?
Note: of-a-sambukê : Greek word formed from Aramaic, referring to a triangular musical instrument with 4 strings.
3:15 ακουητε B?vid | και 2°] pr τε A | om και παντος γενους μουσικων A | προσκυνησητε I°] προσκυνειτε A | εικονι] + τη χρυση A | θεος] pr ο A | χειρος] των χειρων A
(O) καὶ νῦν εἰ μὲν ἔχετε ἑτοίμως ἅμα τῷ ἀκοῦσαι τῆς σάλπιγγος, σύριγγός τε καὶ κιθάρας, σαμβύκης τε καὶ ψαλτηρίου καὶ συμφωνίας καὶ παντὸς ἤχου μουσικῶν, πεσόντες προσκυνῆσαι τῇ εἰκόνι τῇ χρυσῇ ᾗ ἔστησα· εἰ δὲ μή γε, γινώσκετε ὅτι μὴ προσκυνησάντων ὑμῶν αὐθωρὶ ἐμβληθήσεσθε εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρὸς τὴν καιομένην· καὶ ποῖος θεὸς ἐξελεῖται ὑμᾶς ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν μου;
And now if indeed ye-hold unto-readied-of along unto-the-one to-have-heard of-the-one of-a-trumpet, of-a-pipe also and of-a-harp, of-a-sambukê also and of-a-twangerlet and of-a-sounding-together-unto and of-all of-a-reverberation of-muse-belonged-of, having-had-fallen to-have-kissed-toward-unto unto-the-one unto-a-resemblance unto-the-one unto-golden unto-which I-stood? If then-also lest too, ye-should-acquaint to-which-a-one lest of-having-kissed-toward-unto of-ye unto-self-houred ye-shall-be-casted-in into to-the-one to-a-furnace of-the-one of-a-fire to-the-one to-being-burn-belonged; and which-belonged a-Deity(Elah) it-shall-section-out to-ye out of-the-ones of-hands of-me?
Note: of-a-sambukê : Greek word formed from Aramaic, referring to a triangular musical instrument with 4 strings.
3:15 ϗ συριγγος τε και . . . συμφωνιας 87 Syr | ÷ (om 87) τη χρυση 87vid Syr | om γε Syr | εμβηθησεσθε 87
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:16 καὶ ἀπεκρίθησαν Σεδράχ, Μεισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ, λέγοντες τῷ βασιλεῖ Ναβουχοδονοσόρ Οὐ χρείαν ἔχομεν ἡμεῖς περὶ τοῦ ῥήματος τούτου ἀποκριθῆναί σοι.
And they-were-separated-off a-Sedrach, a-Meisach, an-Abdenagô, forthing unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of unto-a-Nabouchodonosor, Not to-an-affording-of we-hold we about of-the-one of-an-uttering-to of-the-one-this to-have-been-separated-off unto-thee.
(O) ἀποκριθέντες δὲ Σεδράχ, Μισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ, εἶπαν τῷ βασιλεῖ Ναβουχοδονοσόρ Βασιλεῦ, οὐ χρείαν ἔχομεν ἡμεῖς ἐπὶ τῇ ἐπιταγῇ ταύτῃ ἀποκριθῆναί σοι.
Having-been-separated-off then-also a-Sedrach, a-Misach, an-Abdenagô, they-said unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of unto-a-Nabouchodonosor, Ruler-of, not to-an-affording-of we-hold we upon unto-the-one unto-an-arrangement-upon unto-the-one-this to-have-been-separated-off unto-thee.
3:16 ΕΠΙΤΑΓΗ Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:17 ἔστιν γὰρ θεός, ᾧ ἡμεῖς λατρεύομεν, δυνατὸς ἐξελέσθαι ἡμᾶς ἐκ τῆς καμίνου τοῦ πυρὸς τῆς καιομένης· καὶ ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν σου, βασιλεῦ, ῥύσεται ἡμᾶς.
It-be too-thus a-Deity(Elah), unto-which we we-serve-of, able to-have-had-sectioned-out to-us out of-the-one of-a-furnace of-the-one of-a-fire of-the-one of-being-burn-belonged; and out of-the-ones of-hands of-thee, Ruler-of, it-shall-tract to-us.
3:17 θεος] + ημων εν ουρανοις Bab mg ο θς̅ ημων εν ουν̅ο̅ι̅ς̅ A | των χειρων] της χειρος A
(O) ἔστι γὰρ θεὸς ἐν οὐρανοῖς εἷς κύριος ἡμῶν, ὃν φοβούμεθα, ὅς ἐστι δυνατὸς ἐξελέσθαι ἡμᾶς ἐκ τῆς καμίνου τοῦ πυρὸς τῆς καιομένης· καὶ ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν σου, βασιλεῦ, ἐξελεῖται ἡμᾶς.
It-be too-thus a-Deity(Elah) in unto-skies one Authority-belonged of-us, to-which we-fearee-unto, which it-be able to-have-had-sectioned-out to-us out of-the-one of-a-furnace of-the-one of-a-fire of-the-one of-being-burn-belonged; and out of-the-ones of-hands of-thee, Ruler-of, it-shall-section-out to-us.
3:17 ÷ εν ουρανοις εις κυριος 87 Syr | ϗ της καιομενης 87 Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:18 καὶ ἐὰν μή, γνωστὸν ἔστω σοι, βασιλεῦ, ὅτι τοῖς θεοῖς σου οὐ λατρεύομεν καὶ τῇ εἰκόνι ᾗ ἔστησας, οὐ προσκυνοῦμεν.
And if-ever lest, acquaintabled it-should-be unto-thee, Ruler-of, to-which-a-one unto-the-ones unto-deities(elah) of-thee not we-serve-of and unto-the-one unto-a-resemblance unto-which thou-stood, not we-kiss-toward-unto.
3:18 εικονι] + τη χρυση A
(O) καὶ τότε φανερόν σοι ἔσται, βασιλεῦ, ὅτι οὔτε τῷ εἰδώλῳ σου λατρεύομεν οὔτε τῇ εἰκόνι σου τῇ χρυσῇ, ἣν ἔστησας, οὐ προσκυνοῦμεν.
And to-the-one-which-also en-manifested unto-thee it-shall-be, Ruler-of, to-which-a-one not-also unto-the-one unto-an-image of-thee we-serve-of not-also unto-the-one unto-a-resemblance of-thee unto-the-one unto-golden, to-which thou-stood, not we-kiss-toward-unto.
3:18 ϗ βασιλευ 87 Syr | om ου Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:19 τότε Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ἐπλήσθη θυμοῦ, καὶ ἡ ὄψις τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ ἠλλοιώθη ἐπὶ Σεδράχ, Μεισάχ, καὶ Ἀβδεναγώ, καὶ εἶπεν ἐκκαῦσαι τὴν κάμινον ἑπταπλασίως, ἕως οὗ εἰς τέλος ἐκκαῇ.
To-the-one-which-also a-Nabouchodonosor it-was-repleted of-a-passion, and the-one a-beholding of-the-one of-looked-toward of-it it-was-en-othered upon to-a-Sedrach, to-a-Meisach, to-an-Abdenagô, and it-had-said to-have-burn-belonged-out to-the-one to-a-furnace unto-seven-fold-belonged, unto-if-which of-which into to-a-finisheedness it-might-have-had-been-burn-belonged-out.
3:19 Ναβουχοδονοσορ] + ο βασιλευς | om και 2° A | om ου A
(O) τότε Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ἐπλήσθη θυμοῦ, καὶ ἡ μορφὴ τοῦ προσώπου αὐτοῦ ἠλλοιώθη ἐπὶ Σεδράχ, Μισάχ, καὶ Ἀβδεναγώ, καὶ ἐπέταξε καῆναι τὴν κάμινον ἑπταπλασίως παρ' ὃ ἔδει αὐτὴν καῆναι,
To-the-one-which-also a-Nabouchodonosor it-was-repleted of-a-passion, and the-one a-form of-the-one of-looked-toward of-it it-was-en-othered upon to-a-Sedrach, to-a-Misach, to-an-Abdenagô, and it-arranged-upon to-have-had-been-burn-belonged to-the-one to-a-furnace unto-seven-fold-belonged beside to-which it-bindeth to-it to-have-had-been-burn-belonged,
3:19 ϗ Σεδρ. Μισ. και Αβδ. Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:20 καὶ ἄνδρας ἰσχυροὺς ἰσχύι εἶπεν πεδήσαντας τὸν Σεδράχ, Μεισάχ, καὶ Ἀβδεναγώ, ἐμβαλεῖν εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρὸς τὴν καιομένην.
And to-men to-force-held unto-a-force-holding it-had-said to-having-footed-unto to-the-one to-a-Sedrach, to-a-Meisach, and to-an-Abdenagô, to-have-had-casted-in into to-the-one to-a-furnace of-the-one of-a-fire to-the-one to-being-burn-belonged.
(O) καὶ ἄνδρας ἰσχυροτάτους τῶν ἐν τῇ δυνάμει ἐπέταξε συνποδίσαντας τὸν Σεδράχ, Μισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ, ἐμβαλεῖν εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρὸς τὴν καιομένην.
and to-men to-most-force-held of-the-ones in unto-the-one unto-an-ability it-arranged-upon to-having-footed-together-to to-the-one to-a-Sedrach, to-a-Misach, to-an-Abdenagô, to-have-had-casted-in into to-the-one to-a-furnace of-the-one of-a-fire to-the-one to-being-burn-belonged.
3:20 ϗ τον Σεδρ. Μισ. ( + και Syr) Αβδ. 87 Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:21 τότε οἱ ἄνδρες ἐκεῖνοι ἐπεδήθησαν σὺν τοῖς σαραβάροις αὐτῶν καὶ τιάραις καὶ περικνημῖσι, καὶ ἐβλήθησαν εἰς τὸ μέσον τῆς καμίνου τοῦ πυρὸς τῆς καιομένης,
To-the-one-which-also the-ones men the-ones-thither they-were-footed-unto together unto-the-ones unto-sarabaros' of-them and unto-tiaras and unto-shinnings-about, and they-were-casted into to-the-one to-middle of-the-one of-a-furnace of-the-one of-a-fire of-the-one of-being-burn-belonged,
Note: unto-sarabaros' : Greek word transliterated from Aramaic, referring to a kind of loose trouser. a-sinking-in-to
3:21 τοτε] οτε A | περικνημισι (-μεσι B -μισι B?)] + και ενδυμασιν αυτων A | εμβληθησαν (sic) A | το μεσον] om το A
(O) τότε οἱ ἄνδρες ἐκεῖνοι συνεποδίσθησαν, ἔχοντες τὰ ὑποδήματα αὐτῶν καὶ τὰς τιάρας αὐτῶν ἐπὶ τῶν κεφαλῶν αὐτῶν, σὺν τῷ ἱματισμῷ αὐτῶν, καὶ ἐβλήθησαν εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρὸς τὴν καιομένην.
To-the-one-which-also the-ones men the-ones-thither they-were-footed-together-to, holding to-the-ones to-bindings-under-to of-them and to-the-one to-tiaras of-them upon of-the-ones of-heads of-them, together unto-the-one unto-an-appareling-of of-them, and they-were-casted into to-the-one to-a-furnace of-the-one of-a-fire to-the-one to-being-burn-belonged.
3:21 εχοντες τα υποδηματα αυτων] ς´ εν τοις υποδημασιν (? ταις αναξυρισιν cf Hieron) αυτων Syrmg | ϗ του πυρος την καιομενην 87vid (deest V) του πυρ. ϗ την καιομ. Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:22 ἐπεὶ τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦ βασιλέως ὑπερίσχυεν· καὶ ἡ κάμινος ἐξεκαύθη ἐκ περισσοῦ.
upon-if the-one an-uttering-to of-the-one of-a-ruler-of it-was-force-holding-over; and the-one a-furnace it-was-burn-belonged-out out of-abouted.
3:22 υπερισχυσεν A | περισσου] + και τους ανδρας εκεινους τους βαλλοντας Σεδρακ Μισακ Αβδεναγω απεκτεινεν η φλοξ του πυρος A
(O) ἐπειδὴ τὸ πρόσταγμα τοῦ βασιλέως ἤπειγεν καὶ ἡ κάμινος ἐξεκαύθη ὑπὲρ τὸ πρότερον ἑπταπλασίως, καὶ οἱ ἄνδρες οἱ προχειρισθέντες συνποδίσαντες αὐτοὺς καὶ προσαγαγόντες τῇ καμίνῳ ἐνεβάλοσαν εἰς αὐτήν.
Upon-if-then the-one an-arranging-toward-to of-the-one of-a-ruler-of it-was-if-too-uponing; and the-one a-furnace it-was-burn-belonged-out over to-the-one to-more-before unto-seven-fold-belonged, and the-ones men the-ones having-been-afforded-before-to having-footed-together-to to-them and having-had-led-toward unto-the-one unto-a-furnace they-hath-had-casted-in into to-it.
3:22 επειδη . . . ηπειδεν] ς´ δια το ρημα του βασ. απαρακλητον ειναι Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:23 καὶ οἱ τρεῖς οὗτοι, Σεδράχ, Μεισάχ, καὶ Ἀβδεναγώ, ἔπεσον εἰς μέσον τῆς καμίνου τῆς καιομένης πεπεδημένοι.
And the-ones three the-ones-these, a-Sedrach, a-Meisach, and an-Abdenagô, they-had-fallen into to-middle of-the-one of-a-furnace of-the-one of-being-burn-belonged having-had-come-to-be-footed-unto.
3:23 om και 2° A | καμινου] + του πυρος A
(O) τοὺς μὲν οὖν ἄνδρας τοὺς συνποδίσαντας τοὺς περὶ τὸν Ἀζαρίαν ἐξελθοῦσα ἡ φλὸξ ἐκ τῆς καμίνου ἐνεπύρισε καὶ ἀπέκτεινεν, αὐτοὶ δὲ συνετηρήθησαν.
To-the-ones indeed accordingly to-men to-the-ones to-having-footed-together-to to-the-ones about to-the-one to-an-Azarias having-had-came-out, the-one a-blaze, out of-the-one of-a-furnace it-fired-in-to and it-killed-off, them then-also they-were-kept-together-unto.
3:23 om εν Syr | εξελθουσα] λ sup ras 87
(Dan 3:24) in Dan 3:91 HS.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:24 Καὶ περιεπάτουν ἐν μέσῳ τῆς φλογὸς ὑμνοῦντες τὸν θεὸν καὶ εὐλογοῦντες τὸν κύριον.
And they-were-treading-about-unto in unto-middle of-the-one of-a-blaze hymning-unto to-the-one to-a-Deity and goodly-fortheeing-unto to-the-one to-Authority-belonged.
(Dan 3:24) in Dan 3:91 HS.
(O) Οὕτως οὖν προσηύξατο Ἁνανίας καὶ Ἀζαρίας καὶ Μισαήλ, καὶ ὕμνησαν τῷ κυρίῳ, ὅτε αὐτοὺς ὁ βασιλεὺς προσέταξεν ἐμβληθῆναι εἰς τὴν κάμινον.
Unto-the-one-this accordingly it-goodly-held-toward, a-Hananias and an-Azarias and a-Misaêl, and they-hymned-unto unto-the-one unto-Authority-belonged(Yahveh), which-also to-them the-one a-ruler-of it-arranged-toward to-have-been-casted-in into to-the-one to-a-furnace.
3:24 προσηυξαντο Syr | εμβληθηναι] εμβαλειν Syrvid 3:26 αινετος Syr
(Dan 3:25) in Dan 3:92 HS.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:25 καὶ συνστὰς Ἀζαρίας προσηύξατο οὕτως καὶ ἀνοίξας τὸ στόμα ἑαυτοῦ ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ πυρὸς εἶπεν
And having-had-stood-together, an-Azarais, it-goodly-held-toward unto-the-one-this and having-opened-up to-the-one to-a-becutteeing-to of-self in unto-middle of-the-one of-a-fire it-had-said,
3:25 συστας B?A | εαυτου] αυτου BabA
(Dan 3:25) in Dan 3:92 HS.
(O) στὰς δὲ Ἀζαρίας προσηύξατο οὕτως, καὶ ἀνοίξας τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ ἐξωμολογεῖτο τῷ κυρίῳ ἅμα τοῖς συνεταίροις αὐτοῦ ἐν μέσῳ τῷ πυρί, ὑποκαιομένης τῆς καμίνου ὑπὸ τῶν Χαλδαίων σφόδρα. καὶ εἶπαν
Having-had-stood then-also, an-Azarias, it-goodly-held-toward unto-the-one-this, and having-opened-up to-the-one to-a-becutteeing-to of-it it-was-along-fortheeing-out-unto unto-the-one unto-Authority-belonged along unto-the-ones unto-comrades-together of-it in unto-middle unto-the-one unto-a-fire, of-being-burn-belonged-under of-the-one of-a-furnace under of-the-ones of-Chaldee-belonged to-vehemented and they-said,
(Dan 3:26) in Dan 3:93 HS.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:26 Εὐλογητὸς εἶ, Κύριε ὁ θεὸς τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, καὶ αἰνετός, καὶ δεδοξασμένον τὸ ὄνομά σου εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Goodly-fortheeable thou-be, Authority-belonged the-one a-Deity of-the-ones of-fathers of-us, and laudable, and having-had-come-to-be-reckoned-to the-one a-naming-to of-thee into to-the-ones to-ages;
3:26 αινετον A
(Dan 3:26) in Dan 3:93 HS.
(O) Εὐλογητὸς εἶ, Κύριε ὁ θεὸς τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, καὶ αἰνετὸν καὶ δεδοξασμένον τὸ ὄνομά σου εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας,
Goodly-fortheeable thou-be, Authority-belonged the-one a-Deity of-the-ones of-fathers of-us, and laudable and having-had-come-to-be-reckoned-to the-one a-naming-to of-thee into to-the-ones to-ages,
(Dan 3:27) in Dan 3:94 HS.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:27 ὅτι δίκαιος εἶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν οἷς ἐποίησας, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἔργα σου ἀληθινά, καὶ εὐθεῖαι αἱ ὁδοί σου, καὶ πᾶσαι αἱ κρίσεις σου ἀλήθεια.
to-which-a-one course-belonged thou-be upon unto-all unto-which thou-did-unto, and all the-ones works of-thee un-secluded-belonged-to, and straight the-ones ways of-thee, and all the-ones separatings of-thee an-un-secluding-of.
3:27 εποιησας] + ημιν A | κρισις B* (κρεισ.) A | αληθεια] -θια B* (-θεια Bab)
(Dan 3:27) in Dan 3:94 HS.
(O) ὅτι δίκαιος εἶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν οἷς ἐποίησας ἡμῖν, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἔργα σου ἀληθινὰ καὶ αἱ ὁδοί σου εὐθεῖαι καὶ πᾶσαι αἱ κρίσεις σου ἀληθιναί.
to-which-a-one course-belonged thou-be upon unto-all unto-which thou-did-unto unto-us, and all the-ones works of-thee un-secluded-belonged-to and the-ones ways of-thee straight and all the-ones separatings of-thee un-secluded-belonged-to.
3:27 αληθιναι] αληθεια Syrtxt (-θιναι Syrmg)
(Dan 3:28) in Dan 3:95 HS.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:28 καὶ κρίματα ἀληθείας ἐποίησας κατὰ πάντα ἃ ἐπήγαγες ἡμῖν καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν πόλιν τὴν ἁγίαν τὴν τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν Ἰερουσαλήμ· ὅτι ἐν ἀληθείᾳ καὶ κρίσει ἐπήγαγες πάντα ταῦτα διὰ τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν.
And to-separatings-to of-an-un-secluding-of thou-did-unto down to-all to-which thou-had-led-upon unto-us and upon to-the-one to-a-city to-the-one to-hallow-belonged to-the-one of-the-ones of-fathers of-us to-an-Ierousalêm; to-which-a-one in unto-an-un-secluding-of and unto-a-separating thou-had-led-upon to-all to-the-ones-these through to-the-ones to-un-adjustings-along-unto of-us;
3:28 αγιαν] + σου A | ταυτα παντα A
(Dan 3:28) in Dan 3:95 HS.
(O) καὶ κρίματα ἀληθείας ἐποίησας κατὰ πάντα ἃ ἐπήγαγες ἡμῖν καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν πόλιν σου τὴν ἁγίαν τὴν τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν Ἰερουσαλήμ· διότι ἐν ἀληθείᾳ καὶ κρίσει ἐποίησας πάντα ταῦτα διὰ τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν.
And to-separatings-to of-an-un-secluding-of thou-did-unto down to-all to-which thou-had-led-upon unto-us and upon to-the-one to-a-city of-thee to-the-one to-hallow-belonged to-the-one of-the-ones of-fathers of-us to-an-Ierousalêm; through-to-which-a-one in unto-an-un-secluding-of and unto-a-separating thou-did-unto to-all to-the-ones-these through to-the-ones to-un-adjustings-along-unto of-us;
(Dan 3:29) in Dan 3:96 HS.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:29 ὅτι ἡμάρτομεν καὶ ἠνομήσαμεν ἀποστῆναι ἀπὸ σοῦ, καὶ ἐξημάρτομεν ἐν πᾶσιν·
to-which-a-one we-had-un-adjusted-along and we-un-parceleed-unto to-have-had-stood-off off of-thee, and we-had-un-adjusted-along-out in unto-all;
3:29 αποστηναι] αποσταντες A
(Dan 3:29) in Dan 3:96 HS.
(O) ὅτι ἡμάρτομεν ἐν πᾶσι καὶ ἠνομήσαμεν ἀποστῆναι ἀπὸ σοῦ καὶ ἐξημάρτομεν ἐν πᾶσι·
to-which-a-one we-had-un-adjusted-along in unto-all and we-un-parceleed-unto to-have-had-stood-off off of-thee and we-had-un-adjusted-along-out in unto-all;
(Dan 3:30) in Dan 3:97 HS.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:30 καὶ τῶν ἐντολῶν σου οὐκ ἠκούσαμεν (30) οὐδὲ συνετηρήσαμεν, οὐδὲ ἐποιήσαμεν καθὼς ἐνετείλω ἡμῖν ἵνα εὖ ἡμῖν γένηται.
and of-the-ones of-finishings-in of-thee not we-heard not-then-also we-kept-together-unto, not-then-also we-did-unto down-as thou-finished-in unto-us so goodly unto-us it-might-have-had-became.
3:30 ημιν I°] υμιν A
(Dan 3:30) in Dan 3:97 HS.
(O) καὶ τῶν ἐντολῶν τοῦ νόμου σου οὐχ ὑπηκούσαμεν (30) οὐδὲ συνετηρήσαμεν, οὐδὲ ἐποιήσαμεν καθὼς ἐνετείλω ἡμῖν ἵνα εὖ ἡμῖν γένηται.
and of-the-ones of-finishings-in of-the-one of-a-parcelee of-thee not we-heard-under not-then-also we-kept-together-unto, not-then-also we-did-unto down-as thou-finished-in unto-us so goodly unto-us it-might-have-had-became.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:31 καὶ πάντα ὅσα ἡμῖν ἐπήγαγες καὶ πάντα ὅσα ἐποίησας ἡμῖν, ἐν ἀληθινῇ κρίσει ἐποίησας.
And to-all to-which-a-which unto-us thou-had-led-upon and to-all to-which-a-which thou-did-unto unto-us, in unto-un-secluded-belonged-to unto-a-separating thou-did-unto.
3:31 om και παντα οσα υμιν επηγαγεσ A
(O) καὶ νῦν πάντα ὅσα ἡμῖν ἐπήγαγες καὶ πάντα ὅσα ἐποίησας ἡμῖν, ἐν ἀληθινῇ κρίσει ἐποίησας,
And now to-all to-which-a-which unto-us thou-had-led-upon and to-all to-which-a-which thou-did-unto unto-us, in unto-un-secluded-belonged-to unto-a-separating thou-did-unto,
3:31 post και 2° ras aliq 87?
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:32 καὶ παρέδωκας ἡμᾶς εἰς χεῖρας ἐχθρῶν ἀνόμων καὶ ἐχθίστων ἀποστατῶν, καὶ βασιλεῖ ἀδίκῳ καὶ πονηροτάτῳ παρὰ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν.
And thou-gave-beside to-us into to-hands of-en-enmitied of-un-parceleed and of-most-enmitied of-standers-off, and unto-a-ruler-of unto-un-coursed and unto-most-en-necessitated beside to-all to-the-one to-a-soil.
3:32 χειρας] χειρα Bb? | om και 2° A
(O) καὶ παρέδωκας ἡμᾶς εἰς χεῖρας ἐχθρῶν ἡμῶν ἀνόμων καὶ ἐχθίστων ἀποστατῶν, καὶ βασιλεῖ ἀδίκῳ καὶ πονηροτάτῳ παρὰ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν.
and thou-gave-beside to-us into to-hands of-en-enmitied of-us of-un-parceleed and of-most-enmitied of-standers-off, and unto-a-ruler-of unto-un-coursed and unto-most-en-necessitated beside to-all to-the-one to-a-soil.
3:32 και 4°] sup ras 87?
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:33 καὶ νῦν οὐκ ἔστιν ἡμῖν ἀνοῖξαι τὸ στόμα ἡμῶν· αἰσχύνη καὶ ὄνειδος ἐγενήθη τοῖς δούλοις σου καὶ τοῖς σεβομένοις σε.
And now not it-be unto-us to-have-opened-up to-the-one to-a-becutteeing-to of-us; a-shamening and a-name-sighteedness it-was-became unto-the-ones unto-bondees of-thee and unto-the-ones unto-revering to-thee.
3:33 om ημων A?
(O) καὶ νῦν οὐκ ἔστιν ἡμῖν ἀνοῖξαι τὸ στόμα· αἰσχύνη καὶ ὄνειδος ἐγενήθη τῶν δούλων σου καὶ τῶν σεβομένων σε.
And now not it-be unto-us to-have-opened-up to-the-one to-a-becutteeing-to; a-shamening and a-name-sighteedness it-was-became of-the-ones of-bondees of-thee and of-the-ones of-revering to-thee.
3:33 τοις δουλοις σου κ. τοις σεβομενοις σε Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:34 μὴ δὴ παραδοῖς ἡμᾶς εἰς τέλος διὰ τὸ ὄνομά σου, καὶ μὴ διασκεδάσῃς τὴν διαθήκην σου,
Lest then thou-may-have-had-given-beside to-us into to-a-finisheedness through to-the-one to-a-naming-to of-thee, and lest thou-might-have-through-bespersed-to to-the-one to-a-placement-through of-thee,
3:34 παραδως A
(O) μὴ παραδῷς ἡμᾶς εἰς τέλος διὰ τὸ ὄνομά σου, καὶ μὴ διασκεδάσῃς σου τὴν διαθήκην.
Lest thou-might-have-had-given-beside to-us into to-a-finisheedness through to-the-one to-a-naming-to of-thee, and lest thou-might-have-through-bespersed-to of-thee to-the-one to-a-placement-through.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:35 καὶ μὴ ἀποστήσῃς τὸ ἔλεός σου ἀφ' ἡμῶν, δι' Ἀβραὰμ τὸν ἠγαπημένον ὑπὸ σοῦ καὶ διὰ Ἰσαὰκ τὸν δοῦλόν σου καὶ Ἰσραὴλ τὸν ἅγιόν σου,
and lest thou-might-have-stood-off to-the-one to-a-besectionateedness of-thee off of-us, through to-an-Abraam to-the-one to-being-excessed-off-unto under of-thee and through to-an-Isaac to-the-one to-a-bondee of-thee and to-an-Israêl to-the-one to-hallow-belonged of-thee,
Note: to-a-besectionateedness : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc.
3:35 δι] δια A
(O) καὶ μὴ ἀποστήσῃς τὸ ἔλεός σου ἀφ' ἡμῶν, διὰ Ἀβραὰμ τὸν ἠγαπημένον ὑπὸ σοῦ καὶ διὰ Ἰσαὰκ τὸν δοῦλόν σου καὶ Ἰσραὴλ τὸν ἅγιόν σου·
And lest thou-might-have-stood-off to-the-one to-a-besectionateedness of-thee off of-us, through to-an-Abraam to-the-one to-being-excessed-off-unto under of-thee and through to-an-Isaac to-the-one to-a-bondee of-thee and to-an-Israêl to-the-one to-hallow-belonged of-thee;
Note: to-a-besectionateedness : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc.
3:35 υπο] απο 87✱ (corr υπο) | om δια 2° Syrtxt (hab Syrmg) | αγιον] λαον Syrtxt (αγιον Syrmg)
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:36 οἷς ἐλάλησας πληθῦναι τὸ σπέρμα αὐτῶν ὡς τὰ ἄστρα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ ὡς τὴν ἄμμον τὴν παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τῆς θαλάσσης.
unto-which thou-spoke-unto to-have-repletened to-the-one to-a-whorling-to of-them as to-the-ones to-en-starrings of-the-one of-a-sky and as to-the-one to-a-sand to-the-one beside to-the-one to-a-rimmeedness of-the-one of-a-flourisheredness;
3:36 ελαλησας] + προς αυτους A
(O) ὡς ἐλάλησας πρὸς αὐτοὺς λέγων πολυπληθῦναι τὸ σπέρμα αὐτῶν ὡς τὰ ἄστρα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τῷ πλήθει καὶ ὡς τὴν ἄμμον τὴν παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τῆς θαλάσσης.
as thou-spoke-unto toward to-them forthing to-have-much-repletened to-the-one to-a-whorling-to of-them as to-the-ones to-en-starrings of-the-one of-a-sky unto-the-one unto-a-repleteedness and as to-the-one to-a-sand to-the-one beside to-the-one to-a-rimmeedness of-the-one of-a-flourisheredness;
3:36 πολυπληθυναι] πολυ πλ. 87 Θ´ ϗ πολυ V pl. Syr | Θ´ ϗ τω πληθει Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:37 ὅτι, δέσποτα, ἐσμικρύνθημεν παρὰ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, καί ἐσμεν ταπεινοὶ ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ σήμερον διὰ τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν.
to-which-a-one, Bind-doer, we-were-en-smalled beside to-all to-the-ones to-placeedness-belongings-to, and we-be lowed-belonged-to in unto-all unto-the-one unto-a-soil this-day through to-the-ones to-un-adjustings-along-unto of-us.
(O) ὅτι, δέσποτα, ἐσμικρύνθημεν παρὰ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, καί ἐσμεν ταπεινοὶ ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ σήμερον διὰ τὰς ἁμαρτίας ἡμῶν·
to-which-a-one, Bind-doer, we-were-en-smalled beside to-all to-the-ones to-placeedness-belongings-to, and we-be lowed-belonged-to in unto-all unto-the-one unto-a-soil this-day through to-the-ones to-un-adjustings-along-unto of-us;
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:38 καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ ἄρχων καὶ προφήτης καὶ ἡγούμενος, οὐδὲ ὁλοκαύτωσις οὐδὲ θυσία οὐδὲ προσφορὰ οὐδὲ θυμίαμα, οὐ τόπος τοῦ καρπῶσαι ἐναντίον σου καὶ εὑρεῖν ἔλεος.
And not it-be in unto-the-one unto-a-time unto-the-one-this firsting and a-declarer-before and leading-unto, not-then-also a-whole-en-burning not-then-also a-surging-unto not-then-also a-bearedness-toward not-then-also an-incensing-to, not an-occasion of-the-one to-have-en-fruited to-ever-a-oned-in of-thee and to-have-had-found to-a-besectionateedness;
Note: to-a-besectionateedness : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc.
3:38 om ουδε προσφορα ουδε θυμιαμα A* (hab ουδε προσφορ᾿ (sic) ουδε θ. Aa?(mg)) | ου] ουδε Bab | εναντιον] ενωπιον A
(O) καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ ἄρχων καὶ προφήτης οὐδὲ ἡγούμενος, οὐδὲ ὁλοκαύτωσις οὐδὲ θυσία οὐδὲ προσφορὰ οὐδὲ θυμίαμα, οὐδὲ τόπος τοῦ καρπῶσαι ἐνώπιόν σου καὶ εὑρεῖν ἔλεος.
and not it-be in unto-the-one unto-a-time unto-the-one-this firsting and a-declarer-before not-then-also leading-unto, not-then-also a-whole-en-burning not-then-also a-surging-unto not-then-also a-bearedness-toward not-then-also an-incensing-to, not-then-also an-occasion of-the-one to-have-en-fruited to-in-look-belonged of-thee and to-have-had-found to-a-besectionateedness;
Note: to-a-besectionateedness : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:39 ἀλλ' ἐν ψυχῇ συντετριμμένῃ καὶ πνεύματι ταπεινώσεως προσδεχθείημεν·
other in unto-a-breathing unto-having-had-come-to-be-rubbed-together and unto-a-currenting-to of-an-en-lowed-belonging-to we-may-have-been-received-toward;
(O) ἀλλ' ἐν ψυχῇ συντετριμμένῃ καὶ πνεύματι τεταπεινωμένῳ προσδεχθείημεν·
other in unto-a-breathing unto-having-had-come-to-be-rubbed-together and unto-a-currenting-to unto-having-had-come-to-be-en-low-belonged-to we-may-have-been-received-toward;
3:39 τεταπεινωμενω] τ 2° sup ras 87 Θ´ ταπεινωσεως Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:40 ὡς ἐν ὁλοκαυτώσει κριῶν καὶ ταύρων καὶ ἐν μυριάσιν ἀρνῶν πιόνων, (Dan 3:40) οὕτως γενέσθω θυσία ἡμῶν ἐνώπιόν σου σήμερον καὶ ἐκτέλεσαι ὄπισθέν σου, ὅτι οὐκ ἔσται αἰσχύνη τοῖς πεποιθόσιν ἐπὶ σοί.
as in unto-a-whole-en-burning of-rams and of-bulls and in unto-myriads of-lamblings of-plumpinged-of, (Dan 3:40) unto-the-one-this it-should-have-had-became a-surging-unto of-us to-in-look-belonged of-thee this-day and it-may-have-finished-out-unto aback-from of-thee, to-which-a-one not it-shall-be a-shamening unto-the-ones unto-having-hath-had-come-to-conduce upon unto-thee.
3:40 ολοκαυτωσει] ολοκαυτωμασιν A | και 2°] + ως AΓ | θυσια] pr η Γ | εσται] εστιν A
(O) ὡς ἐν ὁλοκαυτώμασι κριῶν καὶ ταύρων καὶ ὡς ἐν μυριάσιν ἀρνῶν πιόνων, (Dan 3:40) οὕτω γενέσθω ἡμῶν ἡ θυσία ἐνώπιόν σου σήμερον καὶ ἐξιλάσαι ὄπισθέν σου, ὅτι οὐκ ἔστιν αἰσχύνη τοῖς πεποιθόσιν ἐπὶ σοί, καὶ τελειώσαι ὄπισθέν σου.
as in unto-whole-en-burnings-to of-rams and of-bulls and as in unto-myriads of-lamblings of-plumpinged-of, (Dan 3:40) of-which-unto-the-one it-should-have-had-became of-us the-one a-surging-unto to-in-look-belonged of-thee this-day and it-may-have-sectionated-out aback-from of-thee, to-which-a-one not it-be a-shamening unto-the-ones unto-having-hath-had-come-to-conduce upon unto-thee, and it-may-have-finish-belonged aback-from of-thee.
3:40 και εξιλασαι] Θ´ και εκτελεσαι Syrmg | ÷ (/.. 87) και τελειωσαι οπισθην σου 87 Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:41 καὶ νῦν ἐξακολουθοῦμεν ἐν ὅλῃ καρδίᾳ, καὶ φοβούμεθά σε καὶ ζητοῦμεν τὸ πρόσωπόν σου.
And now we-path-along-out-unto in unto-whole unto-a-heart, and we-fearee-unto to-thee and we-seek-unto to-the-one to-looked-toward of-thee.
(O) καὶ νῦν ἐξακολουθοῦμεν ἐν ὅλῃ καρδίᾳ ἡμῶν καὶ φοβούμεθά σε καὶ ζητοῦμεν τὸ πρόσωπόν σου.
And now we-path-along-out-unto in unto-whole unto-a-heart of-us, and we-fearee-unto to-thee and we-seek-unto to-the-one to-looked-toward of-thee.
3:41 Θ´ ϗ ημων Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:42 μὴ καταισχύνῃς ἡμᾶς, (Dan 3:42) ἀλλὰ ποίησον μεθ' ἡμῶν κατὰ τὴν ἐπιείκειάν σου καὶ κατὰ τὸ πλῆθος τοῦ ἐλέους σου.
Lest thou-might-shamen-down to-us, (Dan 3:42) other thou-should-have-done-unto with of-us down to-the-one to-a-resembling-upon-of of-thee and down to-the-one to-a-repleteedness of-the-one of-a-besectionateedness of-thee.
Note: of-a-besectionateedness : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc.
3:42 επιεικιαν A
(O) μὴ καταισχύνῃς ἡμᾶς, (Dan 3:42) ἀλλὰ ποίησον μεθ' ἡμῶν ἔλεος κατὰ τὴν ἐπιείκειάν σου καὶ κατὰ τὸ πλῆθος τοῦ ἐλέους σου,
Lest thou-might-shamen-down to-us, (Dan 3:42) other thou-should-have-done-unto with of-us to-a-besectionateedness down to-the-one to-a-resembling-upon-of of-thee and down to-the-one to-a-repleteedness of-the-one of-a-besectionateedness of-thee,
Note: to-a-besectionateedness : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc.
3:42 ϗ (om 87) ελεος 87 et (sub _) Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:43 καὶ ἐξελοῦ ἡμᾶς κατὰ τὰ θαυμάσιά σου, καὶ δὸς δόξαν τῷ ὀνόματί σου, Κύριε.
And thou-should-have-had-sectioned-out to-us down to-the-ones to-marvel-to-belonged of-thee, and thou-should-have-had-given to-a-reckonedness unto-the-one unto-a-naming-to of-thee, Authority-belonged.
(O) καὶ ἐξελοῦ ἡμᾶς κατὰ τὰ θαυμάσιά σου καὶ δὸς δόξαν τῷ ὀνόματι σου, Κύριε·
and thou-should-have-had-sectioned-out to-us down to-the-ones to-marvel-to-belonged of-thee and thou-should-have-had-given to-a-reckonedness unto-the-one unto-a-naming-to of-thee, Authority-belonged;
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:44 καὶ ἐντραπείησαν πάντες οἱ ἐνδεικνύμενοι τοῖς δούλοις σου κακά, καὶ καταισχυνθείησαν ἀπὸ πάσης τῆς δυναστείας, καὶ ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτῶν συντριβείη,
And they-may-have-had-been-turned-in all the-ones en-showing-in unto-the-ones unto-bondees of-thee to-wedge-wedged, and they-may-have-been-shamened-down off of-all of-the-one of-an-abling-of, and the-one a-force-holding of-them it-may-have-been-rubbed-together,
3:44 της δυναστειας] δυναμεως και δυναστειας A
(O) καὶ ἐντραπείησαν πάντες οἱ ἐνδεικνύμενοι τοῖς δούλοις σου κακά, καὶ καταισχυνθείησαν ἀπὸ πάσης δυναστείας, καὶ ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτῶν συντριβείη·
and they-may-have-had-been-turned-in all the-ones en-showing-in unto-the-ones unto-bondees of-thee to-wedge-wedged, and they-may-have-been-shamened-down off of-all of-an-abling-of, and the-one a-force-holding of-them it-may-have-been-rubbed-together;
3:44 τοις δουλοις] pr εν Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:45 γνώτωσαν ὅτι σὺ εἶ Κύριος ὁ θεὸς μόνος καὶ ἔνδοξος ἐφ' ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην.
they-should-have-had-acquainted to-which-a-one thou thou-be Authority-belonged the-one a-Deity stayeed and reckoned-in upon to-whole to-the-one to-being-housed-unto.
3:45 γνωτωσαν] pr και Γ | κς̅ ο θς̅ A ο [κς̅ θς̅] Γvid
(O) γνώτωσαν ὅτι σὺ εἶ μόνος Κύριος ὁ θεὸς καὶ ἔνδοξος ἐφ' ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην.
they-should-have-had-acquainted to-which-a-one thou thou-be stayeed Authority-belonged the-one a-Deity and reckoned-in upon to-whole to-the-one to-being-housed-unto.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:46 Καὶ οὐ διέλειπον οἱ ἐμβάλλοντες αὐτοὺς ὑπηρέται τοῦ βασιλέως καίοντες τὴν κάμινον νάφθαν καὶ πίσσαν καὶ στιππύον καὶ κληματίδα.
And not they-were-remaindering-through, the-ones casting-in to-them, under-rowers of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, burn-belonging to-the-one to-a-furnace to-a-naftha and to-a-tar and to-a-canvas and to-a-branchling-to.
Note: to-a-naftha : Greek word from Persian referring to a coal-derived liquid petroleum mixture.
3:46 διελιπον Bb σ[τιπ]πιον Γvid | κληματιδα] pr [τη]ν Γvid κληματιδας A
(O) Καὶ οὐ διέλιπον οἱ ἐμβάλλοντες αὐτοὺς ὑπηρέται τοῦ βασιλέως καίοντες τὴν κάμινον. καὶ ἡνίκα ἐνεβάλοσαν τοὺς τρεῖς εἰς ἅπαξ εἰς τὴν κάμινον, καὶ ἡ κάμινος ἦν διάπυρος κατὰ τὴν θερμασίαν αὐτῆς ἑπταπλασίως· καὶ ὅτε αὐτοὺς ἐνεβάλοσαν, οἱ μὲν ἐμβάλλοντες αὐτοὺς ἦσαν ὑπεράνω αὐτῶν, οἱ δὲ ὑπέκαιον ὑποκάτωθεν αὐτῶν νάφθαν καὶ στιππύον καὶ πίσσαν καὶ κληματίδα.
And not they-had-remaindered-through, the-ones casting-in to-them, under-rowers of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, burn-belonging to-the-one to-a-furnace. And to-which-belonged-of they-hath-had-casted-in to-the-ones to-three into to-once into to-the-one to-a-furnace, and the-one a-furnace it-was fired-through down to-the-one to-a-heating-unto of-it unto-seven-fold-belonged; and which-also to-them they-hath-had-casted-in, the-ones indeed casting-in to-them they-were over-up-unto-which of-them, the-ones then-also they-were-burn-belonging-under under-down-unto-which-from of-them to-a-naftha and to-a-canvas and to-a-tar and to-a-branchling-to.
Note: to-a-naftha : Greek word from Persian referring to a coal-derived liquid petroleum mixture.
3:46 om και ου διελιπον . . . καιοντες την καμινον Syrtxt (hab Syrmg (c εμβαλοντες)) | ενεβαλοσαν I°] ενεβαλλον Syr | εμβαλοντες (2°) Syr | σιτπυον 87
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:47 καὶ διεχεῖτο ἡ φλὸξ ἐπάνω τῆς καμίνου ἐπὶ πήχεις τεσσαράκοντα ἐννέα,
And it-was-being-held-through the-one a-blaze upon-up-unto-which of-the-one of-a-furnace upon to-fores to-forty to-nine,
3:47 διηχειτο A | τεσσαρακοντα Bb
(O) καὶ διεχεῖτο ἡ φλὸξ ἐπάνω τῆς καμίνου ἐπὶ πήχεις τεσσεράκοντα ἐννέα,
And it-was-being-held-through the-one a-blaze upon-up-unto-which of-the-one of-a-furnace upon to-fores to-forty to-nine,
3:47 δεηχειτο 87ed διηχ. in notis (διεχ. Syr)
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:48 καὶ διώδευσεν καὶ ἐνεπύρισεν οὓς εὗρεν περὶ τὴν κάμινον τῶν Χαλδαίων.
and it-wayed-through-of and it-fired-in-to to-which it-had-found about to-the-one to-a-furnace of-the-ones of-Chaldee-belonged.
(O) καὶ διεξώδευσε καὶ ἐνεπύρισεν οὓς εὗρεν περὶ τὴν κάμινον τῶν Χαλδαίων.
and it-wayed-out-through-of and it-fired-in-to to-which it-had-found about to-the-one to-a-furnace of-the-ones of-Chaldee-belonged.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:49 ὁ δὲ ἄγγελος Κυρίου συνκατέβη ἅμα τοῖς περὶ τὸν Ἀζαρίαν εἰς τὴν κάμινον, καὶ ἐξετίναξεν τὴν φλόγα τοῦ πυρὸς ἐκ τῆς καμίνου,
The-one then-also a-leadeeer of-Authority-belonged it-had-stepped-down-together along unto-the-ones about to-the-one to-an-Azarias into to-the-one to-a-furnace, and it-jolted-out to-the-one to-a-blaze of-the-one of-a-fire out of-the-one of-a-furnace,
(O) ἄγγελος δὲ Κυρίου συγκατέβη ἅμα τοῖς περὶ τὸν Ἀζαρίαν εἰς τὴν κάμινον καὶ ἐξετίναξε τὴν φλόγα τοῦ πυρὸς ἐκ τῆς καμίνου,
A-leadeeer then-also of-Authority-belonged it-had-stepped-down-together along unto-the-ones about to-the-one to-an-Azarias into to-the-one to-a-furnace and it-jolted-out to-the-one to-a-blaze of-the-one of-a-fire out of-the-one of-a-furnace,
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:50 καὶ ἐποίησεν τὸ μέσον τῆς καμίνου ὡς πνεῦμα δρόσου διασυρίζον· καὶ οὐχ ἥψατο αὐτῶν τὸ καθόλου τὸ πῦρ, καὶ οὐκ ἐλύπησεν οὐδὲ παρηνώχλησεν αὑτοῖς.
and it-did-unto to-the-one to-middle of-the-one of-a-furnace as to-a-currenting-to of-a-dew to-hissing-through-to; and not it-fastened of-them, the-one down-of-whole the-one a-fire, and not it-throed-unto not-then-also it-crowded-in-beside-unto unto-them.
3:50 αυτοις] αυτους Γ
(O) καὶ ἐποίησε τὸ μέσον τῆς καμίνου ὡσεὶ πνεῦμα δρόσου διασυρίζον, καὶ οὐχ ἥψατο αὐτῶν καθόλου τὸ πῦρ, καὶ οὐκ ἐλύπησε καὶ οὐ παρηνώχλησεν αὐτούς.
and it-did-unto to-the-one to-middle of-the-one of-a-furnace as-if to-a-currenting-to of-a-dew to-hissing-through-to, and not it-fastened of-them, down-of-whole the-one a-fire, and not it-throed-unto and not it-crowded-in-beside-unto to-them.
3:50 ΔΙΑΣΥΡΙΖΟΝ Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:51 Τότε οἱ τρεῖς ὡς ἐξ ἑνὸς στόματος ὕμνουν καὶ ἐδόξαζον καὶ εὐλόγουν τὸν θεὸν ἐν τῇ καμίνῳ λέγοντες
To-the-one-which-also the-ones three as out of-one of-a-becutteeing-to they-were-hymning-unto and the-were-reckoning-to and the-were-goodly-fortheeing-unto to-the-one to-a-Deity in unto-the-one unto-a-furnace forthing,
3:51 ηυλογουν A
(O) Ἀναλαβόντες δὲ οἱ τρεῖς ὡς ἐξ ἑνὸς στόματος ὕμνουν καὶ ἐδόξαζον καὶ εὐλόγουν καὶ ἐξύψουν τὸν θεὸν ἐν τῇ καμίνῳ λέγοντες
Having-had-taken-up then-also, the-ones three, as out of-one of-a-becutteeing-to they-were-hymning-unto and they-were-reckoning-to and they-were-goodly-fortheeing-unto and they-were-en-lofteeing-out to-the-one to-a-Deity in unto-the-one unto-a-furnace forthing,
3:51 αναλ. δε] Θ´ ποτε Syrmg | ÷ και εξυψουν 87 Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:52 Εὐλογητὸς εἶ, Κύριε ὁ θεὸς τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, καὶ αἰνετὸς καὶ ὑπερυψούμενος εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας· καὶ εὐλογημένον τὸ ὄνομα τῆς δόξης σου τὸ ἅγιον, καὶ ὑπεραινετὸν καὶ ὑπερυψούμενον εἰς τοὺς πάντας αἰῶνας.
Goodly-fortheeable thou-be, Authority-belonged the-one a-Deity of-the-ones of-fathers of-us, and laudable and being-en-lofteed-over into to-the-ones to-ages; and having-had-come-to-be-goodly-fortheed-unto the-one a-naming-to of-the-one of-a-reckonedness of-thee the-one hallow-belonged, and laudable-over and being-en-lofteed-over into to-all to-the-ones to-ages.
3:52 υπερυψωμενος Bab | υπερυψωμενον Bab | om παντας A
(O) Εὐλογητὸς εἶ, Κύριε ὁ θεὸς τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, καὶ αἰνετὸς καὶ ὑπερυψούμενος εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας· καὶ εὐλογημένον τὸ ὄνομα τῆς δόξης σου τὸ ἅγιον, καὶ ὑπεραινετὸν καὶ ὑπερυψωμένον εἰς πάντας τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Goodly-fortheeable thou-be, Authority-belonged the-one a-Deity of-the-ones of-fathers of-us, and laudable and being-en-lofteed-over into to-the-ones to-ages; and having-had-come-to-be-goodly-fortheed-unto the-one a-naming-to of-the-one of-a-reckonedness of-thee the-one hallow-belonged, and laudable-over and being-en-lofteed-over into to-all to-the-ones to-ages.
3:52 αινετος κ. υψουμενος Syrvid
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:53 εὐλογημένος εἶ ἐν τῷ ναῷ τῆς ἁγίας δόξης σου, καὶ ὑπερυμνητὸς καὶ ὑπερένδοξος εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Having-had-come-to-be-goodly-fortheed-unto thou-be in unto-the-one unto-a-temple of-the-one of-hallow-belonged of-a-reckonedness of-thee, and hymnable-over and reckoned-in-over into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογημένος εἶ ἐν τῷ ναῷ τῆς ἁγίας δόξης σου, καὶ ὑπερυμνητὸς καὶ ὑπερένδοξος εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Having-had-come-to-be-goodly-fortheed-unto thou-be in unto-the-one unto-a-temple of-the-one of-hallow-belonged of-a-reckonedness of-thee, and hymnable-over and reckoned-in-over into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:54 εὐλογημένος εἶ ὁ ἐπιβλέπων ἀβύσσους, καθήμενος ἐπὶ χερουβείν, καὶ αἰνετὸς καὶ ὑπερυψούμενος εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Having-had-come-to-be-goodly-fortheed-unto thou-be the-one viewing-upon to-depthed-along, sitting-down upon of-cheroubein', and laudable and being-en-lofteed-over into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:54 επιβλεπων] βλεπων A | χερουβειν (-βειμ A)] pr των A | αινετος] υπεραινετος A | υπερυψουμενος BabA
(O) εὐλογητὸς εἶ ἐπὶ θρόνου δόξης τῆς βασιλείας σου, καὶ ὑμνητὸς καὶ ὑπερυψωμένος εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Goodly-fortheeable thou-be upon of-a-throne of-a-reckonedness of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-thee, and hymnable and being-en-lofteed-over into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:54 Θ´ ϗ δοξης Syr | και υμνητος] Θ´ κ. υπερυμνητος Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:55 εὐλογημένος εἶ ἐπὶ θρόνου τῆς βασιλείας σου, καὶ ὑπερυμνητὸς καὶ ὑπερυψούμενος εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Having-had-come-to-be-goodly-fortheed-unto thou-be upon of-a-throne of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-thee, and hymnable-over and being-en-lofteed-over into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογητὸς εἶ ὁ βλέπων ἀβύσσους, καθήμενος ἐπὶ χερουβίμ, καὶ αἰνετὸς καὶ δεδοξασμένος εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Goodly-fortheeable thou-be the-one viewing to-depthed-along, sitting-down upon to-cheroubim', and laudable and having-had-come-to-be-reckoned-to into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:55 ευλογητος ει] Θ´ ευλογημενος ει Syrmg | ο βλεπων] Θ´ ο επιβλεπων Syrmg | δεδοξασμενος] Θ´ υπερυψουμενος Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:56 εὐλογητὸς εἶ ἐν τῷ στερεώματι τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καὶ ὑμνητὸς καὶ δεδοξασμένος εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Goodly-fortheeable thou-be in unto-the-one unto-an-en-stabling-to of-the-one of-a-sky, and hymnable and having-had-come-to-be-reckoned-to into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:56 ευλογητος] ευλογημενος A | υμνητος] υπερυμνητος A
(O) εὐλογητὸς εἶ ἐν τῷ στερεώματι τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καὶ ὑμνητὸς καὶ δεδοξασμένος εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Goodly-fortheeable thou-be in unto-the-one unto-an-en-stabling-to of-the-one of-a-sky, and hymnable and having-had-come-to-be-reckoned-to into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:56 ϗ του ουρανου 87 (deest V) Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:57 εὐλογεῖτε, πάντα τὰ ἔργα Κυρίου, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, all the-ones works of-Authority-belonged, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, πάντα τὰ ἔργα τοῦ κυρίου, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, all the-ones works of-Authority-belonged, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
Dan 3:58-59 (Theodoton) in 03 ordered as Dan 3:59,58 in HS.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:58 εὐλογεῖτε, ἄγγελοι Κυρίου, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, leadeeers of-Authority-belonged, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, ἄγγελοι Κυρίου, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, leadeeers of-Authority-belonged, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:58 om Κυριου Syr
Dan 3:58-59 (Theodoton) in 03 ordered as Dan 3:59,58 in HS.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:59 εὐλογεῖτε, οὐρανοί, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, Skies, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, οὐρανοί, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, Skies, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:60 εὐλογεῖτε, ὕδατα καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐπάνω τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, waters and all the-ones upon-up-unto-which of-the-one of-a-sky, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:60 om και I° A
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, ὕδατα καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐπάνω τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, waters and all the-ones upon-up-unto-which of-the-one of-a-sky, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:60 om και I° 87✱ (superscr corr) hab sub Θ´ ϗ Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:61 εὐλογείτω πᾶσα ἡ δύναμις τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
It-should-goodly-forthee-unto, all the-one an-ability, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:61 ευλογειτε A | πασαι αι δυναμεις κυ̅ A
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάμεις Κυρίου, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, all the-ones abilities of-Authority-belonged, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:62 εὐλογεῖτε, ἥλιος καὶ σελήνη, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, a-sun and a-moon, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, ἥλιος καὶ σελήνη, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, a-sun and a-moon, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:62 ϗ ευλογειτε . . . εις τους αιωνας Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:63 εὐλογεῖτε, ἄστρα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, en-starrings of-the-one of-a-sky, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, ἄστρα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, en-starrings of-the-one of-a-sky, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:64 εὐλογείτω πᾶς ὄμβρος καὶ δρόσος τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
It-should-goodly-forthee-unto, all a-storm and a-dew, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:64 ευλογειτε A
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, πᾶς ὄμβρος καὶ δρόσος, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, all a-storm and a-dew, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:65 εὐλογεῖτε, πάντα τὰ πνεύματα, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, all the-ones currentings-to, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, πάντα τὰ πνεύματα, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, all the-ones currentings-to, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:66 εὐλογεῖτε, πῦρ καὶ καῦμα, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, a-fire and a-burning-to, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:66 αιωνας] + (67) ευλογειτε ψυχος και καυσων τον κν̅· υμνειτε και υπερυψουται αυτον εις τους αιωνας. (68) ευλογειτε δροσοι και νιφετοι τον κν̅· υμνειτε και υπερυψουται αυτον εις τους αιωνας A
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, πῦρ καὶ καῦμα, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, a-fire and a-burning-to, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
Dan 3:67 (Theodoton) not in HS.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, ῥῖγος καὶ ψῦχος, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, a-shivereedness and a-breatheedness, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:67 ριγος και ψυχος] Θ´ ψυχος κ. καυμα Syrmg
Dan 3:68 (Theodoton) not in HS.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, δρόσοι καὶ νιφετοί, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, dews and sleets, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
Dan 3:69-72 (Theodoton) in 03 ordered as Dan 3:71,72,69,70 in HS.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:69 εὐλογεῖτε, ψῦχος καὶ καῦμα, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, a-breatheedness and a-burning-to, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:69 ψυχος κ. καυμα] παγος και ψυχος A
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, πάγοι καὶ ψῦχος, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, pitchages and a-breatheedness, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
Dan 3:69-72 (Theodoton) in 03 ordered as Dan 3:71,72,69,70 in HS.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:70 εὐλογεῖτε, πάχνη καὶ χιόνες, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, a-rime and snows, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:70 παχναι A | χιονες] χ sup ras ut vid Bab
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, πάχναι καὶ χιόνες, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, rimes and snows, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:70 παχνη Syr (mg ΠΑΧΝΗ)
Dan 3:69-72 (Theodoton) in 03 ordered as Dan 3:71,72,69,70 in HS.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:71 εὐλογεῖτε, νύκτες καὶ ἡμέραι, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, nights and dayednesses, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, νύκτες καὶ ἡμέραι, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, nights and dayednesses, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
Dan 3:69-72 (Theodoton) in 03 ordered as Dan 3:71,72,69,70 in HS.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:72 εὐλογεῖτε, φῶς καὶ σκότος, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, a-light and a-dimmeedness, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, φῶς καὶ σκότος, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, a-light and a-dimmeedness, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:73 εὐλογεῖτε, ἀστραπαὶ καὶ νεφέλαι, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, gleamings-along and cloudings, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:73, 74 ordinem transpos A
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, ἀστραπαὶ καὶ νεφέλαι, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, gleamings-along and cloudings, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:74 εὐλογείτω ἡ γῆ τὸν κύριον· ὑμνείτω καὶ ὑπερυψούτω αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
It-should-goodly-forthee-unto, the-one a-soil, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; it-should-hymn-unto and it-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογείτω ἡ γῆ τὸν κύριον· ὑμνείτω καὶ ὑπερυψούτω αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
It-should-goodly-forthee-unto, the-one a-soil, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; it-should-hymn-unto and it-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:75 εὐλογεῖτε, ὄρη καὶ βουνοί, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, jutteednesses and mounds, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, ὄρη καὶ βουνοί, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, jutteednesses and mounds, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:76 εὐλογεῖτε, πάντα τὰ φυόμενα ἐν τῇ γῇ, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, all the-ones spawning in unto-the-one unto-a-soil, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, πάντα τὰ φυόμενα ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, all the-ones spawning upon of-the-one of-a-soil, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:76 επι της γης] Θ´ εν τη γη Syrmg
Dan 3:77-78 (Theodoton) in 03 ordered as Dan 3:78,77 in HS.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:77 εὐλογεῖτε, αἱ πηγαί, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, the-ones pitchings, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, ὄμβροι καὶ αἱ πηγαί, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, storms and the-ones pitchings, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:77 Θ´ ϗ ομβροι και Syr
Dan 3:77-78 (Theodoton) in 03 ordered as Dan 3:78,77 in HS.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:78 εὐλογεῖτε, θάλασσαι καὶ ποταμοί, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, flourisherednesses and drinkationings-of, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, θάλασσαι καὶ ποταμοί, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, flourisherednesses and drinkationings-of, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:79 εὐλογεῖτε, κήτη καὶ πάντα τὰ κινούμενα ἐν τοῖς ὕδασιν, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, cetaceans and all the-ones moving-unto in unto-the-ones unto-waters, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:79 κεινουμε sup ras B1fort | υδασιν (-σι Bb)] pr τοις A
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, κήτη καὶ πάντα τὰ κινούμενα ἐν τοῖς ὕδασι, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, cetaceans and all the-ones moving-unto in unto-the-ones unto-waters, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:80 εὐλογεῖτε, πάντα τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, all the-ones flying-belonged-to of-the-one of-a-sky, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, πάντα τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, all the-ones flying-belonged-to of-the-one of-a-sky, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:80 om παντα Syrtxt (hab sub Θ´Syrmg)
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:81 εὐλογεῖτε, πάντα τὰ θηρία καὶ τὰ κτήνη, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, all the-ones beastlets and the-ones befoundeednesses, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
Note: befoundeednesses : something able to be corporatively tamed and utilized; i.e. livestock.
3:81 om παντα A | τα κτηνη] pr παντα A
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, τετράποδα καὶ θηρία τῆς γῆς, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, four-footed and beastlets of-the-one of-a-soil, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:81 τετραποδα] pr (sub Θ´) παντα τα θηρια και τα κτηνη 87mg Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:82 εὐλογεῖτε, οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, the-ones sons of-the-ones of-mankinds, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:82 οι υιοι] om οι A
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, the-ones sons of-the-ones of-mankinds, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:83 εὐλογεῖτε, Ἰσραήλ, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, Israêl, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:83 ευλογειτω A
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, Ἰσραήλ, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, Israêl, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:83 ευλογει Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:84 εὐλογεῖτε, ἱερεῖς, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, Sacreders-of, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:84 ιερεις] + κυ̅ A
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, ἱερεῖς, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, Sacreders-of, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:84 ιερεις] + δουλοι Κυριου 87mg Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:85 εὐλογεῖτε, δοῦλοι, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, Bondees, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:85 δουλοι] + κυ̅ A
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, δοῦλοι, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, Bondees, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:86 εὐλογεῖτε, πνεύματα καὶ ψυχαὶ δικαίων, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, currentings-to and breathings of-course-belonged, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, πνεύματα καὶ ψυχαὶ δικαίων, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, currentings-to and breathings of-course-belonged, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:87 εὐλογεῖτε, ὅσιοι καὶ ταπεινοὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, holy and lowed-belonged-to unto-the-one unto-a-heart, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
3:87 τη καρδια] om τη A
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, ὅσιοι καὶ ταπεινοὶ καρδίᾳ, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, holy and lowed-belonged-to unto-a-heart, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:88 εὐλογεῖτε, Ἁνανία, Ἀζαρία, Μεισαήλ, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας· ὅτι ἐξείλατο ἡμᾶς ἐξ ᾅδου, καὶ ἐκ χειρὸς θανάτου ἔσωσεν ἡμᾶς, καὶ ἐρύσατο ἡμᾶς ἐκ μέσου καμίνου καιομένης φλογός, καὶ ἐκ μέσου πυρὸς ἐρύσατο ἡμᾶς.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, Hananias, Azarias, Meisaêl, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages; to-which-a-one it-sectioned-out to-ye out of-a-hadês, and out of-a-hand of-a-death it-saved-to to-ye, and it-tracted to-ye out of-middle of-a-furnace of-being-burn-belonged of-a-blaze, and out of-middle of-a-fire it-tracted to-ye.
3:88 Μισαηλ BbA | ερρυσατο bis Bab : I°, A | μεσου καμινου] καμεινου μεσης A
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, Ἁνανία, Ἀζαρία, Μισαήλ, τὸν κύριον· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ὑπερυψοῦτε αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας. ὅτι ἐξείλετο ἡμᾶς ἐξ ᾅδου, καὶ ἔσωσεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ χειρὸς θανάτου, καὶ ἐρρύσατο ἡμᾶς ἐκ μέσου καιομένης φλογός, καὶ ἐκ τοῦ πυρὸς ἐλυτρώσατο ἡμᾶς.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, Hananias, Azarias, Misaêl, to-the-one to-Authority-belonged; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-en-loftee-over to-it into to-the-ones to-ages; to-which-a-one it-had-sectioned-out to-ye out of-a-hadês, and it-saved-to to-ye out of-a-hand of-a-death, and it-tracted to-ye out of-middle of-being-burn-belonged of-a-blaze, and out of-the-one of-a-fire it-en-loosed to-ye.
3:88 τους αιωνας] τον κυριον Syr | και εκ του πυρος] [Θ´ ] και εκ μεσου πυρος Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:89 ἐξομολογεῖσθε τῷ κυρίῳ, ὅτι χρηστός, ὅτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ.
Ye-should-along-forthee-out-unto unto-the-one unto-Authority-belonged, to-which-a-one afforded, to-which-a-one into to-the-one to-an-age the-one a-besectionateedness of-it.
Note: a-besectionateedness : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc.
(O) ἐξομολογεῖσθε τῷ κυρίῳ, ὅτι χρηστός, ὅτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ.
Ye-should-along-forthee-out-unto unto-the-one unto-Authority-belonged, to-which-a-one afforded, to-which-a-one into to-the-one to-an-age the-one a-besectionateedness of-it.
Note: a-besectionateedness : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc.
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:90 εὐλογεῖτε, πάντες οἱ σεβόμενοι τὸν κύριον, τὸν θεὸν τῶν θεῶν· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ἐξομολογεῖσθε· ὅτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, all the-ones revering to-the-one to-Authority-belonged, to-the-one to-a-Deity of-the-ones of-deities; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-along-forthee-out-unto, to-which-a-one into to-the-one to-an-age the-one a-besectionateedness of-it.
Note: a-besectionateedness : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc.
(O) εὐλογεῖτε, πάντες οἱ σεβόμενοι τὸν κύριον, τὸν θεὸν τῶν θεῶν· ὑμνεῖτε καὶ ἐξομολογεῖσθε· ὅτι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τὸ ἔλεος αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τῶν αἰώνων.
Ye-should-goodly-forthee-unto, all the-ones revering to-the-one to-Authority-belonged, to-the-one to-a-Deity of-the-ones of-deities; ye-should-hymn-unto and ye-should-along-forthee-out-unto, to-which-a-one into to-the-one to-an-age the-one a-besectionateedness of-it, and into to-the-one to-an-age of-the-ones of-ages.
Note: a-besectionateedness : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc.
3:90 Θ´ ϗ τον κυριον Syr | οτι εις τον αιωνα] Θ´ οτι εις παντας τους αιωνας Syrmg | ÷ και εις τον αιωνα (superscr ÷ 87) των αιωνων 87 Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:91 (Dan 3:24) Καὶ Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ἤκουσεν ὑμνούντων αὐτῶν καὶ ἐθαύμασεν, καὶ ἐξανέστη ἐν σπουδῇ καὶ εἶπεν τοῖς μεγιστᾶσιν αὐτοῦ Οὐχὶ ἄνδρας τρεῖς ἐβάλομεν εἰς μέσον τοῦ πυρὸς πεπεδημένους; καὶ εἶπαν τῷ βασιλεῖ Ἀληθῶς, βασιλεῦ.
(Dan 3:24) And a-Nabouchodonosor it-heard of-hymning-unto of-them and it-marveled-to, and it-had-stood-up-out in unto-a-hasteneeing and it-had-said unto-the-ones unto-most-greats of-it, Unto-not to-men to-three we-had-casted into to-middle of-the-one of-a-fire to-having-had-come-to-be-footed-unto? And they-said unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of, Unto-un-secludinged, Ruler-of.
3:91 εβαλομεν] ενεβαλομεν A
(O) (Dan 3:24) Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ἀκοῦσαι τὸν βασιλέα ὑμνούντων αὐτῶν καὶ ἑστὼς ἐθεώρει αὐτοὺς ζῶντας· τότε Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐθαύμασε, καὶ ἀνέστη σπεύσας καὶ εἶπεν τοῖς φίλοις αὐτοῦ Οὐχὶ ἄνδρας τρεῖς ἐβάλομεν εἰς μέσον τοῦ πυρὸς πεπεδημένους; καὶ εἶπον τῷ βασιλεῖ Ἀληθῶς, βασιλεῦ.
(Dan 3:24) And it-had-became in unto-the-one to-have-heard to-the-one to-a-ruler-of of-hymning-unto of-them and having-hath-had-come-to-stand it-was-surveiling-unto to-them to-lifing-unto; to-the-one-which-also a-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-ruler-of it-was-marveling-to, and it-had-stood-up having-hastened and it-had-said unto-the-ones unto-cared of-it, Unto-not to-men to-three we-had-casted into to-middle of-the-one of-a-fire to-having-had-come-to-be-footed-unto? And they-had-said unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of, Unto-un-secludinged, Ruler-of.
3:91–92 ϗ (pr •/• 87) ουχι ανδρας . . . και ειπεν ο βασιλευς 87 Syr
3:91 ÷ και εγενετο (εγε| ÷ |νετο 87) εν τω ακουσαι τον βασιλεα (÷ 87) υμνουντων αυτων (÷ 87) και εστως εθεωτει αυτους ζωντας 87 Syr | τοις φιλοις] Θ´ τω οδηγω (sic) Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:92 (Dan 3:25) Ὅδε ἐγὼ ὁρῶ ἄνδρας τέσσαρας λελυμένους καὶ περιπατοῦντας ἐν μέσῳ τοῦ πυρός, καὶ διαφθορὰ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἡ ὅρασις τοῦ τετάρτου ὁμοία υἱῷ θεοῦ.
(Dan 3:25) The-one-then-also I I-seeee-unto to-men to-four to-having-had-come-to-be-loosed and to-treading-about-unto in unto-middle of-the-one of-a-fire, and a-degradedness-through not it-be in unto-them, and the-one a-seeeeing of-the-one of-fourth along-belonged unto-a-son of-a-Deity(Elah).
3:92 οδε] ιδου A pr και ειπεν ο βασιλευς BabA | τεσσαρας B?A | om εν 2° A
(O) (Dan 3:25) καὶ εἶπεν ὁ βασιλεύς Ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ ὁρῶ ἄνδρας τέσσαρας λελυμένους περιπατοῦντας ἐν τῷ πυρί, καὶ φθορὰ οὐδεμία ἐγενήθη ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἡ ὅρασις τοῦ τετάρτου ὁμοίωμα ἀγγέλου θεοῦ.
(Dan 3:25) And it-had-said, the-one a-ruler-of, Thou-should-have-had-seen, I I-seeee-unto to-men to-four to-having-had-come-to-be-loosed to-treading-about-unto in unto-the-one unto-a-fire, and a-degradedness not-then-also-one it-was-became in unto-them, and the-one a-seeeeing of-the-one of-fourth an-en-along-belonging-to of-a-leadeeer of-a-Deity(Elah).
3:91–92 ϗ (pr •/• 87) ουχι ανδρας . . . και ειπεν ο βασιλευς 87 Syr
3:92 περιπατουντας] pr και Syr | αγγελου] υιου Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:93 (Dan 3:26) τότε προσῆλθεν Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ πρὸς τὴν θύραν τῆς καμίνου τοῦ πυρὸς τῆς καιομένης καὶ εἶπεν Σεδράχ, Μεισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ, οἱ δοῦλοι τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ ὑψίστου, ἐξέλθετε καὶ δεῦτε. καὶ ἐξῆλθον Σεδράχ, Μεισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ, ἐκ μέσου τοῦ πυρός.
(Dan 3:26) To-the-one-which-also it-had-came-toward, a-Nabouchodonosor, toward to-the-one to-a-portaledness of-the-one of-a-furnace of-the-one of-a-fire of-the-one of-being-burn-belonged and it-had-said, Sedrach, Meisach, Abdenagô, the-ones bondees of-the-one of-a-Deity(Elah) of-the-one of-most-lofteed, ye-should-have-had-came-out and ye-should-hither-of. And they-had-came-out, a-Sedrach, a-Meisach, an-Abdenagô, out of-middle of-the-one of-a-fire.
3:93 Σεδρακ A bis : item 95. 96, 97 | Μισαχ Bb Μισακ A bis : item 95, 96, 97 | om του υψιστου A | εξελθατε A | δευτε] + εξω A
(O) (Dan 3:26) καὶ προσελθὼν ὁ βασιλεὺς πρὸς τὴν θύραν τῆς καμίνου τῆς καιομένης τῷ πυρὶ ἐκάλεσεν αὐτοὺς ἐξ ὀνόματος Σεδράχ, Μισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ, οἱ παῖδες τοῦ θεοῦ τῶν θεῶν τοῦ ὑψίστου, ἐξέλθετε ἐκ τοῦ πυρός. οὕτως οὖν ἐξῆλθον οἱ ἄνδρες ἐκ μέσου τοῦ πυρός.
(Dan 3:26) And having-had-came-toward, the-one a-ruler-of, toward to-the-one to-a-portaledness of-the-one of-a-furnace of-the-one of-being-burn-belonged unto-the-one unto-a-fire it-called-unto to-them out of-a-naming-to, Sedrach, Misach, Abdenagô, the-ones children of-the-one of-a-Deity(Elah) of-the-ones of-deities of-the-one of-most-lofteed, ye-should-have-had-came-out out of-the-one of-a-fire. Unto-the-one-this accordingly they-had-came-out, the-ones men, out of-middle of-the-one of-a-fire.
3:93 εξ ονοματος] εξ ονοματων αυτων Syr | του θεου] bis scr Syr✱ (improb 2°) | ουτως] τοτε Syrvid
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:94 (Dan 3:27) καὶ συνάγονται οἱ σατράπαι καὶ οἱ στρατηγοὶ καὶ οἱ τοπάρχαι καὶ οἱ δυνάσται τοῦ βασιλέως, καὶ ἐθεώρουν τοὺς ἄνδρας ὅτι οὐκ ἐκυρίευσεν τὸ πῦρ τοῦ σώματος αὐτῶν, καὶ ἡ θρὶξ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτῶν οὐκ ἐφλογίσθη, καὶ τὰ σαράβαρα αὐτῶν οὐκ ἠλλοιώθη, καὶ ὀσμὴ πυρὸς οὐκ ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς.
(Dan 3:27) And they-be-led-together the-ones provincers and the-ones amass-leaders and the-ones occasion-firsters and the-ones ablers of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, and they-were-surveiling-unto to-the-ones to-men to-which-a-one not it-authority-belonged-of, the-one a-fire, of-the-one of-an-en-capsuling-to of-them, and the-one hair of-the-one of-a-head of-them not it-was-blazed-to, and the-ones sarabaros' of-them not it-was-en-othered, and an-odor of-a-fire not it-was in unto-them.
Note: to-sarabaros' : Greek word transliterated from Aramaic, referring to a kind of loose trouser.
3:94 αυτοις] + και προσεκυνησεν ο βασιλευς ενωπιον αυτων τω κω̅ Bab mg infA
(O) (Dan 3:27) καὶ συνήχθησαν οἱ ὕπατοι, τοπάρχαι, καὶ ἀρχιπατριῶται, καὶ οἱ φίλοι τοῦ βασιλέως, καὶ ἐθεώρουν τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἐκείνους, ὅτι οὐχ ἥψατο τὸ πῦρ τοῦ σώματος αὐτῶν, καὶ αἱ τρίχες αὐτῶν οὐ κατεκάησαν καὶ τὰ σαράβαρα αὐτῶν οὐκ ἠλλοιώθησαν, οὐδὲ ὀσμὴ τοῦ πυρὸς ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς.
(Dan 3:27) And they-were-led-together the-ones most-over, occasion-firsters, and firsts-of-fathers, and the-ones cared of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, and they-were-surveiling-unto to-the-ones to-mankinds to-the-ones-thither, to-which-a-one not it-fastened, the-one a-fire, of-the-one of-an-en-capsuling-to of-them, and the-ones hairs of-them not they-had-been-burn-belonged-down and the-ones sarabaros' of-them not they-were-en-othered, not-then-also an-odor of-the-one of-a-fire it-was in unto-them.
Note: to-sarabaros' : Greek word transliterated from Aramaic, referring to a kind of loose trouser.
3:94 και τα σαραβαρα αυτων ουκ] ς´Θ´ ουδε τα υποδηματα (? τας αναξυριδας) αυτων Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:95 (Dan 3:28) καὶ ἀπεκρίθη Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ καὶ εἶπεν Εὐλογητὸς ὁ θεὸς τοῦ Σεδρὰχ καὶ Μεισὰχ καὶ Ἀβδεναγώ, ὃς ἀπέστειλεν τὸν ἄγγελον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐξείλατο τοὺς παῖδας αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ἐπεποίθεισαν ἐπ' αὐτῷ· καὶ τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦ βασιλέως ἠλλοίωσαν καὶ παρέδωκαν τὰ σώματα αὐτῶν εἰς πῦρ, ὅπως μὴ λατρεύσωσιν μηδὲ προσκυνήσωσιν παντὶ θεῷ ἀλλ' ἢ τῷ θεῷ αὐτῶν.
(Dan 3:28) And it-was-separated-off a-Nabouchodonosor and it-had-said, Goodly-fortheeable the-one a-Deity(Elah) of-the-one of-a-Sedrach and of-a-Meisach and of-an-Abdenagô, which it-set-off to-the-one to-a-leadeeer of-it and it-sectioned-out to-the-ones to-children of-it, to-which-a-one they-had-come-to-have-had-sured upon unto-it; and to-the-one to-an-uttering-to of-the-one of-a-ruler-of they-en-other-belonged and they-gave-beside to-the-ones to-en-capsulings-to of-them into to-a-fire, unto-which-whither lest they-might-have-served-of lest-then-also they-might-have-kissed-toward-unto unto-all unto-a-deity(elah) other or unto-the-one unto-a-Deity(Elah) of-them.
3:95 om και 3°, 4° A | om μηδε προσκυνησωσιν A
(O) (Dan 3:28) ὑπολαβὼν δὲ Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ βασιλεὺς εἶπεν Εὐλογητὸς Κύριος τοῦ Σεδράχ, Μισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ, ὃς ἀπέστειλε τὸν ἄγγελον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἔσωσε τοὺς παῖδας αὐτοῦ τοὺς ἐλπίσαντας ἐπ' αὐτόν· τὴν γὰρ προσταγὴν τοῦ βασιλέως ἠθέτησαν καὶ παρέδωκαν τὰ σώματα αὐτῶν εἰς ἐμπυρισμόν, ἵνα μὴ λατρεύσωσι μηδὲ προσκυνήσωσι θεῷ ἑτέρῳ ἀλλ' ἢ τῷ θεῷ αὐτῶν.
(Dan 3:28) Having-had-taken-under then-also, a-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-ruler-of, it-had-said, Goodly-fortheeable Authority-belonged of-the-one of-a-Sedrach, of-a-Misach, of-an-Abdenagô, which it-set-off to-the-one to-a-leadeeer of-it and it-saved-to to-the-ones to-children of-it to-the-ones to-having-drove-sureed-to upon to-it; to-the-one too-thus to-an-arrangement-toward of-the-one of-a-ruler-of they-un-placed-unto and they-gave-beside to-the-ones to-en-capsulings-to of-them into to-a-firing-in-to-of, so lest they-might-have-served-of lest-then-also they-might-have-kissed-toward-unto unto-a-deity(elah) unto-different other or unto-the-one unto-a-Deity(Elah) of-them.
3:95 Κυριος] + ο θεος Syr | Αβδεναγω] pr και Syr : item 96 | τους ελπισαντας . . . ηθετησαν] ς´ οτι πεποιθοτες επ αυτον το ρημα το βασιλικον ηθετ. Syrmg | τα σωματα] το σωμα Syr | ÷ εις εμπυρισμον 87 (εμ|πυ ÷ ρισμ.) Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:96 (Dan 3:29) καὶ ἐγὼ ἐκτίθεμαι δόγμα Πᾶς λαός, φυλή, γλῶσσα, ἐὰν εἴπῃ βλασφημίαν κατὰ τοῦ θεοῦ Σεδράχ, Μεισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ, εἰς ἀπώλειαν ἔσονται καὶ οἱ οἶκοι αὐτῶν εἰς διαρπαγήν· καθότι οὐκ ἔστιν θεὸς ἕτερος ὅστις δυνήσεται ῥύσασθαι οὕτως.
(Dan 3:29) And I I-place-out to-a-thinking-to, All a-people, a-tribing, a-tongue, if-ever it-might-have-had-said to-a-ill-declaring-unto down of-the-one of-a-Deity(Elah) of-a-Sedrach, of-a-Meisach, of-an-Abdenagô, into to-a-destructing-off-of they-shall-be and the-ones houses of-them into to-a-snatching-through; down-to-which-a-one not it-be a-Deity(Elah) different which-a-one it-shall-able to-have-tracted unto-the-one-this.
3:96 το δογμα] om το A | εαν] η αν A | εις διαρπαγην] διαρπαγησονται A
(O) (Dan 3:29) καὶ νῦν ἐγὼ κρίνω ἵνα πᾶν ἔθνος καὶ πᾶσαι φυλαὶ καὶ πᾶσαι γλῶσσαι, ὃς ἂν βλασφημήσῃ εἰς τὸν κύριον τὸν θεὸν Σεδράχ, Μισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ, διαμελισθήσεται καὶ ἡ οἰκία αὐτοῦ δημευθήσεται· διότι οὐκ ἔστιν θεὸς ἕτερος ὃς δυνήσεται ἐξελέσθαι οὕτως.
(Dan 3:29) And now I I-separate so all a-placeedness-belonging-to and all tribings and all tongues, which ever it-might-have-ill-declared-unto into to-the-one to-Authority-belonged to-the-one to-a-Deity(Elah) of-a-Sedrach, of-a-Misach, of-an-Abdenagô, it-shall-be-membered-through-to and the-one a-housing-unto of-it it-shall-be-localitied-of; through-to-which-a-one not it-be a-Deity(Elah) different which it-shall-able to-have-had-sectioned-out unto-the-one-this.
3:96–97 ουτως | x | ουτως 87
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:97 (Dan 3:30) τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς κατεύθυνεν τὸν Σεδράχ, Μεισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ, ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ Βαβυλῶνος, καὶ ἠξίωσεν αὐτοὺς ἡγεῖσθαι πάντων τῶν Ἰουδαίων τῶν ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ.
(Dan 3:30) To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruler-of it-straightened-down to-the-one to-a-Sedrach, to-a-Meisach, to-an-Abdenagô, in unto-the-one unto-a-spacedness of-a-Babulôn, and it-en-deem-belonged to-them to-lead-unto of-all of-the-ones of-Iouda-belonged of-the-ones in unto-the-one unto-a-ruling-of of-it.
3:97 ο βασιλευς κατευθυνεν] κατηυθυνεν ο β. A | εν τη χωρα] επι τα εργα της χωρας A | εξιωσεν] ηυξησεν αυτους και ηξιωσεν Bb + και ηξιωσεν αυτους και ηξιωσεν αυτους (sic) A | των 2°] + οντων A | βασιλια B* (-λεια Bab) subscr ορασις δ´ A
(O) (Dan 3:30) οὕτως οὖν ὁ βασιλεὺς τῷ Σεδράχ, Μισάχ, Ἀβδεναγώ, ἐξουσίαν δοὺς ἐφ' ὅλης τῆς χώρας κατέστησεν αὐτοὺς ἄρχοντας.
(Dan 3:30) Unto-the-one-this accordingly the-one a-ruler-of unto-the-one unto-a-Sedrach, unto-a-Misach, unto-an-Abdenagô, to-a-being-out-unto having-had-given upon of-whole of-the-one of-a-spacedness it-stood-down to-them to-firsting.
3:96–97 ουτως | x | ουτως 87
3:97 ουτως ουν . . . κατεστησεν αυτ. αρχοντας] ς´ ουτως εκ τουτου ο β. εν προαγωγη εποιησε Σ. Μ. A. . . . Syrmg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:98 (Dan 4:1) Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ βασιλεὺς πᾶσι τοῖς λαοῖς, φυλαῖς, καὶ γλώσσαις τοῖς οἰκοῦσιν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ Εἰρήνη ὑμῖν πληθυνθείη.
(Dan 4:1) A-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-ruler-of unto-all unto-the-ones unto-peoples, unto-tribings, and unto-tongues unto-the-ones unto-housing-unto in unto-all unto-the-one unto-a-soil, A-joinifying unto-ye it-may-have-been-repletened.
3:98 superscr ορασις έ A | om και A
(O) (Dan 4:1) Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ βασιλεὺς πᾶσι τοῖς λαοῖς, φυλαῖς, καὶ γλώσσαις τοῖς οἰκοῦσιν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ Εἰρήνη ὑμῖν πληθυνθείη.
(Dan 4:1) A-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-ruler-of unto-all unto-the-ones unto-peoples, unto-tribings, and unto-tongues unto-the-ones unto-housing-unto in unto-all unto-the-one unto-a-soil, A-joinifying unto-ye it-may-have-been-repletened.
3:98–100 ϗ Ναβουχοδονοσορ . . . εις γενεαν και γενεαν 87 Syr
3:98 Ναβουχοδονοσορ] pr αρχη της επιστολης 87mg
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:99 (Dan 4:2) τὰ σημεῖα καὶ τὰ τέρατα ἃ ἐποίησεν μετ' ἐμοῦ ὁ θεὸς ὁ ὕψιστος ἤρεσεν ἐναντίον ἐμοῦ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν.
(Dan 4:2) To-the-ones to-signlets-of and to-the-ones to-anomalies to-which it-did-unto with of-ME the-one a-Deity(Elah) the-one most-lofteed it-pleased to-ever-a-oned-in of-ME to-have-leadeeered-up unto-ye,
(O) (Dan 4:2) τὰ σημεῖα καὶ τὰ τέρατα ἃ ἐποίησεν μετ' ἐμοῦ ὁ θεὸς ὁ ὕψιστος ἤρεσεν ἐναντίον ἐμοῦ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν.
(Dan 4:2) To-the-ones to-signlets-of and to-the-ones to-anomalies to-which it-did-unto with of-ME the-one a-Deity(Elah) the-one most-lofteed it-pleased to-ever-a-oned-in of-ME to-have-leadeeered-up unto-ye,
3:98–100 ϗ Ναβουχοδονοσορ . . . εις γενεαν και γενεαν 87 Syr
(477 B.C.)
Dan 3:100 (Dan 4:3) ὡς μεγάλα καὶ ἰσχυρά· ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ βασιλεία αἰώνιος, ἡ ἐξουσία αὐτοῦ εἰς γενεὰν καὶ γενεάν.
(Dan 4:3) as great and force-held; the-one a-ruling-of of-it a-ruling-of aged-belonged, the-one a-being-out-unto of-it into to-a-becomedness and to-a-becomedness.
3:100 η εξουσια] pr και A | γενεαν και γενεαν] γενεας γενεω̅| A
O reads Gr. [100] (Dan 4:3) ὡς μεγάλα καὶ ἰσχυρά· ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ βασιλεία αἰώνιος, ἡ ἐξουσία αὐτοῦ εἰς γενεὰν καὶ γενεάν.
(Dan 4:3) as great and force-held; the-one a-ruling-of of-it a-ruling-of aged-belonged, the-one a-being-out-unto of-it into to-a-becomedness and to-a-becomedness.
3:98–100 ϗ Ναβουχοδονοσορ . . . εις γενεαν και γενεαν 87 Syr
3:100 ως μεγαλη και ισχυρα· ως μεγαλα και ισχυρα· 87 | bis scr η βασιλεια αυτου 87 | εις γενεαν κ. γενεαν] α´ συν γενεα κ. γενεα ς´ εν παση γενεα Syrmg
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:1 (Dan 4:4) Ἐγὼ Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ εὐθηνῶν ἤμην ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ μου καὶ εὐθαλῶν.
(Dan 4:4) I a-Nabouchodonosor goodly-froming-unto I-was in unto-the-one unto-a-house of-me and goodly-flourishing-unto.
4:1 ευθαλων] + επι του θρονου μου A
(O) (Dan 4:4) Ἔτους ὀκτωκαιδεκάτου τῆς βασιλείας Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ εἶπεν Εἰρηνεύων ἤμην ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ μου, καὶ εὐθηνῶν ἐπὶ τοῦ θρόνου μου.
(Dan 4:4) Of-a-yeareedness of-eight-and-tenth of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-a-Nabouchodonosor it-had-said, Joinifying-of I-was in unto-the-one unto-a-house of-me, and goodly-froming-unto upon of-the-one of-a-throne of-me.
4:1 pr αρχη ενυπνιου περι του δενδρου 87mg | ÷ ετους οκτωκαιδ. της βασ. 87 (deest ÷) Syr | ειρηνευων] ς´ εν ησυχια pr Θ´ εγω Syrmg
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:2 (Dan 4:5) ἐνύπνιον ἴδον καὶ ἐφοβέρισέν με, καὶ ἐταράχθην ἐπὶ τῆς κοίτης μου, καὶ αἱ ὁράσεις τῆς κεφαλῆς μου συνετάραξάν με.
(Dan 4:5) To-an-in-sleeplet I-had-seen and it-en-feareed-to to-me, and I-was-stirred upon of-the-one of-a-situating of-me, and the-ones seeeeings of-the-one of-a-head of-me they-stirred-together to-me.
4:2 ειδον Bab | εφοβερισενσεν B* εφοβερισε Bb
(O) (Dan 4:5) ἐνύπνιον εἶδον καὶ εὐλαβήθην, καὶ φόβος μοι ἐπέπεσεν.
(Dan 4:5) To-an-in-sleeplet I-had-seen and I-was-goodly-taken, and a-fearee unto-me it-had-fallen-upon.
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:3 (Dan 4:6) καὶ δι' ἐμοῦ ἐτέθη δόγμα τοῦ εἰσαγαγεῖν ἐνώπιόν μου πάντας τοὺς σοφοὺς Βαβυλῶνος ὅπως τὴν σύγκρισιν τοῦ ἐνυπνίου γνωρίσωσίν μοι.
(Dan 4:6) And through of-ME it-was-placed a-thinking-to of-the-one to-have-had-led-into to-in-look-belonged of-me to-all to-the-ones to-wisdomed of-a-Babulôn unto-which-whither to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-the-one of-an-in-sleeplet they-might-have-acquainted-to unto-me.
4:3 γνωρισωσι Bb
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:4 (Dan 4:7) καὶ εἰσεπορεύοντο οἱ ἐπαοιδοί, μάγοι, γαζαρηνοί, Χαλδαῖοι, καὶ τὸ ἐνύπνιον εἶπα ἐγὼ ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν· καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἐγνώρισάν μοι,
(Dan 4:7) And they-were-traversing-into-of, the-ones chanters-upon, magos', gazarênians, Chaldee-belonged, and to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet I-said I to-in-look-belonged of-them; and to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-it not they-acquainted-to unto-me,
Note: magos' : used to refer to educated men from the east usually specializing in astronomy.
Note: gazarênians : Greek word formed from Hebrew, meaning cutters who divined through the resultant patterns of cutting things, probably gems and stones.
4:4 Χαλδαιοι] pr και οι A
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:5 (Dan 4:8) ἕως ἦλθεν Δανιήλ, οὗ τὸ ὄνομα Βαλτασὰρ κατὰ τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ θεοῦ μου, ὃς πνεῦμα θεοῦ ἅγιον ἐν ἑαυτῷ ἔχει. ᾧ εἶπα
(Dan 4:8) unto-if-which it-had-came, a-Daniêl, of-which the-one a-naming-to a-Baltasar down to-the-one to-a-naming-to of-the-one of-a-deity(elah) of-me, which to-a-currenting-to of-a-Deity(Elah) to-hallow-belonged in unto-self it-holdeth, unto-which I-said,
4:5 εως] + ου A | Βαρτασαρ A : item 6, 16 bis | εχει] + και το ενυπνιον ενωπιον αυτου A
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:6 (Dan 4:9) Βαλτασὰρ ὁ ἄρχων τῶν ἐπαοιδῶν, ὃν ἐγὼ ἔγνων ὅτι πνεῦμα θεοῦ ἅγιον ἐν σοί, καὶ πᾶν μυστήριον οὐκ ἀδυνατεῖ σε, ἄκουσον τὴν ὅρασιν τοῦ ἐνυπνίου οὗ εἶδον, καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν αὐτοῦ εἰπόν μοι.
(Dan 4:9) Baltasar the-one firsting of-the-ones of-chanters-upon, to-which I I-had-acquainted to-which-a-one a-currenting-to of-a-Deity(Elah) hallow-belonged in unto-thee, and all a-flexerlet not it-un-ableth-unto to-thee, thou-should-have-heard to-the-one to-a-seeeeing of-the-one of-an-in-sleeplet of-which I-had-seen, and to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-it thou-should-have-said unto-me.
Note: a-flexerlet : used to refer to things requiring thought flex to understand.
4:6 σοι] εαυτω εχει A | αδυνατει] αδυνατησει A | om ου ειδον A
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:7 (Dan 4:10) ἐπὶ τῆς κοίτης μου ἐθεώρουν, καὶ ἰδοὺ δένδρον ἐν μέσῳ τῆς γῆς, καὶ τὸ ὕψος αὐτοῦ πολύ.
(Dan 4:10) Upon of-the-one of-a-situating of-me I-was-surveiling-unto, and thou-should-have-had-seen, an-en-treeing in unto-middle of-the-one of-a-soil, and the-one a-lofteedness of-it much.
(O) (Dan 4:10) ἐπὶ τῆς κοίτης μου ἐκάθευδον, καὶ ἰδοὺ δένδρον ὑψηλὸν φυόμενον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ ἡ ὅρασις αὐτοῦ μεγάλη, καὶ οὐκ ἦν ἄλλο ὅμοιον αὐτῷ.
(Dan 4:10) Upon of-the-one of-a-situating of-me I-was-resting-down, and thou-should-have-had-seen, an-en-treeing lofteed-of spawning upon of-the-one of-a-soil, and the-one a-seeeeing of-it great, and not it-was other along-belonged unto-it.
4:7 Θ´ ϗ επι της κοιτης μου Syr | om και 2° Syr | ορασις] κομη Syrtxt vid ΘΡΑΣΙΣ Syrmg
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:8 (Dan 4:11) ἐμεγαλύνθη τὸ δένδρον καὶ ἴσχυσεν, καὶ τὸ ὕψος αὐτοῦ ἔφθασεν ἕως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καὶ τὸ κύτος αὐτοῦ εἰς τὰ πέρατα ἁπάσης τῆς γῆς·
(Dan 4:11) It-was-greatened the-one an-en-treeing and it-force-held, and the-one a-lofteedness of-it it-priored unto-if-which of-the-one of-a-sky, and the-one a-swell of-it into to-the-ones to-acrossments of-along-all of-the-one of-a-soil;
4:8 δενδρον] + εκεινο A | το περας απασης] τα περατα πασης A
Dan 4:8, 9 ordered as Dan 4:9, 8 in 03.
(O) (Dan 4:11) καὶ ἡ ὅρασις αὐτοῦ μεγάλη, ἡ κορυφὴ αὐτοῦ ἤγγιζεν ἕως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τὸ κύτος αὐτοῦ ἕως τῶν νεφελῶν, πληροῦν τὰ ὑποκάτω τοῦ οὐρανοῦ· ὁ ἥλιος καὶ ἡ σελήνη ἦν, ἐν αὐτῷ ᾤκουν καὶ ἐφώτιζον πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν.
(Dan 4:11) And the-one a-seeeeing of-it great, the-one a-crest of-it it-neared-to unto-if-which of-the-one of-a-sky and the-one a-swell of-it unto-if-which of-the-ones of-cloudings, to-en-fill to-the-ones under-down-unto-which of-the-one of-a-sky; the-one a-sun and the-one a-moon it-was, in unto-it they-were-housing-unto and they-were-lighting-to to-all to-the-one to-a-soil.
4:8 ÷ και η ορασις . . . ουρανου 87 (deest V) ÷ και η ορασις . . . η σεληνη ην Syr | om εν αυτω ωκουν . . . την γην Syr
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:9 (Dan 4:12) τὰ φύλλα αὐτοῦ ὡραῖα, καὶ ὁ καρπὸς αὐτοῦ πολύς, καὶ τροφὴ πάντων ἐν αὐτῷ· καὶ ὑποκάτω αὐτοῦ κατεσκήνουν τὰ θηρία τὰ ἄγρια, καὶ ἐν τοῖς κλάδοις αὐτοῦ κατῴκουν τὰ ὄρνεα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καὶ ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἐτρέφετο πᾶσα σάρξ.
(Dan 4:12) the-ones leafs of-it hour-belonged, and the-one a-fruit of-it much, and a-nourishing of-all in unto-it; and under-down-unto-which of-it they-were-en-tenting-down, the-ones beastlets the-ones field-belonged, and in unto-the-ones unto-branches of-it they-were-housing-down-unto, the-ones en-flailings of-the-one of-a-sky, and out of-it it-was-being-nourished all a-flesh.
Note: en-flailings : groupingly refers to birds that non-glidingly flail their wings.
Dan 4:8, 9 ordered as Dan 4:9, 8 in 03.
(O) (Dan 4:12) οἱ κλάδοι αὐτοῦ τῷ μήκει ὡς σταδίων τριάκοντα, καὶ ὑποκάτω αὐτοῦ ἐσκίαζον πάντα τὰ θηρία τῆς γῆς, καὶ ἐν αὐτῷ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐνόσσευον· ὁ καρπὸς αὐτοῦ πολὺς καὶ ἀγαθός, καὶ ἐχορήγει πᾶσι τοῖς ζῴοις.
(Dan 4:12) The-ones branches of-it unto-the-one unto-a-longeedness as of-stadios' of-thirty, and under-down-unto-which of-it they-were-shadowing-to to-all to-the-ones to-beastlets of-the-one of-a-soil, and in unto-it the-ones flying-belonged-to of-the-one of-a-sky they-were-nesting-of; the-one a-fruit of-it much and excess-placed, and it-was-chorus-leading-unto unto-all unto-the-ones unto-liflets.
Note: of-stadios' : used to refer to the distance around a-stadion, an arena track, 606.75 feet.
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:10 (Dan 4:13) ἐθεώρουν ἐν ὁράματι τῆς νυκτὸς ἐπὶ τῆς κοίτης μου, καὶ ἰδοὺ εἲρ καὶ ἅγιος ἀπ' οὐρανοῦ κατέβη
(Dan 4:13) I-was-surveiling-unto in unto-a-seeeeing-to of-the-one of-a-night upon of-the-one of-a-situating of-me, and thou-should-have-had-seen, an-eir and hallow-belonged off of-a-sky it-had-stepped-down
Note: an-eir : transliterated from Aramaic, used to refer to a supernatural watcher.
4:10 μου] + εγρηγορος A
(O) (Dan 4:13) ἐθεώρουν ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ μου, καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄγγελος ἀπεστάλη ἐν ἰσχύι ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ,
(Dan 4:13) I-was-surveiling-unto in unto-the-one unto-a-sleep of-me, and thou-should-have-had-seen, a-leadeeer it-had-been-set-off in unto-a-force-holding out of-the-one of-a-sky,
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:11 (Dan 4:14) καὶ ἐφώνησεν ἐν ἰσχύι, καὶ οὕτως εἶπεν Ἐκκόψατε τὸ δένδρον, καὶ ἐκτίλατε τοὺς κλάδους αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐκτινάξατε τὰ φύλλα αὐτοῦ καὶ διασκορπίσατε τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ· σαλευθήτωσαν τὰ θηρία ὑποκάτωθεν αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ ὄρνεα ἀπὸ τῶν κλάδων αὐτοῦ.
(Dan 4:14) and it-sounded-unto in unto-a-force-holding, and unto-the-one-this it-had-said, Ye-should-have-felled-out to-the-one to-an-en-treeing, and ye-should-have-pulled-out to-the-ones to-branches of-it and ye-should-have-jolted-out to-the-ones to-leafs of-it and ye-should-have-scattered-through-to to-the-one to-a-fruit of-it; they-should-have-been-undulated-of the-ones beastlets under-down-unto-which-from of-it and the-ones en-flailings off of-the-ones of-branches of-it.
Note: en-flailings : groupingly refers to birds that non-glidingly flail their wings.
4:11 κλαδους] καρπους A | τον καρπον] τους καρπους A
(O) (Dan 4:14) καὶ ἐφώνησε καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ Ἐκκόψατε αὐτὸ καὶ καταφθείρατε αὐτό· προστέτακται γὰρ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑψίστου ἐκριζῶσαι καὶ ἀχρειῶσαι αὐτό.
(Dan 4:14) and it-sounded-unto and it-had-said unto-it, Ye-should-have-felled-out to-it and ye-should-have-degraded-down to-it; it-had-come-to-be-arranged-toward too-thus off of-the-one of-most-lofteed to-have-en-rooted-out and to-have-en-un-afford-belonged to-it.
4:11 εκ κριζωσαι (sic) 87 | αχριωσαι 87✱vid
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:12 (Dan 4:15) πλὴν τὴν φυὴν τῶν ῥιζῶν αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ γῇ ἐάσατε, καὶ ἐν δεσμῷ σιδηρῷ καὶ χαλκῷ καὶ ἐν τῇ χλόῃ τῇ ἔξω καὶ ἐν τῇ δρόσῳ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ κοιτασθήσεται, καὶ μετὰ τῶν θηρίων ἡ μερὶς αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ χόρτῳ τῆς γῆς.
(Dan 4:15) To-beyond, to-the-one to-a-spawn of-the-ones of-rootednesses of-it in unto-the-one unto-a-soil ye-should-have-let-unto, and in unto-a-bindee unto-iron and unto-coppern and in unto-the-one unto-a-greening unto-the-one out-unto-which and in unto-the-one unto-a-dew of-the-one of-a-sky it-shall-be-situated-to, and with of-the-ones of-beastlets the-one a-portion of-it in unto-the-one unto-a-victualage of-the-one of-a-soil.
(O) (Dan 4:15) καὶ οὕτως εἶπεν Ῥίζαν μίαν ἄφετε αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ γῇ, ὅπως μετὰ τῶν θηρίων τῆς γῆς ἐν τοῖς ὄρεσιν χόρτον ὡς βοῦς νέμηται,
(Dan 4:15) And unto-the-one-this it-had-said, To-a-rootedness to-one ye-should-have-had-sent-off of-it in unto-the-one unto-a-soil, unto-which-whither with of-the-ones of-beastlets of-the-one of-a-soil in unto-the-ones unto-jutteednesses to-a-victualage as an-ox it-might-be-parceled,
4:12 ως] ω sup ras 871
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:13 (Dan 4:16) ἡ καρδία αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἀλλοιωθήσεται, καὶ καρδία θηρίου δοθήσεται αὐτῷ, καὶ ἑπτὰ καιροὶ ἀλλαγήσονται ἐπ' αὐτόν.
(Dan 4:16) The-one a-heart of-it off of-the-ones of-mankinds it-shall-be-en-othered, and a-heart of-a-beastlet it-shall-be-given unto-it, and seven times they-shall-be-othered upon to-it.
(O) (Dan 4:16) καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς δρόσου τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ ἀλλοιωθῇ, καὶ ἑπτὰ ἔτη βοσκηθῇ σὺν αὐτοῖς,
(Dan 4:16) and off of-the-one of-a-dew of-the-one of-a-sky the-one an-en-capsuling-to of-it it-was-en-othered, and to-seven to-yeareednesses it-might-have-been-pasturaged together unto-them,
4:13 ΒΟΣΚΗΘΗ Syrmg
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:14 (Dan 4:17) διὰ συνκρίματος εἲρ ὁ λόγος, καὶ ῥῆμα ἁγίων τὸ ἐπερώτημα, ἵνα γνῶσιν οἱ ζῶντες ὅτι κύριός ἐστιν ὁ ὕψιστος τῆς βασιλείας τῶν ἀνθρώπων, καὶ ᾧ ἐὰν δόξῃ δώσει αὐτὴν καὶ ἐξουδένημα ἀνθρώπων ἀναστήσει ἐπ' αὐτήν.
(Dan 4:17) Through of-a-separating-together-to of-an-eir the-one a-forthee, and an-uttering-to of-hallow-belonged the-one an-entreating-upon-to, so they-might-have-had-acquainted, the-ones lifing-unto, to-which-a-one Authority-belonged it-be the-one most-lofteed of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-the-ones of-mankinds, and unto-which if-ever it-might-have-thought-unto it-shall-give to-it and to-a-not-then-also-oneing-out-to of-mankinds it-shall-stand-up upon to-it.
Note: of-an-eir : transliterated from Aramaic, used to refer to a supernatural watcher.
4:14 συγκριματος BabAQ | ρημα] λογος A | αγιων] ων non inst Bb | περωτημα B* (ε superscr Bab) | εξουδενημα] εξουθενωμα A | αναστησεται A
(O) (Dan 4:17) ἕως ἂν γνῷ τὸν κύριον τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν πάντων τῶν ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ καὶ τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ ὅσα ἂν θέλῃ ποιεῖν ποιεῖ ἐν αὐτοῖς.
(Dan 4:17) unto-if-which ever it-might-have-had-acquainted to-the-one to-Authority-belonged of-the-one of-a-sky to-a-being-out-unto to-hold of-all of-the-ones in unto-the-one unto-a-sky and of-the-ones upon of-the-one of-a-soil, and to-which-a-which ever it-might-determine to-do-unto it-doeth-unto in unto-them.
4:14 om ποιειν Syr
HS reads Gr. [14a] (Dan 4:17a) ἐνώπιόν μου ἐξεκόπη ἐν ἡμέρᾳ μιᾷ, καὶ ἡ καταφθορὰ αὐτοῦ ἐν ὥρᾳ μιᾷ τῆς ἡμέρας, καὶ οἱ κλάδοι αὐτοῦ ἐδόθησαν εἰς πάντα ἄνεμον, καὶ εἱλκύσθη καὶ ἐρρίφη· καὶ τὸν χόρτον τῆς γῆς ἤσθιε, καὶ εἰς φυλακὴν παρεδόθη, καὶ ἐν πέδαις καὶ ἐν χειροπέδαις χαλκαῖς ἐδέθη ὑπ' αὐτῶν. σφόδρα ἐθαύμασα ἐπὶ τούτοις, καὶ ὁ ὕπνος μου ἀπέστη ἀπὸ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν μου.
(Dan 14:17a) To-in-look-belonged of-me it-was-felled-out in unto-a-dayedness unto-one, and the-one a-degradedness-down of-it in unto-an-houredness unto-one of-the-one of-a-dayedness, and the-ones branches of-it they-were-given into to-all to-a-wind, and it-was-haulationed and it-was-flung; and to-the-one to-a-victualage of-the-one of-a-soil it-was-eat-belonging, and into to-a-guardery it-was-given-beside, and in unto-footings and in unto-hand-footings unto-coppern it-was-binded under of-them. To-vehemented I-marveled-to upon unto-the-ones-these, and the-one a-sleep of-me it-had-stood-off off of-the-ones of-eyes of-me.
4:14a οι κλαδοι] om οι 87✱(hab 87?(mg)) | γης] + μετα των θηριων της γης Syr | τουτοις] pr πασι Syr
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:15 (Dan 4:18) τοῦτο τὸ ἐνύπνιον ὃ ἴδον ἐγὼ Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ βασιλεύς, καὶ σύ, Βαλτασάρ, τὸ σύγκριμα εἰπόν, ὅτι πάντες οἱ σοφοὶ τῆς βασιλείας μου οὐ δύνανται τὸ σύγκριμα αὐτοῦ δηλῶσαί μοι· σὺ δέ, Δανιήλ, δύνασαι, ὅτι θεοῦ πνεῦμα ἅγιον ἐν σοί.
(Dan 4:18) The-one-this the-one an-in-sleeplet to-which I-had-seen I a-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-ruler-of, and thou, Baltasar, to-the-one to-a-separating-together-to thou-should-have-said, to-which-a-one all the-ones wisdomed of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-me not they-able to-the-one to-a-separating-together-to of-it to-have-en-distincted unto-me; thou then-also, Daniêl, thou-able, to-which-a-one of-a-Deity(Elah) a-currenting-to hallow-belonged in unto-thee.
4:15 ειδον Bab | θυ̅ πν̅α̅ θυ̅ B* (non inst θυ̅ 2° Bb) πν̅α̅ θυ̅ A | εν σοι αγιον A
(O) (Dan 4:18) καὶ ἀναστὰς τὸ πρωὶ ἐκ τῆς κοίτης μου ἐκάλεσα τὸν Δανιὴλ τὸν ἄρχοντα τῶν σοφιστῶν καὶ τὸν ἡγούμενον τῶν κρινόντων τὰ ἐνύπνια, καὶ διηγησάμην αὐτῷ τὸ ἐνύπνιον, καὶ ὑπέδειξέ μοι πᾶσαν τὴν σύγκρισιν αὐτοῦ.
(Dan 4:18) And having-had-stood-up to-the-one unto-before-belonged out of-the-one of-a-situating of-me I-called-unto to-the-one to-a-Daniêl to-the-one to-firsting of-the-ones of-wisdom-belongers and to-the-one to-leading-unto of-the-ones of-separating to-the-ones to-in-sleeplets, and I-led-through-unto unto-it to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet, and it-en-showed-under unto-me to-all to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-it.
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:16 (Dan 4:19) Τότε Δανιήλ, οὗ τὸ ὄνομα Βαλτασάρ, ἀπενεώθη ὡσεὶ ὥραν μίαν, καὶ οἱ διαλογισμοὶ αὐτοῦ συνετάρασσον αὐτόν. καὶ ἀπεκρίθη Βαλτασὰρ καὶ εἶπεν Κύριε, τὸ ἐνύπνιον ἔστω τοῖς μισοῦσίν σε, καὶ ἡ σύγκρισις αὐτοῦ τοῖς ἐχθροῖς σου.
(Dan 4:19) To-the-one-which-also a-Daniêl, of-which the-one a-naming-to a-Baltasar, it-was-en-nodded-in-off as-if to-an-houredness to-one, and the-ones fortheeings-through-to-of of-it they-were-stirring-together to-it. And it-was-separated-off a-Baltasar and it-had-said, Authority-belonged(mare), the-one an-in-sleeplet it-should-be unto-the-ones unto-hating-unto to-thee, and the-one a-separating-together of-it unto-the-ones unto-en-enmitied of-thee.
4:16 απηνεωθη BabA | αυτον] + και απεκριθη ο βασιλευς και ειπεν βαλτασαρ (Βαρτ. A) το ενυπνιον και η συγκρισις μη κατασπευσατε σε A | εστω το ενυπνιον A
(O) (Dan 4:19) Μεγάλως δὲ ἐθαύμασεν ὁ Δανιὴλ καὶ ὑπόνοια κατέσπευδεν αὐτόν· καὶ φοβηθεὶς τρόμου λαβόντος αὐτὸν καὶ ἀλλοιωθείσης τῆς ὁράσεως αὐτοῦ, κινήσας τὴν κεφαλήν, ὥραν μίαν ἀποθαυμάσας ἀπεκρίθη μοι φωνῇ πραείᾳ Βασιλεῦ, τὸ ἐνύπνιον τοῦτο τοῖς μισοῦσί σε καὶ ἡ σύγκρισις αὐτοῦ τοῖς ἐχθροῖς σου ἐπέλθοι.
(Dan 4:19) Unto-great then-also it-marveled-to, the-one a-Daniêl, and an-en-mulling-under-unto it-was-hastening-down to-it; and having-been-feareed-unto of-a-tremblee of-having-had-taken to-it and of-having-been-en-othered of-the-one of-a-seeeeing of-it, having-moved-unto to-the-one to-a-head, to-an-houredness to-one having-off-marveled-to it-was-separated-off unto-me unto-a-sound unto-mild, Ruler-of, the-one an-in-sleeplet the-one-this unto-the-ones unto-hating-unto to-thee and the-one a-separating-together of-it unto-the-ones unto-en-enmitied of-thee it-may-have-had-came-upon.
4:16 κινησας] pr και Syr | ωραν] pr και Syr
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:17 (Dan 4:20) τὸ δένδρον ὃ ἴδες μεγαλυνθὲν καὶ τὸ ἰσχυκός, οὗ τὸ ὕψος ἔφθασεν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὸ κύτος αὐτοῦ εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν,
(Dan 4:20) The-one an-en-treeing to-which thou-had-seen having-been-greatened and the-one having-had-come-to-force-hold, of-which the-one a-lofteedness it-priored into to-the-one to-a-sky and the-one a-swell of-it into to-all to-the-one to-a-soil,
4:17 ειδες Bab | μεγαλυνθεν] pr το A | εφθανεν] εφθασεν A
(O) (Dan 4:20) τὸ δένδρον τὸ ἐν τῇ γῇ πεφυτευμένον, οὗ ἡ ὅρασις μεγάλη, σὺ εἶ, βασιλεῦ.
(Dan 4:20) The-one an-en-treeing the-one in unto-the-one unto-a-soil having-had-come-to-be-planted-of, of-which the-one a-seeeeing great, thou thou-be, Ruler-of.
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:18 (Dan 4:21) καὶ τὰ φύλλα αὐτοῦ εὐθαλῆ, καὶ ὁ καρπὸς αὐτοῦ πολύς, καὶ τροφὴ πᾶσιν ἐν αὐτῷ· ὑποκάτω αὐτοῦ κατῴκουν τὰ θηρία τὰ ἄγρια, καὶ ἐν τοῖς κλάδοις αὐτοῦ κατεσκήνουν τὰ ὄρνεα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ·
(Dan 4:21) and the-ones leafs of-it goodly-flourishinged, and the-one a-fruit of-it much, and a-nourishing unto-all in unto-it; under-down-unto-which of-it they-were-housing-down-unto, the-ones beastlets the-ones field-belonged, and in unto-the-ones unto-branches of-it they-were-en-tenting-down, the-ones en-flailings of-the-one of-a-sky;
Note: en-flailings : groupingly refers to birds that non-glidingly flail their wings.
4:18 om και I° A | κατεσκηνουν] κατωκουν A
(O) (Dan 4:21) καὶ πάντα τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τὰ νοσσεύοντα ἐν αὐτῷ· ἡ ἰσχὺς τῆς γῆς καὶ τῶν ἐθνῶν καὶ τῶν γλωσσῶν πασῶν ἕως τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς καὶ πᾶσαι αἱ χῶραι σοὶ δουλεύουσι.
(Dan 4:21) And all the-ones flying-belonged-to of-the-one of-a-sky the-ones nesting-of in unto-it; the-one a-force-holding of-the-one of-a-soil and of-the-ones of-placeedness-belongings-to and of-the-ones of-tongues of-all unto-if-which of-the-ones of-acrossments of-the-one of-a-soil and all the-ones spacednesses unto-thee they-bondee-of.
4:18 η ισχυς] om η 87✱ (hab 871) | δουλευσουσι Syr
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:19 (Dan 4:22) σὺ εἶ, βασιλεῦ· ὅτι ἐμεγαλύνθης καὶ ἴσχυσας, καὶ ἡ μεγαλωσύνη σου ἐμεγαλύνθη καὶ ἔφθασεν εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, καὶ ἡ κυρία σου εἰς τὰ πέρατα τῆς γῆς.
(Dan 4:22) thou thou-be, Ruler-of; to-which-a-one thou-was-greatened and thou-force-held, and the-one an-en-greateningedness of-thee it-was-greatened and it-priored into to-the-one to-a-sky, and the-one an-authoritying-unto of-thee into to-the-ones to-acrossments of-the-one of-a-soil;
4:19 κυρεια Bab κυριεια A
(O) (Dan 4:22) τὸ δὲ ἀνυψωθῆναι τὸ δένδρον ἐκεῖνο καὶ ἐγγίσαι τῷ οὐρανῷ καὶ τὸ κύτος αὐτοῦ ἅψασθαι τῶν νεφελῶν· σύ, βασιλεῦ, ὑψώθης ὑπὲρ πάντας τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τοὺς ὄντας ἐπὶ προσώπου πάσης τῆς γῆς, ὑψώθη σου ἡ καρδία ὑπερηφανίᾳ καὶ ἰσχύι τὰ πρὸς τὸν ἅγιον καὶ τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ· τὰ ἔργα σου ὤφθη, καθότι ἐξερήμωσας τὸν οἶκον τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος ἐπὶ ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις τοῦ λαοῦ τοῦ ἡγιασμένου.
(Dan 4:22) To-the-one then-also to-have-been-en-lofteed-up to-the-one to-an-en-treeing to-the-one-thither and to-have-neared-to unto-the-one unto-a-sky and to-the-one to-a-swell of-it to-have-fastened of-the-ones of-cloudings; thou, Ruler-of, thou-was-en-lofteed over to-all to-the-ones to-mankinds to-the-ones to-being upon of-looked-toward of-all of-the-one of-a-soil, it-was-en-lofteed of-thee the-one a-heart unto-a-manifesting-over-unto and unto-a-force-holding to-the-ones toward to-the-one to-hallow-belonged and to-the-ones to-leadeeers of-it; the-ones works of-thee it-was-beheld, down-to-which-a-one thou-en-solituded-out to-the-one to-a-house of-the-one of-a-Deity of-the-one of-lifing-unto upon unto-the-ones unto-un-adjustings-along-unto of-the-one of-a-people of-the-one of-having-had-come-to-be-hallow-belonged-to.
4:19 post εκεινο ras aliq 87? | ΗΓΙΑΣΜΕΝΟΥ Syrmg
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:20 (Dan 4:23) καὶ ὅτι ἴδεν ὁ βασιλεὺς εἲρ καὶ ἅγιον καταβαίνοντα ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ· καὶ εἶπεν Ἐκτίλατε τὸ δένδρον καὶ διαφθείρατε αὐτό, πλὴν τὴν φυὴν τῶν ῥιζῶν αὐτοῦ ἐάσατε ἐν τῇ γῇ, καὶ ἐν δεσμῷ σιδηρῷ καὶ ἐν χαλκῷ καὶ ἐν τῇ χλόῃ τῇ ἔξω καὶ ἐν τῇ δρόσῳ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ αὐλισθήσεται, καὶ μετὰ θηρίων ἀγρίων ἡ μερὶς αὐτοῦ ἕως οὗ ἑπτὰ καιροὶ ἀλλοιωθῶσιν ἐπ' αὐτόν·
(Dan 4:23) and to-which-a-one it-had-seen, the-one a-ruler-of, to-an-eir and to-hallow-belonged to-stepping-down off of-the-one of-a-sky; and it-had-said, Ye-should-have-pulled-out to-the-one to-an-en-treeing and ye-should-have-degraded-through to-it, to-beyond, to-the-one to-a-spawn of-the-ones of-rootednesses of-it ye-should-have-let-unto in unto-the-one unto-a-soil, and in unto-a-bindee unto-iron and in unto-coppern and in unto-the-one unto-a-greening unto-the-one out-unto-which and in unto-the-one unto-a-dew of-the-one of-a-sky it-shall-be-channeled-to, and with of-beastlets of-field-belonged the-one a-portion of-it unto-if-which of-which seven times they-might-have-been-en-other-belonged upon to-it;
Note: to-an-eir : transliterated from Aramaic, used to refer to a supernatural watcher.
4:20 ειδεν Bab | απο του ουρ.] εκ του ουρ. A | om εν 3° A
(O) (Dan 4:23) καὶ ἡ ὅρασις ἣν εἶδες, ὅτι ἄγγελος ἐν ἰσχύι ἀπεστάλη παρὰ τοῦ κυρίου, καὶ ὅτι εἶπεν ἐξᾶραι τὸ δένδρον καὶ ἐκκόψαι· ἡ κρίσις τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ μεγάλου ἥξει ἐπὶ σέ,
(Dan 4:23) And the-one a-seeeeing to-which thou-had-seen, to-which-a-one a-leadeeer in unto-a-force-holding it-had-been-set-off beside of-the-one of-Authority-belonged, and to-which-a-one it-had-said to-have-lifted-out to-the-one to-an-en-treeing and to-have-felled-out; the-one a-separating of-the-one of-a-Deity of-the-one of-great it-shall-arrive upon to-thee,
4:20 ηξει] ηκει Syr
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:21 (Dan 4:24) τοῦτο ἡ σύγκρισις αὐτοῦ, βασιλεῦ, καὶ σύγκριμα Ὑψίστου ἐστὶν ὃ ἔφθασεν ἐπὶ τὸν κύριόν μου τὸν βασιλέα,
(Dan 4:24) the-one-this the-one a-separating-together of-it, Ruler-of, and a-separating-together-to of-most-lofteed it-be to-which it-priored upon to-the-one to-authority-belonged(mare) of-me to-the-one to-a-ruler-of,
(O) (Dan 4:24) καὶ ὁ ὕψιστος καὶ οἱ ἄγγελοι αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ σὲ κατατρέχουσιν·
(Dan 4:24) and the-one most-lofteed and the-ones leadeeers of-it upon to-thee they-circuiteth-down;
4:21 κατατρεχουσιν] καταδραμουσιν Syrvid
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:22 (Dan 4:25) καὶ σὲ ἐκδιώξουσιν ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, καὶ μετὰ θηρίων ἀγρίων ἔσται ἡ κατοικία σου, καὶ χόρτον ὡς βοῦν ψωμιοῦσίν σε, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς δρόσου τοῦ οὐρανοῦ αὐλισθήσῃ, καὶ ἑπτὰ καιροὶ ἀλλαγήσονται ἐπὶ σέ· ἕως οὗ γνῷς ὅτι κυριεύει ὁ ὕψιστος τῆς βασιλείας τῶν ἀνθρώπων, καὶ ᾧ ἂν δόξῃ δώσει αὐτήν.
(Dan 4:25) and to-thee they-shall-pursue-out off of-the-ones of-mankinds, and with of-beastlets of-field-belonged it-shall-be the-one a-housing-down-unto of-thee, and to-a-victualage as to-an-ox they-shall-morsel-to to-thee, and off of-the-one of-a-dew of-the-one of-a-sky thou-shall-be-channeled-to, and seven times they-shall-be-othered upon to-thee, unto-if-which of-which thou-might-have-had-acquainted to-which-a-one it-authority-belongeth-of, the-one most-lofteed, of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-the-ones of-mankinds, and unto-which ever it-might-have-thought-unto it-shall-give to-it;
4:22 εκδιωξουσιν] εκδιξουσεν A*? | κατοικεια A : item 29, 32 | ψωμιουσιν] ψωμισουσιν A | γνως] γνω Bb vid | αν] εαν A
(O) (Dan 4:25) εἰς φυλακὴν ἀπάξουσί σε, καὶ εἰς τόπον ἔρημον ἀποστελοῦσί σε.
(Dan 4:25) into to-a-guardery they-shall-lead-off to-thee, and into to-an-occasion to-solituded they-shall-set-off to-thee.
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:23 (Dan 4:26) καὶ ὅτι εἶπαν Ἐάσατε τὴν φυὴν τῶν ῥιζῶν τοῦ δένδρου, ἡ βασιλεία σού σοι μενεῖ ἀφ' ἧς ἂν γνῷς τὴν ἐξουσίαν τὴν οὐράνιον.
(Dan 4:26) and to-which-a-one they-said, Ye-should-have-let-unto to-the-one to-a-spawn of-the-ones of-rootednesses of-the-one of-an-en-treeing, the-one a-ruling-of of-thee unto-thee it-shall-stay off of-which ever thou-might-have-had-acquainted to-the-one to-a-being-out-unto to-the-one to-skyed-belonged.
4:23 ειπαν] ειπεν A | om των ριζων A | ουρανιον] επουρανιον A
(O) (Dan 4:26) καὶ ἡ ῥίζα τοῦ δένδρου ἡ ἀφεθεῖσα, ἐπεὶ οὐκ ἐξεριζώθη· ὁ τόπος τοῦ θρόνου σού σοι συντηρηθήσεται εἰς καιρὸν καὶ ὥραν. ἰδοὺ ἐπὶ σὲ ἑτοιμάζονται, καὶ μαστιγώσουσί σε καὶ ἐπάξουσι τὰ κεκριμένα ἐπὶ σέ. (Dan 4:27) Κύριος ζῇ ἐν οὐρανῷ καὶ ἡ ἐξουσία αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ γῇ.
(Dan 4:26) And the-one a-rootedness of-the-one of-an-en-treeing the-one having-been-sent-off, upon-if not it-was-en-rooted-out; the-one an-occasion of-the-one of-throne of-thee unto-thee it-shall-be-kept-together-unto into to-a-time and to-an-houredness. Thou-should-have-had-seen, upon to-thee they-be-readied-to, and they-shall-whip-to to-thee and they-shall-lead-upon to-the-ones to-having-had-come-to-be-separated upon to-thee. (Dan 4:27) Authority-belonged it-lifeth-unto in unto-a-sky and the-one a-being-out-unto of-it upon unto-all unto-the-one unto-a-soil.
4:23 ΚΕΡΙΜΜΕΝΑ (sic) Syrmg
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:24 (Dan 4:27) διὰ τοῦτο, βασιλεῦ, ἡ βουλή μου ἀρεσάτω σοι, καὶ τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου ἐν ἐλεημοσύναις λύτρωσαι καὶ τὰς ἀδικίας ἐν οἰκτιρμοῖς πενήτων· ἴσως ἔσται μακρόθυμος τοῖς παραπτώμασίν σου ὁ θεός.
(Dan 4:27) Through to-the-one-this, Ruler-of, the-one a-purposing of-me it-should-have-pleased unto-thee, and to-the-ones to-un-adjustings-along-unto of-thee in unto-besectionatingednesses thou-should-have-en-loosed and to-the-ones to-un-coursings-unto in unto-pitierings-of of-necessitatinged; unto-samed it-shall-be en-long-passioned unto-the-ones unto-en-fallings-beside-to of-thee the-one a-Deity.
4:24 αδικιας] + σου A
(O) (Dan 4:27) αὐτοῦ δεήθητι περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν σου καὶ πάσας τὰς ἀδικίας σου ἐλεημοσύναις λύτρωσαι, ἵνα ἐπιείκεια δοθῇ σοι καὶ πολυήμερος γένῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ θρόνου τῆς βασιλείας σου, καὶ μὴ καταφθείρῃ σε. τούτους τοὺς λόγους ἀγάπησον· ἀκριβὴς γάρ μου ὁ λόγος, καὶ πλήρης ὁ χρόνος σου.
(Dan 4:27) Of-it thou-should-have-been-binded about of-the-ones of-un-adjustings-along-unto of-thee and to-all to-the-ones to-un-coursings-unto of-thee unto-besectionatingednesses thou-should-have-en-loosed, so a-resembling-upon-of it-might-have-been-given unto-thee and much-dayed thou-might-have-had-became upon of-the-one of-a-throne of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-thee, and lest it-might-degrade-down to-thee. To-the-ones-these to-the-ones to-forthees thou-should-have-excessed-off-unto; exactinged too-thus of-me the-one a-forthee, and fullinged the-one a-while of-thee.
4:24 ελεημοσυναις] λ sup ras 87? | καταφθειρη] τα sup ras 87a | om σε Syr
(462 B.C.)
Dan 4:25 (Dan 4:28) Ταῦτα πάντα ἔφθασεν ἐπὶ Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ τὸν βασιλέα.
(Dan 4:28) The-ones-these all it-priored upon to-a-Nabouchodonosor to-the-one to-a-ruler-of.
(O) (Dan 4:28) Καὶ ἐπὶ συντελείᾳ τῶν λόγων Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὡς ἤκουσεν τὴν κρίσιν τοῦ ὁράματος, τοὺς λόγους ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ συνετήρησε.
(Dan 4:28) And upon unto-a-finishing-together-of of-the-ones of-forthees a-Nabouchodonosor as it-heard to-the-one to-a-separating of-the-one of-a-seeeeing-to, to-the-ones to-forthees in unto-the-one unto-a-heart it-kept-together-unto.
4:25 και επι συντελεια . . . συνετηρησε] Θ´ ταυτα παντα εφθασεν επι Ναβουχοδονοσορ τον βασιλεα Syrmg
(461 B.C.)
Dan 4:26 (Dan 4:29) μετὰ δωδεκάμηνον, ἐπὶ τῷ ναῷ τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ ἐν Βαβυλῶνι περιπατῶν,
(Dan 4:29) With to-two-ten-monthed, upon unto-the-one unto-a-temple of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-it in unto-a-Babulôn treading-about-unto,
4:26 βασιλιας B* (-λειας Bb)
(O) (Dan 4:29) Καὶ μετὰ μῆνας δώδεκα ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐπὶ τῶν τειχῶν τῆς πόλεως μετὰ πάσης τῆς δόξης αὐτοῦ περιεπάτει καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν πύργων αὐτῆς διεπορεύετο,
(Dan 4:29) And with to-months to-two-ten the-one a-ruler-of upon of-the-ones of-lineationeednesses of-the-one of-a-city with of-all of-the-one of-a-reckonedness of-it it-was-treading-about-unto and upon of-the-ones of-towers of-it it-was-traversing-through-of,
(461 B.C.)
Dan 4:27 (Dan 4:30) ἀπεκρίθη ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ εἶπεν Οὐχ αὕτη ἐστὶν Βαβυλὼν ἡ μεγάλη ἣν ἐγὼ ᾠκοδόμησα εἰς οἶκον βασιλείας, ἐν τῷ κράτει τῆς ἰσχύος μου, εἰς τιμὴν τῆς δόξης μου;
(Dan 4:30) it-was-separated-off the-one a-ruler-of and it-had-said, Not the-one-this it-be a-Babulôn the-one great to-which I I-house-built-unto into to-a-house of-a-ruling-of, in unto-the-one unto-a-securement of-the-one of-a-force-holding of-me, into to-a-valuation of-the-one of-a-reckonedness of-me?
4:27 om ο βασιλευς A
(O) (Dan 4:30) καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς εἶπεν Αὕτη ἐστὶ Βαβυλὼν ἡ μεγάλη, ἣν ἐγὼ ᾠκοδόμησα, καὶ οἶκος βασιλείας μου ἐν ἰσχύι κράτους μου κληθήσεται εἰς τιμὴν τῆς δόξης μου.
(Dan 4:30) and having-been-separated-off it-had-said, The-one-this it-be a-Babulôn the-one great, to-which I I-house-built-unto, and a-house of-a-ruling-of of-me in unto-a-force-holding of-a-securement of-me it-shall-be-called-unto into to-a-valuation of-the-one of-reckonedness of-me.
(461 B.C.)
Dan 4:28 (Dan 4:31) ἔτι τοῦ λόγου ἐν στόματι τοῦ βασιλέως ὄντος φωνὴ ἀπ' οὐρανοῦ ἐγένετο Σοὶ λέγουσιν, Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ βασιλεῦ, ἡ βασιλεία παρῆλθεν ἀπὸ σοῦ,
(Dan 4:31) If-to-a-one of-the-one of-a-forthee in unto-a-becutteeing-to of-the-one of-a-ruler-of of-being a-sound off of-a-sky it-had-became, Unto-thee they-forth, Nabouchodonosor Ruler-of, The-one a-ruling-of it-had-came-beside off of-thee,
4:28 απ ουρανου] εκ του ουρ. A | βασιλεια] + σου A
(O) (Dan 4:31) ἔτι τοῦ λόγου ἐν τῷ στόματι τοῦ βασιλέως ὄντος, καὶ ἐπὶ συντελείας τοῦ λόγου αὐτοῦ φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἤκουσε Σοὶ λέγεται, Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ βασιλεῦ, ἡ βασιλεία Βαβυλῶνος ἀφῄρηταί σου καὶ ἑτέρῳ δίδοται, ἐξουθενημένῳ ἀνθρώπῳ ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ σου. ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ καθίστημι αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τῆς βασιλείας σου, καὶ τὴν ἐξουσίαν σου καὶ τὴν δόξαν σου καὶ τὴν τρυφήν σου παραλήψεται, ὅπως ἐπιγνῷς ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ θεὸς τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, καὶ ᾧ ἐὰν βούληται δώσει αὐτήν· ἕως δὲ ἡλίου ἀνατολῆς βασιλεὺς ἕτερος εὐφραθήσεται ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ σου, καὶ κρατήσει τῆς δόξης σου καὶ τῆς ἰσχύος σου καὶ τῆς ἐξουσίας σου.
(Dan 4:31) If-to-a-one of-the-one of-a-forthee in unto-the-one unto-a-becutteeing-to of-the-one of-a-ruler-of of-being, and upon of-a-finishing-together-of of-the-one of-a-forthee of-it to-a-sound out of-the-one of-a-sky it-heard, Unto-thee it-be-forthed, Nabouchodonosor Ruler-of, the-one a-ruling-of of-a-Babulôn it-had-come-to-be-sectioned-along-off-unto of-thee and unto-different it-be-given, unto-having-had-come-to-be-not-from-oned-out-unto unto-a-mankind in unto-the-one unto-a-house of-thee. Thou-should-have-had-seen, I I-stand-down to-it upon of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-thee, and to-the-one to-a-being-out-unto of-thee and to-the-one to-a-reckonedness of-thee and to-the-one to-a-luxury of-thee it-shall-take-beside, unto-which-whither thou-might-have-had-acquainted-upon to-which-a-one to-a-being-out-unto it-holdeth, the-one a-Deity of-the-one of-a-sky, in unto-the-one unto-a-ruling-of of-the-ones of-mankinds, and unto-which if-ever it-purposeth it-shall-give to-it; unto-if-which then-also of-a-sun of-a-finishing-up a-ruler-of different it-shall-be-goodly-centered in unto-the-one unto-a-house of-thee, and it-shall-secure-unto of-the-one of-a-reckonedness of-thee and of-the-one of-a-force-holding of-thee and of-the-one of-a-being-out-unto of-thee.
4:28 om ετι του λογου . . . οντος Syrtxt (hab sub Θ´Syrmg) | οντος] οντως 87✱ (-τος 87a) | καωιστημι] inter ι I° et σ ras aliq 87? (ι fort ex ε fec)
(461 B.C.)
Dan 4:29 (Dan 4:32) καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων σε ἐκδιώξουσιν, καὶ μετὰ θηρίων ἀγρίων ἡ κατοικία σου, καὶ χόρτον ὡς βοῦν ψωμιοῦσίν σε, καὶ ἑπτὰ καιροὶ ἀλλαγήσονται ἐπὶ σέ, ἕως γνῷς ὅτι κυριεύει ὁ ὕψιστος τῆς βασιλείας τῶν ἀνθρώπων, καὶ ᾧ ἐὰν δόξῃ δώσει αὐτήν.
(Dan 4:32) and off of-the-ones of-mankinds to-thee they-shall-pursue-out, and with of-beastlets of-field-belonged the-one a-housing-down-unto of-thee, and to-a-victualage as to-an-ox they-shall-morsel-to to-thee, and seven times they-shall-be-othered upon to-thee, unto-if-which thou-might-have-had-acquainted to-which-a-one it-authority-belongeth-of, the-one most-lofteed, of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-the-ones of-mankinds, and unto-which if-ever it-might-have-thought-unto it-shall-give to-it.
4:29 εκδιωξουσιν A | η κατοικια] pr εσται A | ψωμισουσιν A | εως] + ου A
(O) (Dan 4:32) καὶ οἱ ἄγγελοι διώξονταί σε ἐπὶ ἔτη ἑπτά, καὶ οὐ μὴ ὀφθῇς οὐδ' οὐ μὴ λαλήσῃς μετὰ παντὸς ἀνθρώπου· χόρτον ὡς βοῦν σε ψωμίσουσι καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς χλόης τῆς γῆς ἔσται ἡ νομή σου· ἰδοὺ ἀντὶ τῆς δόξης σου δήσουσί σε, καὶ τὸν οἶκον τῆς τρυφῆς σου καὶ τῆς βασιλείας σου ἕτερος ἕξει.
(Dan 4:32) And the-ones leadeeers they-shall-pursue to-thee upon to-yeareednesses to-seven, and not lest thou-might-have-been-beheld not-then-also not lest thou-might-have-spoke-unto with of-all of-a-mankind; to-a-victualage as to-an-ox to-thee they-shall-morsel-to and off of-the-one of-a-greening of-the-one of-a-soil it-shall-be the-one a-parceleeing of-thee; thou-should-have-had-seen, ever-a-one of-the-one of-a-reckonedness of-thee they-shall-bind to-thee, and to-the-one to-a-house of-the-one of-a-luxury of-thee and of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-thee different it-shall-hold;
4:29 om επι Syr | την βασιλειαν Syr
(461-454 B.C.)
Dan 4:30 (Dan 4:33) αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ ὁ λόγος συνετελέσθη ἐπὶ Ναβουχοδονοσόρ, καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐξεδιώχθη, καὶ χόρτον ὡς βοῦς ἤσθιεν, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς δρόσου τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ ἐβάφη, ἕως αἱ τρίχες αὐτοῦ ὡς λεόντων ἐμεγαλύνθησαν καὶ οἱ ὄνυχες αὐτοῦ ὡς ὀρνέων.
(Dan 4:33) Unto-the-one-this unto-the-one unto-an-houredness the-one a-forthee it-was-finished-together-unto upon to-a-Nabouchodonosor, and off of-the-ones of-mankinds it-was-pursued-out, and to-a-victualage as an-ox it-was-eat-belonging, and off of-the-one of-a-dew of-the-one of-a-sky the-one an-en-capsuling-to of-it it-was-dipped, unto-if-which the-ones hairs of-it as of-lions they-were-greatened and the-ones unguises of-it as of-en-flailings.
Note: en-flailings : groupingly refers to birds that non-glidingly flail their wings.
4:30 Ναβουχοδονοσορ] + τον βασιλεα A | βους] βου A* (superscr ς Aa?) | εως] + ου A
(O) (Dan 4:33) ἕως δὲ πρωὶ πάντα τελεσθήσεται ἐπὶ σέ, Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ βασιλεῦ Βαβυλῶνος, καὶ οὐχ ὑστερήσει ἀπὸ πάντων τούτων οὐθέν.
(Dan 4:33) unto-if-which then-also unto-before-belonged all it-shall-be-finished-unto upon to-thee, Nabouchodonosor Ruler-of of-a-Babulôn, and not it-shall-latter-unto off of-all of-the-ones-these, not-from-one.
O reads Gr. [30a] (Dan 4:33a) Ἐγὼ Ναβουχοδονοσόρ, βασιλεὺς Βαβυλῶνος, ἑπτὰ ἔτη ἐπεδήθην· χόρτον ὡς βοῦν ἐψώμισάν με καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς χλόης τῆς γῆς ἤσθιον. καὶ μετὰ ἔτη ἑπτὰ ἔδωκα τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς δέησιν, καὶ ἠξίωσα περὶ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν μου κατὰ πρόσωπον Κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καὶ περὶ τῶν ἀγνοιῶν μου τοῦ θεοῦ τῶν θεῶν τοῦ μεγάλου ἐδεήθην.
(Dan 4:33a) I a-Nabouchodonosor, a-ruler-of of-a-Babulôn, to-seven to-yeareednesses I-was-footed-unto; to-a-victualage as to-an-ox they-morseled-to to-me and off of-the-one of-a-greening of-the-one of-a-soil I-was-eat-belonging. And with to-yeareednesses to-seven I-gave to-the-one to-a-breathing of-me into to-a-binding, and I-en-deem-belonged about of-the-ones of-un-adjustings-along-unto of-me down to-looked-toward of-Authority-belonged of-the-one of-a-Deity of-the-one of-a-sky, and about of-the-ones of-un-en-mullings-unto of-me of-the-one of-a-Deity of-the-ones of-deities of-the-one of-great I-was-binded.
O reads Gr. [30b] (Dan 4:33b) καὶ αἱ τρίχες μου ἐγένοντο ὡς πτέρυγες ἀετοῦ, οἱ ὄνυχές μου ὡσεὶ λέοντος· ἠλλοιώθη ἡ σάρξ μου καὶ ἡ καρδία μου, γυμνὸς περιεπάτουν μετὰ τῶν θηρίων τῆς γῆς. ἐνύπνιον εἶδον καὶ ὑπόνοιαί με εἰλήφασιν, καὶ διὰ χρόνου ὕπνος με ἔλαβε πολὺς καὶ νυσταγμὸς ἐπέπεσέ μοι.
(Dan 4:33b) And the-ones hairs of-me they-had-became as wings of-an-airer, the-ones unguises of-me as-if of-a-lion; it-was-en-othered the-one a-flesh of-me and the-one a-heart of-me, stripped I-was-treading-about-unto with of-the-ones of-beastlets of-the-one of-a-soil. To-an-in-sleeplet I-had-seen and en-mullings-under-unto to-me they-hath-had-come-to-take, and through of-a-while a-sleep to-me it-had-taken, much, and a-nodding-of it-had-fallen-upon unto-me.
Note: of-an-airer : used to refer to things suspended in air, of birds skilled in gliding, particularly an eagle.
O reads Gr. [30c] (Dan 4:33c) καὶ ἐπὶ συντελείᾳ τῶν ἑπτὰ ἐτῶν ὁ χρόνος μου τῆς ἀπολυτρώσεως ἦλθεν, καὶ αἱ ἁμαρτίαι μου καὶ αἱ ἄγνοιαί μου ἐπληρώθησαν ἐναντίον τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ· καὶ ἐδεήθην περὶ τῶν ἀγνοιῶν μου τοῦ θεοῦ τῶν θεῶν τοῦ μεγάλου, καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄγγελος εἷς ἐκάλεσέν με ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ λέγων Ναβουχοδονοσόρ, δούλευσον τῷ θεῷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τῷ ἁγίῳ καὶ δὸς δόξαν τῷ ὑψίστῳ· τὸ βασίλειον τοῦ ἔθνους σού σοι ἀποδίδοται.
(Dan 4:33c) And upon unto-a-finishing-together-of of-the-ones of-seven of-yeareednesses the-one a-while of-me of-the-one of-an-en-loosing-off it-had-came, and the-ones un-adjustings-along-unto of-me and the-ones un-en-mullings-unto of-me they-were-en-filled to-ever-a-oned-in of-the-one of-a-Deity of-the-one of-a-sky; and I-was-binded about of-the-ones of-un-en-mullings-unto of-me of-the-one of-a-Deity of-the-ones of-deities of-the-one of-great, and thou-should-have-had-seen, a-leadeeer one it-called-unto to-me out of-the-one of-a-sky forthing, Nabouchodonosor, thou-should-have-bondeed-of unto-the-one unto-a-Deity of-the-one of-a-sky unto-the-one unto-hallow-belonged and thou-should-have-had-given to-a-reckonedness unto-the-one unto-most-lofteed; the-one a-rulerlet of-the-one of-a-placeedness-belonging-to of-thee unto-thee it-be-given-off.
4:30c αι αιμαρτιαι] in αι I° ras aliq inferius 87? | ε|επληρωθησαν (sic) 87
(454 B.C.)
Dan 4:31 (Dan 4:34) Καὶ μετὰ τὸ τέλος τῶν ἡμερῶν ἐγὼ Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς μου εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνέλαβον, καὶ αἱ φρένες μου ἐπ' ἐμὲ ἐπεστράφησαν, καὶ τῷ ὑψίστῳ εὐλόγησα, καὶ τῷ ζῶντι εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα ᾔνεσα καὶ ἐδόξασα, ὅτι ἡ ἐξουσία αὐτοῦ ἐξουσία αἰώνιος καὶ ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ εἰς γενεὰν καὶ γενεάν·
(Dan 4:34) And with to-the-one to-a-finisheedness of-the-ones of-dayednesses I a-Nabouchodonosor to-the-ones to-eyes of-me into to-the-one to-a-sky I-had-taken-up, and the-ones centers of-me upon to-me they-had-been-beturned-upon, and unto-the-one unto-most-lofteed I-goodly-fortheed-unto, and unto-the-one unto-lifing-unto into to-the-one to-an-age I-lauded-unto and I-reckoned-to, to-which-a-one the-one a-being-out-unto of-it a-being-out-unto aged-belonged and the-one a-ruling-of of-it into to-a-becomedness and to-a-becomedness;
4:31 ηυλογησα A | τον αιωνα] τους αιωνας A
(454 B.C.)
Dan 4:32 (Dan 4:35) καὶ πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες τὴν γῆν ὡς οὐδὲν ἐλογίσθησαν· καὶ κατὰ τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ ποιεῖ ἐν τῇ δυνάμει τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ ἐν τῇ κατοικίᾳ τῆς γῆς, καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ὃς ἀντιποιήσεται τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐρεῖ αὐτῷ Τί ἐποίησας;
(Dan 4:35) and all the-ones housing-down-unto to-the-one to-a-soil as not-then-also-one they-were-fortheed-to; and down to-the-one to-a-determining-to of-it it-doeth-unto in unto-the-one unto-an-ability of-the-one of-a-sky and in unto-the-one unto-a-housing-down-unto of-the-one of-a-soil, and not it-be which it-shall-ever-a-one-do-unto unto-the-one unto-a-hand of-it and it-shall-utter unto-it, To-what-one thou-did-unto?
4:32 ουδεν] ουδε A
(454 B.C.)
Dan 4:33 (Dan 4:36) αὐτῷ τῷ καιρῷ αἱ φρένες μου ἐπεστράφησαν ἐπ' ἐμέ, καὶ εἰς τὴν τιμὴν τῆς βασιλείας μου ἦλθον· καὶ ἡ μορφή μου ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπ' ἐμέ, καὶ οἱ τύραννοί μου καὶ οἱ μεγιστᾶνές μου ἐζήτουν με, καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν βασιλείαν μου ἐκραταιώθην, καὶ μεγαλωσύνη περισσοτέρα προσετέθη μοι.
(Dan 4:36) Unto-it unto-the-one unto-a-time the-ones centers of-me they-had-been-beturned-upon upon to-ME, and into to-the-one to-a-valuation of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-me I-had-came; and the-one a-form of-me it-beturned-upon upon to-ME, and the-ones tyrants of-me and the-ones most-greats of-me they-were-seeking-unto to-me, and upon to-the-one to-a-ruling-of of-me I-was-en-secure-belonged, and an-en-greateningedness more-abouted it-was-placed-toward unto-me.
Note: an-en-greateningedness in 03C2 : a-greateningedness in 02 03*.
4:33 μεγαλωσυνη (-λος. B* -λωσ. Bb)] μεγαλωσυνην A
(O) (Dan 4:36) ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ ἀποκατεστάθη ἡ βασιλεία μου ἐμοὶ καὶ ἡ δόξα μου ἀπεδόθη μοι.
(Dan 4:36) in unto-the-one-thither unto-the-one unto-a-time it-was-stood-down-off the-one a-ruling-of of-me unto-ME and the-one a-reckonedness of-me it-was-given-off unto-me.
4:33 η βασ. ÷ μου (μου ÷ Syr) . . . απεδοθη μοι 87 Syr
(454 B.C.)
Dan 4:34 (Dan 4:37) νῦν οὖν ἐγὼ Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ αἰνῶ καὶ ὑπερυψῶ καὶ δοξάζω τὸν βασιλέα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, ὅτι πάντα τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ ἀληθινὰ καὶ αἱ τρίβοι αὐτοῦ κρίσεις, καὶ πάντας τοὺς πορευομένους ἐν ὑπερηφανίᾳ δύναται ταπεινῶσαι.
(Dan 4:37) Now accordingly I a-Nabouchodonosor I-laud-unto and I-en-loftee-over and I-reckon-to to-the-one to-a-ruler of-the-one of-a-sky, to-which-a-one all the-ones works of-it un-secluded-belonged-to and the-ones rubbed of-it separatings, and to-all to-the-ones to-traversing-of in unto-a-manifesting-over-unto it-ableth to-have-en-low-belonged-to.
4:34 κρισις A | subscr ορασις έ A
(O) (Dan 4:37) τῷ ὑψίστῳ ἀνθομολογοῦμαι καὶ αἰνῶ, τῷ κτίσαντι τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν καὶ τὰς θαλάσσας καὶ τοὺς ποταμοὺς καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς ἐξομολογοῦμαι καὶ αἰνῶ· ὅτι αὐτός ἐστι θεὸς τῶν θεῶν καὶ κύριος τῶν κυρίων καὶ βασιλεὺς τῶν βασιλέων, ὅτι αὐτὸς ποιεῖ σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα καὶ ἀλλοιοῖ καιροὺς καὶ χρόνους, ἀφαιρῶν βασιλείαν βασιλέων καὶ καθιστῶν ἑτέρους ἀντ' αὐτῶν.
(Dan 4:37) Unto-the-one unto-most-lofteed I-ever-a-one-along-forthee-unto and I-laud-unto, unto-the-one unto-having-befounded-to to-the-one to-a-sky and to-the-one to-a-soil and to-the-ones to-flourisherednesses and to-the-ones to-drinkationings-of and to-all to-the-ones in unto-them I-along-forthee-out-unto and I-laud-unto; to-which-a-one it it-be a-Deity of-the-ones of-deities and Authority-belonged of-the-ones of-authority-belonged and a-ruler-of of-the-ones of-rulers-of, to-which-a-one it it-doeth-unto to-signlets-of and to-anomalies and it-en-othereth to-times and to-whiles, sectioning-along-off-unto to-a-ruling-of of-rulers-of and standing-down to-different ever-a-one of-them.
4:34 βασιλειαν βασιλεων] βασιλειας βασιλεων Syr
O reads Gr. [34a] (Dan 4:37a) ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν αὐτῷ λατρεύσω, καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ φόβου αὐτοῦ τρόμος εἴληφέ με, καὶ πάντας τοὺς ἁγίους αἰνῶ· οἱ γὰρ θεοὶ τῶν ἐθνῶν οὐκ ἔχουσιν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἰσχὺν ἀποστρέψαι βασιλείαν βασιλέως εἰς ἕτερον βασιλέα, καὶ ἀποκτεῖναι καὶ ζῇν ποιῆσαι, καὶ ποιῆσαι σημεῖα καὶ θαυμάσια μεγάλα καὶ φοβερὰ καὶ ἀλλοιῶσαι ὑπερμεγέθη πράγματα, καθὼς ἐποίησεν ἐν ἐμοὶ ὁ θεὸς τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ ἠλλοίωσεν ἐπ' ἐμοὶ μεγάλα πράγματα. ἐγὼ πάσας τὰς ἡμέρας τῆς βασιλείας μου περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς μου τῷ ὑψίστῳ θυσίας προσοίσω εἰς ὀσμὴν εὐωδίας τῷ κυρίῳ, καὶ τὸ ἀρεστὸν ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ ποιήσω ἐγὼ καὶ ὁ λαός μου, τὸ ἔθνος μου καὶ αἱ χῶραί μου αἱ ἐν τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ μου. καὶ ὅσοι ἐλάλησαν εἰς τὸν θεὸν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ ὅσοι ἂν καταληφθῶσι λαλοῦντές τι, τούτους κατακρινῶ θανάτῳ.
(Dan 4:37a) Off of-the-one now unto-it I-serve-of, and off of-the-one of-a-fearee of-it a-tremblee it-hath-had-come-to-take to-me, and to-all to-the-ones to-hallow-belonged I-laud-unto; the-ones too-thus deities of-the-ones of-placeedness-belongings-to not they-hold in unto-selves to-a-force-holding to-have-beturned-off to-a-ruling-of of-a-ruler-of into to-different to-a-ruler-of, and to-have-killed-off and to-life-unto to-have-done-unto, and to-have-done-unto to-signlets-of and to-marvel-to-belonged to-great and to-en-feareed and to-have-en-othered to-greateninged-over to-practicings-to, down-as it-did-unto in unto-ME the-one a-Deity of-the-one of-a-sky and it-en-othered upon unto-ME to-great to-practicings-to. I to-all to-the-ones to-dayednesses of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-me about of-the-one of-a-breathing of-me unto-the-one unto-most-lofteed to-surgings-unto I-shall-bear-toward into to-an-odor of-a-goodly-odoring-unto unto-the-one unto-Authority-belonged, and to-the-one to-pleasable to-in-look-belonged of-it I-shall-do-unto I and the-one a-people of-me, the-one a-placeedness-belonging-to of-me and the-ones spacednesses of-me the-ones in unto-the-one unto-a-being-out-unto of-me. And which-a-which they-spoke-unto into to-the-one to-a-Deity of-the-one of-a-sky and which-a-which ever they-might-have-been-taken-down speaking-unto to-a-one, to-the-ones-these I-shall-separate-down unto-a-death.
4:34a αγιους] + αυτου Syr | αινω] αινεσω Syr
O reads Gr. [34b] (Dan 4:37b) Ἔγραψε δὲ ὁ βασιλεὺς Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ἐπιστολὴν ἐγκύκλιον πᾶσι τοῖς κατὰ τόπον ἔθνεσι καὶ χώραις καὶ γλώσσαις πάσαις ταῖς οἰκούσαις ἐν πάσαις ταῖς χώραις, γενεαῖς καὶ γενεαῖς. Κυρίῳ τῷ θεῷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ αἰνεῖτε, καὶ θυσίαν καὶ προσφορὰν προσφέρετε αὐτῷ ἐνδόξως. ἐγὼ βασιλεὺς βασιλέων ἀνθομολογοῦμαι αὐτῷ ἐνδόξως, ὅτι οὕτως ἐποίησε μετ' ἐμοῦ· ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκάθισέ με ἐπὶ τοῦ θρόνου μου καὶ τῆς ἐξουσίας μου καὶ τῆς βασιλείας μου· ἐν τῷ λαῷ μου ἐκράτησα καὶ ἡ μεγαλωσύνη μου ἀποκατεστάθη μοι.
(Dan 4:37b) It-scribed then-also, the-one a-ruler-of a-Nabouchodonosor, to-a-seteeing-upon to-circle-belonged-in unto-all unto-the-ones down to-an-occasion unto-placeedness-belongings-to and unto-spacednesses and unto-tongues unto-all unto-the-ones unto-housing-unto in unto-all unto-the-ones unto-spacednesses, unto-becomednesses and unto-becomednesses. Unto-Authority-belonged unto-the-one unto-a-Deity of-the-one of-a-sky ye-should-laud-unto, and to-a-surging-unto and to-a-bearedness-toward ye-should-bear-toward unto-it unto-reckoned-in. I a-ruler-of of-rulers-of I-ever-a-one-along-forthee-unto unto-it unto-reckoned-in, to-which-a-one unto-the-one-this it-did-unto with of-ME; in unto-it unto-the-one unto-a-dayedness it-sat-down-to to-me upon of-the-one of-a-throne of-me and of-the-one of-a-being-out-unto of-me and of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-me; in unto-the-one unto-a-people of-me I-secured-unto and the-one an-en-greateningedness of-me it-was-stood-down-off unto-me.
4:34b pr περι της εγκυκλιου επιστολης 87mg | γενεαις κ. γενεαις] pr εν Syr
O reads Gr. [34c] (Dan 4:37c) Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ βασιλεὺς πᾶσι τοῖς ἔθνεσι καὶ πάσαις ταῖς χώραις καὶ πᾶσι τοῖς οἰκοῦσιν αὐταῖς· εἰρήνη ὑμῖν πληθυνθείη ἐν παντὶ καιρῷ. καὶ νῦν ὑποδείξω ὑμῖν τὰς πράξεις ἃς ἐποίησεν μετ' ἐμοῦ ὁ θεὸς ὁ μέγας· ἔδοξε δέ μοι ἀποδεῖξαι ὑμῖν καὶ τοῖς σοφισταῖς ὑμῶν ὅτι ἔστι θεός, καὶ τὰ θαυμάσια αὐτοῦ μεγάλα· τὸ βασίλειον αὐτοῦ βασίλειον εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα, ἡ ἐξουσία αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ γενεῶν εἰς γενεάς. καὶ ἀπέστειλεν ἐπιστολὰς περὶ πάντων τῶν γενηθέντων αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ πᾶσι τοῖς ἔθνεσι τοῖς οὖσιν ὑπὸ τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ.
(Dan 4:37c) A-Nabouchodonosor a-ruler-of unto-all unto-the-ones unto-placeedness-belongings-to and unto-all unto-the-ones unto-spacednesses and unto-all unto-the-ones unto-housing-unto unto-them; a-joinifying unto-ye it-may-have-been-repletened in unto-all unto-a-time. And now I-shall-en-show-under unto-ye to-the-ones to-practicings to-which it-did-unto with of-ME the-one a-Deity the-one great; it-thought-unto then-also unto-me to-have-en-showed-off unto-ye and unto-the-ones unto-wisdom-belongers of-ye to-which-a-one it-be a-Deity, and the-ones marvel-to-belonged of-it great; the-one a-rulerlet of-it a-rulerlet into to-the-one to-an-age, the-one a-being-out-unto of-it off of-becomednesses into to-becomednesses. And it-set-off to-seteeings-upon about of-all of-the-ones of-having-been-became unto-it in unto-the-one unto-a-ruling-of of-it unto-all unto-the-ones unto-placeedness-belongings-to unto-the-ones unto-being under to-the-one to-a-ruling-of of-it.
4:34c αυταις] pr εν Syrvid | γενεας] γεας 87
Dan 5:0 (O) Βαλτασὰρ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐποίησε δοχὴν μεγάλην ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ἐγκαινισμοῦ τῶν βασιλείων αὐτοῦ· ἐκάλεσεν ἄνδρας δισχιλίους. ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ Βαλτασὰρ ἀνυψούμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ οἴνου καὶ καυχώμενος ἐπῄνεσεν πάντας τοὺς θεοὺς τῶν ἐθνῶν τοὺς χωνευτοὺς καὶ γλυπτοὺς ἐν τῷ τόπῳ αὐτοῦ, καὶ τῷ θεῷ τῷ ὑψίστῳ οὐκ ἔδωκεν αἴνεσιν. ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ νυκτὶ ἐξῆλθον δάκτυλοι ὡσεὶ ἀνθρώπου καὶ ἐπέγραψαν ἐπὶ τοῦ τοίχου οἴκου αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τοῦ κονιάματος κατέναντι τοῦ λύχνους Μανή, φαρές, θεκέλ. ἔστι δὲ ἡ ἑρμηνεία αὐτῶν· μανή, ἠρίθμηται· φαρές, ἐξρται· θεκέλ, ἕσταται.
A-Baltasar the-one a-ruler-of it-did-unto to-a-receiving to-great in unto-a-dayedness of-a-freshening-in-to-of of-the-ones of-ruler-belonged of-it; it-called-unto to-men to-two-thousand. In unto-the-one unto-a-dayedness unto-the-one-thither a-Baltasar being-en-lofteed-up off of-the-one of-a-wine and boasting-unto it-lauded-upon-unto to-all to-the-ones to-deities of-the-ones of-placeedness-belongings-to to-the-ones to-moltened-of and to-carved in unto-the-one unto-an-occasion of-it, and unto-the-one unto-a-Deity unto-the-one unto-most-lofteed not it-gave to-a-lauding. In unto-it unto-the-one unto-a-night they-had-came-out, digits, as-if of-a-mankind and they-scribed-upon upon of-the-one of-a-lineation of-a-house of-it upon of-the-one of-a-raise-belongednessing-to down-in-ever-a-one of-the-one of-a-luminateedness, Manê, fares, thekel. It-be then-also the-one a-clearifying-of of-them; manê, it-had-come-to-be-numbered-unto; fares, it-had-come-to-be-lifted-out; thekel, it-had-come-to-be-stood.
Note: of-a-lineation : lined siding.
Note: of-a-raise-belongednessing-to : refers to collected dust.
5:0 tit βασιλεῶν 87 | εκαλεσεν] prius ἔνεγκαι 87 | om και 5° Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:1 Βαλτασὰρ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐποίησεν δεῖπνον μέγα τοῖς μεγιστᾶσιν αὐτοῦ χιλίοις, καὶ κατέναντι τῶν χιλίων ὁ οἶνος.
A-Baltasar the-one a-ruler-of it-did-unto to-a-meal to-great unto-the-ones unto-most-greats of-it unto-thousand, and down-in-ever-a-one of-the-ones of-thousand the-one a-wine.
5:1 superscr ορασις ς´ A | Bartasar A | epoihse Afort | om μεγα A | χιλιοις] pr ανδρασιν A
(O) Βαλτασὰρ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐποίησεν ἑστιατορίαν μεγάλην τοῖς ἑταίροις αὐτοῦ.
A-Baltasar the-one a-ruler-of it-did-unto to-an-eat-belonging-unto to-great unto-the-ones unto-comrades of-it.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:2 καὶ πίνων (Dan 5:2) Βαλτασὰρ εἶπεν ἐν τῇ γεύσει τοῦ οἴνου ἐνεγκεῖν τὰ σκεύη τὰ χρυσᾶ καὶ τὰ ἀργυρᾶ ἃ ἐξήνεγκεν Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ τοῦ ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ, καὶ πιέτωσαν ἐν αὐτοῖς ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ οἱ μεγιστᾶνες αὐτοῦ καὶ αἱ παλλακαὶ αὐτοῦ καὶ αἱ παράκοιτοι αὐτοῦ.
And drinking, (Dan 5:2) a-Baltasar, it-had-said in unto-the-one unto-a-tasting of-the-one of-a-wine of-it to-have-had-beared to-the-ones to-equipeednesses to-the-ones to-golden and to-the-one to-silvern to-which it-beared-out, a-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-father of-it, out of-the-one of-a-temple of-the-one in unto-an-Ierousalêm, and they-should-have-had-drank in unto-them, the-one a-ruler-of and the-ones most-greats of-it and the-ones wriggleries of-it and the-ones situaters-beside of-it.
Note: wriggleries : used to refer to women as defined by seductive movements, as in a coital role, usually referring to a concubine (not a lawful wife); also of the ritual of prostitution.
5:2 ειπεν εν τη γευσει του οινου αυτου] ειπεν εν τη η. τ. οινου A | ενεγκεν] του εν. A
(O) καὶ ἔπινεν οἶνον, (Dan 5:2) καὶ ἀνυψώθη ἡ καρδία αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἶπεν ἐνέγκαι τὰ σκεύη τὰ χρυσᾶ καὶ τὰ ἀργυρᾶ τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ θεοῦ, ἃ ἤνεγκε Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλήμ, καὶ οἰνοχοῆσαι ἐν αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἑταίροις αὐτοῦ.
And it-was-drinking to-a-wine, (Dan 5:2) and it-was-en-lofteed-up the-one a-heart of-it, and it-had-said to-have-beared to-the-ones to-equipeednesses to-the-ones to-golden and to-the-ones to-silvern of-the-one of-a-house of-the-one of-a-Deity, to-which it-beared, a-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-father of-it, off of-an-Ierousalêm, and to-have-wine-poured-unto in unto-them unto-the-ones unto-comrades of-it.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:3 καὶ ἠνέχθησαν τὰ σκεύη τὰ χρυσᾶ καὶ τὰ ἀργυρᾶ ἃ ἐξήνεγκεν ἐκ τοῦ ναοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ, καὶ ἔπινον ἐν αὐτοῖς ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ οἱ μεγιστᾶνες αὐτοῦ καὶ αἱ παλλακαὶ αὐτοῦ καὶ αἱ παράκοιτοι αὐτοῦ·
And they-were-beared the-ones equipeednesses the-ones golden and the-ones silvern to-which it-beared-out out of-the-one of-a-temple of-the-one of-a-Deity(Elah) of-the-one in unto-an-Ierousalêm, and they-were-drinking in unto-them, the-one a-ruler-of and the-ones most-greats of-it and the-ones wriggleries of-it and the-ones situaters-beside of-it;
Note: wriggleries : used to refer to women as defined by seductive movements, as in a coital role, usually referring to a concubine (not a lawful wife); also of the ritual of prostitution.
5:3 ηνεχθησαν] ηχθησαν A | om του θεου A | αι παρακοιτοι αυτου και αι παλλακαι αυτου A
(O) καὶ ἠνέχθη, καὶ ἔπινον ἐν αὐτοῖς·
And it-was-beared, and they-were-drinking in unto-them;
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:4 ἔπινον οἶνον, καὶ ᾔνεσαν τοὺς θεοὺς τοὺς χρυσοῦς καὶ ἀργυροῦς καὶ χαλκοῦς καὶ σιδηροῦς καὶ ξυλίνους καὶ λιθίνους.
they-were-drinking to-a-wine, and they-lauded-unto to-the-ones to-deities(elah) to-the-ones to-golden and to-silvern and to-coppern and to-iron and to-wooded-belonged-to and to-stoned-belonged-to.
5:4 τους θεους] ο I° sup ras Aa? | λιθινους] + και τον θν̅ του αιωνος ουκ ευλογησαν (ηυλ. A) τον εχοντα την (om Α) εξουσιαν του πν̅ς̅ αυτων (αυτου A) Bab mg infA
(O) καὶ ηὐλόγουν τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ χειροποίητα αὐτῶν, καὶ τὸν θεὸν τοῦ αἰῶνος οὐκ εὐλόγησαν τὸν ἔχοντα τὴν ἐξουσίαν τοῦ πνεύματος αὐτῶν.
and they-were-goodly-fortheeing-unto to-the-ones to-images to-the-ones to-hand-doable of-them, and to-the-one to-a-Deity of-the-one of-an-age not they-goodly-fortheed-unto, to-the-one to-holding to-the-one to-a-being-out-unto of-the-one of-a-currenting-to of-them.
5:4 και I° sup ras 87?
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:5 ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ ἐξῆλθον δάκτυλοι χειρὸς ἀνθρώπου καὶ ἔγραφον κατέναντι τῆς λαμπάδος ἐπὶ τὸ κονίαμα τοῦ τοίχου καὶ οἴκου τοῦ βασιλέως, καὶ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐθεώρει τοὺς ἀστραγάλους τῆς χειρὸς τῆς γραφούσης.
In unto-it unto-the-one unto-an-houredness they-had-came-out, digits of-a-hand of-a-mankind, and they-were-scribing down-in-ever-a-one of-the-one of-a-lamp upon to-the-one to-a-raise-belongednessing-to of-the-one of-a-lineation and of-a-house of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, and the-one a-ruler-of it-was-surveiling-unto to-the-ones to-wringings-along of-the-one of-a-hand of-the-one of-scribing.
Note: of-a-raise-belongednessing-to : refers to collected dust.
Note: of-a-lineation : lined siding.
Note: and [2nd] in 03 : omit in 02 03C1 03C2.
Note: to-wringings-along : used to refer to a wring in a formation, of vertabrae, of certain animal ankle joints, of knuckles and the dice made from them, as a compliment of wringing along into formation (i.e. well turned), of a type of scourge, of types of moldings, of a type of plant, of a type of ear ring, of a type of wood prism, etc.
5:5 om και 2° BabA | οικου] pr του A
(O) ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ ἐκείνῃ ἐξῆλθον δάκτυλοι ὡσεὶ χειρὸς ἀνθρώπου καὶ ἔγραψαν ἐπὶ τοῦ τοίχου τοῦ οἴκου αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τοῦ κονιάματος κατέναντι τοῦ φωτὸς ἔναντι τοῦ βασιλέως Βαλτασάρ, καὶ εἶδε χεῖρα γράφουσαν.
In unto-it unto-the-one unto-an-houredness unto-the-one-thither they-had-came-out, digits as-if of-a-hand of-a-mankind, and they-scribed upon of-the-one of-a-lineation of-the-one of-a-house of-it upon of-the-one of-a-raise-belongednessing-to down-in-ever-a-one of-the-one of-a-light in-ever-a-one of-the-one of-a-ruler-of of-a-Baltasar, and it-had-seen to-a-hand to-scribing.
Note: of-a-lineation : lined siding.
Note: of-a-raise-belongednessing-to : refers to collected dust.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:6 τότε τοῦ βασιλέως ἡ μορφὴ ἠλλοιώθη, καὶ οἱ διαλογισμοὶ αὐτοῦ συνετάρασσον αὐτόν, καὶ οἱ σύνδεσμοι τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ διελύοντο, καὶ τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ συνεκροτοῦντο.
To-the-one-which-also of-the-one of-a-ruler-of the-one a-form it-was-en-othered, and the-ones fortheeings-through-to-of of-it they-were-stirring-together to-it, and the-ones bindees-together of-the-one of-a-loin of-it they-were-being-loosed-through, and the-ones knees of-it they-were-clattering-together-unto.
(O) καὶ ἡ ὅρασις αὐτοῦ ἠλλοιώθη, καὶ φόβοι καὶ ὑπόνοιαι αὐτὸν κατέσπευδον. ἔσπευσεν οὖν ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ἐξανέστη, καὶ ἑώρα τὴν γραφὴν ἐκείνην, καὶ οἱ συνεταῖροι κύκλῳ αὐτοῦ ἐκαυχῶντο.
And the-one a-seeeeing of-it it-was-en-othered, and fearees and en-mullings-under-unto to-it they-were-hastening-down. It-hastened accordingly, the-one a-ruler-of, and it-had-stood-up-out, and it-was-seeeeing-unto to-the-one to-a-scribing to-the-one-thither, and the-ones comrades-together unto-a-circle of-it they-were-boasting-unto.
Note: they-were-boasting-unto : i.e. speaking boisterously in their wine that there was nothing to fear.
5:6 και η ορασις αυτου] Θ´ τοτε του βασιλεως μορφη (η μ. Syrvid) 87mg Syrmg
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:7 καὶ ἐβόησεν ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐν ἰσχύι τοῦ εἰσαγαγεῖν μάγους, Χαλδαίους, γαζαρηνούς, καὶ εἶπεν τοῖς σοφοῖς Βαβυλῶνος Ὃς ἂν ἀναγνῷ τὴν γραφὴν ταύτην καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν γνωρίσῃ μοι, πορφύραν ἐνδύσεται, καὶ ὁ μανιάκης ὁ χρυσοῦς ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ, καὶ τρίτος ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ μου ἄρξει.
And it-hollered-unto, the-one a-ruler-of, in unto-a-force-holding of-the-one to-have-had-led-into to-magos', to-Chaldee-belonged, to-gazarênians, and it-had-said unto-the-ones unto-wisdomed of-Babulôn, Which ever it-might-have-had-acquainted-up to-the-one to-a-scribing to-the-one-this and to-the-one to-a-separating-together it-might-have-acquainted-to unto-me, to-a-flushedness it-shall-be-sunk-in, and the-one a-torc the-one golden upon to-the-one to-a-throat of-it, and third in unto-the-one unto-a-ruling-of of-me it-shall-first.
Note: to-magos' : used to refer to educated men from the east usually specializing in astronomy.
Note: to-gazarênians : Greek word formed from Hebrew, meaning cutters who divined through the resultant patterns of cutting things, probably gems and stones.
Note: to-a-flushedness : used to refer to a kind of mussel from the blueish-red dye it yields because of its flush of color visual affect, and to the dye itself; also used of clothing and adornments as assigned to the flushed color category, i.e. bright red to blueish-red.
Note: a-torc : a rigid neck ring often with a gap, bent on.
5:7 Βαβυλωνοις B* (-νος Bb) | αν] εαν A | συγκρισιν] + αυτης A | επι] εσται περι A
(O) καὶ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐφώνησε φωνῇ μεγάλῃ καλέσαι τοὺς ἐπαοιδοὺς καὶ φαρμακοὺς καὶ Χαλδαίους καὶ γαζαρηνούς, ἀπαγγεῖλαι τὸ σύγκριμα τῆς γραφῆς. καὶ εἰσεπορεύοντο ἐπὶ θεωρίαν ἰδεῖν τὴν γραφήν, καὶ τὸ σύγκριμα τῆς γραφῆς οὐκ ἐδύναντο συγκρῖναι τῷ βασιλεῖ. τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐξέθηκε πρόσταγμα λέγων Πᾶς ἀνήρ ὃς ἂν ὑποδείξῃ τὸ σύγκριμα τῆς γραφῆς, στολιεῖ αὐτὸν πορφύραν, καὶ μανιάκην χρυσοῦν περιθήσει αὐτῷ, καὶ δοθήσεται αὐτῷ ἐξουσία τοῦ τρίτου μέρους τῆς βασιλείας.
And the-one a-ruler-of it-sounded-unto unto-a-sound unto-great to-have-called-unto to-the-ones to-chanters-upon and to-dosers and to-Chaldee-belonged and to-gazarênians, to-have-leadeeered-off to-the-one to-a-separating-together-to of-the-one of-a-scribing. And they-were-traversing-into-of upon to-a-surveiling-unto to-have-had-seen to-the-one to-a-scribing, and to-the-one to-a-separting-together-to of-the-one of-a-scribing not they-abled to-have-separated-together unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of. To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruler-of it-placed-out to-an-arranging-toward-to forthing, All a-man which ever it-might-have-en-showed-under to-the-one to-a-separating-together-to of-the-one of-a-scribing, it-shall-setee-to to-it to-a-flushedness, and to-a-torc to-golden it-shall-place-about unto-it, and it-shall-be-given unto-it a-being-out-unto of-the-one of-third of-a-portioneedness of-the-one of-a-ruling-of.
Note: to-gazarênians : Greek word formed from Hebrew, meaning cutters who divined through the resultant patterns of cutting things, probably gems and stones.
Note: it-shall-setee-to : used to refer to putting on a setting of clothing.
Note: to-a-flushedness : used to refer to a kind of mussel from the blueish-red dye it yields because of its flush of color visual affect, and to the dye itself; also used of clothing and adornments as assigned to the flushed color category, i.e. bright red to blueish-red.
Note: to-a-torc : a rigid neck ring often with a gap, bent on.
5:7 απαγγειλαι] απαγγεῖ| 87
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:8 καὶ εἰσεπορεύοντο πάντες οἱ σοφοὶ τοῦ βασιλέως, καὶ οὐκ ἠδύναντο τὴν γραφὴν ἀναγνῶναι οὐδὲ τὴν σύγκρισιν γνωρίσαι τῷ βασιλεῖ.
And they-were-traversing-into-of, all the-ones wisdomed of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, and not they-were-abling to-the-one to-a-scribing to-have-had-acquainted-up not-then-also to-the-one to-a-separating-together to-have-acquainted-to unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of.
5:8 om παντες A
(O) καὶ εἰσεπορεύοντο οἱ ἐπαοιδοὶ καὶ φαρμακοὶ καὶ γαζαρηνοί, καὶ οὐκ ἠδύνατο οὐδεὶς τὸ σύγκριμα τῆς γραφῆς ἀπαγγεῖλαι.
And they-were-traversing-into-of, the-ones chanters-upon and dosers and gazarênians, and not it-was-abling, not-then-also-one, to-the-one to-a-separating-together-to of-the-one of-a-scribing to-have-leadeeered-off.
Note: gazarênians : Greek word formed from Hebrew, meaning cutters who divined through the resultant patterns of cutting things, probably gems and stones.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:9 καὶ ὁ βασιλεὺς Βαλτασὰρ ἐταράχθη, καὶ ἡ μορφὴ αὐτοῦ ἠλλοιώθη ἐν αὐτῷ, καὶ οἱ μεγιστᾶνες αὐτοῦ συνεταράσσοντο.
And the-one a-ruler-of a-Baltasar it-was-stirred, and the-one a-form of-it it-was-en-other-belonged in unto-it, and the-ones most-greats of-it they-were-being-stirred-together.
5:9 εταραχθη] pr πολυ A | εν αυτω] επ αυτω A | συνεταρασσοντο (-σσαντο B* -σσοντο Bab)] συνεταρασσον αυτον A
(O) τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐκάλεσε τὴν βασίλισσαν περὶ τοῦ σημείου, καὶ ὑπέδειξεν αὐτῇ ὡς μέγα ἐστί, καὶ ὅτι πᾶς ἄνθρωπος οὐ δύναται ἀπαγγεῖλαι τῷ βασιλεῖ τὸ σύγκριμα τῆς γραφῆς.
To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruler-of it-called-unto to-the-one to-a-ruleress about of-the-one of-a-signlet-of, and it-en-showed-under unto-it as great it-be, and to-which-a-one all a-mankind not it-ableth to-have-leadeeered-off unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of to-the-one to-a-separating-together-to of-the-one of-a-scribing.
5:9 του σημ.] του bis scr 87
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:10 καὶ εἰσῆλθεν ἡ βασίλισσα εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ πότου καὶ εἶπεν Βασιλεῦ, εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα ζῆθι· μὴ ταρασσέτωσάν σε οἱ διαλογισμοί σου, καὶ ἡ μορφή σου μὴ ἀλλοιούσθω.
And it-had-came-into, the-one a-ruleress, into to-the-one to-a-house of-the-one of-a-drinkation and it-had-said, Ruler-of, into to-the-one to-an-age thou-should-life-unto; lest they-should-stir to-thee, the-ones fortheeings-through-to-of of-thee, and the-one a-form of-thee lest it-should-be-en-other-belonged.
5:10 και 2°] + απεκριθη η βασιλεισσα και A | τον αιωνα] τους αιωνας A
(O) τότε ἡ βασίλισσα ἐμνήσθη πρὸς αὐτὸν περὶ τοῦ Δανιήλ, ὃς ἦν ἐκ τῆς αἰχμαλωσίας τῆς Ἰουδαίας,
To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruleress it-was-memoried-unto toward to-it about of-the-one of-a-Daniêl, which it-was out of-the-one of-a-spear-capturing-unto of-the-one of-an-Ioudaia,
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:11 ἔστιν ἀνὴρ ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ σου ἐν ᾧ πνεῦμα θεοῦ, καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τοῦ πατρός σου γρηγόρησις καὶ σύνεσις εὑρέθη ἐν αὐτῷ, καὶ ὁ βασιλεὺς Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ ὁ πατήρ σου ἄρχοντα ἐπαοιδῶν, μάγων, Χαλδαίων, γαζαρηνῶν, κατέστησεν αὐτόν,
It-be a-man in unto-the-one unto-a-ruling-of of-thee in unto-which a-currenting-to of-a-Deity(Elah), and in unto-the-ones unto-dayednesses of-the-one of-a-father of-thee watchings and sendings-together it-was-found in unto-it, and the-one a-ruler-of a-Nabouchodonosor the-one a-father of-thee to-firsting of-chanters-upon, of-magos', of-Chaldee-belonged, of-gazarênians, it-stood-down to-it,
Note: of-magos' : used to refer to educated men from the east usually specializing in astronomy.
Note: of-gazarênians : Greek word formed from Hebrew, meaning cutters who divined through the resultant patterns of cutting things, probably gems and stones.
5:11 θεου] + αγιον A | εν 4°] ε|ν B* εν| B? | πατηρ] incep βα B* (πατ. Bab) | αυτον] + πη̅ρ̅ σου ο βασιλευς A
(O) καὶ εἶπεν τῷ βασιλεῖ Ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐπιστήμων ἦν καὶ σοφὸς καὶ ὑπερέχων πάντας τοὺς σοφοὺς Βαβυλῶνος,
and it-had-said unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of, The-one a-mankind standinged-upon-of it-was and wisdomed and holding-over to-all to-the-ones to-wisdomed of-a-Babulôn,
5:11 υπερεχων] υπερεσχε Syrvid
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:12 ὅτι πνεῦμα περισσὸν ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ φρόνησις καὶ σύνεσις· συνκρίνων ἐνύπνια καὶ ἀναγγέλλων κρατούμενα καὶ λύων συνδέσμους Δανιήλ, καὶ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐπέθηκεν αὐτῷ ὄνομα Βαλτασάρ· νῦν οὖν κληθήτω, καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν αὐτοῦ ἀναγγελεῖ σοι.
to-which-a-one a-currenting-to abouted in unto-it and a-centering and a-sending-together, separating-together to-in-sleeplets and leadeeering-up to-being-secured-unto and loosing to-bindees-together, a-Daniêl, and the-one a-ruler-of it-placed-upon unto-it to-a-naming-to to-a-Baltasar; now accordingly it-should-be-called-unto, and to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-it it-shall-leadeeer-up unto-thee.
5:12 συνεσις] + εν αυτω BabA | συγκρινων BabA
(O) καὶ πνεῦμα ἅγιον ἐν αὐτῷ ἐστι, καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τοῦ πατρός σου τοῦ βασιλέως συγκρίματα ὑπέρογκα ὑπέδειξε Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ τῷ πατρί σου.
and a-currenting-to hallow-belonged in unto-it it-be, and in unto-the-ones unto-dayednesses of-the-one of-a-father of-thee of-the-one of-a-ruler-of to-separatings-together-to to-over-bulged it-en-showed-under unto-a-Nabouchodonosor unto-the-one unto-a-father of-thee.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:13 Τότε Δανιὴλ εἰσήχθη ἐνώπιον τοῦ βασιλέως, καὶ εἶπεν ὁ βασιλεὺς τῷ Δανιὴλ Σὺ εἶ Δανιὴλ ὁ ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν τῆς αἰχμαλωσίας τῆς Ἰουδαίας ἧς ἤγαγεν ὁ βασιλεὺς ὁ πατήρ μου;
To-the-one-which-also a-Daniêl it-was-led-into to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, and it-had-said, the-one a-ruler-of, unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl, Thou thou-be a-Daniêl the-one off of-the-ones of-sons of-the-one of-a-spear-capturing-unto of-the-one of-an-Ioudaia of-which it-had-led, the-one a-ruler-of the-one a-father of-me?
(O) Τότε Δανιὴλ εἰσήχθη πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα, καὶ ἀποκριθεὶς ὁ βασιλεὺς εἶπεν αὐτῷ
To-the-one-which-also a-Daniêl it-was-led-into toward to-the-one to-a-ruler-of, and having-been-separated-off the-one a-ruler-of it-had-said unto-it,
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:14 ἤκουσα περὶ σοῦ ὅτι πνεῦμα θεοῦ ἐν σοί, καὶ γρηγόρησις καὶ σοφία περισσὴ εὑρέθη ἐν σοί.
I-heard about of-thee to-which-a-one a-currenting-to of-a-Deity(Elah) in unto-thee, and a-watching and a-wisdoming-unto abouted it-was-found in unto-thee.
Note: and [2nd] in 03 : + a-sending-together and in 02 03C1 03C2.
5:14 και 2°] + συνεσις και BabA
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:15 καὶ νῦν εἰσῆλθον ἐνώπιόν μου οἱ σοφοί, μάγοι, γαζαρηνοί, ἵνα τὴν γραφὴν ταύτην ἀναγνῶσιν καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν αὐτῆς γνωρίσωσίν μοι, καὶ οὐκ ἠδυνήθησαν ἀναγγεῖλαί μοι.
And now they-had-came-into to-in-look-belonged of-me, the-ones wisdomed, magos', gazarênians, so to-the-one to-a-scribing to-the-one-this to-an-acquainting-up and to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-it they-might-have-acquainted-to unto-me, and not they-were-abled to-have-leadeeered-up unto-me.
Note: magos' : used to refer to educated men from the east usually specializing in astronomy.
Note: gazarênians : Greek word formed from Hebrew, meaning cutters who divined through the resultant patterns of cutting things, probably gems and stones.
5:15 μου] εμου A | om ταυτην A
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:16 καὶ ἐγὼ ἤκουσα περὶ σοῦ ὅτι δύνασαι κρίματα συγκρῖναι· νῦν οὖν ἐὰν δυνηθῇς τὴν γραφὴν ἀναγνῶναι καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν αὐτῆς γνωρίσαι μοι, πορφύραν ἐνδύσῃ, καὶ ὁ μανιάκης ὁ χρυσοῦς ἔσται ἐπὶ τῷ τραχήλῳ σου, καὶ τρίτος ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ μου ἄρξεις.
And I I-heard about of-thee to-which-a-one thou-able to-separatings-to to-have-separated-together; now accordingly if-ever thou-might-have-been-abled to-the-one to-a-scribing to-have-had-acquainted-up and to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-it to-have-acquainted-to unto-me, to-a-flushedness thou-shall-sink-in, and the-one a-torc the-one golden it-shall-be upon unto-the-one unto-a-throat of-thee, and third in unto-the-one unto-a-ruling-of of-me thou-shall-first.
Note: to-a-flushedness : used to refer to a kind of mussel from the blueish-red dye it yields because of its flush of color visual affect, and to the dye itself; also used of clothing and adornments as assigned to the flushed color category, i.e. bright red to blueish-red.
Note: a-torc : a rigid neck ring often with a gap, bent on.
5:16 οτι] + συ A | συνκριναι] συγκρινειν A | γραφην] + ταυτην A | γνωρισης] γνωρισαι A | επι τω τραχηλω] περι τον τραχηλον A
(O) Ὦ Δανιήλ, δύνῃ μοι ὑποδεῖξαι τὸ σύγκριμα τῆς γραφῆς; καὶ στολιῶ σε πορφύραν καὶ μανιάκην χρυσοῦν περιθήσω σοι, καὶ ἕξεις ἐξουσίαν τοῦ τρίτου μέρους τῆς βασιλείας μου.
Oh Daniêl, thou-might-able unto-me to-have-en-showed-under to-the-one to-a-separating-together-to of-the-one of-a-scribing? And I-shall-setee-to to-thee to-a-flushedness and to-a-torc to-golden I-shall-place-about unto-thee, and thou-shall-hold to-a-being-out-unto of-the-one of-third of-a-portioneedness of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-me.
Note: I-shall-setee-to : used to refer to putting on a setting of clothing.
Note: to-a-flushedness : used to refer to a kind of mussel from the blueish-red dye it yields because of its flush of color visual affect, and to the dye itself; also used of clothing and adornments as assigned to the flushed color category, i.e. bright red to blueish-red.
Note: to-a-torc : a rigid neck ring often with a gap, bent on.
5:16 Δανιηλ 87ed | ras aliq in σε 87?
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:17 καὶ εἶπεν Δανιὴλ ἐνώπιον τοῦ βασιλέως Τὰ δόματά σού σοι ἔστω, καὶ τὴν δωρεὰν τῆς οἰκίας σου ἑτέρῳ δός· ἐγὼ δὲ τὴν γραφὴν ἀναγνώσομαι καὶ τὴν σύγκρισιν αὐτῆς γνωρίσω σοι.
And it-had-said, a-Daniêl, to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, The-ones givings-to of-thee unto-thee it-should-be, and to-the-one to-a-giftedness of-the-one of-a-housing-unto of-thee unto-different thou-should-have-had-given; I then-also to-the-one to-a-scribing I-shall-acquaint-up and to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-it I-shall-acquaint-to unto-thee.
5:17 και ειπεν] τοτε απεκριθη A | Δανιηλ] + και ειπεν A | σοι] pr συν A | αναγνωσομαι] + τω βασιλει A
(O) τότε Δανιὴλ ἔστη κατέναντι τῆς γραφῆς καὶ ἀνέγνω, καὶ οὕτως ἀπεκρίθη τῷ βασιλεῖ Αὕτη ἡ γραφή Ἠρίθμηται, κατελογίσθη, ἐξῆρται· καὶ ἔστη ἡ γράψασα χείρ, καὶ αὕτη ἡ σύγκρισις αὐτῶν.
To-the-one-which-also a-Daniêl it-had-stood down-in-ever-a-one of-the-one of-a-scribing and it-had-acquainted-up, and unto-the-one-this it-was-separated-off unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of, The-one-this the-one a-scribing, It-had-come-to-be-numbered-unto, it-was-fortheed-down-to, it-had-come-to-be-lifted-out; and it-had-stood, the-one having-scribed a-hand. And the-one-this the-one a-separating-together of-them.
5:17 ΗΡΙΘΜΗΤΑΙ ΚΑΤΕΛΟΓΙΣΘΗ Syrmg
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:18 βασιλεῦ, ὁ θεὸς ὁ ὕψιστος τὴν βασιλείαν καὶ τὴν μεγαλωσύνην καὶ τὴν τιμὴν καὶ τὴν δόξαν ἔδωκεν Ναβουχοδονοσὸρ τῷ πατρί σου,
Ruler-of, the-one a-Deity(Elah) the-one most-lofteed to-the-one to-a-ruling-of and to-the-one to-an-en-greateningedness and to-the-one to-a-valuation and to-the-one to-a-reckonedness it-gave unto-a-Nabouchodonosor unto-the-one unto-a-father of-thee,
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:19 καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς μεγαλωσύνης ἧς ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ πάντες οἱ λαοί, φυλαί, γλῶσσαι, ἦσαν τρέμοντες καὶ φοβούμενοι ἀπὸ προσώπου αὐτοῦ· οὓς ἠβούλετο αὐτὸς ἀνῄρει, καὶ οὓς ἠβούλετο αὐτὸς ἔτυπτεν, καὶ οὓς ἠβούλετο αὐτὸς ὑψοῖ, καὶ οὓς ἠβούλετο αὐτὸς ἐταπείνου.
and off of-the-one of-an-en-greateningedness of-which it-gave unto-it all the-ones peoples, tribings, tongues, they-were trembling and feareeing-unto off of-looked-toward of-it, to-which it-was-purposing it it-was-sectioning-along-up-unto, and to-which it-was-purposing it it-was-strikering, and to-which it-was-purposing it it-en-lofteeth, and to-which it-was-purposing it it-was-en-low-belonging-to.
5:19 μεγαλοσυνης B* (-λωσ. Bb salt) | om ης B* (superscr Bab) | ηβουλετο quater] εβουλετο A (in ηβ. I° η non inst Bb) | υψου Bb
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:20 καὶ ὅτε ὑψώθη ἡ καρδία αὐτοῦ καὶ τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐκραταιώθη τοῦ ὑπερηφανεύσασθαι, κατηνέχθη ἀπὸ τοῦ θρόνου τῆς βασιλείας καὶ ἡ τιμὴ ἀφῃρέθη ἀπ' αὐτοῦ,
And which-also it-was-en-lofteed the-one a-heart of-it and the-one a-currenting-to of-it it-was-en-secure-belonged of-the-one to-have-manifested-over-of, it-was-beared-down off of-the-one of-a-throne of-the-one of-a-ruling-of and the-one a-valuation it-was-sectioned-along-off-unto off of-it,
5:20 υπερηφανευεσθαι A | βασιλειας] + αυτου A
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:21 καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐξεδιώχθη, καὶ ἡ καρδία αὐτοῦ μετὰ τῶν θηρίων ἐδόθη, καὶ μετὰ ὀνάγρων ἡ κατοικία αὐτοῦ, καὶ χόρτον ὡς βοῦν ἐψώμιζον αὐτόν, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς δρόσου τοῦ οὐρανοῦ τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ ἐβάφη, ἕως οὗ γνῷ ὅτι κυριεύει ὁ θεὸς ὁ ὕψιστος τῆς βασιλείας τῶν ἀνθρώπων, καὶ ᾧ ἂν δόξῃ δώσει αὐτήν.
and off of-the-ones of-mankinds it-was-pursued-out, and the-one a-heart of-it with of-the-ones of-beastlets it-was-given, and with of-field-donkeys the-one a-housing-down-unto of-it, and to-a-victualage as to-an-ox they-were-morseling-to to-it, and off of-the-one of-a-dew of-the-one of-a-sky the-one an-en-capsuling-to of-it it-was-dipped, unto-if-which of-which it-had-acquainted to-which-a-one it-authority-belongeth-of, the-one a-Deity(Elah) the-one most-lofteed, of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-the-ones of-mankinds, and unto-which ever it-might-have-thought-unto it-shall-give to-it.
5:21 εγνω A | om ο θεος A | αν] εα̅| A
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:22 καὶ σὺ οὖν ὁ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ Βαλτασὰρ οὐκ ἐταπείνωσας τὴν καρδίαν σου κατενώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ· οὐ πάντα ταῦτα ἔγνως·
And thou accordingly the-one a-son of-it, Baltasar, not thou-en-low-belonged-to to-the-one to-a-heart of-thee to-down-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-Deity; not to-all to-the-ones-these thou-had-acquainted;
5:22 om ουν A | κατενωπιον] ενωπιον A
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:23 καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν κύριον θεὸν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ὑψώθης, καὶ τὰ σκεύη τοῦ οἴκου αὐτοῦ ἤνεγκας ἐνώπιόν σου, καὶ σὺ καὶ οἱ μεγιστᾶνές σου καὶ αἱ παλλακαί σου καὶ αἱ παράκοιτοί σου οἶνον ἐπίνετε ἐν αὐτοῖς, καὶ τοὺς θεοὺς τοὺς χρυσοῦς καὶ ἀργυροῦς καὶ χαλκοῦς καὶ σιδηροῦς καὶ ξυλίνους καὶ λιθίνους, οἳ οὐ βλέπουσιν καὶ οἳ οὐκ ἀκούουσιν καὶ οὐ γινώσκουσιν, ᾔνεσας, καὶ τὸν θεὸν οὗ ἡ πνοή σου ἐν χειρὶ αὐτοῦ καὶ πᾶσαι αἱ ὁδοί σου, αὐτὸν οὐκ ἐδόξασας.
and upon to-the-one to-Authority-belonged(Mare) to-a-Deity of-the-one of-a-sky thou-was-en-lofteed, and to-the-ones to-equipeednesses of-the-one of-a-house of-it thou-beared to-in-look-belonged of-thee, and thou and the-ones most-greats of-thee and the-ones concubines of-thee and the-ones situaters-beside of-thee to-a-wine ye-were-drinking in unto-them, and to-the-ones to-deities(elah) to-the-ones to-golden and to-silvern and to-coppern and to-iron and to-wooded-belonged-to and to-stoned-belonged-to, which not they-view and which not they-hear and not they-acquaint, thou-lauded-unto, and to-the-one to-a-Deity(Elah) of-which the-one currenting of-thee in unto-a-hand of-it and all the-ones ways of-thee, to-it not thou-reckoned-to.
5:23 ηνεγκας] ηνεγκαν B? (-γκας B*fortA) | αι παρακοιτοι] om αι A | om και οι ουκ ανουουσιν A | χειρι] pr τη A
(O) Βασιλεῦ σὺ ἐποιήσω ἑστιατορίαν τοῖς φίλοις σου καὶ ἔπινες οἶνον, καὶ τὰ σκεύη τοῦ οἴκου τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος ἠνέχθη σοι καὶ ἐπίνετε ἐν αὐτοῖς, σὺ καὶ οἱ μεγιστᾶνές σου, καὶ ᾐνέσατε πάντα τὰ εἴδωλα τὰ χειροποίητα τῶν ἀνθρώπων, καὶ τῷ θεῷ τῷ ζῶντι οὐκ εὐλογήσατε, καὶ τὸ πνεῦμά σου ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὸ βασίλειόν σου αὐτὸς ἔδωκέ σοι, καὶ οὐκ εὐλόγησας αὐτὸν οὐδὲ ᾔνεσας αὐτῷ.
Ruler-of, thou thou-did-unto to-an-eat-belonging-unto unto-the-ones unto-cared of-thee and thou-was-drinking to-a-wine, and the-ones equipeednesses of-the-one of-a-house of-a-Deity of-the-one of-lifing-unto it-was-beared unto-thee and ye-were-drinking in unto-them, thou and the-ones most-greats of-thee, and ye-lauded-unto to-all to-the-ones to-images to-the-ones to-hand-doable of-the-ones of-mankinds, and unto-the-one unto-a-Deity(Elah) unto-the-one unto-lifing-unto not ye-goodly-fortheed-unto, and the-one a-currenting-to of-thee in unto-the-one unto-a-hand of-it, and to-the-one to-a-rulerlet of-thee it it-gave unto-thee, and not thou-goodly-fortheed-unto to-it not-then-also thou-lauded-unto unto-it.
5:23 ηνεσατε] ηνειτε Syr | ÷ σοι και ουκ . . . ηνεσας αυτω 87vid (sed deest V)
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:24 διὰ τοῦτο ἐκ προσώπου αὐτοῦ ἀπεστάλη ἀστράγαλος χειρὸς καὶ τὴν γραφὴν ταύτην ἐνέταξεν.
Through to-the-one-this out of-looked-toward of-it it-had-been-set-off a-wringing-along of-a-hand and to-the-one to-a-scribing to-the-one-this it-arranged-in.
Note: a-wringing-along : used to refer to a wring in a formation, of vertabrae, of certain animal ankle joints, of knuckles and the dice made from them, as a compliment of wringing along into formation (i.e. well turned), of a type of scourge, of types of moldings, of a type of plant, of a type of ear ring, of a type of wood prism, etc.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:25 καὶ αὕτη ἡ γραφὴ ἡ ἐντεταγμένη Μανή, θεκέλ, φαρές.
And the-one-this the-one a-scribing the-one having-had-come-to-be-arranged-in, Manê, thekel, fares.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:26 τοῦτο τὸ σύγκριμα τοῦ ῥήματος· μανή, ἐμέτρησεν ὁ θεὸς τὴν βασιλείαν σου καὶ ἐπλήρωσεν αὐτήν·
The-one-this the-one a-separating-together-to of-the-one of-an-uttering-to; manê, it-measured-unto the-one a-Deity(Elah) to-the-one to-a-ruling-of of-thee and it-en-filled to-it;
5:26 του ρημ sup ras B?
(O) τοῦτο τὸ σύγκριμα τῆς γραφῆς Ἠρίθμηται ὁ χρόνος σου τῆς βασιλείας, ἀπολήγει ἡ βασιλεία σου·
The-one-this the-one a-separating-together-to of-the-one of-a-scribing, It-had-come-to-be-numbered-unto the-one a-while of-thee of-the-one of-a-ruling-of, it-abateth-off, the-one a-ruling-of of-thee;
5:26–28 η βασιλεια σου·| συντετμηται· και| συντετελεσται· η| βασιλεια σου· sic distinx 87
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:27 θεκέλ, ἐστάθη ἐν ζυγῷ καὶ εὑρέθη ὑστεροῦσα·
thekel, it-was-stood in unto-a-couplage and it-was-found lattering-unto;
(O) (Dan 6:26a) συντέτμηται καὶ συντετέλεσται·
(Dan 6:26a) it-had-come-to-be-cut-together and it-had-come-to-be-finished-together-unto;
5:26–28 η βασιλεια σου·| συντετμηται· και| συντετελεσται· η| βασιλεια σου· sic distinx 87
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:28 φαρές, διῄρηται ἡ βασιλεία σου καὶ ἐδόθη Μήδοις καὶ Πέρσαις.
fares, it-had-come-to-be-sectioned-along-through-unto the-one a-ruling-of of-thee and it-was-given unto-Mêdians and unto-Persians.
(O) (Dan 6:26b) ἡ βασιλεία σου τοῖς Μήδοις καὶ τοῖς Πέρσαις δίδοται.
(Dan 6:26b) the-one a-ruling-of of-thee unto-the-ones unto-Mêdians and unto-the-ones unto-Persians it-be-given.
5:26–28 η βασιλεια σου·| συντετμηται· και| συντετελεσται· η| βασιλεια σου· sic distinx 87
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:29 καὶ εἶπεν Βαλτασάρ, καὶ ἐνέδυσαν τὸν Δανιὴλ πορφύραν, καὶ τὸν μανιάκην τὸν χρυσοῦν περιέθηκαν περὶ τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐκήρυξεν περὶ αὐτοῦ εἶναι αὐτὸν ἄρχοντα τρίτον ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ.
And it-had-said, a-Baltasar, and they-sunk-in to-the-one to-a-Daniêl to-a-flushedness, and to-the-one to-a-torc to-the-one to-golden they-placed-about about to-the-one to-a-throat of-it, and it-heraldered about of-it to-be to-it to-firsting to-third in unto-the-one unto-a-ruling-of.
Note: to-a-flushedness : used to refer to a kind of mussel from the blueish-red dye it yields because of its flush of color visual affect, and to the dye itself; also used of clothing and adornments as assigned to the flushed color category, i.e. bright red to blueish-red.
Note: to-a-torc : a rigid neck ring often with a gap, bent on.
5:29 πρφυραν B* (πορφ. Bab) | ειναι] pr του A | βασιλεια] + αυτου A | superscr ορασις ς´ A
(O) τότε Βαλτασὰρ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐνέδυσε τὸν Δανιὴλ πορφύραν, καὶ μανιάκην χρυσοῦν περιέθηκεν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἔδωκεν ἐξουσίαν αὐτῷ τοῦ τρίτου μέρους τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ.
To-the-one-which-also a-Baltasar the-one a-ruler-of it-sunk-in to-the-one to-a-Daniêl to-a-flushedness, and to-a-torc to-golden it-placed-about unto-it, and it-gave to-a-being-out-unto unto-it of-the-one of-third of-a-portioneedness of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-it.
Note: to-a-flushedness : used to refer to a kind of mussel from the blueish-red dye it yields because of its flush of color visual affect, and to the dye itself; also used of clothing and adornments as assigned to the flushed color category, i.e. bright red to blueish-red.
Note: to-a-torc : a rigid neck ring often with a gap, bent on.
5:29 ο βασιλευς] σι sup ras 87?
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:30 ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ νυκτὶ ἀναιρέθη Βαλτασὰρ ὁ βασιλεὺς ὁ Χαλδαίων,
In unto-it unto-the-one unto-a-night it-was-sectioned-along-up-unto a-Baltasar the-one a-ruler-of the-one of-Chaldee-belonged,
5:30 superscr ορασις ς´ A | ανερεθη B* ανηρεθη BabA | om ο βασιλευς ο Χαλδαιων A | Χαλδαιος Bab
(O) καὶ τὸ σύγκριμα ἐπῆλθε Βαλτασὰρ τῷ βασιλεῖ, καὶ τὸ βασίλειον ἐξῆρται ἀπὸ τῶν Χαλδαίων καὶ ἐδόθη τοῖς Μήδοις καὶ τοῖς Πέρσαις.
And the-one a-separating-together-to it-had-came-upon unto-a-Baltasar unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of, and the-one a-rulerlet it-had-come-to-be-lifted-out off of-the-ones of-Chaldee-belonged and it-was-given unto-the-ones unto-Mêdians and unto-the-ones unto-Persians.
5:30 και το συγκριμα επηλθε B. τω βασιλει] [Θ´ ] εν ταυτη τη νυκτι ανηρεθη B. ο βασιλευς ο Χαλδαιος Syrmg 5:31 ο των Μηδων] ο βασιλευς των Περσων Syrmg
(426 B.C.)
Dan 5:31 (Dan 6:1) καὶ Δαρεῖος ὁ Μῆδος παρέλαβεν τὴν βασιλείαν, ὢν ἐτῶν ἑξήκοντα δύο.
(Dan 6:1) and a-Dareios the-one a-Mêdian it-had-taken-beside to-the-one to-a-ruling-of, being of-yeareednesses of-sixty of-two.
Note: a-Dareios the-one a-Mêdian : at the time co-ruling with his son Cyrus; Cyrus took solo reign the same yeareedness; see table Dan_1:1.
5:31 Δαριος B* (Δαρειος Bab)
(O) (Dan 6:1) καὶ Ἀρταξέρξης ὁ τῶν Μήδων παρέλαβε τὴν βασιλείαν.
(Dan 6:1) And an-Artaxerxês the-one of-the-ones of-Mêdians it-had-taken-beside to-the-one to-a-ruling-of.
Note: an-Artaxerxês the-one of-the-ones of-Mêdians : at the time co-ruling with his son Cyrus; Cyrus took solo reign the same yeareedness; see table Dan_1:1.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:1 (Dan 6:2) Καὶ ἤρεσεν ἐνώπιον Δαρείου, καὶ κατέστησεν ἐπὶ τῆς βασιλείας σατράπας ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι τοῦ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ βασιλείᾳ αὐτοῦ,
(Dan 6:2) And it-pleased to-in-look-belonged of-a-Dareios, and it-stood-down upon of-the-one of-a-ruling-of to-provincers to-a-hundred to-twenty of-the-one to-be to-them in unto-whole unto-the-one unto-a-ruling-of of-it,
6:1 Δαριου B* (Δαρειου Bab) : item 28 | ολη] παση A
(O) (Dan 6:1) Καὶ Δαρεῖος πλήρης τῶν ἡμερῶν καὶ ἔνδοξος ἐν γήρει· (Dan 6:2) καὶ κατέστησε σατράπας ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι ἑπτὰ ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ,
(Dan 6:1) And a-Dareios repletinged of-the-ones of-dayednesses and reckoned-in in unto-an-oldeness; (Dan 6:2) and it-stood-down to-provincers to-a-hundred to-twenty to-seven upon of-all of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-it,
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:2 (Dan 6:3) καὶ ἐπάνω αὐτῶν τακτικοὺς τρεῖς, ὧν ἦν Δανιὴλ εἷς ἐξ αὐτῶν, τοῦ ἀποδιδόναι αὐτοῖς τοὺς σατράπας λόγον, ὅπως ὁ βασιλεὺς μὴ ἐνοχλῆται.
(Dan 6:3) and upon-up-unto-which of-them to-arrange-belonged-of to-three, of-which it-was a-Daniêl one out of-them, of-the-one to-give-off unto-them to-the-ones to-provincers to-a-forthee, unto-which-whither the-one a-ruler-of lest it-might-be-crowded-in-unto.
6:2 ος] ων A
(O) (Dan 6:3) καὶ ἐπ' αὐτῶν ἄνδρας τρεῖς ἡγουμένους αὐτῶν. καὶ Δανιὴλ εἷς ἦν τῶν τριῶν ἀνδρῶν,
(Dan 6:3) and upon of-them to-men to-three to-leading-unto of-them. And a-Daniêl one it-was of-the-ones of-three of-men,
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:3 (Dan 6:4) καὶ ἦν Δανιὴλ ὑπὲρ αὐτούς, ὅτι πνεῦμα περισσὸν ἐν αὐτῷ, καὶ ὁ βασιλεὺς κατέστησεν αὐτὸν ἐφ' ὅλης τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ.
(Dan 6:4) And it-was a-Daniêl over to-them, to-which-a-one a-currenting-to abouted in unto-it, and the-one a-ruler-of it-stood-down to-it upon of-whole of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-it.
6:3 εν] ην επ A
(O) (Dan 6:4) ὑπὲρ πάντας ἔχων ἐξουσίαν ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ. καὶ Δανιὴλ ἦν ἐνδεδυμένος πορφύραν καὶ μέγας καὶ ἔνδοξος ἔναντι Δαρείου τοῦ βασιλέως, καθότι ἦν ἔνδοξος καὶ ἐπιστήμων καὶ συνετός, καὶ πνεῦμα ἅγιον ἐν αὐτῷ, καὶ εὐοδούμενος ἐν ταῖς πραγματείαις τοῦ βασιλέως αἷς ἔπρασσε. τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐβουλεύσατο καταστῆσαι τὸν Δανιὴλ ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ καὶ τοὺς δύο ἄνδρας, οὓς κατέστησε μετ' αὐτοῦ, καὶ σατράπας ἑκατὸν εἴκοσι ἑπτά.
(Dan 6:4) over to-all holding to-a-being-out-unto in unto-the-one unto-a-ruling-of. And a-Daniêl it-was having-had-come-to-be-sunk-in to-a-flushedness and great and reckoned-in in-ever-a-one of-a-Dareios of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, down-to-which-a-one it-was reckoned-in and standinged-upon-of and sendable-together, and a-currenting-to hallow-belonged in unto-it, and being-goodly-en-wayed in unto-the-ones unto-practicings-to-of of-the-one of-a-ruler-of unto-which it-was-practicing. To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruler-of it-purposed-of to-have-stood-down to-the-one to-a-Daniêl upon of-all of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-it and to-the-ones to-two to-men to-which it-stood-down with of-it and to-provincers to-a-hundred to-twenty to-seven.
Note: to-a-flushedness : used to refer to a kind of mussel from the blueish-red dye it yields because of its flush of color visual affect, and to the dye itself; also used of clothing and adornments as assigned to the flushed color category, i.e. bright red to blueish-red.
6:3 παντας] τ sup litur 87? | βασιλεως I°] ε sup ras 87a | ÷ και ευοδουμενος (superscr ÷) εν ταις πραγματειαις ÷ του βασιλεως αις επρασσε 87 (deest V) και ευοδ. ην (ut vid) ÷ εν τ. πρ. τ. βασ. αισ επρ. Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:4 (Dan 6:5) καὶ οἱ τακτικοὶ καὶ οἱ σατράπαι ἐζήτουν πρόφασιν εὑρεῖν κατὰ Δανιήλ· καὶ πᾶσαν πρόφασιν καὶ παράπτωμα καὶ ἀμβλάκημα οὐχ εὗρον κατ' αὐτοῦ, ὅτι πιστὸς ἦν.
(Dan 6:5) And the-ones arrange-belonged-of and the-ones provincers they-were-seeking-unto to-a-manifesting-before to-have-had-found down of-a-Daniêl; and to-all to-a-manifesting-before and to-an-en-falling-beside-to and to-a-faulting-to not it-was-found down of-it, to-which-a-one trusted it-was.
6:4 αμπλακημα Bab
(O) (Dan 6:5) ὅτε δὲ ἐβουλεύσατο ὁ βασιλεὺς καταστῆσαι τὸν Δανιὴλ ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ, τότε βουλὴν καὶ γνώμην ἐβουλεύσαντο ἐν ἑαυτοῖς οἱ δύο νεανίσκοι πρὸς ἀλλήλους λέγοντες, ἐπεὶ οὐδεμίαν ἁμαρτίαν οὐδὲ ἄγνοιαν ηὕρισκον κατὰ τοῦ Δανιὴλ περὶ ἧς κατηγορήσουσιν αὐτοῦ πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα,
(Dan 6:5) Which-also then-also it-purposed-of, the-one a-ruler-of, to-have-stood-down to-the-one to-a-Daniêl upon of-all of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-it, to-the-one-which-also to-a-purposing and to-an-acquaintance they-purposed-of in unto-selves, the-ones two new-belongings-of, toward to-other-to-other forthing, upon-if to-not-then-also-one to-an-un-adjusting-along not-then-also to-an-un-en-mulling-unto they-were-finding down of-the-one of-a-Daniêl about of-which they-shall-lead-alongedness-down-unto of-it toward to-the-one to-a-ruler-of,
6:4 ουδε μιαν 87
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:5 (Dan 6:6) καὶ εἶπον οἱ τακτικοί Οὐχ εὑρήσομεν κατὰ Δανιὴλ πρόφασιν Εἰ μὴ ἐν νομίμοις θεοῦ αὐτοῦ.
(Dan 6:6) And they-had-said, the-ones arrange-belonged-of, Not we-shall-find down of-a-Daniêl to-a-manifesting-before if lest in unto-parcelee-belonged-to of-a-Deity(Elah) of-it.
6:5 νομιμοις] νομοις A
(O) (Dan 6:6) καὶ εἶπαν Δεῦτε στήσωμεν ὁρισμὸν καθ' ἑαυτῶν, ὅτι πᾶς ἄνθρωπος οὐκ ἀξιώσει ἀξίωμα καὶ οὐ μὴ εὔξηται εὐχὴν ἀπὸ παντὸς θεοῦ ἕως ἡμερῶν τριάκοντα, ἀλλ' ἢ παρὰ Δαρείου τοῦ βασιλέως· εἰ δὲ μή, ἀποθανεῖται· ἵνα ἡττήσωσι τὸν Δανιὴλ ἐναντίον τοῦ βασιλέως, καὶ ῥιφῇ εἰς τὸν λάκκον τῶν λεόντων. ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ὅτι Δανιὴλ προσεύχεται καὶ δεῖται Κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ αὐτοῦ τρὶς τῆς ἡμέρας.
(Dan 6:6) and they-said, Ye-should-hither-of, we-might-have-stood to-a-bounding-to-of down of-selves, to-which-a-one all a-mankind not it-shall-en-deem-belong to-an-en-deem-belonging-to and not lest it-might-have-goodly-held to-a-goodly-holding off of-all of-a-deity unto-if-which of-dayednesses of-thirty, other or beside of-a-Dareios of-the-one of-a-ruler-of; if then-also lest, it-shall-die-off; so they-might-have-lessened-unto to-the-one to-a-Daniêl to-ever-a-oned-in of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, and it-might-have-been-flung into to-the-one to-a-reservoir of-the-ones of-lions. They-had-come-to-have-had-seen too-thus to-which-a-one a-Daniêl it-goodly-holdeth-toward and it-bindeth of-Authority-belonged of-the-one of-a-Deity of-it to-thrice of-the-one of-a-dayedness.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:6 (Dan 6:7) τότε οἱ τακτικοὶ καὶ οἱ σατράπαι παρέστησαν τῷ βασιλεῖ καὶ εἶπαν αὐτῷ Δαρεῖε βασιλεῦ, εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα ζῆθι.
(Dan 6:7) To-the-one-which-also the-ones arrange-belonged-of and the-ones provincers they-had-stood-beside unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of and they-said unto-it, Dareios Ruler-of, into to-the-one to-an-age thou-should-life-unto.
6:6 Δαριε B* (Δαρειε Bab) | τον αιωνα] τους αιωνας BabA
(O) (Dan 6:7) τότε προσήλθοσαν οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκεῖνοι καὶ εἶπαν ἐναντίον τοῦ βασιλέως
(Dan 6:7) To-the-one-which-also they-hath-had-came-toward, the-ones mankinds the-ones-thither, and they-said to-ever-a-oned-in of-the-one of-a-ruler-of,
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:7 (Dan 6:8) συνεβουλεύσαντο πάντες οἱ ἐπὶ τῆς βασιλείας σου στρατηγοὶ καὶ σατράπαι, ὕπατοι καὶ τοπάρχαι, στῆσαι στάσει βασιλικῇ καὶ ἐνισχῦσαι ὁρισμόν, ὅπως ὃς ἂν αἰτήσῃ αἴτημα παρὰ παντὸς θεοῦ καὶ ἀνθρώπου ἕως ἡμερῶν τριάκοντα ἀλλ' ἢ παρὰ σοῦ, βασιλεῦ, ἐμβληθήσεται εἰς τὸν λάκκον τῶν λεόντων.
(Dan 6:8) They-purposed-together-of, all the-ones upon of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-thee amass-leaders and provincers, most and occasion-firsters, to-have-stood unto-a-standing unto-ruler-belonged-of and to-have-force-held-in to-a-bounding-to-of, unto-which-whither which ever it-might-have-appealed-unto to-an-appealing-to beside of-all of-a-deity(elah) and of-a-mankind unto-if-which of-dayednesses of-thirty other or beside of-thee, Ruler-of, it-shall-be-casted-in into to-the-one to-a-reservoir of-the-ones of-lions.
6:7 τοπαρχαι] τοπαρχ sup ras Bab | στησαι στασει βασιλικη] του στησαι στασιν βασιλεικην A | αιτηση] αιτησηται A | ανθρωπων A
(O) (Dan 6:8) Ὁρισμὸν καὶ στάσιν ἐστήσαμεν, ὅτι πᾶς ἄνθρωπος ὃς ἂν εὔξηται εὐχὴν ἢ ἀξιώσῃ ἀξίωμά τι παρὰ παντὸς θεοῦ ἕως ἡμερῶν τριάκοντα ἀλλ' ἢ παρὰ Δαρείου τοῦ βασιλέως, ῥιφήσεται εἰς τὸν λάκκον τῶν λεόντων.
(Dan 6:8) To-a-bounding-to-of and to-a-standing we-stood, to-which-a-one all a-mankind which ever it-might-have-goodly-held to-a-goodly-holding or it-might-have-en-deem-belonged to-an-en-deem-belonging-to to-a-one beside of-all of-a-deity(elah) unto-if-which of-dayednesses of-thirty other or beside of-a-Dareios of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, it-shall-be-flung into to-the-one to-a-reservoir of-the-ones of-lions.
6:7 λεοντων] + και ηξιωσαν τον βασιλεα ινα στηση τον ορισμον και μη αλλοιωση αυτον διοτι ηδεισαν οτι Δανιηλ προσευχεται και δειται τρις της ημερας ινα ηττηθη δια του βασιλεως και ριφη εις τον λακκον των λεοντων Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:8 (Dan 6:9) νῦν οὖν, βασιλεῦ, στῆσον τὸν ὁρισμὸν καὶ ἔκθες γραφήν, ὅπως μὴ ἀλλοιωθῇ τὸ δόγμα Περσῶν καὶ Μήδων.
(Dan 6:9) Now accordingly, Ruler-of, thou-should-have-stood to-the-one to-a-bounding-to-of and thou-should-have-had-placed-out to-a-scribing, unto-which-whither lest it-might-have-been-en-other-belonged the-one a-thinking-to of-Persians and of-Mêdians.
6:8 τον ορισμον] om τον A | εχθες Bb) | Μηδων και Περσων A
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:9 (Dan 6:10) τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς Δαρεῖος ἐπέταξεν γραφῆναι τὸ δόγμα.
(Dan 6:10) To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruler-of a-Dareios it-arranged-upon to-have-had-been-scribed to-the-one to-a-thinking-to.
6:9 Δαριος B* (Δαρειος Bab) A : item 25
(O) (Dan 6:10) καὶ οὕτως ὁ βασιλεὺς Δαρεῖος ἔστησε καὶ ἐκύρωσεν.
(Dan 6:10) And unto-the-one-this the-one a-ruler-of a-Dareios it-stood and it-en-authoritied.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:10 (Dan 6:11) καὶ Δανιήλ, ἡνίκα ἔγνω ὅτι ἐνετάγη τὸ δόγμα, εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ· καὶ αἱ θυρίδες ἀνεῳγμέναι αὐτῷ ἐν τοῖς ὑπερῴοις αὐτοῦ κατέναντι Ἰερουσαλήμ, καὶ καιροὺς τρεῖς τῆς ἡμέρας ἦν κάμπτων ἐπὶ τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ, καὶ προσευχόμενος καὶ ἐξομολογούμενος ἐναντίον τοῦ θεοῦ αὐτοῦ, καθὼς ἦν ποιῶν ἔμπροσθεν.
(Dan 6:11) And a-Daniêl to-which-belonged-of it-had-acquainted to-which-a-one it-had-been-arranged-in the-one a-thinking-to, it-had-came-into into to-the-one to-a-house of-it, and the-ones portalets having-had-come-to-be-opened-up unto-it in unto-the-ones unto-en-overed of-it down-in-ever-a-one of-an-Ierousalêm. And to-times to-three of-the-one of-a-dayedness it-was bending upon to-the-ones to-knees of-it and goodly-holding-toward and along-fortheeing-out-unto to-ever-a-oned-in of-the-one of-a-Deity(Elah) of-it down-as it-was doing-unto in-toward-from.
Note: portalets : used to refer to a window.
6:10 αυτου I°] εαυτου A | ηνεωγμεναι A
(O) (Dan 6:11) ἐπιγνοὺς δὲ Δανιὴλ τὸν ὁρισμὸν ὃν ἔστησε κατ' αὐτοῦ, θυρίδας ἤνοιξεν ἐν τῷ ὑπερῴῳ αὐτοῦ κατέναντι Ἰερουσαλήμ, καὶ ἔπιπτεν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ τρὶς τῆς ἡμέρας, καθὼς ἐποίει ἔμπροσθεν, καὶ ἐδεῖτο.
(Dan 6:11) Having-had-acquainted-upon then-also, a-Daniêl, to-the-one to-a-bounding-to-of to-which it-stood down of-it, to-portalets it-opened-up in unto-the-one unto-en-overed of-it down-in-ever-a-one of-an-Ierousalêm, and it-was-falling-upon upon to-looked-toward of-it to-thrice of-the-one of-a-dayedness, down-as it-was-doing-unto in-toward-from, and it-was-binding.
6:10 εμπροσθεν] pr και Syrvid
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:11 (Dan 6:12) τότε οἱ ἄνδρες ἐκεῖνοι παρετήρησαν, καὶ εὗρον τὸν Δανιὴλ ἀξιοῦντα καὶ δεόμενον τοῦ θεοῦ αὐτοῦ.
(Dan 6:12) To-the-one-which-also the-ones men the-ones-thither they-had-kept-beside-unto, and they-had-found to-the-one to-a-Daniêl to-en-deem-belonging and to-binding of-the-one of-a-Deity(Elah) of-it.
(O) (Dan 6:12) καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐτήρησαν τὸν Δανιήλ, καὶ κατελάβοσαν αὐτὸν εὐχόμενον τρὶς τῆς ἡμέρας καθ' ἑκάστην ἡμέραν.
(Dan 6:12) And them they-kept-unto to-the-one to-a-Daniêl, and they-hath-had-taken-down to-it to-goodly-holding to-thrice of-the-one of-a-dayedness down to-each to-a-dayedness.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:12 (Dan 6:13) καὶ προσελθόντες λέγουσιν τῷ βασιλεῖ Βασιλεῦ, οὐχ ὁρισμὸν ἔταξας ὅπως πᾶς ἄνθρωπος ὃς ἂν αἰτήσῃ παρὰ παντὸς θεοῦ καὶ ἀνθρώπου αἴτημα ἕως ἡμερῶν τριάκοντα ἀλλ' ἢ παρὰ σοῦ, βασιλεῦ, ἐμβληθήσεται εἰς τὸν λάκκον τῶν λεόντων; καὶ εἶπεν ὁ βασιλεύς Ἀληθινὸς ὁ λόγος, καὶ τὸ δόγμα Μήδων καὶ Περσῶν οὐ παρελεύσεται.
(Dan 6:13) And having-had-came-beside they-forth unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of, Ruler-of, not to-a-bounding-to-of thou-arranged unto-which-whither all a-mankind which ever it-might-have-appealed-unto beside of-all of-a-Deity(Elah) and of-a-mankind to-an-appealing-to unto-if-which of-dayednesses of-thirty other or beside of-thee, Ruler-of, it-shall-be-casted-in into to-the-one to-a-reservoir of-the-ones of-lions? And it-had-said, the-one a-ruler-of, Un-secluded-belonged-to the-one a-forthee, and the-one a-thinking-to of-Mêdians and of-Persians not it-shall-come-beside.
6:12 ουχ] ουχι A | αιτηση] αυτησηται A
(O) (Dan 6:13) τότε οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐνέτυχον τῷ βασιλεῖ καὶ εἶπαν Δαρεῖε βασιλεῦ, οὐχ ὁρισμὸν ὡρίσω ἵνα πᾶς ἄνθρωπος μὴ εὔξηται εὐχὴν μηδὲ ἀξιώσῃ ἀξίωμα παρὰ παντὸς θεοῦ ἕως ἡμερῶν τριάκοντα ἀλλὰ παρὰ σοῦ, βασιλεῦ· εἰ δὲ μή, ῥιφήσεται εἰς τὸν λάκκον τῶν λεόντων; ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ ὁ βασιλεὺς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς Ἀκριβὴς ὁ λόγος, καὶ μενεῖ ὁ ὁρισμός,
(Dan 6:13) To-the-one-which-also the-ones-these the-ones mankinds they-had-actuanated-in unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of and they-said, Dareios Ruler-of, not to-a-bounding-to-of thou-bounded-to so all a-mankind lest it-might-have-goodly-held to-a-goodly-holding lest-then-also it-might-have-en-deem-belonged to-an-en-deem-belonging-to beside of-all of-a-Deity(Elah) unto-if-which of-dayednesses of-thirty other beside of-thee, Ruler-of, if then-also lest, it-shall-be-flung into to-the-one to-a-reservoir of-the-ones of-lions? Having-been-separated-off then-also the-one a-ruler-of it-had-said unto-them, Exactinged the-one a-forthee, and it-shall-stay the-one a-bounding-to-of.
6:12 Δαρεῖ|| 87 | ορισμον] inter ο et ρ ras aliq 87? | ει δε μη bis scr 87✱ (improb 2° 87?)
HS reads Gr. [12a] (Dan 6:13a) καὶ εἶπον αὐτῷ Ὁρκίζομέν σε τοῖς Μήδων καὶ Περσῶν δόγμασιν, ἵνα μὴ ἀλλοιώσῃς τὸ πρόσταγμα μηδὲ θαυμάσῃς πρόσωπον, καὶ ἵνα μὴ ἐλαττώσῃς τι τῶν εἰρημένων, καὶ κολάσῃς τὸν ἄνθρωπον ὃς οὐκ ἐνέμεινε τῷ ὁρισμῷ τούτῳ. καὶ εἶπεν Οὕτως ποιήσω καθὼς λέγετε, καὶ ἑστηκέ μοι τοῦτο.
(Dan 6:13a) And they-had-said unto-it, We-fenceed-to to-thee unto-the-ones of-Mêdians and unto-the-ones of-Persians unto-thinkings-to, so lest thou-might-have-en-othered to-the-one to-an-arranging-toward-to lest-then-also thou-might-have-marveled to-looked-toward, and so lest thou-might-have-en-lackened to-a-one of-the-ones of-having-had-come-to-be-said, and thou-might-have-strictured-to to-the-one to-a-mankind which not it-stayed-in unto-the-one unto-a-bounding-to-of unto-the-one-this. And it-had-said, Unto-the-one-this I-shall-do-unto down-as ye-forth, and it-had-come-to-be-stood unto-me the-one-this.
6:12a om τι Syr | και 4°] αλλα (superscr) 87? | λεγετε] ε 3° sup ras (fort prius αι) 87?
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:13 (Dan 6:14) τότε ἀπεκρίθησαν καὶ λέγουσιν ἐνώπιον τοῦ βασιλέως Δανιὴλ ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν τῆς αἰχμαλωσίας τῆς Ἰουδαίας οὐχ ὑπετάγη τῷ δόγματί σου, καὶ καιροὺς τρεῖς τῆς ἡμέρας αἰτεῖ παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ αὐτοῦ τὰ αἰτήματα αὐτοῦ.
(Dan 6:14) To-the-one-which-also they-were-separated-off and they-forth to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, A-Daniêl off of-the-ones of-sons of-the-one of-a-spear-capturing-unto of-the-one of-an-Ioudaia not it-had-been-arranged-under unto-the-one unto-a-thinking-to of-thee, and to-times to-three of-the-one of-a-dayedness it-appealeth-unto beside of-the-one of-a-Deity of-it to-the-ones to-appealings-to of-it.
6:13 απο] pr ο A | σου] + περι του ορισμου ου εταξας A | αιτει] αιτειτε A
(O) (Dan 6:14) καὶ εἶπον Ἰδοὺ εὕρομεν Δανιὴλ τὸν φίλον σου εὐχόμενον καὶ δεόμενον τοῦ προσώπου τοῦ θεοῦ αὐτοῦ τρὶς τῆς ἡμέρας.
(Dan 6:14) And they-had-said, Thou-should-have-had-seen, we-had-found to-a-Daniêl to-the-one to-cared of-thee to-goodly-holding and to-binding of-the-one of-looked-toward of-the-one of-a-Deity of-it to-thrice of-the-one of-a-dayedness.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:14 (Dan 6:15) τότε ὁ βασιλεύς, ὡς τὸ ῥῆμα ἤκουσεν, πολὺ ἐλυπήθη ἐπ' αὐτῷ, καὶ περὶ τοῦ Δανιὴλ ἠγωνίσατο τοῦ ἐξελέσθαι αὐτόν.
(Dan 6:15) To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruler-of, as to-the-one to-an-uttering-to it-heard, to-much it-was-throed-unto upon unto-it, and about of-the-one of-a-Daniêl it-struggled-to of-the-one to-have-had-sectioned-out to-it.
6:14 αυτον] + και εως εσπερας ην αγωνιζομενος του (om A) εξελεσθαι αυτον Bab mh inf A
(O) (Dan 6:15) καὶ λυπούμενος ὁ βασιλεὺς εἶπεν ῥιφῆναι τὸν Δανιὴλ εἰς τὸν λάκκον τῶν λεόντων, κατὰ τὸν ὁρισμὸν ὃν ἔστησε κατ' αὐτοῦ. τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς σφόδρα ἐλυπήθη ἐπὶ τῷ Δανιήλ, καὶ ἐβοήθει τοῦ ἐξελέσθαι αὐτὸν ἕως δυσμῶν ἡλίου ἀπὸ τῶν χειρῶν τῶν σατραπῶν,
(Dan 6:15) And being-throed-unto the-one a-ruler-of it-had-said to-have-been-flung to-the-one to-a-Daniêl into to-the-one to-a-reservoir of-the-ones of-lions, down to-the-one to-a-bounding-to-of to-which it-stood down of-it. To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruler-of to-vehemented it-was-throed-unto upon unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl, and it-was-holler-running-unto of-the-one to-have-had-sectioned-out to-it unto-if-which of-sinkeeings of-a-sun off of-the-ones of-hands of-the-ones of-provincers,
6:14 εστησαν Syr | εβοηθει] ει sup ras (fort prius η) 87?
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:15 (Dan 6:16) τότε οἱ ἄνδρες ἐκεῖνοι λέγουσιν τῷ βασιλεῖ Γνῶθι, βασιλεῦ, ὅτι τὸ δόγμα Μήδοις καὶ Πέρσαις, τοῦ πᾶν ὁρισμὸν καὶ στάσιν ἣν ἂν ὁ βασιλεὺς στήσῃ, οὐ δεῖ παραλλάξαι.
(Dan 6:16) To-the-one-which-also the-ones men the-ones-thither they-forth unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of, Thou-should-have-had-acquainted, Ruler-of, to-which-a-one the-one a-thinking-to unto-Mêdians and unto-Persians, of-the-one to-all to-a-bounding-to-of and to-a-standing to-which ever the-one a-ruler-of it-might-have-stood, not it-bindeth to-have-othered-beside.
6:15 om αν A | στησει A
(O) (Dan 6:16) καὶ οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἐξελέσθαι αὐτὸν ἀπ' αὐτῶν.
(Dan 6:16) and not it-was-abling to-have-had-sectioned-out to-it off of-them.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:16 (Dan 6:17) τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς εἶπεν, καὶ ἤγαγον τὸν Δανιὴλ καὶ ἐνέβαλον εἰς τὸν λάκκον τῶν λεόντων· καὶ εἶπεν ὁ βασιλεὺς τῷ Δανιὴλ Ὁ θεός σου, ᾧ σὺ λατρεύεις ἐνδελεχῶς, αὐτὸς ἐξελεῖταί σε.
(Dan 6:17) To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruler-of it-had-said, and they-had-led to-the-one to-a-Daniêl and they-had-casted-in into to-the-one to-a-reservoir of-the-ones of-lions; and it-had-said, the-one a-ruler-of, unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl, The-one a-Deity(Elah) of-thee, unto-which thou thou-serve-of unto-elongatinged-in, it it-shall-section-out to-thee.
Note: they-had-casted-in in 03 : + to-it in 02 03C1 03C2.
6:16 ενεβαλον] + αυτον BabA | om συ A
(O) (Dan 6:17) ἀναβοήσας δὲ Δαρεῖος ὁ βασιλεὺς εἶπεν τῷ Δανιήλ Ὁ θεός σου, ᾧ σὺ λατρεύεις ἐνδελεχῶς τρὶς τῆς ἡμέρας, αὐτὸς ἐξελεῖταί σε ἐκ χειρὸς τῶν λεόντων· ἕως πρωὶ θάρρει.
(Dan 6:17) Having-up-hollered-unto then-also, a-Dareios the-one a-ruler-of, it-had-said unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl, The-one a-Deity(Elah) of-thee, unto-which thou thou-serve-of unto-elongatinged-in to-thrice of-the-one of-a-dayedness, it it-shall-section-out to-thee out of-a-hand of-the-ones of-lions; unto-if-which unto-before-belonged thou-should-brave-unto.
Note: thou-should-brave-unto (QARREI) : a later phonetic variant of QARSEI, having the same meaning.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:17 (Dan 6:18) καὶ ἤνεγκαν λίθον καὶ ἐπέθηκαν ἐπὶ τὸ στόμα τοῦ λάκκου, καὶ ἐσφραγίσατο ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐν τῷ δακτυλίῳ αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐν τῷ δακτυλίῳ τῶν μεγιστάνων αὐτοῦ, ὅπως μὴ ἀλλοιωθῇ πρᾶγμα ἐν τῷ Δανιήλ.
(Dan 6:18) And they-beared to-a-stone and they-placed-upon upon to-the-one to-a-becutteeing-to of-the-one of-a-reservoir, and it-sealed-to, the-one a-ruler-of, in unto-the-one unto-digit-belonged of-it and in unto-the-one unto-digit-belonged of-the-ones of-most-greats of-it, unto-which-whither lest it-might-have-been-en-other-belonged a-practicing-to in unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl.
6:17 ηνεγκεν A | επεθηκεν A | om ο βασιλευς A
(O) (Dan 6:18) τότε Δανιὴλ ἐρρίφη εἰς τὸν λάκκον τῶν λεόντων, καὶ ἠνέχθη λίθος καὶ ἐτέθη εἰς τὸ στόμα τοῦ λάκκου, καὶ ἐσφραγίσατο ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐν τῷ δακτυλίῳ ἑαυτοῦ καὶ ἐν τοῖς δακτυλίοις τῶν μεγιστάνων αὐτοῦ, ὅπως μὴ ἀπ' αὐτῶν ἀρθῇ ὁ Δανιὴλ ἢ ὁ βασιλεὺς αὐτὸν ἀνασπάσῃ ἐκ τοῦ λάκκου.
(Dan 6:18) To-the-one-which-also a-Daniêl it-was-flung into to-the-one to-a-reservoir of-the-ones of-lions, and it-was-beared a-stone and it-was-placed into to-the-one to-a-becutteeing-to of-the-one of-a-reservoir, and it-sealed-to, the-one a-ruler-of, in unto-the-one unto-digit-belonged of-self and in unto-the-ones unto-digit-belonged of-the-ones of-most-greats of-it, unto-which-whither lest off of-them it-might-have-been-lifted the-one a-Daniêl or the-one a-ruler-of to-it it-might-have-up-drawn-unto out of-the-one of-a-reservoir.
6:17 ÷ η ο βασιλευς . . . λακκου 87 Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:18 (Dan 6:19) καὶ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ βασιλεὺς εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐκοιμήθη ἄδειπνος, καὶ ἐδέσματα οὐκ εἰσήνεγκαν αὐτῷ, καὶ ὁ ὕπνος ἀπέστη ἀπ' αὐτοῦ. καὶ ἔκλεισεν ὁ θεὸς τὰ στόματα τῶν λεόντων, καὶ οὐ παρηνώχλησαν τῷ Δανιήλ.
(Dan 6:19) And it-had-came-off, the-one a-ruler-of, into to-the-one to-a-house of-it and it-was-situateed-unto un-mealed, and to-eatings-to not they-beared-into unto-it, and the-one a-sleep it-had-stood-off off of-it. And it-latch-belonged-off, the-one a-Deity, to-the-ones to-becutteeings-to of-the-ones of-lions, and not they-crowded-in-beside-unto unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl.
6:18 εισηνεγκαν] εισηνεχθη A | ο υπνος] + αυτου A | απεστη] εδυνασθη A
(O) (Dan 6:19) τότε ὑπέστρεψεν ὁ βασιλεὺς εἰς τὰ βασίλεια αὐτοῦ καὶ ηὐλίσθη νῆστις, καὶ ἦν λυπούμενος περὶ τοῦ Δανιήλ. τότε ὁ θεὸς τοῦ Δανιὴλ πρόνοιαν ποιούμενος αὐτοῦ ἀπέκλεισε τὰ στόματα τῶν λεόντων, καὶ οὐ παρηνώχλησαν τῷ Δανιήλ.
(Dan 6:19) To-the-one-which-also it-beturned-under, the-one a-ruler-of, into to-the-ones to-ruler-belonged of-it and it-was-channeled-to a-non-eating, and it-was being-throed-unto about of-the-one of-a-Daniêl. To-the-one-which-also the-one a-Deity of-the-one of-a-Daniêl to-an-en-mulling-before-unto doing-unto of-it it-latch-belonged-off to-the-ones to-becutteeings-to of-the-ones of-lions, and not they-crowded-in-beside unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl.
6:18 και ηυλισθη νηστις] [Θ´ ]κ. εκοιμηθη αδειπνος Syrmg
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:19 (Dan 6:20) τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς ἀνέστη τὸ πρωὶ ἐν τῷ φωτί, καὶ ἐν σπουδῇ ἦλθεν ἐπὶ τὸν λάκκον τῶν λεόντων.
(Dan 6:20) To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruler-of it-had-stood-up to-the-one unto-before-belonged in unto-the-one unto-a-light, and in unto-a-hasteneeing it-had-came upon to-the-one to-a-reservoir of-the-ones of-lions.
(O) (Dan 6:20) καὶ ὁ βασιλεὺς Δαρεῖος ὤρθρισε πρωὶ καὶ παρέλαβε μεθ' ἑαυτοῦ τοὺς σατράπας, καὶ πορευθεὶς ἔστη ἐπὶ τοῦ στόματος τοῦ λάκκου τῶν λεόντων.
(Dan 6:20) And the-one a-ruler-of a-Dareios it-ruddy-jutted-to unto-before-belonged and it-had-taken-beside with of-self to-the-ones to-provincers, and having-been-traversed-of it-had-stood upon of-the-one of-a-becutteeing-to of-the-one of-a-reservoir of-the-ones of-lions.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:20 (Dan 6:21) καὶ ἐν τῷ ἐγγίζειν αὐτὸν τῷ λάκκῳ ἐβόησεν φωνῇ ἰσχυρᾷ Δανιὴλ ὁ δοῦλος τοῦ θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος, ὁ θεός σου, ᾧ σὺ λατρεύεις ἐνδελεχῶς, εἰ ἠδυνήθη ἐξελέσθαι σε ἐκ στόματος τῶν λεόντων;
(Dan 6:21) And in unto-the-one to-near-to to-it unto-the-one unto-a-reservoir it-hollered-unto unto-a-sound unto-force-held, Daniêl the-one a-bondee of-the-one of-a-Deity(Elah) of-the-one of-lifing-unto, the-one a-Deity(Elah) of-thee unto-which thou thou-serve-of unto-elongatinged-in, if it-was-abled to-have-had-sectioned-out to-thee out of-a-becutteeing-to of-the-ones of-lions?
(O) (Dan 6:21) τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐκάλεσε τὸν Δανιὴλ φωνῇ μεγάλῃ μετὰ κλαυθμοῦ λέγων Ὦ Δανιήλ, εἰ ἄρα ζῇς, καὶ ὁ θεός σου, ᾧ λατρεύεις ἐνδελεχῶς, σέσωκέ σε ἀπὸ τῶν λεόντων, καὶ οὐκ ἠχρείωκάν σε;
(Dan 6:21) To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruler-of it-called-unto to-the-one to-a-Daniêl unto-a-sound unto-great with of-sobbing-of forthing, Oh Daniêl, if thus thou-life-unto, and the-one a-Deity(Elah) of-thee unto-which thou-serve-of unto-elongatinged-in it-had-come-to-save-to to-thee off of-the-ones of-lions, and not they-had-come-to-en-un-afford-belong to-thee?
6:20 απο|πο 87
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:21 (Dan 6:22) καὶ εἶπεν Δανιὴλ τῷ βασιλεῖ Βασιλεῦ, εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας ζῆθι.
(Dan 6:22) And it-had-said, a-Daniêl, unto-the-one unto-a-ruler-of, Ruler-of, into to-the-ones to-ages thou-should-life-unto.
(O) (Dan 6:22) τότε Δανιὴλ ἐπήκουσε φωνῇ μεγάλῃ καὶ εἶπεν
(Dan 6:22) To-the-one-which-also a-Daniêl it-heard-upon unto-a-sound unto-great and it-had-said,
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:22 (Dan 6:23) ὁ θεός μου ἀπέστειλεν τὸν ἄγγελον αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐνέφραξεν τὰ στόματα τῶν λεόντων, καὶ οὐκ ἐλυμήναντό με, ὅτι κατέναντι αὐτοῦ εὐθύτης ηὑρέθη μοι· καὶ ἐνώπιον δὲ σοῦ, βασιλεῦ, παράπτωμα οὐκ ἐποίησα.
(Dan 6:23) The-one a-Deity(Elah) of-me it-set-off to-the-one to-a-leadeeer of-it and it-hedged-in to-the-ones to-becutteeings-to of-the-ones of-lions, and not they-slagged to-me, to-which-a-one down-in-ever-a-one of-it a-straightness it-had-been-found unto-me; and to-in-look-belonged then-also of-thee, Ruler-of, to-an-en-falling-beside-to not I-did-unto.
6:22 κατεναντι] κατεναντιον A | ηυρεθη μοι] ευρεθη εν εμοι A
(O) Βασιλεῦ, ἔτι εἰμὶ ζῶν, (Dan 6:23) καὶ σέσωκέ με ὁ θεὸς ἀπὸ τῶν λεόντων, καθότι δικαιοσύνη ἐν ἐμοὶ εὑρέθη ἐναντίον αὐτοῦ· καὶ ἐναντίον δὲ σοῦ, βασιλεῦ, οὔτε ἄγνοια οὔτε ἁμαρτία εὑρέθη ἐν ἐμοί· σὺ δὲ ἤκουσας ἀνθρώπων πλανώντων βασιλεῖς καὶ ἔρριψάς με εἰς τὸν λάκκον τῶν λεόντων εἰς ἀπώλειαν.
Ruler-of, if-to-a-one I-be lifing-unto, (Dan 6:23) and it-had-come-to-save-to to-me, the-one a-Deity(Elah), off of-the-ones of-lions, down-to-which-a-one a-course-belongingedness in unto-ME it-was-found to-ever-a-oned-in of-it; and to-ever-a-oned-in then-also of-thee, Ruler-of, not-also an-un-en-mulling-unto not-also an-un-adjusting-along-unto it-was-found in unto-ME; thou then-also thou-heard of-mankinds of-wandering-unto to-rulers-of and thou-flung to-me into to-the-one to-a-reservoir of-the-ones of-lions into to-a-destructing-off-of.
6:22 om και 3° Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:23 (Dan 6:24) τότε ὁ βασιλεὺς πολὺ ἠγαθύνθη ἐπ' αὐτῷ, καὶ τὸν Δανιὴλ εἶπεν ἀνενέγκαι ἐκ τοῦ λάκκου. καὶ ἀνηνέχθη Δανιὴλ ἐκ τοῦ λάκκου, καὶ πᾶσα διαφθορὰ οὐχ εὑρέθη ἐν αὐτῷ, ὅτι ἐπίστευσεν ἐν τῷ θεῷ αὐτοῦ.
(Dan 6:24) To-the-one-which-also the-one a-ruler-of to-much it-was-en-excess-placened upon unto-it, and to-the-one to-a-Daniêl it-had-said to-have-beared-up out of-the-one of-a-reservoir. And it-was-beared-up a-Daniêl out of-the-one of-a-reservoir, and all a-degradedness-through not it-was-found in unto-it, to-which-a-one it-trusted-of in unto-the-one unto-a-Deity(Elah) of-it.
6:23 om εν 2° A
(O) (Dan 6:24) τότε συνήχθησαν πᾶσαι αἱ δυνάμεις καὶ εἶδον τὸν Δανιήλ, ὡς οὐ παρηνώχλησαν αὐτῷ οἱ λέοντες.
(Dan 6:24) To-the-one-which-also they-were-led-together all the-ones abilities and they-had-seen to-the-one to-a-Daniêl, as not they-crowded-in-beside-unto unto-it, the-ones lions.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:24 (Dan 6:25) καὶ εἶπεν ὁ βασιλεύς, καὶ ἠγάγοσαν τοὺς ἄνδρας τοὺς διαβαλόντας τὸν Δανιήλ, καὶ εἰς τὸν λάκκον τῶν λεόντων ἐνεβλήθησαν, αὐτοὶ καὶ οἱ υἱοὶ αὐτῶν καὶ αἱ γυναῖκες αὐτῶν· καὶ οὐκ ἔφθασαν εἰς τὸ ἔδαφος τοῦ λάκκου ἕως οὗ ἐκυρίευσαν αὐτῶν οἱ λέοντες, καὶ πάντα τὰ ὀστᾶ αὐτῶν ἐλέπτυναν.
(Dan 6:25) And it-had-said, the-one a-ruler-of, and they-hath-had-led to-the-ones to-men to-the-ones to-having-had-casted-through to-the-one to-a-Daniêl, and into to-the-one to-a-reservoir of-the-ones of-lions they-were-casted-in, them and the-ones sons of-them and the-ones women of-them; and not they-priored into to-the-one to-a-beloweedness of-the-one of-a-reservoir unto-if-which of-which they-authority-belonged-of of-them, the-ones lions, and to-all to-the-ones to-bones of-them they-peelened.
Note: they-peelened : formed from peel.
6:24 ηγαγο| A | ενεβληθησαν] εβληθησαν A | αυτων I°] ων sup ras Bab
(O) (Dan 6:25) τότε οἱ δύο ἄνθρωποι ἐκεῖνοι οἱ καταμαρτυρήσαντες τοῦ Δανιήλ, αὐτοὶ καὶ αἱ γυναῖκες αὐτῶν καὶ τὰ τέκνα αὐτῶν, ἐρρίφησαν τοῖς λέουσι, καὶ οἱ λέοντες ἀπέκτειναν αὐτοὺς καὶ ἔθλασαν τὰ ὀστᾶ αὐτῶν.
(Dan 6:25) To-the-one-which-also the-ones two mankinds the-ones-thither the-ones having-witnessed-down-unto of-the-one of-a-Daniêl, them and the-ones women of-them and the-ones creationees of-them, they-were-flung unto-the-ones unto-lions, and the-ones lions they-killed-off to-them and they-dashed-unto to-the-ones to-bones of-them.
6:24 τα| τα οστα 87
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:25 (Dan 6:26) Τότε Δαρεῖος ὁ βασιλεὺς ἔγραψεν πᾶσι τοῖς λαοῖς φυλαῖς γλώσσαις τοῖς οἰκοῦσιν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ Εἰρήνη ὑμῖν πληθυνθείη.
(Dan 6:26) To-the-one-which-also a-Dareios the-one a-ruler-of it-scribed unto-all unto-the-ones unto-peoples unto-tribings unto-tongues unto-the-ones unto-housing-unto in unto-all unto-the-one unto-a-soil, A-joinifying unto-ye it-may-have-been-repletened.
6:25 Δαριος B*A | ο βασιλευς Δαριος A | πασιν A
(O) (Dan 6:26) Τότε Δαρεῖος ἔγραψε πᾶσι τοῖς ἔθνεσι καὶ γλώσσαις καὶ χώραις τοῖς οἰκοῦσιν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ αὐτοῦ λέγων
(Dan 6:26) To-the-one-which-also a-Dareios it-scribed unto-all unto-the-ones unto-placeedness-belongings-to and unto-tongues and unto-spacednesses unto-the-ones unto-housing-unto in unto-all unto-the-one unto-a-soil of-it forthing,
6:25 χωραις κ. γλωσσαις Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:26 (Dan 6:27) ἐκ προσώπου μου ἐτέθη δόγμα τοῦτο, ἐν πάσῃ ἀρχῇ τῆς βασιλείας μου εἶναι τρέμοντας καὶ φοβουμένους ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ θεοῦ Δανιήλ, ὅτι αὐτός ἐστιν θεὸς ζῶν καὶ μένων εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας, καὶ ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ οὐ διαφθαρήσεται, καὶ ἡ κυρία αὐτοῦ ἕως τέλους·
(Dan 6:27) Out of-looked-toward of-me it-was-placed a-thinking-to the-one-this, in unto-all unto-a-firsting of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-me to-be to-trembling and to feareeing-unto off of-looked-toward of-the-one of-a-Deity(Elah) of-a-Daniêl, to-which-a-one it it-be a-Deity(Elah) lifing-unto and staying into to-the-ones to-ages, and the-one a-ruling-of of-it not it-shall-have-been-degraded-through, and the-one an-authoritying-unto of-it unto-if-which of-a-finisheedness;
6:26 τουτο] του A | om εστιν A | κυρεια Ba κυριεια A
(O) (Dan 6:27) Πάντες οἱ ἄνθρωποι οἱ ὄντες ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ μου ἔστωσαν προσκυνοῦντες καὶ λατρεύοντες τῷ θεῷ τοῦ Δανιήλ· αὐτὸς γάρ ἐστι θεὸς μένων καὶ ζῶν εἰς γενεὰς γενεῶν ἕως τοῦ αἰῶνος.
(Dan 6:27) All the-ones mankinds the-ones being in unto-the-one unto-a-ruling-of of-me they-should-be kissing-toward-unto and serving-of unto-the-one unto-a-Deity(Elah) of-the-one of-a-Daniêl; it too-thus it-be a-Deity(Elah) staying and lifing-unto into to-becomednesses of-becomednesses unto-if-which of-the-one of-an-age.
6:26 προσκυνῦν|τες 87ed
(426 B.C.)
Dan 6:27 (Dan 6:28) ἀντιλαμβάνεται καὶ ῥύεται, καὶ ποιεῖ σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα ἐν οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ὅστις ἐξείλατο τὸν Δανιὴλ ἐκ χειρὸς τῶν λεόντων.
(Dan 6:28) it-ever-a-one-taketh and it-tracteth, and it-doeth-unto to-signlets-of and to-anomalies in unto-a-sky and upon of-the-one of-a-soil, which-a-one it-sectioned-out to-the-one to-a-Daniêl out of-a-hand of-the-ones of-lions.
6:28 κατηυθυνεν A | Δαριου BA | subscr ορασις ζ´ A
(O) (Dan 6:28) ἐγὼ Δαρεῖος ἔσομαι αὐτῷ προσκυνῶν καὶ δουλεύων πάσας τὰς ἡμέρας μου· τὰ γὰρ εἴδωλα τὰ χειροποίητα οὐ δύνανται σῶσαι, ὡς ἐλυτρώσατο ὁ θεὸς τοῦ Δανιὴλ τὸν Δανιήλ.
(Dan 6:28) I a-Dareios I-shall-be unto-it kissing-toward-unto and bondeeing-of to-all to-the-ones to-dayednesses of-me; the-ones too-thus images the-ones hand-doable not they-able to-have-saved-to, as it-en-loosed, the-one a-Deity of-the-one of-a-Daniêl, to-the-one to-a-Daniêl.
(426-419 B.C.)
Dan 6:28 (Dan 6:29) καὶ Δανιὴλ κατεύθυνεν ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ Δαρείου καὶ ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ Κύρου τοῦ Πέρσου.
(Dan 6:29) And a-Daniêl it-was-straighening-down in unto-the-one unto-a-ruling-of of-a-Dareios and in unto-the-one unto-a-ruling-of of-a-Kuros of-the-one of-a-Persian.
(O) (Dan 6:29) καὶ ὁ βασιλεὺς Δαρεῖος προσετέθη πρὸς τὸ γένος αὐτοῦ, καὶ Δανιὴλ κατεστάθη ἐπὶ τῆς βασιλείας Δαρείου· καὶ Κῦρος ὁ Πέρσης παρέλαβε τὴν βασιλείαν αὐτοῦ.
(Dan 6:29) And the-one a-ruler-of a-Dareios it-was-placed-toward toward to-the-one to-a-becomeedness of-it, and a-Daniêl it-was-stood-down upon of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-a-Dareios; and a-Kuros the-one a-Persian it-had-taken-beside to-the-one to-a-ruling-of of-it.
6:28 προς το γενος] adnot (ut vid) προς τους πατερας Syrmg | ÷ και Δανιηλ (÷ 87) . . . Δαρειου 87 Syr
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:1 Ἐν ἔτει τρίτῳ Βαλτασὰρ βασιλέως Χαλδαίων Δανιὴλ ἐνύπνιον ἴδεν, καὶ αἱ ὁράσεις τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τῆς κοίτης αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὸ ἐνύπνιον αὐτοῦ ἔγραψεν.
In unto-a-yeareedness unto-third of-a-Baltasar of-a-ruler-of of-Chaldee-belonged a-Daniêl to-an-in-sleeplet it-had-seen, and the-ones seeeeings of-the-one of-a-head of-it upon of-the-one of-a-situating of-it, and to-the-one to-an-in-sleeplet of-it it-scribed.
7:1 superscr ορασις ή A superscr + ορασις . . + Γ | τριτω] πρωτω BabA | ειδεν Bab ειδε[ν?] Γ | ορασις A | om αυτου 3° AΓ
(O) Ἔτους πρώτου βασιλεύοντος Βαλτασὰρ χώρας Βαβυλωνίας Δανιὴλ ὅραμα εἶδε παρὰ κεφαλὴν ἐπὶ τῆς κοίτης αὐτοῦ. τότε Δανιὴλ τὸ ὅραμα, ὃ εἶδεν, ἔγραψεν εἰς κεφάλαια λόγων.
Of-a-yeareedness of-most-before of-ruling-of of-a-Baltasar of-a-spacedness of-a-Babulônia, a-Daniêl to-a-seeeeing-to it-had-seen beside to-a-head upon of-the-one of-a-situating of-it. To-the-one-which-also a-Daniêl to-the-one to-a-seeeeing-to to-which it-had-seen it-scribed into to-headlets of-forthees.
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:2 Ἐγὼ Δανιὴλ ἐθεώρουν, καὶ ἰδοὺ οἱ τέσσαρες ἄνεμοι τοῦ οὐρανοῦ προσέβαλλον εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν τὴν μεγάλην.
I a-Daniêl I-was-surveiling-unto, and thou-should-have-had-seen, the-ones four winds of-the-one of-a-sky they-were-casting-toward into to-the-one to-a-flourisheredness to-the-one to-great.
7:2 Δανιηλ] + εν ορα[ματι] της νυ[κτος] Γvid | εθεωρουν] + εν οραματι της νυκτος A ιδον Γ
(O) Ἐπὶ τῆς κοίτης μου ἐθεώρουν καθ' ὕπνους νυκτός, καὶ ἰδοὺ τέσσαρες ἄνεμοι τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐνέπεσον εἰς τὴν θάλασσαν τὴν μεγάλην.
Upon of-the-one of-a-situating of-me I-was-surveiling-unto down to-sleeps of-a-night, and thou-should-have-had-seen, four winds of-the-one of-a-sky they-had-fallen-in into to-the-one to-a-flourisheredness to-the-one to-great.
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:3 καὶ τέσσαρα θηρία μεγάλα ἀνέβαινον ἐκ τῆς θαλάσσης, διαφέροντα ἀλλήλων.
And four beastlets great they-were-stepping-up out of-the-one of-a-flourisheredness, bearing-through of-other-to-other.
7:3 τεσσαρα Bb : item 6, 17 | ανεβαινον AΓ
(O) καὶ τέσσαρα θηρία ἀνέβαινον ἐκ τῆς θαλάσσης, διαφέροντα ἓν παρὰ τὸ ἕν.
And four beastlets they-were-stepping-up out of-the-one of-a-flourisheredness, bearing-through, one beside to-the-one to-one.
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:4 τὸ πρῶτον ὡσεὶ λέαινα, καὶ πτερὰ αὐτῇ ὡσεὶ ἀετοῦ· ἐθεώρουν ἕως οὗ ἐξετίλη τὰ πτερὰ αὐτῆς, καὶ ἐξήρθη ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς καὶ ἐπὶ ποδῶν ἀνθρώπου ἐστάθη, καὶ καρδία ἀνθρώπου ἐδόθη αὐτῇ.
The-one most-before as-if a-lioness, and en-wingings unto-it as-if of-an-airer; I-was-surveiling-unto unto-if-which of-which it-had-been-pulled-out the-ones en-wingings of-it, and it-was-lifted-out off of-the-one of-a-soil and upon of-feet of-a-mankind it-was-stood, and a-heart of-a-mankind it-was-given unto-it.
Note: of-an-airer : used to refer to things suspended in air, of birds skilled in gliding, particularly an eagle.
7:4 λεαινα] + εχουσα πτερα BabA | αυτη] αυτης A | ωσει 2°] ως A | εξηρθη] εξηγερθη A
(O) τὸ πρῶτον ὡσεὶ λέαινα ἔχουσα πτερὰ ὡσεὶ ἀετοῦ, ἐθεώρουν ἕως ὅτου ἐτίλη τὰ πτερὰ αὐτῆς, καὶ ἤρθη ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς, καὶ ἐπὶ ποδῶν ἀνθρωπίνων ἐστάθη καὶ ἀνθρωπίνη καρδία ἐδόθη αὐτῇ.
The-one most-before as-if a-lioness holding to-en-wingings as-if of-an-airer; I-was-surveiling-unto unto-if-which of-which-a-one it-had-been-pulled the-ones en-wingings of-it, and it-was-lifted off of-the-one of-a-soil, and upon of-feet of-mankinds it-was-stood and mankind-belonged-to a-heart it-was-given unto-it.
7:4 adnot η βασιλεια των Βαβυλωνιων 87mg inf
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:5 καὶ ἰδοὺ θηρίον δεύτερον ὅμοιον ἄρκῳ, καὶ εἰς μέρος ἓν ἐστάθη, καὶ τρεῖς πλευραὶ ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτῆς ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν ὀδόντων αὐτῆς· καὶ οὕτως ἔλεγον αὐτῇ Ἀνάστηθι, φάγε σάρκας πολλάς.
And thou-should-have-had-seen, a-beastlet second along-belonged unto-a-lift-belongation-of, and into to-a-portioneedness to-one it-was-stood, and three sidednesses in unto-the-one unto-a-becutteeing-to of-it up to-middle of-the-ones of-teeth of-it; and unto-the-one-this they-were-forthing unto-it, Thou-should-have-had-stood-up, thou-should-have-had-devoured to-fleshes to-much.
Note: unto-a-lift-belongation-of : from ARKEW (derived from AIRW); incorrectly equated to ARKTOS; all occurrences in NT and Septuagint manuscripts are the ARKOS form; occurs in Jdg_1:35; 1Sa_17:34; 1Sa_17:36; 1Sa_17:37; 2Ki_2:24; Wis_11:17; Sir_47:3; Hos_13:8; Amo_5:19; Isa_11:7; Isa_59:11; Lam_3:10; Dan_7:5; Rev_12:3; refers to the bear family; the meaning refers to their fending-off fighting technique, of raising up and swatting their claws with great force and quickness; in the area of Israel the species was most likely the Syrian bear - light brown, up to 4.5 ft. nose to tail and up to 550 lbs.
7:5 τρεις πλευρα] τρια πλευρα A
(O) καὶ ἰδοὺ μετ' αὐτὴν ἄλλο θηρίον ὁμοίωσιν ἔχον ἄρκου, καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἑνὸς πλευροῦ ἐστάθη, καὶ τρία πλευρὰ ἦν ἐν τῷ στόματι αὐτῆς ἐν μέσῳ ὀδόντων αὐτῆς, καὶ οὕτως εἶπεν Ἀνάστα, κατάφαγε σάρκας πολλάς.
And thou-should-have-had-seen, with to-it other a-beastlet to-an-en-alonged-belonging holding of-a-lift-belongation-of, and upon of-the-one of-one of-a-side it-was-stood, and three sides it-was in unto-the-one unto-a-becutteeing-to of-it in unto-middle of-teeth of-it, and unto-the-one-this it-had-said, Thou-should-have-up-stood-unto, thou-should-have-had-devoured-down to-fleshes to-much.
Note: of-a-lift-belongation-of : from ARKEW (derived from AIRW); incorrectly equated to ARKTOS; all occurrences in NT and Septuagint manuscripts are the ARKOS form; occurs in Jdg_1:35; 1Sa_17:34; 1Sa_17:36; 1Sa_17:37; 2Ki_2:24; Wis_11:17; Sir_47:3; Hos_13:8; Amo_5:19; Isa_11:7; Isa_59:11; Lam_3:10; Dan_7:5; Rev_12:3; refers to the bear family; the meaning refers to their fending-off fighting technique, of raising up and swatting their claws with great force and quickness; in the area of Israel the species was most likely the Syrian bear - light brown, up to 4.5 ft. nose to tail and up to 550 lbs.
7:5 adnot Περσαι και Μηδοι 87mg | εχων 87 | ϗ εν μεσω οδοντων αυτης 87 εν μ. οδ. αυτης Syr
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:6 ὀπίσω τούτου ἐθεώρουν, καὶ ἰδοὺ ἕτερον θηρίον ὡσεὶ πάρδαλις· καὶ αὐτῇ πτερὰ τέσσαρα πετεινοῦ ὑπεράνω αὐτῆς, καὶ τέσσαρες κεφαλαὶ τῷ θηρίῳ, καὶ ἐξουσία ἐδόθη αὐτῇ.
Aback unto-which of-the-one-this I-was-surveiling-unto, and thou-should-have-had-seen, different a-beastlet as-if a-leapord; and unto-it en-wingings four of-flying-belonged-to over-up-unto-which of-it, and four heads unto-the-one unto-a-beastlet, and a-being-out-unto it-was-given unto-it.
7:6 θηριον ετερον A | om και 2° Bb vid | αυτη 2° αυτω A
(O) καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα ἐθεώρουν θηρίον ἄλλο ὡσεὶ πάρδαλιν· καὶ πτερὰ τέσσαρα ἐπέτεινον ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ, καὶ τέσσαρες κεφαλαὶ τῷ θηρίῳ.
And with to-the-ones-these I-was-surveiling-unto to-a-beastlet to-other as-if to-a-leapord; and en-wingings four they-were-stretching-upon upon-up-unto-which of-it, and four heads unto-the-one unto-a-beastlet.
7:6 adnot οι απο Αλεξανδρου κρατησαντες Ελληνες 87mg | ταυτα] ras aliq sup ταυ 87? (fort prius τ᾿ αυτα) | τω θηριω (in ω bis ras aliq 87a)] + και γλωσσα εδοθη θυτω Syr
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:7 ὀπίσω τούτου ἐθεώρουν, καὶ ἰδοὺ θηρίον τέταρτον φοβερὸν καὶ ἔκθαμβον καὶ ἰσχυρὸν περισσῶς, καὶ οἱ ὀδόντες αὐτοῦ σιδηροῖ, ἐσθίον καὶ λεπτῦνον, καὶ τὰ ἐπίλοιπα τοῖς ποσὶν αὐτοῦ συνεπάτει, καὶ αὐτὸ διάφορον περισσῶς παρὰ πάντα τὰ θηρία τὰ ἔμπροσθεν αὐτοῦ· καὶ κέρατα δέκα αὐτῷ.
Aback-unto-which of-the-one-this I-was-surveiling-unto and thou-should-have-had-seen, a-beastlet fourth en-feareed and stupored-out and force-held unto-abouted, and the-ones teeth of-it iron, eat-belonging and peelening, and to-the-ones to-remaindered-upon unto-the-ones unto-feet of-it it-was-treading-together-unto, and it beareed-through unto-abouted beside to-all to-the-ones to-beastlets to-the-ones in-toward-from of-it, and horns ten unto-it.
Note: to-peelening : formed from peel.
7:7 περισσως I°] + παρα πνατα τα θηρια τα εμπροσθεν αυτου και κερατα δεκα (και κερατα sup ras Aa?) A | om και 4° A | σιδηροι] + μεγαλοι AΓ | κερατα δεκα] δεκα κερατα A
(O) μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα ἐθεώρουν ἐν ὁράματι τῆς νυκτὸς θηρίον τέταρτον φοβερόν, καὶ ὁ φόβος αὐτοῦ ὑπερφέρων ἰσχύι, ἔχον ὀδόντας σιδηροῦς μεγάλους, ἐσθίον καὶ κοπανίζον, κύκλῳ τοῖς ποσὶ καταπατοῦν, διαφόρως χρώμενον παρὰ πάντα τὰ πρὸ αὐτοῦ θηρία· εἶχε δὲ κέρατα δέκα,
With then-also to-the-ones-these I-was-surveiling-unto in unto-a-seeeeing-to of-the-one of-a-night to-a-beastlet to-fourth to-en-feareed, and the-one a-fearee of-it bearing-over unto-a-force-holding, to-holding to-teeth to-iron to-great, to-eat-belonging and to-fellening-to, unto-a-circle unto-the-ones unto-feet to-treading-down-unto, unto-beareed-through to-affording-unto beside to-all to-the-ones before of-it to-beastlets; it-was-holding then-also to-horns to-ten,
7:7 adnot οι νυν κρατουντες Ρωμαιοι 87mg | κοπανιζων 87✱ (-ζον 871) | κερατα δεκα] adnot αι ί βασιλειαι 87mg
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:8 προσενόουν τοῖς κέρασιν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἰδοὺ κέρας ἕτερον μικρὸν ἀνέβη ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν, καὶ τρία κέρατα τῶν ἔμπροσθεν αὐτοῦ ἐξεριζώθη ἀπὸ προσώπου αὐτοῦ· καὶ ἰδοὺ ὀφθαλμοὶ ὡσεὶ ὀφθαλμοὶ ἀνθρώπου ἐν τῷ κέρατι τούτῳ καὶ στόμα λαλοῦν μεγάλα.
I-was-en-mulling-toward-unto unto-the-ones unto-horns of-it, and thou-should-have-had-seen, a-horn different small it-had-stepped-up in unto-middle of-them, and three horns of-the-ones in-toward-from of-it it-was-en-rooted-out off of-looked-toward of-it; and thou-should-have-had-seen, eyes as-if eyes of-a-mankind in unto-the-one unto-a-horn unto-the-one-this and a-becutteeing-to speaking-unto to-great.
7:8 κερατα] pr των B* (non inst Bb) | εξερριζωθη Bab
(O) καὶ βουλαὶ πολλαὶ ἐν τοῖς κέρασιν αὐτοῦ. καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄλλο ἓν κέρας ἀνεφύη ἀνὰ μέσον αὐτῶν μικρὸν ἐν τοῖς κέρασιν αὐτοῦ, καὶ τρία τῶν κεράτων τῶν πρώτων ἐξηράνθησαν δι' αὐτοῦ· καὶ ἰδοὺ ὀφθαλμοὶ ὥσπερ ὀφθαλμοὶ ἀνθρώπινοι ἐν τῷ κέρατι τούτῳ καὶ στόμα λαλοῦν μεγάλα, καὶ ἐποίει πόλεμον πρὸς τοὺς ἁγίους.
and purposings much in unto-the-ones unto-horns of-it. And thou-should-have-had-seen, other one a-horn it-had-been-spawned-up up to-middle of-them small in unto-the-ones unto-horns of-it, and three of-the-ones of-horns of-the-ones of-most-before they-were-dried through of-it; and thou-should-have-had-seen, eyes as-very eyes mankind-belonged-to in unto-the-one unto-a-horn unto-the-one-this and a-becutteeing-to speaking-unto to-great, and it-was-doing-unto to-a-war toward to-the-ones to-hallow-belonged.
7:8 ΚΑΙ ΒΟΥΛΑΙ Syrmg | πολλαι] μεγαλαι Syr | και ιδου] adnot τελευταιον του αντιχριστου 87mg | τρια των κερατων] adnot σημαινει οτι τρεις βασιλεις αινιττονται Αιγυπτου Λιβυων Αιθιοπων 87mg | εξηρανθησαν δι αυτου (ΔΙ ΑΥΤΟΥ Syrmg)] εξερριζωθη απο προσωπου αυτου Syrmg | ÷ και εποιει πολεμον προς τους (÷ 87) αγιους 87 Syr
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:9 ἐθεώρουν ἕως ὅτου θρόνοι ἐτέθησαν, καὶ παλαιὸς ἡμερῶν ἐκάθητο, καὶ τὸ ἔνδυμα αὐτοῦ ὡσεὶ χιὼν λευκόν, καὶ ἡ θρὶξ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ ὡσεὶ ἔριον καθαρόν· ὁ θρόνος αὐτοῦ φλὸξ πυρός, οἱ τροχοὶ αὐτοῦ πῦρ φλέγον.
I-was-surveiling-unto unto-if-which of-which-a-one thrones they-were-placed, and past-belonged of-dayednesses it-was-sitting-down, and the-one a-sinking-in-to of-it as-if a-snow whited, and the-one a-hair of-the-one of-a-head of-it as-if a-wool cleansed; the-one a-throne of-it a-blaze of-a-fire, the-ones circuitees of-it a-fire blazing.
Note: circuitees : used to refer to something circuited, the course or the thing designed, of wheels, hoops, mechanical rings, whirlwinds, circular tracks and boundaries, etc.
(O) ἐθεώρουν ἕως ὅτε θρόνοι ἐτέθησαν, καὶ παλαιὸς ἡμερῶν ἐκάθητο ἔχων περιβολὴν ὡσεὶ χιόνα, καὶ τὸ τρίχωμα τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ ὡσεὶ ἔριον λευκὸν καθαρόν· ὁ θρόνος ὡσεὶ φλὸξ πυρός, τροχοὶ αὐτοῦ πῦρ καιόμενον.
I-was-surveiling-unto unto-if-which which-also thrones they-were-placed, and past-belonged of-dayednesses it-was-sitting-down holding to-a-casting-about as-if to-a-snow, and the-one a-hairing-to of-the-one of-a-head of-it as-if a-wool whited cleansed; the-one a-throne as-if a-blaze of-a-fire, circuitees of-it a-fire being-burn-belonged.
Note: circuitees : used to refer to something circuited, the course or the thing designed, of wheels, hoops, mechanical rings, whirlwinds, circular tracks and boundaries, etc.
7:9–10 ϗ τροχοι αυτου πυρ καιομενον (ϗ 87) . . . ελκων 87 (deest V) Syr
7:9 χιων 87✱ (χιονα 871) | τροχοι] αρμα Syrmg vid
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:10 ποταμὸς πυρὸς εἷλκεν ἔμπροσθεν αὐτοῦ· χίλιαι χιλιάδες ἐλειτούργουν αὐτῷ, καὶ μύριαι μυριάδες παρειστήκεισαν αὐτῷ· κριτήριον ἐκάθισεν, καὶ βίβλοι ἠνεῴχθησαν.
A-drinkationing-of of-a-fire it-was-hauling in-toward-from of-it; thousand thousands they-were-public-working-unto unto-it, and myriaded myriads they-had-come-to-have-stood-beside unto-it; a-separaterlet it-sat-down-to, and papers they-were-opened-up.
Note: myriaded : when context infers a definite number refers to ten thousand.
Note: they-were-opened-up (HNEWXQHSAN) in 02 03; (ANEWXQHSAN), same meaning, is probably the original form as indicated in Mat 27:52; dialect or later usage motivated the change.
7:10 πυρος] + εκπορευομενος A | ειλκεν] + εκπορευομενος Γ | ελιτουρ (sic) B* (ελειτουργουν Bab) | παρειστηκεισαν Bab | αυτω 2°] [εμπρο]σθε[ν αυ]του Γ
(O) ποταμὸς πυρός ἕλκων, καὶ ἐξεπορεύετο κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ποταμὸς πυρός· χίλιαι χιλιάδες ἐθεράπευον αὐτὸν καὶ μύριαι μυριάδες παρειστήκεισαν αὐτῷ· καὶ κριτήριον ἐκάθισε καὶ βίβλοι ἠνεῴχθησαν.
A-drinkationing-of of-a-fire hauling, and it-was-traversing-out-of down to-looked-toward of-it, a-drinkationing-of of-a-fire; thousand thousands they-ministering-of to-it and myriaded myriads they-had-come-to-have-stood-beside unto-it; and a-separaterlet it-sat-down-to and papers they-were-opened-up.
Note: myriaded : when context infers a definite number refers to ten thousand.
Note: they-were-opened-up (HNEWXQHSAN); (ANEWXQHSAN), same meaning, is probably the original form as indicated in Mat 27:52; dialect or later usage motivated the change.
7:9–10 ϗ τροχοι αυτου πυρ καιομενον (ϗ 87) . . . ελκων 87 (deest V) Syr
7:10 ΚΡΙΤΗΡΙΟΝ Syrmg
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:11 ἐθεώρουν τότε ἀπὸ φωνῆς τῶν λόγων τῶν μεγάλων ὧν τὸ κέρας ἐκεῖνο ἐλάλει, ἕως ἀνῃρέθη τὸ θηρίον καὶ ἀπώλετο, καὶ τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ ἐδόθη εἰς καῦσιν πυρός.
I-was-surveiling-unto to-the-one-which-also off of-a-sound of-the-ones of-forthees of-the-ones of-great of-which the-one a-horn the-one-thither it-was-speaking-unto, unto-if-which it-was-sectioned-along-up-unto the-one a-beastlet and it-had-destructed-off, and the-one an-en-capsuling-to of-it it-was-given into to-a-burning of-a-fire.
7:11 των μεγαλων] ων ελαλει A | ανρεθη το θηριον] το θηριο̅| εκεινο ανηρ. A
(O) ἐθεώρουν τότε τὴν φωνὴν τῶν λόγων τῶν μεγάλων ὧν τὸ κέρας ἐλάλει· θεωρῶν ἤμην, καὶ ἀπετυμπανίσθη τὸ θηρίον, καὶ ἀπώλετο τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐδόθη εἰς καῦσιν πυρός.
I-was-surveiling-unto to-the-one-which-also to-the-one to-a-sound of-the-ones of-forthees of-the-ones of-great of-which the-one a-horn it-was-speaking-unto; surveiling-unto I-was, and it-was-racked-off-to the-one a-beastlet, and it-had-destructed-off the-one an-en-capsuling-to of-it and it-was-given into to-a-burning of-a-fire.
7:11 ϗ θεωρων ημην Syr | παρησαν V (sic ut vid) 87 ηγγιζον Syrmg vid
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:12 καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν θηρίων ἡ ἀρχὴ μετεστάθη, καὶ μακρότης ζωῆς ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς ἕως καιροῦ καὶ καιροῦ.
And of-the-ones of-remaindered of-beastlets the-one a-firsting it-was-stood-with, and an-en-longness of-a-lifing it-was-given unto-them unto-if-which of-a-time and of-a-time.
(O) καὶ τοὺς κύκλῳ αὐτοῦ ἀπέστησε τῆς ἐξουσίας αὐτῶν, καὶ χρόνος ζωῆς ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς ἕως χρόνου καὶ καιροῦ.
And to-the-ones unto-a-circle of-it it-stood-off of-the-one of-a-being-out-unto of-them, and a-while of-a-lifing it-was-given unto-them unto-if-which of-a-while and of-a-time.
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:13 ἐθεώρουν ἐν ὁράματι τῆς νυκτός, καὶ ἰδοὺ μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ὡς υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου ἐρχόμενος, καὶ ἕως τοῦ παλαιοῦ τῶν ἡμερῶν ἔφθασεν· καὶ προσήχθη αὐτῷ.
I-was-surveiling-unto in unto-a-seeeeing-to of-the-one of-a-night, and thou-should-have-had-seen, with of-the-ones of-cloudings of-the-one of-a-sky as a-son of-a-mankind coming, and unto-if-which of-the-one of-past-belonged of-the-ones of-dayednesses it-priored; and it-was-beared-toward unto-it.
7:13 ερχομενος] + ην A | και προσηχθη αυτω] ενωπιον αυτου προσηγαγον αυτον A [ε]νωπιον αυτο[υ προση]χθη Γvid
(O) ἐθεώρουν ἐν ὁράματι τῆς νυκτός, καὶ ἰδοὺ ἐπὶ τῶν νεφελῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ὡς υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου ἤρχετο, καὶ ὡς παλαιὸς ἡμερῶν παρῆν· καὶ οἱ παρεστηκότες παρῆσαν αὐτῷ.
I-was-surveiling-unto in unto-a-seeeeing-to of-the-one of-a-night, and thou-should-have-had-seen, upon of-the-ones of-cloudings of-the-one of-a-sky as a-son of-a-mankind it-was-coming, and as past-belonged of-dayednesses it-was-being-beside; and the-ones having-had-come-to-stand-beside they-were-being-beside unto-it.
7:13 παρησαν V (sic ut vid) 87 ηγγιζον Syrmg vid
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:14 καὶ αὐτῷ ἐδόθη ἡ ἀρχὴ καὶ ἡ τιμὴ καὶ ἡ βασιλεία, καὶ πάντες οἱ λαοί, φυλαί, καὶ γλῶσσαι δουλεύσουσιν αὐτῷ· ἡ ἐξουσία αὐτοῦ ἐξουσία αἰώνιος ἥτις οὐ παρελεύσεται, καὶ ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ οὐ διαφθαρήσεται.
And unto-it it-was-given the-one a-firsting and the-one a-valuation and the-one a-ruling-of, and all the-ones peoples, tribings, and tongues they-were-bondeeing-of unto-it; the-one a-being-out-unto of-it a-being-out-unto aged-belonged which-a-one not it-shall-come-beside, and the-one a-ruling-of of-it not it-shall-have-been-degraded-through.
7:14 om και 5° AΓ | δουλευουσιν αυτω] αυτω δουλευουσιν A αυτ. δουλευσουσιν και [υπ]ακουσοντ[αι] Γ
(O) καὶ ἐδόθη αὐτῷ ἐξουσία καὶ τιμὴ βασιλική, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη τῆς γῆς κατὰ γένη καὶ πᾶσα δόξα αὐτῷ λατρεύουσα· καὶ ἡ ἐξουσία αὐτοῦ ἐξουσία αἰώνιος ἥτις οὐ μὴ ἀρθῇ, καὶ ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ, ἥτις οὐ μὴ φθαρῇ.
And it-was-given unto-it a-being-out-unto and a-valuation ruler-belonged-of, and all the-ones placeedness-belongings-to of-the-one of-a-soil down to-a-becomeedness and all a-reckonedness unto-it serving-of; and the-one a-being-out-unto of-it a-being-out-unto aged-belonged which-a-one not lest it-might-have-been-lifted, and the-one a-ruling-of of-it which-a-one not lest it-might-have-had-been-degraded.
7:14 ϗ και (87) τιμη βασιλικη 87 Syr | λατρευουσα] + ην Syr
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:15 Ἔφριξεν τὸ πνεῦμά μου ἐν τῇ ἕξει μου, ἐγὼ Δανιήλ, καὶ αἱ ὁράσεις τῆς κεφαλῆς μου ἐτάρασσόν με.
It-bristled, the-one a-currenting-to of-me, in unto-the-one unto-a-holdeeing of-me, I a-Daniêl, and the-ones seeeeings of-the-one of-a-head of-me they-were-stirring to-me.
7:15 [ε]|γω Δα[νιηλ εν τη]| εξει μου Γ | εταρασσον] σ[υ]νεταρασσον Γ
(O) Καὶ ἀκηδιάσας ἐγὼ Δανιὴλ ἐν τούτοις ἐν τῷ ὁράματι τῆς νυκτός, ἐτάρασσόν με οἱ διαλογισμοί μου.
And having-un-regard-belonged-to I a-Daniêl in unto-the-ones-these in unto-the-one unto-a-seeeeing-to of-the-one of-a-night, they-were-stirring to-me, the-ones fortheeings-through-to-of of-me.
7:15 ακιδιασας 87 | ϗ ετα ϗ ρασσον με οι διαλογισμοι μου 87 (deest V) ϗ εταρασσον με Syr | om οι διαλ. μου Syr
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:16 καὶ προσῆλθον ἑνὶ τῶν ἑστηκότων, καὶ τὴν ἀκρίβειαν ἐζήτουν παρ' αὐτοῦ περὶ πάντων τούτων· καὶ εἶπέν μοι τὴν ἀκρίβειαν, καὶ τὴν σύνκρισιν τῶν λόγων ἐγνώρισέν μοι
And I-had-came-toward unto-one of-the-ones of-having-had-come-to-stand, and to-the-one to-an-exacting-of I-was-seeking-unto beside of-it about of-all of-the-ones-these; and it-had-said unto-me to-the-one to-an-exacting-of, and to-the-one to-a-separating-together of-the-ones of-forthees it-acquainted-to unto-me,
7:16 ακριβιαν B*A (-βειαν BabΓ) bis | om παρ αυτου Γ | αυτου] + μαθειν BabA | συγκρισιν BabΓ | εγνωρισε Γ
(O) προσῆλθον πρὸς ἕνα τῶν ἑστώτων καὶ τὴν ἀκρίβειαν ἐζήτουν παρ' αὐτοῦ ὑπὲρ πάντων τούτων. ἀποκριθεὶς δὲ λέγει μοι καὶ τὴν κρίσιν τῶν λόγων ἐδήλωσέ μοι
I-had-came-toward toward to-one of-the-ones of-having-hath-had-come-to-stand and to-the-one to-an-exacting-of I-was-seeking-unto beside of-it over of-all of-the-ones-these. Having-been-separated-off then-also it-fortheth unto-me and to-the-one to-a-separating of-the-ones of-forthees it-en-distincted unto-me,
7:16 λεγει] ειπε Syr
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:17 Ταῦτα τὰ θηρία τὰ τέσσαρα, τέσσαρες βασιλεῖαι ἀναστήσονται ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, αἳ ἀρθήσονται·
The-ones-these the-ones beastlets the-ones four, four rulings-of they-shall-stand-up upon of-the-one of-a-soil, which they-shall-be-lifted;
7:17 θηρια] + τα μεγαλα AΓ | τεσσερες Γ
(O) Ταῦτα τὰ θηρία τὰ μεγάλα εἰσὶ τέσσαρες βασιλεῖαι, αἳ ἀπολοῦνται ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς·
The-ones-these the-ones beastlets the-ones great they-be four rulings-of, which they-shall-destruct-off off of-the-one of-a-soil;
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:18 καὶ παραλήμψονται τὴν βασιλείαν ἅγιοι Ὑψίστου καὶ καθέξουσιν αὐτὴν ἕως αἰῶνος τῶν αἰώνων.
and they-shall-take-beside to-the-one to-a-ruling-of, hallow-belonged of-most-lofteed, and they-shall-hold-down to-it unto-if-which of-an-age of-the-ones of-ages.
7:18 παραληψονται BbΓ | κατε[ξουσι]ν Γ
(O) καὶ παραλήψονται τὴν βασιλείαν ἅγιοι Ὑψίστου, καὶ καθέξουσι τὴν βασιλείαν ἕως τοῦ αἰῶνος τῶν αἰώνων.
and they-shall-take-beside to-the-one to-a-ruling-of, hallow-belonged of-most-lofteed, and they-shall-hold-down to-the-one to-a-ruling-of unto-if-which of-the-one of-an-age of-the-ones of-ages.
7:18 εως του αιωνος] + και εως του αιωνος Syr
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:19 καὶ ἐζήτουν ἀκριβῶς περὶ τοῦ θηρίου τοῦ τετάρτου, ὅτι ἦν διάφορον παρὰ πᾶν θηρίον, φοβερὸν περισσῶς, οἱ ὀδόντες αὐτοῦ σιδηροῖ καὶ οἱ ὄνυχες αὐτοῦ χαλκοῖ, ἐσθίον καὶ λεπτῦνον, καὶ τὰ ἐπίλοιπα τοῖς ποσὶν αὐτοῦ συνεπάτει·
And I-was-seeking-unto unto-exacted about of-the-one of-a-beastlet of-the-one of-fourth, to-which-a-one it-was beareed-through beside to-all to-a-beastlet, en-feareed unto-abouted, the-ones teeth of-it iron and the-ones unguises of-it coppern, eat-belonging and peelening, and to-the-ones to-remaindered-upon unto-the-ones unto-feet of-it it-was-treading-together-unto;
Note: peelening : formed from peel.
7:19 διαφορον A | χαλκοι] + οι B
(O) τότε ἤθελον ἐξακριβάσασθαι περὶ τοῦ θηρίου τοῦ τετάρτου τοῦ διαφθείροντος πάντα καὶ ὑπερφόβου· καὶ ἰδοὺ οἱ ὀδόντες αὐτοῦ σιδηροῖ καὶ οἱ ὄνυχες αὐτοῦ χαλκοῖ, κατεσθίοντες πάντας κυκλόθεν καὶ καταπατοῦντες τοῖς ποσί·
To-the-one-which-also I-was-determining to-have-out-exacted-to about of-the-one of-a-beastlet of-the-one of-fourth of-the-one of-degrading-through to-all and of-feareed-over; and thou-should-have-had-seen, the-ones teeth of-it iron and the-ones unguises of-it coppern, eat-belonging-down to-all circled-from and treading-down-unto unto-the-ones unto-feet;
7:19 κυκλωθεν 87✱ (κυκλοθεν 87?)
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:20 καὶ περὶ τῶν κεράτων αὐτοῦ τῶν δέκα τῶν ἐν τῇ κεφαλῇ αὐτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ ἑτέρου τοῦ ἀναβάντος καὶ ἐκτινάξαντος τῶν πρώτων, ᾧ οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ καὶ στόμα λαλοῦν μεγάλα, καὶ ἡ ὅρασις αὐτοῦ μείζων τῶν λοιπῶν.
and about of-the-ones of-horns of-it of-the-ones of-ten of-the-ones in unto-the-one unto-a-head of-it, and of-the-one of-different of-the-one of-having-had-stepped-up and of-having-jolted-out of-the-ones of-most-before, unto-which the-ones eyes and a-becutteeing-to speaking-unto to-great, and the-one a-seeeeing of-it greateninged-of of-the-ones of-remaindered.
7:20 κεφαλην A* (-λη Aa?) | πρωτων] προτερων AΓvid + τρια· κερας εκεινο AΓfort | μειζω A
(O) καὶ περὶ τῶν δέκα κεράτων αὐτοῦ τῶν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς, καὶ τοῦ ἑνὸς τοῦ ἄλλου τοῦ προσφυέντος, καὶ ἐξέπεσαν δι' αὐτοῦ τρία, καὶ τὸ κέρας ἐκεῖνο εἶχεν ὀφθαλμοὺς καὶ στόμα λαλοῦν μεγάλα, καὶ ἡ πρόσοψις αὐτοῦ ὑπερέφερε τὰ ἄλλα.
and about of-the-ones of-ten of-horns of-it of-the-ones upon of-the-one of-a-head, and of-the-one of-one of-the-one of-other of-the-one of-having-had-been-spawned-toward, and they-falled-out through of-it, three, and the-one a-horn the-one-thither it-was-holding to-eyes and to-a-becutteeing-to to-speaking-unto to-great, and the-one a-beholding-toward of-it it-was-bearing-over to-the-ones to-other.
Note: they-falled-out : old English form used to avoid confusion with the Verb to-fell.
7:20 του ενος] pr περι Syr
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:21 ἐθεώρουν, καὶ τὸ κέρας ἐκεῖνο ἐποίει πόλεμον μετὰ τῶν ἁγίων, καὶ ἴσχυσεν πρὸς αὐτούς,
I-was-surveiling-unto, and the-one a-horn the-one-thither it-was-doing-unto to-a-war with of-the-ones of-hallow-belonged, and it-force-held toward to-them,
7:21 ισχυεν A
(O) καὶ κατενόουν τὸ κέρας ἐκεῖνο πόλεμον συνιστάμενον πρὸς τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τροπούμενον αὐτούς,
And I-was-en-mulling-down-unto to-the-one to-a-horn to-the-one-thither to-a-war to-standing-together toward to-the-ones to-hallow-belonged and to-en-turneeing to-them,
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:22 ἕως οὗ ἦλθεν ὁ παλαιὸς ἡμερῶν καὶ τὸ κρίμα ἔδωκεν ἁγίοις Ὑψίστου, καὶ ὁ καιρὸς ἔφθασεν καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν κατέσχον οἱ ἅγιοι.
unto-if-which of-which it-had-came, the-one past-belonged of-dayednesses, and to-the-one to-a-separating-to it-gave unto-hallow-belonged of-most-lofteed, and the-one a-time it-priored and to-the-one to-a-ruling-of they-had-held-down, the-ones hallow-belonged.
7:22 om ou A | hmerwn] pr των AΓ
(O) ἕως τοῦ ἐλθεῖν τὸν παλαιὸν ἡμερῶν, καὶ τὴν κρίσιν ἔδωκε τοῖς ἁγίοις τοῦ ὑψίστου, καὶ ὁ καιρὸς ἐδόθη καὶ τὸ βασίλειον κατέσχον οἱ ἅγιοι.
unto-if-which of-the-one to-have-had-came to-the-one to-past-belonged of-dayednesses, and to-the-one to-a-separating it-gave unto-the-ones unto-hallow-belonged of-the-one of-most-lofteed, and the-one a-time it-was-given and to-the-one to-a-rulerlet they-had-held-down, the-ones hallow-belonged.
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:23 καὶ εἶπεν Τὸ θηρίον τὸ τέταρτον βασιλεία τετάρτη ἔσται ἐν τῇ γῇ, ἥτις ὑπερέξει πάσας τὰς βασιλείας, καὶ καταφάγεται πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, καὶ συνπατήσει αὐτὴν καὶ κατακόψει.
And it-had-said, The-one a-beastlet the-one fourth a-ruling-of fourth it-shall-be in unto-the-one unto-a-soil, which-a-one it-shall-hold-over to-all to-the-ones to-rulings-of, and it-shall-devour-down to-all to-the-one to-a-soil, and it-shall-tread-together-unto to-it and it-shall-fell-down.
7:23 συμπατησει BbΓ
(O) καὶ ἐρρέθη μοι περὶ τοῦ θηρίου τοῦ τετάρτου, ὅτι βασιλεία τετάρτη ἔσται ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ἥτις διοίσει παρὰ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν, καὶ καταφάγεται πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν καὶ ἀναστατώσει αὐτὴν καὶ καταλεανεῖ αὐτήν.
And it-was-uttered unto-me about of-the-one of-a-beastlet of-the-one of-fourth to-which-a-one a-ruling-of fourth it-shall-be upon of-the-one of-a-soil, which-a-one it-shall-bear-through beside to-all to-the-one to-a-soil, and it-shall-devour-down to-all to-the-one to-a-soil and it-shall-en-stand-up to-it and it-shall-smooth-down to-it.
7:23 παρα πασαν την γην] παρα πασας τας βασιλειας Syrmg | ϗ και καταφαγεται πασαν την γην 87 Syr | ΚΑΙ ΑΝΑΣΤΑΤΩΣΕΙ Syrmg | ΚΑΤΑΛΕΑΝΕΙ Syrmg
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:24 καὶ τὰ δέκα κέρατα αὐτοῦ, δέκα βασιλεῖς ἀναστήσονται· καὶ ὀπίσω αὐτῶν ἀναστήσεται ὃς ὑπεροίσει κακοῖς πάντας τοὺς ἔμπροσθεν, καὶ τρεῖς βασιλεῖς ταπεινώσει,
And the-ones ten horns of-it, ten rulers-of they-shall-stand-up; and aback-unto-which of-them it-shall-stand-up which it-shall-bear-over unto-wedge-wedged to-all to-the-ones in-toward-from, and to-three to-rulers-of it-shall-en-low-belong-to,
7:24 αυτων] αυτου A | αναστησεται] + ετερος BabAΓ
(O) καὶ τὰ δέκα κέρατα τῆς βασιλείας δέκα βασιλεῖς στήσονται· καὶ ὁ ἄλλος βασιλεὺς μετὰ τούτους στήσεται, καὶ αὐτὸς διοίσει κακοῖς ὑπὲρ τοὺς πρώτους καὶ τρεῖς βασιλεῖς ταπεινώσει,
And the-ones ten horns of-the-one of-a-ruling-of ten rulers-of they-shall-stand; and the-one other a-ruler-of with to-the-ones-these it-shall-stand, and it it-shall-bear-through unto-wedge-wedged over to-the-ones to-most-before and to-three to-rulers-of it-shall-en-low-belong-to,
7:24 της βασιλειας] pr εκ Syr | διοισει] σ sup ras 87a
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:25 καὶ λόγους πρὸς τὸν ὕψιστον λαλήσει, καὶ τοὺς ἁγίους Ὑψίστου παλαιώσει, καὶ ὑπονοήσει τοῦ ἀλλοιῶσαι καιροὺς καὶ νόμον, καὶ δοθήσεται ἐν χειρὶ αὐτοῦ ἕως καιροῦ καὶ καιρῶν καὶ γε ἥμισυ καιροῦ.
and to-forthees toward to-the-one to-most-lofteed it-shall-speak-unto, and to-the-ones to-hallow-belonged of-most-lofteed it-shall-en-past-belong, and it-shall-en-mull-under-unto of-the-one to-have-en-othered to-times and to-a-parcelee, and it-shall-be-given in unto-a-hand of-it unto-if-which of-a-time and of-times and too to-half of-a-time.
7:25 εν χειρι αυτου] αυτω Γvid | καιρου I°] + και καιρου A | om γε A
(O) καὶ ῥήματα εἰς τὸν ὕψιστον λαλήσει καὶ τοὺς ἁγίους τοῦ ὑψίστου κατατρίψει, καὶ προσδέξεται ἀλλοιῶσαι καιροὺς καὶ νόμον, καὶ παραδοθήσεται πάντα εἰς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ ἕως καιροῦ καὶ καιρῶν καὶ ἕως ἡμίσους καιροῦ.
and to-utterings-to into to-the-one to-most-lofteed it-shall-speak-unto and to-the-ones to-hallow-belonged of-the-one of-most-lofteed it-shall-rub-down, and it-shall-receive-toward to-have-en-othered to-times and to-a-parcelee, and it-shall-be-given-beside all into to-the-ones to-hands of-it unto-if-which of-a-time and of-times and unto-if-which of-a-half of-a-time.
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:26 καὶ τὸ κριτήριον ἐκάθισεν, καὶ τὴν ἀρχὴν μεταστήσουσιν τοῦ ἀφανίσαι καὶ τοῦ ἀπολέσαι ἕως τέλους,
And the-one a-separaterlet it-sat-down-to, and to-the-one to-a-firsting they-shall-stand-with of-the-one to-have-un-manifested-to and of-the-one to-have-destructed-off unto-if-which of-a-finisheedness,
7:26 εκαθισεν] καθειση Avid
(O) καὶ ἡ κρίσις καθίσεται, καὶ τὴν ἐξουσίαν ἀπολοῦσι, καὶ βουλεύσονται μιᾶναι καὶ ἀπολέσαι ἕως τέλους.
And the-one a-separating it-shall-sit-down-to, and to-the-one to-a-being-out-unto it-shall-destruct-off, and they-shall-purpose-of to-have-stain-belonged and to-have-destructed-off unto-if-which of-a-finisheedness.
7:26 η κρισις (Η ΚΡΙΣΙΣ Syrmg)] το κριτηριον Syrmg
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:27 καὶ ἡ βασιλεία καὶ ἡ ἐξουσία καὶ ἡ μεγαλωσύνη τῶν βασιλέων τῶν ὑποκάτω παντὸς τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐδόθη ἁγίοις Ὑψίστου· καὶ ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ βασιλεία αἰώνιος, καὶ πᾶσαι αἱ ἀρχαὶ αὐτῷ δουλεύσουσιν καὶ ὑπακούσονται· (Dan 7:28) ἕως ὧδε τὸ πέρας τοῦ λόγου.
and the-one a-ruling-of and the-one a-being-out-unto and the-one an-en-greateningedness of-the-ones of-rulers-of of-the-ones under-down-unto-which of-all of-the-one of-a-sky it-was-given unto-hallow-belonged of-most-lofteed; and the-one a-ruling-of of-it a-ruling-of aged-belonged, and all the-ones firstings unto-it they-shall-bondee-of and they-shall-hear-under; (Dan 7:28) unto-if-which unto-which-then-also to-the-one to-an-acrossment of-the-one of-a-forthee.
7:27 εδοθη] pr και A
(O) καὶ τὴν βασιλείαν καὶ τὴν ἐξουσίαν καὶ τὴν μεγαλειότητα αὐτῶν καὶ τὴν ἀρχὴν πασῶν τῶν ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν βασιλειῶν ἔδωκε λαῷ ἁγίῳ ὑψίστῳ βασιλεῦσαι βασιλείαν αἰώνιον, καὶ πᾶσαι ἐξουσίαι αὐτῷ ὑποταγήσονται καὶ πειθαρχήσουσιν αὐτῷ (Dan 7:28) ἕως καταστροφῆς τοῦ λόγου.
And to-the-one to-a-ruling-of and to-the-one to-a-being-out-unto and to-the-one to-a-greatened-belongness of-them and to-the-one to-a-firsting of-all of-the-ones under to-the-one to-a-sky of-rulings-of it-gave unto-a-people unto-hallow-belonged unto-most-lofteed to-have-rulered-of to-a-ruling-of to-aged-belonged, and all beings-out-unto unto-it they-shall-have-been-arranged-under and they-shall-firsting-sure-unto unto-it (Dan 7:28) unto-if-which of-a-beturning-down of-the-one of-a-forthee.
7:27 βασιλιαν 87 | τον ουνο̅ν̅ 87✱ (των ουνω̅ν̅ 87?) | υψιστου Syr | εως καταστροφης του λογου] εως ωδε το περας του λογου 87mg Syrmg
(429 B.C.)
Dan 7:28 ἐγὼ Δανιήλ, οἱ διαλογισμοί μου ἐπὶ πολὺ συνετάρασσόν με, καὶ ἡ μορφή μου ἠλλοιώθη, καὶ τὸ ῥῆμα ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ μου συνετήρησα.
I a-Daniêl, the-ones fortheeings-through-to-of of-me upon to-much they-were-stirring-together to-me, and the-one a-form of-me it-was-en-other-belonged, and to-the-one to-an-uttering-to in unto-the-one unto-a-heart of-me I-kept-together-unto.
7:28 επι πολυ οι διαλογισμοι μου AΓ | ηλλοιωθη] + επ εμοι A + εν ε|μ[οι] Γ | διετηρησα] συνετηρησα A | subscr ορασις ή A
(O) ἐγὼ Δανιὴλ σφόδρα ἐκστάσει περιειχόμην, καὶ ἡ ἕξις μου διήνεγκεν ἐμοί, καὶ τὸ ῥῆμα ἐν καρδίᾳ μου ἐστήριξα.
I a-Daniêl to-vehemented unto-a-standing-out I-was-being-held-about, and the-one a-holdeeing of-me it-beared-through unto-ME, and to-the-one to-an-uttering-to in unto-a-heart of-me I-stablished-to.
7:28 και η εξις (ΕΞΙΣ Syrmg) μου] και η μορφη μου Syrmg
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:1 Ἐν ἔτει τρίτῳ τῆς βασιλείας Βαλτασὰρ τοῦ βασιλέως ὅρασις ὤφθη πρὸς μέ, ἐγὼ Δανιήλ, μετὰ τὴν ὀφθεῖσάν μοι τὴν ἀρχήν.
In unto-a-yeareedness unto-third of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-a-Baltasar of-the-one of-a-ruler-of a-seeeeing it-was-beheld toward to-me, I a-Daniêl, with to-the-one to-having-been-beheld unto-me to-the-one to-a-firsting.
8:1 superscr ορασις θ´ A (paene evanuit superscriptio in Γ) | βαρτασαρ A | εγω Δανιηλ bis scr A
(O) Ἔτους τρίτου βασιλεύοντος Βαλτασὰρ ὅρασις ἣν εἶδον ἐγὼ Δανιὴλ μετὰ τὸ ἰδεῖν με τὴν πρώτην.
Of-a-yeareedness of-third of-rulering-of of-a-Baltasar a-seeeeing to-which I-had-seen I a-Daniêl with to-the-one to-have-had-seen to-me to-the-one to-most-before.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:2 καὶ ἤμην ἐν Σούσοις τῇ βάρει ἥ ἐστιν ἐν χώρᾳ Αἰλάμ, καὶ ἤμην ἐπὶ τοῦ Οὐβάλ.
And I-was in unto-Sousa' unto-the-one unto-a-weighting which it-be in unto-a-spacedness of-an-Ailam, and I-was upon of-the-one of-an-Oubal.
Note: unto-a-weighting : used of heavily fortified structures and loaded barges.
8:2 τη βαρει] της| βαρε[ως] Γ | Αιλαμ] + και ιδον εν οραματι AΓ 8:3 ειδον Ba? : item 4 | κερατα] + και τα κερατα AΓ | υψηλον] υψηλοτερον AΓ | αναβαινε̅| (sic) Α | εσχατων A
(O) καὶ εἶδον ἐν τῷ ὁράματι τοῦ ἐνυπνίου μου, ἐμοῦ ὄντος ἐν Σούσοις τῇ πόλει, ἥτις ἐστὶν ἐν Ἐλυμαίδι χώρᾳ, καὶ εἶδον ἐν ὁράματι ἔτι ὄντος μου πρὸς τῇ πύλῃ Αἰλάμ·
And I-had-seen in unto-the-one unto-a-seeeeing-to of-the-one of-an-in-sleeplet of-me, of-ME of-being in unto-Sousa' unto-the-one unto-a-city, which-a-one it-be in unto-an-Elumais unto-a-spacedness, and I-had-seen in unto-a-seeeeing-to if-to-a-one of-being of-me toward unto-the-one unto-a-gate of-an-Ailam;
8:2 Ελυμαιδι] Αλαμαιδι 87a vid | ϗ και ειδον εν οραματι 87 Syr | Αιλαμ] Ουλαμ Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:3 καὶ ἦρα τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς μου καὶ ἴδον, καὶ ἰδοὺ κριὸς εἷς ἑστηκὼς πρὸ τοῦ Οὐβάλ, καὶ αὐτῷ κέρατα ὑψηλά· καὶ τὸ ἓν ὑψηλότερον τοῦ ἑτέρου, καὶ τὸ ὑψηλὸν ἀνέβαινεν ἐπ' ἐσχάτῳ.
And I-lifted to-the-ones to-eyes of-me and I-had-seen, and thou-should-have-had-seen, a-ram one having-had-come-to-stand before of-the-one of-an-Oubal, and unto-it horns lofteed-of; and the-one one more-lofteed-of of-the-one of-different, and the-one lofteed-of it-was-stepping-up upon unto-most-bordered.
(O) ἀναβλέψας εἶδον κριὸν ἕνα μέγαν ἑστῶτα ἀπέναντι τῆς πύλης, καὶ εἶχε κέρατα, καὶ τὰ κέρατα ὑψηλά· καὶ τὸ ἓν ὑψηλότερον τοῦ ἑτέρου, καὶ τὸ ὑψηλότερον ἀνέβαινε.
having-viewed-up I-had-seen to-a-ram to-one to-great to-having-hath-had-come-to-stand off-in-ever-a-one of-the-one of-a-gate, and it-was-holding to-horns, and the-ones horns lofteed-of; and the-one one more-lofteed-of of-the-one of-different, and the-one more-lofteed-of it-was-stepping-up.
8:3 ϗ και τα κερατα (ϗ 87) υψηλα 87 (deest V) Syr | ε|ετερου 87
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:4 ἴδον τὸν κριὸν κερατίζοντα κατὰ θάλασσαν καὶ βορρᾶ καὶ νότον· καὶ πάντα τὰ θηρία οὐ στήσονται ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ, καὶ οὐκ ἦν ὁ ἐξαιρούμενος ἐκ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐποίησεν κατὰ τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐμεγαλύνθη.
I-had-seen to-the-one to-a-ram to-horning-to down to-a-flourisheredness and to-a-north and to-a-tropic and all the-ones beastlets not they-shall-stand to-in-look-belonged of-it, and not it-was the-one sectioning-along-out-unto out of-a-hand of-it, and it-did-unto down to-the-one to-a-determining-to of-it and it-was-greatened.
8:4 ιδον] pr και AΓ | βορραν AΓvid | νοτον] + και λιβα AΓvid | στησονται] στ[η]σε[ται] Γ
(O) μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα εἶδον τὸν κριὸν κερατίζοντα πρὸς ἀνατολὰς καὶ πρὸς βορρᾶν καὶ πρὸς δυσμὰς καὶ μεσημβρίαν· καὶ πάντα τὰ θηρία οὐκ ἔστησαν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ, καὶ οὐκ ἦν ὁ ῥυόμενος ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐποίει ὡς ἤθελε καὶ ὑψώθη.
With then-also to-the-ones-these I-had-seen to-the-one to-a-ram to-horning-to toward to-finishings-up and toward to-a-north and toward to-sinkeeings and to-a-middle-daying-unto; and all the-ones beastlets not they-had-stood aback-unto-which of-it, and not it-was the-one tracting out of-the-ones of-hands of-it, and it-was-doing-unto as it-was-determining and it-was-en-lofteed.
8:4 ανατολας] ανα|λας 87 | και 3°] και|και 87 | ουκ εστησαν οπισω αυτου] ου στησονται (?στησεται) ενωπιον αυτου Syrmg
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:5 καὶ ἐγὼ ἤμην συνίων, καὶ ἰδοὺ τράγος αἰγῶν ἤρχετο ἀπὸ λιβὸς ἐπὶ πρόσωπον πάσης τῆς γῆς, καὶ οὐκ ἦν ἁπτόμενος τῆς γῆς, καὶ τῷ τράγῳ κέρας μέσον τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ.
And I I-was together-belonging, and thou-should-have-had-seen, a-billy of-goats it-was-coming off of-a-south upon to-looked-toward of-all of-the-one of-a-soil, and not it-was fastening of-the-one of-a-soil, and unto-the-one unto-a-billy a-horn to-middle of-the-ones of-eyes of-it.
Note: together-belonging : from SUNIW.
8:5 τραγος] τραχος A | απτομενος] pr ο A | κερας] + θεωρητον AΓ | μεσον] pr ανα AΓ
(O) καὶ ἐγὼ διενοούμην, καὶ ἰδοὺ τράγος αἰγῶν ἤρχετο ἀπὸ δυσμῶν ἐπὶ προσώπου τῆς γῆς, καὶ ἦν τοῦ τράγου κέρας ἓν θεωρητὸν ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ.
And I I-was-en-mulling-through-unto, and thou-should-have-had-seen, a-billy of-goats it-was-coming off of-sinkeeings upon of-looked-toward of-the-one of-a-soil, and it-was of-the-one of-a-billy a-horn one surveilable up to-middle of-the-ones of-eyes of-it.
8:5 γης] + και ουχ επτετο τηςγης Syr | ϗ θεωπητον 87 Syr ΘΕΩΡΗΤΟΝ Syrmg | αυτου] αυτων (seq V) 87
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:6 καὶ ἦλθεν ἕως τοῦ κριοῦ τοῦ τὰ κέρατα ἔχοντος, οὗ ἴδον, ἑστὼς ἐνώπιον τοῦ Οὐβάλ, καὶ ἔδραμεν πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐν ὁρμῇ τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ.
And it-had-came unto-if-which of-the-one of-a-ram of-the-one to-the-ones to-horns of-holding, of-which I-had-seen, of-having-hath-had-come-to-stand to-in-look-belonged of-the-one of-an-Oubal, and it-had-circuited toward to-it in unto-a-cording of-the-one of-a-force-holding of-it.
8:6 ειδον BabΓ | εστως ενωπιον] εστωτος ανα μεσον A | εδραμε Γ
(O) καὶ ἦλθεν ἐπὶ τὸν κριὸν τὸν τὰ κέρατα ἔχοντα, ὃν εἶδον ἑστῶτα πρὸς τῇ πύλῃ, καὶ ἔδραμε πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐν θυμῷ ὀργῆς.
And it-had-came upon to-the-one to-a-ram to-the-one to-the-ones to-horns to-holding, to-which I-had-seen to-having-hath-had-come-to-stand toward unto-the-one unto-a-gate, and it-had-circuited toward to-it in unto-a-passion of-a-stressing.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:7 καὶ ἴδον αὐτὸν φθάνοντα ἕως τοῦ κριοῦ, καὶ ἐξηγριάνθη πρὸς αὐτόν· καὶ ἔπαισεν τὸν κριὸν καὶ συνέτριψεν ἀμφότερα τὰ κέρατα αὐτοῦ, καὶ οὐκ ἦν ἰσχὺς τῷ κριῷ τοῦ στῆναι ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ· καὶ ἔριψεν αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν καὶ συνεπάτησεν αὐτόν, καὶ οὐκ ἦν ὁ ἐξαιρούμενος τὸν κριὸν ἐκ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ.
And I-had-seen to-it to-prioring unto-if-which of-the-one of-a-ram, and it-was-field-belonged-out toward to-it; and it-childed-to to-the-one to-a-ram and it-rubbed-together to-more-around to-the-ones to-horns of-it, and not it-was a-force-holding unto-the-one unto-a-ram of-the-one to-have-had-stood to-in-look-belonged of-it; and it-flung to-it upon to-the-one to-a-soil and it-treaded-together-unto to-it, and not it-was sectioning-along-out-unto to-the-one to-a-ram out of-a-hand of-it.
Note: it-was-field-belonged-out : used to refer to going wild, i.e. into survival mode.
8:7 ειδον Ba | om αυτον I° A | φθαννοντα BA hiat Γ | εξηγριωθη A | erriyen Ba?b
(O) καὶ εἶδον αὐτὸν προσάγοντα πρὸς τὸν κριόν, καὶ ἐθυμώθη ἐπ' αὐτόν· καὶ ἐπάταξε τὸν κριὸν καὶ συνέτριψε τὰ δύο κέρατα αὐτοῦ, καὶ οὐκέτι ἦν ἰσχὺς ἐν τῷ κριῷ στῆναι κατέναντι τοῦ τράγου· καὶ ἐσπάραξεν αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν καὶ συνέτριψεν αὐτόν, καὶ οὐκ ἦν ὁ ῥυόμενος τὸν κριὸν ἀπὸ τοῦ τράγου.
And I-had-seen to-it to-leading-toward toward to-the-one to-a-ram, and it-was-en-passioned upon to-it; and it-smote to-the-one to-a-ram and it-rubbed-together to-the-ones to-two to-horns of-it, and not-if-to-a-one it-was a-force-holding in unto-the-one unto-a-ram to-have-had-stood down-in-ever-a-one of-the-one of-a-billy; and it-drawered to-it upon to-the-one to-a-soil and it-rubbed-together to-it, and not it-was the-one tracting to-the-one to-a-ram off of-the-one of-a-billy.
8:7 ΠΡΟΣΑΓΟΝΤΑ Syrmg | ϗ τον κριον (2°) 87 (deest V) Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:8 καὶ ὁ τράγος τῶν αἰγῶν ἐμεγαλύνθη ἕως σφόδρα· καὶ ἐν τῷ ἰσχῦσαι αὐτὸν συνετρίβη τὸ κέρας αὐτοῦ τὸ μέγα, καὶ ἀνέβη κέρατα τέσσαρα ὑποκάτω αὐτοῦ εἰς τοὺς τέσσαρας ἀνέμους τοῦ οὐρανοῦ.
And the-one a-billy of-the-ones of-goats it-was-greatened unto-if-which to-vehemented; and in unto-the-one to-have-force-held to-it it-had-been-rubbed-together the-one a-horn of-it the-one great, and it-had-stepped-up, horns four, under-down-unto-which of-it into to-the-ones to-four to-winds of-the-one of-a-sky.
8:8 αιγων] ετων B*vid (αιγ. Bab) | ανεβη] + ετερα A | τεσσερα] τεσσαρα Bb : item 22 | τεσσαρες] τεσσαρας Bb(vid)AΓ
(O) καὶ ὁ τράγος τῶν αἰγῶν κατίσχυσε σφόδρα· καὶ ὅτε κατίσχυσε συνετρίβη αὐτοῦ τὸ κέρας τὸ μέγα, καὶ ἀνέβη ἕτερα τέσσαρα κέρατα κατόπισθεν αὐτοῦ εἰς τοὺς τέσσαρας ἀνέμους τοῦ οὐρανοῦ.
And the-one a-billy of-the-ones of-goats it-force-held-down to-vehemented; and which-also if-force-held-down it-had-been-rubbed-together of-it the-one a-horn the-one great, and it-had-stepped-up, different four horns, down-aback-from of-it into to-the-ones to-four to-winds of-the-one of-a-sky.
8:8 κατισχυε I° Syr | τεσσασα (sic) 87
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:9 καὶ ἐκ τοῦ ἑνὸς αὐτῶν ἐξῆλθεν κέρας ἓν ἰσχυρόν, καὶ ἐμεγαλύνθη περισσῶς πρὸς τὸν νότον καὶ πρὸς τὴν δύναμιν·
And out of-the-one of-one of-them it-had-came-out a-horn one force-held, and it-was-greatened unto-abouted toward to-the-one to-a-tropic and toward to-the-one to-an-ability;
8:9 εμεγαλυνθη] non inst ⲗ Bb vid | τον νοτον sup ras Aa? om τον Γvid + και προς ανατολην AΓ
(O) καὶ ἐξ ἑνὸς αὐτῶν ἀνεφύη κέρας ἰσχυρὸν ἕν, καὶ κατίσχυσε καὶ ἐπάταξεν ἐπὶ μεσημβρίαν καὶ ἐπ' ἀνατολὰς καὶ ἐπὶ βορρᾶν·
And out of-one of-them it-had-been-spawned-up a-horn force-held one, and it-force-held-down and it-smote upon to-a-middle-daying-unto and upon to-finishings-up and upon to-a-north;
8:9 adnot Αντιοχος ο επιφανης κατα γενος προσηκων τω Αλεξανδρω ος την Ιερουσαλημ κρατησας ηχρειωσε τον ναον και τα αγια 87mg sup | επ ανατολης] superscr επι νοτον 871
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:10 ἐμεγαλύνθη ἕως τῆς δυνάμεως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ· καὶ ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν ἀπὸ τῆς δυνάμεως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἄστρων, καὶ συνεπάτησαν αὐτά,
it-was-greatened unto-if-which of-the-one of-an-ability of-the-one of-a-sky; and it-had-fallen upon to-the-one to-a-soil, off of-the-one of-an-ability of-the-one of-a-sky and off of-the-ones of-en-starrings, and they-treaded-together-unto to-them,
8:10 om απο 2° A | συνεπατησαν αυτα] συνεπατηθη A συνεπατησεν αυτα
(O) καὶ ὑψώθη ἕως τῶν ἀστέρων τοῦ οὐρανοῦ· καὶ ἐρράχθη ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν ἀπὸ τῶν ἀστέρων καὶ ἀπὸ αὐτῶν κατεπατήθη,
and it-was-en-lofteed unto-if-which of-the-ones of-stars of-the-one of-a-sky; and it-was-strikered upon to-the-one to-a-soil, off of-the-ones of-stars, and off of-them it-was-treaded-down-unto,
8:10 ΚΑΙ ΕΡΡΑΧΘΗ Syrmg
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:11 καὶ ἕως ὁ ἀρχιστράτηγος ῥύσηται τὴν αἰχμαλωσίαν, καὶ δι' αὐτὸν θυσία ἐράχθη, καὶ κατευοδώθη αὐτῷ· καὶ τὸ ἅγιον ἐρημωθήσεται.
and unto-if-which the-one a-first-amass-leader it-might-have-tracted to-the-one to-a-spear-capturing-unto, and through to-it a-surging-unto it-was-strikered, and it-was-goodly-en-wayed-down unto-it; and the-one hallow-belonged it-shall-be-en-solituded.
8:11 εως] + ου AΓ | εραχθη] και εγενηθη AΓ | κατευωδωθη Bab
(O) ἕως ὁ ἀρχιστράτηγος ῥύσεται τὴν αἰχμαλωσίαν· καὶ δι' αὐτὸν τὰ ὄρη τὰ ἀπ' αἰῶνος ἐρράχθη, καὶ ἐξήρθη ὁ τόπος αὐτῶν καὶ θυσία, καὶ ἔθηκεν αὐτὴν ἕως χαμαὶ ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ εὐωδώθησαν καὶ ἐγενήθη· καὶ τὸ ἅγιον ἐρημωθήσεται.
unto-if-which the-one a-first-amass-leader it-shall-tract to-the-one to-a-spear-capturing-unto; and through to-it the-ones jutteednesses the-ones off of-an-age it-was-strikered, and it-was-lifted-out the-one an-occasion of-them and a-surging-unto, and it-placed to-it unto-if-which unto-ground upon to-the-one to-a-soil, and they-were-goodly-en-wayed and it-was-became; and the-one hallow-belonged it-shall-be-en-solituted.
8:11 αιχμαλωσιαν] μα fort sup ras 87? | ευωδωθη Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:12 καὶ ἐδόθη ἐπὶ τὴν θυσίαν ἁμαρτία, καὶ ἐρίφη χαμαὶ ἡ δικαιοσύνη· καὶ ἐποίησεν καὶ εὐοδώθη.
And it-was-given upon to-the-one to-a-surging-unto an-un-adjusting-along-unto, and it-was-flung unto-ground the-one a-course-belongingedness; and it-did-unto and it-was-goodly-en-wayed.
8:12 ερριφη Bb | ευοδωθη (ευωδ. Bab)] κατευοδωθη A
(O) καὶ ἐγενήθησαν ἐπὶ τῇ θυσίᾳ αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, καὶ ἐρρίφη χαμαὶ ἡ δικαιοσύνη· καὶ ἐποίησε καὶ εὐωδώθη.
And they-were-became upon unto-the-one unto-a-surging-unto the-ones un-adjustings-along-unto, and it-was-flung unto-ground the-one a-course-belongingedness; and it-did-unto and it-was-goodly-en-wayed.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:13 καὶ ἤκουσα ἑνὸς ἁγίου λαλοῦντος· καὶ εἶπεν εἷς ἅγιος τῷ φελμουνεὶ τῷ λαλοῦντι Ἕως πότε ἡ ὅρασις στήσεται, ἡ θυσία ἡ ἀρθεῖσα καὶ ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐρημώσεως ἡ δοθεῖσα, καὶ τὸ ἅγιον καὶ ἡ δύναμις συνπατηθήσεται;
And I-heard of-one of-hallow-belonged of-speaking-unto, and it-had-said, one hallow-belonged, unto-the-one unto-a-Felmounei unto-the-one unto-speaking-unto, Unto-if-which whither-also the-one a-seeeeing it-shall-stand, the-one a-surging-unto the-one having-been-lifted and the-one an-un-adjusting-along-unto of-an-en-solituding the-one having-been-given, and the-one hallow-belonged and the-one an-ability it-shall-be-treaded-together-unto?
Note: unto-a-Felmounei : transliterated from Hebrew, the -ei ending signifying levitical assignment to the tabernacle area, as used upon namings-to in Numbers 2-3; possibly the Hebrew meaning intended, a sacred one.
8:13 om αγιου A | φελμωνι A | συμπατηθησεται Bb
(O) καὶ ἤκουον ἑτέρου ἁγίου λαλοῦντος· καὶ εἶπεν ὁ ἕτερος ἅγιος τῷ φελμουνὶ τῷ λαλοῦντι Ἕως τίνος τὸ ὅραμα στήσεται καὶ ἡ θυσία ἡ ἀρθεῖσα καὶ ἡ ἁμαρτία ἐρημώσεως ἡ δοθεῖσα, καὶ τὰ ἅγια ἐρημωθήσεται εἰς καταπάτημα;
And I-was-hearing of-different of-hallow-belonged of-speaking-unto; and it-had-said, the-one different hallow-belonged, unto-the-one unto-a-Felmouni unto-the-one unto-speaking-unto, Unto-if-which of-what-one the-one a-seeeeing-to it-shall-stand and the-one a-surging-unto the-one having-been-lifted and the-one an-un-adjusting-along-unto of-an-en-solituding the-one having-been-given, and the-ones hallow-belonged it-shall-be-en-solituted into to-a-treading-down-to?
Note: unto-a-Felmouni : transliterated from Hebrew, the -i (or -ei) ending signifying levitical assignment to the tabernacle area, as used upon namings-to in Numbers 2-3; possibly the Hebrew meaning intended, a sacred one.
8:13 ηκουσα Syr | ϗ αγιος 87 (deest ϗ) Syr | ΦΕΛΜΟΥΝΙ Syrmg | ΕΡΗΜΩΣΕΩΣ Syrmg
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:14 καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ Ἕως ἑσπέρας καὶ πρωί, ἡμέραι δισχίλιαι καὶ τριακόσιαι· καὶ καθαρισθήσεται τὸ ἅγιον.
And it-had-said unto-it, Unto-if-which of-an-into-acrossedness and unto-before-belonged dayednesses twice-thousand and three-hundred; and it-shall-be-cleansed-to the-one hallow-belonged.
(O) καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ Ἕως ἑσπέρας καὶ πρωί, ἡμέραι δισχίλιαι τριακόσιαι· καὶ καθαρισθήσεται τὸ ἅγιον.
And it-had-said unto-it, Unto-if-which of-an-into-acrossedness and unto-before-belonged dayednesses twice-thousand three-hundred; and it-shall-be-cleansed-to the-one hallow-belonged.
8:14 τριακοσιαι] pr και Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:15 Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ἰδεῖν με, ἐγὼ Δανιήλ, τὴν ὅρασιν, καὶ ἐζήτουν σύνεσιν· καὶ ἰδοὺ ἔστη ἐνώπιον ἐμοῦ ὡς ὅρασις ἀνδρός.
And it-had-became in unto-the-one to-have-had-seen to-me, I a-Daniêl, to-the-one to-a-seeeeing, and I-was-seeking-unto to-a-sending-together; and thou-should-have-had-seen, it-had-stood to-in-look-belonged of-ME as a-seeeeing of-a-man.
(O) Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ θεωρεῖν με, ἐγὼ Δανιὴλ τὸ ὅραμα ἐζήτουν διανοηθῆναι· καὶ ἰδοὺ ἔστη κατεναντίον μου ὡς ὅρασις ἀνθρώπου.
And it-had-became in unto-the-one to-surveil-unto to-me, I a-Daniêl, to-the-one to-a-seeeeing-to, I-was-seeking-unto to-have-been-en-mulled-through-unto; and thou-should-have-had-seen, it-had-stood to-ever-a-oned-down-in of-me as a-seeeeing of-a-mankind.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:16 καὶ ἤκουσα φωνὴν ἀνδρὸς ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ Οὐβάλ, καὶ ἐκάλεσεν καὶ εἶπεν Γαβριήλ, συνέτισον ἐκεῖνον τὴν ὅρασιν.
And I-heard to-a-sound of-a-man up to-middle of-the-one of-an-Oubal, and it-called-unto and it-had-said, Gabriêl, thou-should-have-togethered-to to-the-one-thither to-the-one to-a-seeeeing.
(O) καὶ ἤκουσα φωνὴν ἀνθρώπου ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ Οὐλαί, καὶ ἐκάλεσε καὶ εἶπεν Γαβριήλ, συνέτισον ἐκεῖνον τὴν ὅρασιν. καὶ ἀναβοήσας εἶπεν ὁ ἄνθρωπος Ἐπὶ τὸ πρόσταγμα ἐκεῖνο ἡ ὅρασις.
And I-heard to-a-sound of-a-mankind up to-middle of-the-one of-an-Oulai, and it-called-unto and it-had-said, Gabriêl, thou-should-have-togethered-to to-the-one-thither to-the-one to-a-seeeeing. And having-up-hollered-unto it-had-said, the-one a-mankind, Upon to-the-one to-an-arranging-toward-to to-the-one-thither the-one a-seeeeing.
8:16 Ουλαι] superscr Ωλαι 87a | ÷ και αναβοησας ειπεν ο ανθρωπος (÷ 87) . . . η ορασις 87 Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:17 καὶ ἦλθεν καὶ ἔστη ἐχόμενος τῆς στάσεώς μου· καὶ ἐν τῷ ἐλθεῖν αὐτὸν ἐθαμβήθην, καὶ πίπτω ἐπὶ πρόσωπόν μου· καὶ εἶπεν πρός μέ Υἱὲ ἀνθρώπου, ἔτι γὰρ εἰς καιροῦ πέρας ἡ ὅρασις.
And it-had-came and it-had-stood holding of-the-one of-a-standing of-me; and in unto-the-one to-have-had-came to-it I-was-stupored-unto, and I-falleth upon to-looked-toward of-me; and it-had-said toward to-me, Son of-a-mankind, if-to-a-one too-thus into of-a-time to-an-acrossment the-one a-seeeeing.
8:17 εχομενος] ανα μεσο̅| A | υιε ανθρωπου] pr συνες Bab mgA
(O) καὶ ἦλθε καὶ ἔστη ἐχόμενός μου τῆς στάσεως· καὶ ἐν τῷ ἔρχεσθαι αὐτὸν ἐθορυβήθην καὶ ἔπεσα ἐπὶ πρόσωπόν μου· καὶ εἶπέν μοι Διανοήθητι, υἱὲ ἀνθρώπου· ἔτι γὰρ εἰς ὥραν καιροῦ τοῦτο τὸ ὅραμα.
And it-had-came and it-had-stood holding of-me of-the-one of-a-standing; and in unto-the-one to-come to-it I-was-tumulted-unto and I-falled upon to-looked-toward of-me; and it-had-said unto-me, Thou-should-have-been-en-mulled-through-unto, Son of-a-mankind; if-to-a-one too-thus into to-an-houredness of-a-time the-one-this the-one a-seeeeing-to.
Note: I-falled : old English form used to avoid confusion with the Verb to-fell.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:18 καὶ ἐν τῷ λαλεῖν αὐτὸν μετ' ἐμοῦ πίπτω ἐπὶ πρόσωπόν μου ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ ἥψατό μου καὶ ἔστησέν με ἐπὶ πόδας,
And in unto-the-one to-speak-unto to-it with of-ME I-falleth upon to-looked-toward of-me upon to-the-one to-a-soil, and it-fastened of-me and it-stood to-me upon to-feet,
8:18 πιπτω] pr εθαμβηθην και A | ποδας] + μου A
(O) καὶ λαλοῦντος αὐτοῦ μετ' ἐμοῦ ἐκοιμήθην ἐπὶ πρόσωπον χαμαί, καὶ ἁψάμενός μου ἤγειρέ με ἐπὶ τοῦ τόπου,
And of-speaking-unto of-it with of-ME I-was-situateed-unto upon to-looked-toward unto-ground, and having-fastened of-me it-roused to-me upon of-the-one of-an-occasion,
8:18 ras aliq ante αυτου 87?
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:19 καὶ εἶπεν Ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ γνωρίζω σοι τὰ ἐσόμενα ἐπ' ἐσχάτω τῆς ὀργῆς· ἔτι γὰρ εἰς καιροῦ πέρας ἡ ὅρασις.
and it-had-said, Thou-should-have-had-seen, I I-acquaint-to unto-thee to-the-ones to-shall-having-been upon unto-most-bordered of-the-one of-a-stressing; if-to-a-one too-thus into of-a-time to-an-acrossment the-one a-seeeeing.
8:19 ειπεν] + μοι A | γνωριω A* (ζ superscr Aa?) | εσχατου A | οργης] εορτης A*vid (οργ. Aa)
(O) καὶ εἶπέ μοι Ἰδοὺ ἐγὼ ἀπαγγέλλω σοι ἃ ἔσται ἐπ' ἐσχάτου τῆς ὀργῆς τοῖς υἱοῖς τοῦ λαοῦ σου· ἔτι γὰρ εἰς ὥρας καιροῦ συντελείας μενεῖ.
and it-had-said unto-me, Thou-should-have-had-seen, I I-leadeeer-off unto-thee to-which it-shall-be upon of-most-bordered of-the-one of-a-stressing unto-the-ones unto-sons of-the-one of-a-people of-thee; if-to-a-one too-thus into to-an-houredness of-a-time of-a-finishing-together-of it-shall-stay.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:20 ὁ κριὸς ὃν εἶδες, ὁ ἔχων τὰ κέρατα, βασιλεὺς Περσῶν καὶ Μήδων.
The-one a-ram to-which thou-had-seen, the-one holding to-the-ones to-horns, a-ruler-of of-Persians and of-Mêdians.
8:20 ιδες A
(O) τὸν κριὸν ὃν εἶδες τὸν ἔχοντα τὰ κέρατα, βασιλεὺς Μήδων καὶ Περσῶν ἐστι.
To-the-one to-a-ram to-which thou-had-seen to-the-one to-holding to-the-ones to-horns, a-ruler-of of-Mêdians and of-Persians it-be.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:21 καὶ ὁ τράγος τῶν αἰγῶν βασιλεὺς Ἑλλήνων· καὶ τὸ κέρας τὸ μέγα ὃ ἦν ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ, αὐτός ἐστιν ὁ βασιλεὺς ὁ πρῶτος.
And the-one a-billy of-the-ones of-goats a-ruler-of of-Hellên'; and the-one a-horn the-one great which it-was up to-middle of-the-ones of-eyes of-it, it it-be the-one a-ruler-of the-one most-before.
(O) καὶ ὁ τράγος τῶν αἰγῶν βασιλεὺς τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐστί· καὶ τὸ κέρας τὸ μέγα τὸ ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ, αὐτὸς ὁ βασιλεὺς ὁ πρῶτος.
And the-one a-billy of-the-ones of-goats a-ruler-of of-the-ones of-Hellên' it-be; and the-one a-horn the-one great the-one up to-middle of-the-ones of-eyes of-it, it the-one a-ruler-of the-one most-before.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:22 καὶ τοῦ συντριβέντος οὗ ἔστησαν τέσσαρα ὑποκάτω κέρατα, τέσσαρες βασιλεῖς ἐκ τοῦ ἔθνους αὐτοῦ ἀναστήσονται, καὶ οὐκ ἐν τῇ ἰσχύι αὐτῶν.
And of-the-one of-having-had-been-rubbed-together of-which they-had-stood, four, under-down-unto-which, horns, four rulers-of out of-the-one of-a-placeedness-belonging-to of-it they-shall-stand-up, and not in unto-the-one unto-a-force-holding of-them.
8:22 τεσσερα υποκατω κερατα] υποκατω τεσσ. κερ. A | τεσσαρες] τεσσερα B* (τεσσαρες Bab) | αυτων] αυτου A
(O) καὶ τὰ συντριβέντα καὶ ἀναβάντα ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ τέσσαρα κέρατα, τέσσαρες βασιλεῖς τοῦ ἔθνους αὐτοῦ ἀναστήσονται, οὐ κατὰ τὴν ἰσχὺν αὐτῶν.
And the-ones having-had-been-rubbed-together and having-had-stood-up aback-unto-which of-it four horns, four rulers-of of-the-one of-a-placeedness-belonging-to of-it they-shall-stand-up, not down to-the-one to-a-force-holding of-them.
8:22 και τα συντριβεντα . . . οπισω αυτου] και οτι συνετριβη και εστη οπ. αυτ. Syrmg | τεσσαρες] ρες sup ras 87?
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:23 καὶ ἐπ' ἐσχάτων τῆς βασιλείας αὐτῶν, πληρουμένων τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν, ἀναστήσεται βασιλεὺς ἀναιδὴς προσώπῳ καὶ συνίων προβλήματα.
And upon of-most-bordered of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-them, of-being-en-filled of-the-ones of-un-adjustings-along-unto of-them, it-shall-stand-up, a-ruler-of un-un-sightinged unto-looked-toward, and together-belonging to-castings-before-to.
Note: un-un-sightinged (ANAIDEIS): un-un intended; from AN=un and AIDEW; AIDEW is from A and EIDOS, to-un-sight-unto, i.e., a desire to be unseen (because of shame); so, lacking a desire to be unseen, i.e., un-ashamed.
8:23 εσχατω A
(O) καὶ ἐπ' ἐσχάτου τῆς βασιλείας αὐτῶν, πληρουμένων τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν, ἀναστήσεται βασιλεὺς ἀναιδὴς προσώπῳ, διανοούμενος αἰνίγματα.
And upon of-most-bordered of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-them, of-being-en-filled of-the-ones of-un-adjustings-along-unto of-them, it-shall-stand-up, a-ruler-of un-un-sightinged unto-looked-toward, en-mulling-through-unto to-riddlings-to.
Note: un-un-sightinged (ANAIDEIS): un-un intended; from AN=un and AIDEW; AIDEW is from A and EIDOS, to-un-sight-unto, i.e., a desire to be unseen (because of shame); so, lacking a desire to be unseen, i.e., un-ashamed.
8:23 adnot αντιχριστος 87mg inf
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:24 καὶ κραταιὰ ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμαστὰ διαφθερεῖ, καὶ κατευθυνεῖ καὶ ποιήσει, καὶ διαφθερεῖ ἰσχυροὺς καὶ λαὸν ἅγιον.
And secure-belonged the-one a-force-holding of-it, and to-marveled-to it-shall-degrade-through, and it-shall-straighten-down and it-shall-do-unto, and it-shall-degrade-through to-force-held and to-a-people to-hallow-belonged.
8:24 αυτου] + και ουκ εν τη ισχυι αυτου A
(O) καὶ στερεωθήσεται ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτοῦ, καὶ οὐκ ἐν τῇ ἰσχύι αὐτοῦ, καὶ θαυμαστῶς φθερεῖ, καὶ εὐοδωθήσεται καὶ ποιήσει, καὶ φθερεῖ δυνάστας καὶ δῆμον ἁγίων.
And it-shall-be-en-stabled the-one a-force-holding of-it, and not in unto-the-one unto-a-force-holding of-it, and unto-marveled-to it-shall-degrade, and it-shall-be-goodly-en-wayed and it-shall-do-unto, and it-shall-degrade to-ablers and to-a-locality of-hallow-belonged.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:25 καὶ ὁ ζυγὸς τοῦ κλοιοῦ αὐτοῦ κατευθυνεῖ· δόλος ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ μεγαλυνθήσεται, καὶ δόλῳ διαφθερεῖ πολλούς, καὶ ἐπὶ ἀπωλείας πολλῶν στήσεται, καὶ ὡς ὠὰ χειρὶ συντρίψει.
And the-one a-couplage of-the-one of-a-collar of-it it-shall-straighten-down; a-guile in unto-the-one unto-a-hand of-it, and in unto-a-heart of-it it-shall-be-greatened and unto-a-guile it-shall-degrade-through to-much, and upon of-a-destructing-off-of of-much it-shall-stand, and as to-eggs unto-a-hand it-shall-rub-through.
8:25 απωλειας] απωλεια A
(O) καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἁγίους τὸ διανόημα αὐτοῦ, καὶ εὐοδωθήσεται τὸ ψεῦδος ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἡ καρδία αὐτοῦ ὑψωθήσεται, καὶ δόλῳ ἀφανιεῖ πολλούς, καὶ ἐπὶ ἀπωλείας ἀνδρῶν στήσεται καὶ ποιήσει συναγωγὴν χειρὸς καὶ ἀποδώσεται.
And upon to-the-ones to-hallow-belonged the-one an-en-mulling-through-to of-it, and it-shall-be-goodly-en-wayed the-one a-falseedness in unto-the-ones unto-hands of-it, and the-one a-heart of-it it-shall-be-en-lofteed, and unto-a-guile it-shall-un-manifest-to to-much, and upon of-a-destructing-off-of of-men it-shall-stand and it-shall-do-unto to-a-leading-together of-a-hand and it-shall-give-off.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:26 καὶ ἡ ὅρασις τῆς ἑσπέρας καὶ τῆς πρωίας τῆς ῥηθείσης ἀληθῶς ἐστιν· καὶ σὺ σφράγισον τὴν ὅρασιν, ὅτι εἰς ἡμέρας πολλάς.
And the-one a-seeeeing of-the-one of-an-into-acrossedness and of-the-one of-a-before-belonging-unto of-the-one of-having-been-uttered unto-un-secludinged it-be; and thou thou-should-have-sealed-to to-the-one to-a-seeeeing, to-which-a-one into to-dayednesses to-much.
8:26 πρωιας] πρωινης A | αληθως] αληθης A
(O) τὸ ὅραμα τὸ ἑσπέρας καὶ πρωὶ ηὑρέθη ἐπ' ἀληθείας· καὶ νῦν πεφραγμένον τὸ ὅραμα, ἔτι γὰρ εἰς ἡμέρας πολλάς.
The-one a-seeeeing-to the-one of-an-into-acrossedness and unto-before-belonged it-had-been-found upon of-an-un-secluding-of; and now having-had-come-to-be-hedged the-one a-seeeeing-to, if-to-a-one too-thus into to-dayednesses to-much.
8:26 pr και Syr | ÷ το οραμα (deest V)
(426 B.C.)
Dan 8:27 καὶ ἐγὼ Δανιὴλ ἐκοιμήθην καὶ ἐμαλακίσθην· καὶ ἀνέστην καὶ ἐποίουν τὰ ἔργα τοῦ βασιλέως, καὶ ἐθαύμαζον τὴν ὅρασιν, καὶ οὐκ ἦν ὁ συνίων.
And I a-Daniêl I-was-situateed-unto and I-was-softed-to; and I-had-stood-up and I-was-doing-unto to-the-ones to-works of-the-one of-a-ruler-of, and I-was-marveling-to to-the-one to-a-seeeeing, and not it-was the-one together-belonging.
Note: together-belonging : from SUNIW.
8:27 εμαλακισθην] + ημερας A | subscr ορασις θ´ A
(O) ἐγὼ Δανιὴλ ἀσθενήσας ἡμέρας πολλάς· καὶ ἀναστὰς ἐπραγματευόμην πάλιν βασιλικά, καὶ ἐξελυόμην ἐπὶ τῷ ὁράματι, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἦν ὁ διανοούμενος.
I a-Daniêl having-un-vigored-unto to-dayednesses to-much; and having-had-stood-up I-was-practicing-to-of unto-furthered to-ruler-belonged-of, and I-was-being-loosed-out upon unto-the-one unto-a-seeeeing-to, and not-then-also-one it-was the-one being-en-mulled-through-unto.
8:27 α|αναστας 87 | παλιν παλιν 87✱ (improb 2° 87a) | το οραματι 87
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:1 Ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ ἔτει Δαρείου τοῦ υἱοῦ Ἀσουήρου, ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος τῶν Μήδων, ὃς ἐβασίλευσεν ἐπὶ βασιλείαν Χαλδαίων·
In unto-the-one unto-most-before unto-a-yeareedness of-a-Dareios of-the-one of-a-son of-an-Asouêros, off of-the-one of-a-whorling-to of-the-ones of-Mêdians, which it-rulered-of upon to-a-ruling-of of-Chaldee-belonged;
Note: of-a-Dareios of-the-one of-a-son of-an-Asouêros : referring to Cyrus; see table Dan_1:1.
9:1 superscr ορασις ι´ A | Δαρειου] om B* (hab B1(fort) (-ριου B1A) -ρειου Ba) pr επει (sic) A | Ασσουηρου A*salt | των Μηδων] om των A
(O) Ἔτους πρώτου ἐπὶ Δαρείου τοῦ Ξέρξου ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς τῆς Μηδικῆς, οἳ ἐβασίλευσαν ἐπὶ τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν Χαλδαίων·
Of-a-yeareedness of-most-before upon of-a-Dareios of-the-one of-a-Xerxês off of-the-one of-a-becomedness of-the-one of-Mêdian-belonged-of, which they-rulered-of upon to-the-one to-a-ruling-of of-the-ones of-Chaldee-belonged;
Note: of-a-Dareios of-the-one of-a-Xerxês : referring to Cyrus; see table Dan_1:1.
9:1 του Ξ.] υιοι Ξ. Syrmg
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:2 ἐγὼ Δανιὴλ συνῆκα ἐν ταῖς βύβλοις τὸν ἀριθμὸν τῶν ἐτῶν, ὃς ἐγενήθη λόγος Κυρίου πρὸς Ἰερεμίαν τὸν προφήτην εἰς συνπλήρωσιν ἐρημώσεως Ἰερουσαλήμ, ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτη.
I a-Daniêl I-sent-together in unto-the-ones unto-barks to-the-one to-a-number of-the-ones of-yeareednesses, which it-was-became a-forthee of-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) toward to-an-Ieremias to-the-one to-a-declarer-before into to-an-en-filling-together of-an-en-solituding of-an-Ierousalêm, to-seventy to-yeareednesses.
9:2 εγω] pr εν ετει ενι της βασιλειας αυτου A | βυβλοις] βιβλοις A | ετων] ημερων A | συμπληρωσιν Bb
(O) τῷ πρώτῳ ἔτει τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ ἐγὼ Δανιὴλ διενοήθην ἐν ταῖς βίβλοις τὸν ἀριθμὸν τῶν ἐτῶν, ὅτε ἐγένετο πρόσταγμα τῇ γῇ ἐπὶ Ἰερεμίαν τὸν προφήτην ἐγεῖραι εἰς ἀναπλήρωσιν ὀνειδισμοῦ Ἰερουσαλήμ, ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτη.
unto-the-one unto-most-before unto-a-yeareedness of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-it I a-Daniêl I-was-en-mulled-through-unto in unto-the-ones unto-papers to-the-one to-a-number of-the-ones of-yeareednesses, which-also it-had-became an-arranging-toward-to unto-the-one unto-a-soil upon to-an-Ieremias to-the-one to-a-declarer-before to-have-roused into to-an-en-filling-up of-a-reproaching-to-of of-an-Ierousalêm, to-seventy to-yeareednesses.
9:2 των αριθμων 87 | τον| τον προφ. 87 | εγερθηναι Syrvid
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:3 καὶ ἔδωκα τὸ πρόσωπόν μου πρὸς Κύριον τὸν θεὸν τοῦ ἐκζητῆσαι προσευχὴν καὶ δεήσεις ἐν νηστείαις καὶ σάκκῳ.
And I-gave to-the-one to-looked-toward of-me toward to-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) to-the-one to-a-Deity(haElohim) of-the-one to-have-sought-out-unto to-a-goodly-holding-toward and to-bindings in unto-non-eatings-of and unto-a-burlap.
Note: to-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
9:3 θεον] + του ουν̅ο̅υ̅ A | δεησιν A | νηστιαις A | σακκω] + και σποδω A
(O) καὶ ἔδωκα τὸ πρόσωπόν μου ἐπὶ Κύριον τὸν θεὸν εὑρεῖν προσευχὴν καὶ ἔλεος ἐν νηστείαις καὶ σάκκῳ καὶ σποδῷ.
And I-gave to-the-one to-looked-toward of-me upon to-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) to-the-one to-a-Deity(haElohim) to-have-had-found to-a-goodly-holding-toward and to-a-besectionateedness in unto-non-eatings-of and unto-a-burlap and unto-an-ash.
Note: to-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
Note: to-a-besectionateedness : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:4 καὶ προσηυξάμην πρὸς Κύριον τὸν θεόν μου, καὶ ἐξωμολογησάμην καὶ εἶπα Κύριε ὁ θεὸς ὁ μέγας καὶ θαυμαστός, ὁ φυλάσσων τὴν διαθήκην σου καὶ τὸ ἔλεος τοῖς ἀγαπῶσίν σε καὶ τοῖς φυλάσσουσιν τὰς ἐντολάς σου·
And I-goodly-held-toward toward to-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) to-the-one to-a-Deity(Elohim) of-me, and I-along-fortheed-out-unto and I-said, Authority-belonged(Yahveh) the-one a-Deity(El) the-one great and marveled-to, the-one guardering to-the-one to-a-placement-through of-thee and to-the-one to-a-besectionateedness unto-the-ones unto-excessing-off-unto to-thee and unto-the-ones unto-guardering to-the-ones to-finishings-in of-thee;
Note: Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
Note: to-a-besectionateedness : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc.
9:4 τον θεον μου] του ουν̅ο̅υ̅ A | εξομολογησαμην A | ελεος] + σου A
(O) καὶ προσηυξάμην πρὸς Κύριον τὸν θεόν· καὶ ἐξωμολογησάμην καὶ εἶπα Ἰδού, κύριε, σὺ εἶ ὁ θεὸς ὁ μέγας καὶ ὁ ἰσχυρὸς καὶ ὁ φοβερός, τηρῶν τὴν διαθήκην καὶ τὸ ἔλεος τοῖς ἀγαπῶσί σε καὶ τοῖς φυλάσσουσι τὰ προστάγματά σου·
And I-goodly-held-toward toward to-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) to-the-one to-a-Deity(Elohim); and I-along-fortheed-out-unto and I-said, Thou-should-have-had-seen, Authority-belonged(Yahveh), thou thou-be the-one a-Deity(El) the-one great and the-one force-held and the-one en-feareed, keeping-unto to-the-one to-a-placement-through and to-the-one to-a-besectionateedness unto-the-ones unto-excessing-off-unto to-thee and unto-the-ones unto-guardering to-the-ones to-arrangings-toward-to of-thee;
Note: Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
Note: to-a-besectionateedness : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc.
9:4 προσηυξαμην] ras aliq sup ο et υ 87a | εξωμολογησαμην] pr και Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:5 ἡμάρτομεν, ἠδικήσαμεν, ἠνομήσαμεν, καὶ ἀπέστημεν καὶ ἐξεκλίναμεν ἀπὸ τῶν ἐντολῶν σου καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν κριμάτων σου·
we-had-un-adjusted-along, we-un-coursed-unto, we-un-parceleed-unto, and we-had-stood-off and we-clined-out off of-the-ones of-finishings-in of-thee and off of-the-ones of-separatings-to of-thee;
9:5 ηδικησαμεν ηνομησαμεν] ηνομησαμε̅| ησεβησαμεν ηδικησαμεν A
(O) ἡμάρτομεν, ἠδικήσαμεν, ἠσεβήσαμεν, καὶ ἀπέστημεν καὶ παρέβημεν τὰς ἐντολάς σου καὶ τὰ κρίματά σου·
we-had-un-adjusted-along, we-un-coursed-unto, we-un-revered-unto, and we-had-stood-off and we-had-stepped-beside to-the-ones to-finishings-in of-thee and to-the-ones to-separatings-to of-thee;
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:6 καὶ οὐκ εἰσηκούσαμεν τῶν δούλων σου τῶν προφητῶν, οἳ ἐλάλουν ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου πρὸς τοὺς βασιλεῖς ἡμῶν καὶ ἄρχοντας ἡμῶν καὶ πατέρας ἡμῶν, καὶ πρὸς πάντα τὸν λαὸν τῆς γῆς.
and not we-heard-into of-the-ones of-bondees of-thee of-the-ones of-declarers-before, which they-were-speaking-unto in unto-the-one unto-a-naming-to of-thee toward to-the-ones to-rulers-of of-us and to-firsting of-us and to-fathers of-us, and toward to-all to-the-one to-a-people of-the-one of-a-soil.
(O) καὶ οὐκ ἠκούσαμεν τῶν παίδων σου τῶν προφητῶν, ἃ ἐλάλησαν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι σου ἐπὶ τοὺς βασιλεῖς ἡμῶν καὶ δυνάστας ἡμῶν καὶ πατέρας ἡμῶν, καὶ παντὶ ἔθνει ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς.
and not we-heard-into of-the-ones of-children of-thee of-the-ones of-declarers-before, to-which they-spoke-unto upon unto-the-one unto-a-naming-to of-thee upon to-the-ones to-rulers-of of-us and to-ablers of-us and to-fathers of-us, and unto-all unto-a-placeedness-belonging-to upon of-the-one of-a-soil.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:7 σοί, κύριε, ἡ δικαιοσύνη, καὶ ἡμῖν ἡ αἰσχύνη τοῦ προσώπου, ὡς ἡ ἡμέρα αὕτη, ἀνδρὶ Ἰούδα καὶ τοῖς ἐνοικοῦσιν ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ καὶ παντὶ Ἰσραήλ, τοῖς ἐγγὺς καὶ τοῖς μακρὰν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ οὗ διέσπειρας αὐτοὺς ἐκεῖ ἐν ἀθεσίᾳ αὐτῶν ᾗ ἠθέτησαν.
Unto-thee, Authority-belonged(Yahveh), the-one a-course-belongingedness, and unto-us the-one a-shamening of-the-one of-looked-toward, as the-one a-dayedness the-one-this, unto-a-man of-an-Ioudas and unto-the-ones unto-housing-in-unto in unto-an-Ierousalêm and unto-all unto-an-Israêl, unto-the-ones to-neared and unto-the-ones to-en-longed in unto-all unto-the-one unto-a-soil of-which thou-whorled-through to-them thither in unto-an-un-revering-unto of-them unto-which they-un-placed-unto.
Note: Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
9:7 ενοικουσιν εν] κατοικουσιν A | αθεσια] αθετησει A | ηθετησαν] + σε κε̅
(O) σοί, κύριε, ἡ δικαιοσύνη, καὶ ἡμῖν ἡ αἰσχύνη τοῦ προσώπου, κατὰ τὴν ἡμέραν ταύτην, ἀνθρώποις Ἰούδα καὶ καθημένοις ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ καὶ παντὶ τῷ λαῷ Ἰσραήλ, τῷ ἔγγιστα καὶ τῷ ἀπωτέρω ἐν πάσαις ταῖς χώραις εἰς ἃς διεσκόρπισας αὐτοὺς ἐκεῖ ἐν τῇ πλημμελείᾳ ᾗ ἐπλημμέλησαν ἐναντίον σου.
Unto-thee, Authority-belonged(Yahveh), the-one a-course-belongingedness, and unto-us the-one a-shamening of-the-one of-looked-toward, down to-the-one to-a-dayedness to-the-one-this, unto-mankinds of-an-Ioudas and unto-sitting-down in unto-an-Ierousalêm and unto-all unto-the-one unto-a-people of-an-Israêl, unto-the-one to-most-near and unto-the-one more-off-unto-which in unto-all unto-the-ones unto-spacednesses into to-which thou-scattered-through-to to-them thither in unto-the-one unto-a-beyond-membering-of unto-which they-beyond-membered-unto to-ever-a-oned-in of-thee.
Note: Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:8 ἐν σοί, κύριε, ἔστιν ἡμῶν ἡ δικαιοσύνη, καὶ ἡμῖν ἡ αἰσχύνη τοῦ προσώπου καὶ τοῖς βασιλεῦσιν ἡμῶν καὶ τοῖς ἄρχουσιν ἡμῶν καὶ τοῖς πατράσιν ἡμῶν, οἵτινες ἡμάρτομέν σοι.
In unto-thee, Authority-belonged(Yahveh), it-be of-us the-one a-course-belongingedness, and unto-us the-one a-shamening of-the-one of-looked-toward and unto-the-ones unto-rulers-of of-us and unto-the-ones unto-firsting of-us and unto-the-ones unto-fathers of-us, which-ones we-had-un-adjusted-along unto-thee.
9:8 εν ras A?vid | εστιν ημων η δικαιοσυνη και] ημων η δικαι sup ras et in mg Bab om εστιν ημων A
(O) δέσποτα, ἡμῖν ἡ αἰσχύνη τοῦ προσώπου καὶ τοῖς βασιλεῦσιν ἡμῶν καὶ δυνάσταις καὶ τοῖς πατράσιν ἡμῶν, ὅτι ἡμάρτομέν σοι.
Bind-doer, unto-us the-one a-shamening of-the-one of-looked-toward and unto-the-ones unto-rulers-of of-us and unto-ablers and unto-the-ones unto-fathers of-us, to-which-a-one we-had-un-adjusted-along unto-thee.
9:8 και 3°] κ sup ras 87a
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:9 τῷ κυρίῳ θεῷ ἡμῶν οἱ οἰκτειρμοὶ καὶ οἱ ἱλασμοί, ὅτι ἀπέστημεν,
Unto-the-one unto-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) unto-a-Deity(Elohey) of-us the-ones pitierings-of and the-ones sectionatings-to-of, to-which-a-one we-had-stood-off,
Note: unto-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
9:9 απεστημεν] + απο κυ̅ A
(O) τῷ κυρίῳ ἡ δικαιοσύνη καὶ τὸ ἔλεος, ὅτι ἀπέστημεν ἀπὸ σοῦ,
Unto-the-one unto-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) the-one a-course-belongingedness and the-one a-besectionateedness, to-which-a-one we-had-stood-off off of-thee,
Note: unto-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
Note: a-besectionateedness : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:10 καὶ οὐκ εἰσηκούσαμεν τῆς φωνῆς τοῦ Κυρίου θεοῦ ἡμῶν πορεύεσθαι ἐν τοῖς νόμοις αὐτοῦ οἷς ἔδωκεν κατὰ πρόσωπον ἡμῶν ἐν χερσὶν τῶν δούλων αὐτοῦ τῶν προφητῶν.
and not we-heard-into of-the-one of-a-sound of-the-one of-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) of-a-Deity(Elohey) of-us to-traverse-of in unto-the-ones unto-parcelees of-it unto-which it-gave down to-looked-toward of-us in unto-hands of-the-ones of-bondees of-it of-the-ones of-declarers-before.
9:10 του κυριου θεου] κυ̅ του θυ̅ A | om εν I° A
(O) καὶ οὐκ ἠκούσαμεν τῆς φωνῆς Κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ ἡμῶν κατακολουθῆσαι τῷ νόμῳ σου ᾧ ἔδωκας ἐνώπιον Μωσῆ καὶ ἡμῶν διὰ τῶν παίδων σου τῶν προφητῶν.
and not we-heard-into of-the-one of-a-sound of-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) of-the-one of-a-Deity(Elohim) of-us to-have-pathed-along-down-unto unto-the-one unto-a-parcelee of-thee unto-which thou-gave to-in-look-belonged of-a-Môsês and of-us through of-the-ones of-children of-thee of-the-ones of-declarers-before.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:11 καὶ πᾶς Ἰσραὴλ παρέβησαν τὸν νόμον σου καὶ ἐξέκλιναν τοῦ μὴ ἀκοῦσαι τῆς φωνῆς σου· καὶ ἐπῆλθεν ἐφ' ἡμᾶς ἡ κατάρα καὶ ὁ ὅρκος ὁ γεγραμμένος ἐν νόμῳ Μωυσέως δούλου τοῦ θεοῦ· ὅτι ἡμάρτομεν αὐτῷ.
And all an-Israêl they-had-stepped-beside to-the-one to-a-parcelee of-thee and they-clined-out of-the-one lest to-have-heard of-the-one of-a-sound of-thee; and it-had-came-upon upon to-us, the-one a-cursedness-down and the-one a-fencee the-one having-had-come-to-be-scribed in unto-a-parcelee of-a-Môuseus of-a-bondee of-the-one of-a-Deity(haElohim), to-which-a-one we-had-un-adjusted-along unto-it.
9:11 ακουσαι] εισακουσαι A
(O) καὶ πᾶς Ἰσραὴλ ἐγκατέλιπε τὸν νόμον σου καὶ ἀπέστησαν τοῦ μὴ ἀκοῦσαι τῆς φωνῆς σου· καὶ ἐπῆλθεν ἐφ' ἡμᾶς ἡ κατάρα καὶ ὁ ὅρκος ὁ γεγραμμένος ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Μωσῆ παιδὸς τοῦ θεοῦ· ὅτι ἡμάρτομεν αὐτῷ.
And all an-Israêl it-had-remaindered-down-in to-the-one to-a-parcelee of-thee and they-had-stood-off of-the-one lest to-have-heard of-the-one of-a-sound of-thee; and it-had-came-upon upon to-us, the-one a-cursedness-down and the-one a-fencee the-one having-had-come-to-be-scribed in unto-the-one unto-a-parcelee of-a-Môsês of-a-child of-the-one of-a-Deity(haElohim); to-which-a-one we-had-un-adjusted-along unto-it.
9:11 ᾑ| κατάρα 87
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:12 καὶ ἔστησεν τοὺς λόγους αὐτοῦ οὓς ἐλάλησεν ἐφ' ἡμᾶς καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς κριτὰς ἡμῶν οἳ ἔκρινον ἡμᾶς, ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ' ἡμᾶς κακὰ μεγάλα, οἷα οὐ γέγονεν ὑποκάτω παντὸς τοῦ οὐρανοῦ κατὰ τὰ γενόμενα ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ.
And it-stood to-the-ones to-forthees of-it to-which it-spoke-unto upon to-us and upon to-the-ones to-separaters of-us which they-were-separating to-us, to-have-had-led-upon upon to-us to-wedge-wedged to-great, to-which-belonged not it-hath-had-come-to-become under-down-unto-which of-all of-the-one of-a-sky down to-the-ones to-having-had-became in unto-an-Ierousalêm.
(O) καὶ ἔστησεν ἡμῖν τὰ προστάγματα αὐτοῦ, ὅσα ἐλάλησεν ἐφ' ἡμᾶς καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς κριτὰς ἡμῶν, ὅσα ἔκρινας ἡμῖν ἐπαγαγεῖν ἐφ' ἡμᾶς, κακὰ μεγάλα, οἷα οὐκ ἐγενήθη ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν καθότι ἐγενήθη ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ.
And it-stood unto-us to-the-ones to-arrangings-toward-to of-it to-which-a-which it-spoke-unto upon to-us and upon to-the-ones to-separaters of-us, to-which-a-which thou-separated unto-us to-have-had-led-upon upon to-us to-wedge-wedged to-great, to-which-a-which not it-was-became under to-the-one to-a-sky down-to-which-a-one it-was-became in unto-an-Ierousalêm.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:13 καθὼς γέγραπται ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Μωυσῆ, πάντα τὰ κακὰ ταῦτα ἦλθεν ἐφ' ἡμᾶς· καὶ οὐκ ἐδεήθημεν τοῦ προσώπου Κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ ἡμῶν, ἀποστρέψαι ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδικιῶν ἡμῶν καὶ τοῦ συνιέναι ἐν πάσῃ ἀληθείᾳ σου.
Down-as it-had-come-to-be-scribed in unto-the-one unto-a-parcelee of-a-Môusês, all the-ones wedge-wedged the-ones-these it-had-came upon to-us; and not we-were-binded of-the-one of-looked-toward of-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) of-the-one of-a-Deity(Elohey) of-us, to-have-beturned-off off of-the-ones of-un-coursings-unto of-us and of-the-one to-send-together in unto-all unto-an-un-secluding-of of-thee.
9:13 τω νομω] om τω A | Μωυση] Μωση A
(O) κατὰ τὰ γεγραμμένα ἐν διαθήκῃ Μωσῆ, πάντα τὰ κακὰ ἐπῆλθεν ἡμῖν· καὶ οὐκ ἐξεζητήσαμεν τὸ πρόσωπον Κυρίου θεοῦ ἡμῶν, ἀποστῆναι ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν καὶ διανοηθῆναι τὴν δικαιοσύνην σου, Κύριε.
Down to-the-ones to-having-had-come-to-be-scribed in unto-a-placement-through of-a-Môsês, all the-ones wedge-wedged it-had-came-upon unto-us; and not we-sought-out-unto to-the-one to-looked-toward of-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) of-a-Deity(Elohey) of-us, to-have-had-stood-off off of-the-ones of-un-adjustings-along-unto of-us and to-have-been-en-mulled-through-unto to-the-one to-a-course-belongingedness of-thee, Authority-belonged.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:14 καὶ ἐγρηγόρησεν Κύριος καὶ ἐπήγαγεν αὐτὰ ἐφ' ἡμᾶς, ὅτι δίκαιος Κύριος ὁ θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐπὶ πᾶσαν τὴν ποίησιν αὐτοῦ ἣν ἐποίησεν, καὶ οὐκ εἰσηκούσαμεν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ.
And it-watched-unto, Authority-belonged(Yahveh), and it-had-led-upon to-them upon to-us, to-which-a-one course-belonged Authority-belonged(Yahveh) the-one a-Deity(Elohey) of-us upon to-all to-the-one to-a-doing of-it to-which it-did-unto, and not we-heard-into of-the-one of-a-sound of-it.
9:14 Κυριος I°] + ο θς̅ ημων επι την κακιαν A | om Κυριος 2° A
(O) καὶ ἠγρύπνησε Κύριος ὁ θεὸς ἐπὶ τὰ κακὰ καὶ ἐπήγαγεν ἐφ' ἡμᾶς, ὅτι δίκαιος Κύριος ὁ θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐπὶ πάντα ὅσα ἂν ποιήσῃ, καὶ οὐκ ἠκούσαμεν τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ.
And it-field-slept-unto, Authority-belonged(Yahveh) the-one a-Deity, upon to-the-ones to-wedge-wedged and it-had-led-upon upon to-us, to-which-a-one course-belonged Authority-belonged(Yahveh) the-one a-Deity(Elohey) of-us upon to-all to-which-a-which ever it-might-have-done-unto, and not we-heard of-the-one of-a-sound of-it.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:15 καὶ νῦν, Κύριε ὁ θεὸς ἡμῶν, ὃς ἐξήγαγες τὸν λαόν σου ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου ἐν χειρὶ κραταιᾷ καὶ ἐποίησας σεαυτῷ ὄνομα ὡς ἡ ἡμέρα αὕτη· ἡμάρτομεν, ἠνομήσαμεν.
And now, Authority-belonged(Yahveh) the-one a-Deity(Elohey) of-us, which thou-had-led-out to-the-one to-a-people of-thee out of-a-soil of-an-Aiguptos in unto-a-hand unto-secure-belonged and thou-did-unto unto-thyself to-a-naming-to as the-one a-dayedness the-one-this; we-had-un-adjusted-along, we-un-parceleed-unto.
Note: Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
9:15 ημω B* (-μων Bab) | ηνομησαμεν] ηδικησαμεν Γ
(O) καὶ νῦν, δέσποτα κύριε ὁ θεὸς ἡμῶν, ὁ ἐξαγαγὼν τὸν λαόν σου ἐξ Αἰγύπτου τῷ βραχίονί σου τῷ ὑψηλῷ, καὶ ἐποίησας σεαυτῷ ὄνομα κατὰ τὴν ἡμέραν ταύτην· ἡμάρτομεν, ἠγνοήκαμεν.
And now, Bind-doer Authority-belonged(Yahveh) the-one a-Deity(Elohey) of-us, the-one having-had-led-out to-the-one to-a-people of-thee out of-an-Aiguptos unto-the-one unto-more-short of-thee unto-the-one unto-lofteed-of, and thou-did-unto unto-thyself to-a-naming-to down to-the-one to-a-dayedness to-the-one-this; we-had-un-adjusted-along, we-had-come-to-un-en-mull-unto.
Note: Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:16 κύριε, ἐν πάσῃ ἐλεημοσύνῃ σου ἀποστραφήτω δὴ ὁ θυμός σου καὶ ἡ ὀργή σου ἀπὸ τῆς πόλεώς σου Ἰερουσαλήμ, ὄρους ἁγίου σου· ὅτι ἡμάρτομεν, καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἀδικίαις ἡμῶν καὶ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν Ἰερουσαλὴμ καὶ ὁ λαός σου εἰς ὀνειδισμὸν ἐγένετο ἐν πᾶσιν τοῖς περικύκλῳ ἡμῶν.
Authority-belonged(Yahveh), in unto-all unto-a-besectionatingedness of-thee it-should-have-had-been-beturned-off then the-one a-passion of-thee and the-one a-stressing of-thee off of-the-one of-a-city of-thee of-an-Ierousalêm, of-a-jutteedness of-hallow-belonged of-thee; to-which-a-one we-had-un-adjusted-along, and in unto-the-ones unto-un-coursings-unto of-us and of-the-ones fathers of-us an-Ierousalêm and the-one a-people of-thee into to-a-reproaching-to-of it-had-became in unto-all unto-the-ones unto-circled-about of-us.
Note: Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
9:16 Ιερουσαλημ I°] Ιη̅λ̅ A | om και 2° A
(O) δέσποτα, κατὰ τὴν δικαιοσύνην σου ἀποστραφήτω ὁ θυμός σου καὶ ἡ ὀργή σου ἀπὸ τῆς πόλεώς σου Ἰερουσαλήμ, ὄρους τοῦ ἁγίου σου· ὅτι ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ἡμῶν καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἀγνοίαις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν Ἰερουσαλὴμ καὶ ὁ δῆμός σου, κύριε, εἰς ὀνειδισμὸν ἐν πᾶσι τοῖς περικύκλῳ ἡμῶν.
Bind-doer, down to-the-one to-a-course-belongingedness of-thee it-should-have-had-been-beturned-off the-one a-passion of-thee and the-one a-stressing of-thee off of-the-one of-a-city of-thee of-an-Ierousalêm, of-a-jutteedness of-the-one of-hallow-belonged of-thee; to-which-a-one in unto-the-ones unto-un-adjustings-along-unto of-us and in unto-the-ones unto-un-en-mullings-unto of-the-ones of-fathers of-us an-Ierousalêm and the-one a-locality of-thee, Authority-belonged, into to-a-reproaching-to-of in unto-all unto-the-ones unto-circled-about of-us.
9:16 εις ονειδ.] + εγενετο Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:17 καὶ νῦν εἰσάκουσον, κύριε ὁ θεὸς ἡμῶν, τῆς προσευχῆς τοῦ δούλου σου καὶ τῶν δεήσεων αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐπίφανον τὸ πρόσωπόν σου ἐπὶ τὸ ἁγίασμά σου τὸ ἔρημον ἕνεκέν σου, κύριε.
And now thou-should-have-heard-into, Authority-belonged the-one a-Deity(Elohey) of-us, of-the-one of-a-goodly-holding-toward of-the-one of-a-bondee of-thee and of-the-ones of-bindings of-it, and thou-should-have-manifested-upon to-the-one to-looked-toward of-thee upon to-the-one to-a-hallow-belonging-to of-thee to-the-one to-solituded in-out-in of-thee, Authority-belonged(Yahveh).
Note: Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
9:17 κε̅ ο θς̅ ημων εισακουσο̅| A | δουλου σου] ου σου sup ras et in mg Aa | αυτου] αυτων Γ* (του ut vid superscr) | ερημον (ε sup ras Aa)] ερημωθεν Γ | ενεκεν] εινεκεν A εκενεν Γcd
(O) καὶ νῦν ἐπάκουσον, δέσποτα, τῆς προσευχῆς τοῦ παιδός σου καὶ ἐπὶ τὰς δεήσεις μου, καὶ ἐπιβλεψάτω τὸ πρόσωπόν σου ἐπὶ τὸ ὄρος τὸ ἅγιόν σου τὸ ἔρημον ἕνεκεν τῶν δούλων σου, δέσποτα.
And now thou-should-have-heard-upon, Bind-doer, of-the-one of-a-goodly-holding-toward of-the-one of-a-child of-thee and upon to-the-ones to-bindings of-me, and it-should-have-viewed-upon, the-one looked-toward of-thee, upon to-the-one to-a-jutteedness to-the-one to-hallow-belonged of-thee to-the-one to-solituded in-out-in of-the-ones of-bondees of-thee, Bind-doer.
9:17 επι τας δεησεις] των δεησεων Syrvid | μου] αυτου Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:18 κλῖνον, ὁ θεός μου, τὸ οὖς σου καὶ ἄκουσον· ἄνοιξον τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς σου καὶ ἰδὲ τὸν ἀφανισμὸν ἡμῶν καὶ τῆς πόλεώς σου, ἐφ' ἧς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά σου ἐπ' αὐτῆς· ὅτι οὐκ ἐπὶ ταῖς δικαιοσύναις ἡμῶν ῥιπτοῦμεν τὸν οἰκτειρμὸν ἡμῶν ἐνώπιόν σου, ἀλλ' ἐπὶ τοὺς οἰκτειρμούς σου τοὺς πολλούς, (Dan 9:19) κύριε.
Thou-should-have-clined, the-one a-Deity(Elohim) of-me, to-the-one to-an-ear of-thee and thou-should-heard; thou-should-have-opened-up to-the-ones to-eyes of-thee and thou-should-have-had-seen to-the-one to-an-un-manifesting-to-of of-us and of-the-one of-a-city of-thee upon of-which it-had-come-to-be-called-upon-unto the-one a-naming-to of-thee upon of-it; to-which-a-one not upon unto-the-ones unto-course-belongingednesses of-us we-fling-unto to-the-one to-a-pitiering-of of-us to-in-look-belonged of-thee, other upon to-the-ones to-pitierings-of of-thee to-the-ones to-much, (Dan 9:19) Authority-belonged(Yahveh).
Note: Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
9:18 ανοιξον] pr και A | σου 3°] + Ih´l´m A + Ilh´m´ G | riptoumen] pr ημεις AΓfort | οικτιρμ. bis Bb I° salt Γ
(O) πρόσχες, κύριε, τὸ οὖς σου καὶ ἐπάκουσόν μου, ἄνοιξον τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς σου καὶ ἴδε τὴν ἐρήμωσιν ἡμῶν καὶ τῆς πόλεώς σου, ἐφ' ἧς ἐπεκλήθη τὸ ὄνομά σου ἐπ' αὐτῆς· οὐ γὰρ ἐπὶ ταῖς δικαιοσύναις ἡμῶν ἡμεῖς δεόμεθα ἐν ταῖς προσευχαῖς ἡμῶν ἐνώπιόν σου, ἀλλὰ διὰ τὸ σὸν ἔλεος, (Dan 9:19) κύριε, σὺ ἱλάτευσον.
thou-should-have-had-held-toward, Authority-belonged, to-the-one to-an-ear of-thee and thou-should-have-heard-into of-me, thou-should-have-opened-up to-the-ones to-eyes of-thee and thou-should-have-had-seen to-the-one to-an-en-solituding of-us and of-the-one of-a-city of-thee, upon of-which it-was-called-upon-unto the-one a-naming-to of-thee upon of-it; not too-thus upon unto-the-ones unto-course-belongingednesses of-us we we-bind in unto-the-ones unto-goodly-holdings-toward of-us to-in-look-belonged of-thee, other through to-the-one to-thine to-a-besectionateedness, (Dan 9:19) Authority-belonged(Yahveh), thou thou-should-have-sectionated-of.
Note: Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
Note: to-a-besectionateedness : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:19 εἰσάκουσον, κύριε· ἱλάσθητι, κύριε· πρόσχες, κύριε· μὴ χρονίσῃς ἕνεκέν σου, ὁ θεός μου, ὅτι τὸ ὄνομά σου ἐπικέκληται ἐπὶ τὴν πόλιν σου καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν λαόν σου.
Thou-should-have-heard-into, Authority-belonged(Yahveh); thou-should-have-been-sectionated, Authority-belonged(Yahveh); thou-should-have-had-held-toward, Authority-belonged; lest thou-might-have-whiled-to in-out-in of-thee, the-one a-Deity(Elohim) of-me, to-which-a-one the-one a-naming-to of-thee it-had-come-to-be-called-upon-unto upon to-the-one to-a-city of-thee and upon to-the-one to-a-people of-thee.
Note: Authority-belonged(Yahveh) {both}: 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
9:19 εισακουσον . . . τροσχες κυριε] κε̅ ακουσον· κε̅ ιλασθητι· κε̅ προσχες A | μη χρονισης] pr κε̅ ποιησον και A pr ποιησον και Γ | ο θεος] κε̅ ο θς̅ A
(O) κύριε, ἐπάκουσον καὶ ποίησον, καὶ μὴ χρονίσῃς ἕνεκα σεαυτοῦ, δέσποτα· ὅτι τὸ ὄνομά σου ἐπεκλήθη ἐπὶ τὴν πόλιν σου Σιὼν καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν λαόν σου Ἰσραήλ.
Authority-belonged(Yahveh), thou-should-have-heard-upon and thou-should-have-done-unto, and lest thou-might-have-whiled-to to-in-out-which of-thyself, Bind-doer; to-which-a-one the-one a-naming-to of-thee it-was-called-upon-unto upon to-the-one to-a-city of-thee to-a-Siôn and upon to-the-one to-a-people of-thee to-an-Israêl.
Note: Authority-belonged(Yahveh) : 1 of the 134 places noted in Massorah (107-15, Ginsburg's edition) where Yahveh was altered to Adonay by the Sopherim.
9:19 χρονησης 87 | Σιων] ω sup ras 87?
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:20 Καὶ ἔτι ἐμοῦ λαλοῦντος καὶ προσευχομένου, καὶ ἐξαγορεύοντος τὰς ἁμαρτίας μου καὶ τὰς ἁμαρτίας τοῦ λαοῦ μου Ἰσραήλ, καὶ ῥιπτοῦντος τὸν ἔλεόν μου ἐναντίον τοῦ Κυρίου θεοῦ μου περὶ τοῦ ὄρους τοῦ ἁγίου·
And if-to-a-one of-ME of-speaking-unto and of-goodly-holding-toward, and of-lead-alongednessing-out-of to-the-ones to-un-adjustings-along-unto of-me and to-the-ones to-un-adjustings-along-unto of-the-one of-a-people of-me of-an-Israêl, and of-flinging-unto to-the-one to-a-besectionation of-me to-ever-a-oned-in of-the-one of-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) of-a-Deity(Elohim) of-me about of-the-one of-a-jutteedness of-the-one of-hallow-belonged;
Note: to-a-besectionation : a sectionating off from peril, affliction, misery, distress, predicament, etc., as having been applied.
9:20 εμου] μου AΓ | εξαγορευοντος] + μου A | ριπτοντ[ος] Γ | του κυριου θεου] om κυριου A om του Γ | ορου B* (ορους Ba vel potiusb) | αγιου] + του θυ μου AΓ
(O) Καὶ ἐγὼ ἐλάλουν προσευχόμενος καὶ ἐξομολογούμενος τὰς ἁμαρτίας μου καὶ τὰς ἁμαρτίας τοῦ λαοῦ μου Ἰσραήλ, καὶ δεόμενος ἐν ταῖς προσευχαῖς ἐναντίον Κυρίου θεοῦ μου καὶ ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὄρους τοῦ ἁγίου τοῦ θεοῦ ἡμῶν·
And I I-was-speaking-unto goodly-holding-toward and along-fortheeing-out-unto to-the-ones to-un-adjustings-along-unto of-me and to-the-ones to-un-adjustings-along-unto of-the-one of-a-people of-me of-an-Israêl, and binding in unto-the-ones unto-goodly-holdings-toward to-ever-a-oned-in of-Authority-belonged(Yahveh) of-a-Deity(Elohim) of-me and over of-the-one of-a-jutteedness of-the-one of-hallow-belonged of-the-one of-a-Deity(Elohim) of-us;
9:20 του λαου μου] του γενους μου Syrmg
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:21 καὶ ἔτι ἐμοῦ λαλοῦντος ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ, καὶ ἰδοὺ ἀνὴρ Γαβριὴλ ὃν ἴδον ἐν τῇ ὁράσει ἐν τῇ ἀρχῇ πετόμενος, καὶ ἥψατό μου ὡσεὶ ὥραν θυσίας ἑσπερινῆς.
and if-to-a-one of-ME of-speaking-unto in unto-the-one unto-a-goodly-holding-toward, and thou-should-have-had-seen, a-man a-Gabriêl to-which I-had-seen in unto-the-one unto-a-seeeeing in unto-the-one unto-a-firsting, flying, and it-fastened of-me as-if to-an-houredness of-a-surging-unto of-into-acrossed-belonged-to.
9:21 εμου] μου A | λαλουντος] + και προσευχομενου A | om και 2° A | ειδον Bab | ορασει] + [μου] Γfort
(O) καὶ ἔτι λαλοῦντός μου ἐν τῇ προσευχῇ μου, καὶ ἰδοὺ ὁ ἀνήρ ὃν εἶδον ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ μου τὴν ἀρχήν, Γαβριήλ, τάχει φερόμενος προσήγγισέ μοι ἐν ὥρᾳ θυσίας ἑσπερινῆς.
and if-to-a-one of-speaking-unto of-me in unto-the-one unto-a-goodly-holding-toward of-me, and thou-should-have-had-seen, the-one a-man to-which I-had-seen in unto-the-one unto-a-sleep of-me to-the-one to-a-firsting, a-Gabriêl, unto-a-quickeedness being-beared it-neared-toward-to unto-me in unto-an-houredness of-a-surging-unto of-into-acrossed-belonged-to.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:22 καὶ συνέτισέν με, καὶ ἐλάλησεν μετ' ἐμοῦ καὶ εἶπεν Δανιήλ, νῦν ἐξῆλθον συμβιβάσαι σε σύνεσιν.
And it-sent-together-to to-me, and it-spoke-unto with of-ME and it-had-said, Daniêl, now I-had-came-out to-have-step-stepped-to to-thee to-a-sending-together.
9:22 ειπεν] + μοι Γ
(O) καὶ προσῆλθε καὶ ἐλάλησε μετ' ἐμοῦ καὶ εἶπεν Δανιήλ, ἄρτι ἐξῆλθον ὑποδεῖξαί σοι διάνοιαν.
And it-had-came-toward and it-spoke-unto with of-ME and it-had-said, Daniêl, thus-to-a-one I-had-came-out to-have-en-showed-under unto-thee to-an-en-mulling-through-unto.
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:23 ἐν ἀρχῇ τῆς δεήσεώς σου ἐξῆλθεν λόγος, καὶ ἐγὼ ἦλθον τοῦ ἀναγγεῖλαί σοι, ὅτι ἀνὴρ ἐπιθυμιῶν σὺ εἶ· καὶ ἐννοήθητι ἐν τῷ ῥήματι καὶ σύνες ἐν τῇ ὀπτασίᾳ.
In unto-a-firsting of-the-one of-a-binding of-thee it-had-came-out, a-forthee, and I I-had-came of-the-one to-have-leadeeered-up unto-thee, to-which-a-one a-man of-passionings-upon-unto thou thou-be; and thou-should-have-been-en-mulled-in-unto in unto-the-one unto-an-uttering-to and thou-should-have-had-sent-together in unto-the-one unto-a-beholding-unto.
9:23 om σου A | αναγγειλαι σοι] om σοι A* (λαι σοι rescr A1) | επιθυμιων] π rescr A1 | ει συ Γvid
(O) ἐν ἀρχῇ τῆς δεήσεώς σου ἐξῆλθεν πρόσταγμα παρὰ Κυρίου, καὶ ἐγὼ ἦλθον ὑποδεῖξαί σοι, ὅτι ἐλεεινὸς εἶ· καὶ διανοήθητι τὸ πρόσταγμα.
In unto-a-firsting of-the-one of-a-binding of-thee it-had-came-out, an-arranging-toward-to, beside of-Authority-belonged, and I I-had-came to-have-en-showed-under unto-thee, to-which-a-one besectionated-belonged-to thou-be; and thou-should-have-been-en-mulled-through-unto to-the-one to-an-arranging-toward-to.
9:23 οτι ελεεινος ει] _ οτι ανηρ επιθυμητος ει Syrmg | προσταγμα] + και διενοηθην το προσταγμα Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:24 ἑβδομήκοντα ἑβδομάδες συνετμήθησαν ἐπὶ τὸν λαόν σου καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν πόλιν τὴν ἁγίαν σου τοῦ συντελεσθῆναι ἁμαρτίαν, καὶ τοῦ σφραγίσαι ἁμαρτίας καὶ ἀπαλεῖψαι τὰς ἀδικίας, καὶ τοῦ ἐξιλάσασθαι ἀδικίας καὶ τοῦ ἀγαγεῖν δικαιοσύνην αἰώνιον, καὶ τοῦ σφραγίσαι ὅρασιν καὶ προφήτην, καὶ τοῦ χρίσαι ἅγιον ἁγίων.
Seventy sevens they-were-cut-together upon to-the-one to-a-people of-thee and upon to-the-one to-a-city to-the-one to-hallow-belonged of-thee of-the-one to-have-been-finished-together-unto to-an-un-adjusting-along-unto, and of-the-one to-have-sealed-to to-un-adjustings-along-unto and to-have-smeared-along-off to-the-ones to-un-coursings-unto, and of-the-one to-have-sectionated-out to-un-coursings-unto and of-the-one to-have-had-led to-a-course-belongingedness to-aged-belonged, and of-the-one to-have-sealed-to to-a-seeeeing and to-a-declarer-before, and of-the-one to-have-anointed to-hallow-belonged of-hallow-belonged.
9:24 σου] + Ιη̅λ̅ A | συντελεσθηναι] συντελεσαι A | σφραγισαι I°] + ορασιν A | αδικιας I°] ανομιας A
(O) ἑβδομήκοντα ἑβδομάδες ἐκρίθησαν ἐπὶ τὸν λαόν σου καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν πόλιν Σιὼν συντελεσθῆναι τὴν ἁμαρτίαν καὶ τὰς ἀδικίας σπανίσαι καὶ ἀπαλεῖψαι τὰς ἀδικίας, καὶ διανοηθῆναι τὸ ὅραμα καὶ δοθῆναι δικαιοσύνην αἰώνιον καὶ συντελεσθῆναι τὰ ὁράματα καὶ προφήτην, καὶ εὐφρᾶναι ἅγιον ἁγίων.
Seventy sevens they-were-separated upon to-the-one to-a-people of-thee and upon to-the-one to-a-city to-a-Siôn to-have-been-finished-together-unto to-the-one to-an-un-adjusting-along-unto and to-the-ones to-un-coursings-unto to-have-scarced-to and to-have-smeared-along-off to-the-ones to-un-coursings-unto, and to-have-been-en-mulled-through-unto to-the-one to-a-seeeeing-to and to-have-been-given to-a-course-belongingedness to-aged-belonged and to-have-been-finished-together-unto to-the-ones to-seeeeings-to and to-a-declarer-before, and to-have-goodly-centered to-hallow-belonged of-hallow-belonged.
9:24 τας αδικιας (I°)] την αδικιαν Syr | ÷ και δοθηναι δικ. αιωνιον Syr α´ κ. του αγαγειν δικ. αιωνιον Syrmg | τα οραματα] το οραμα Syr | ϗ και ϗ προφ. 87 (deest V) ϗ και προφ. και ευφραναι Syr | και προφητην] κ. προφητας Syrtxt κ. προθητειαν Syrmg | και ευφραναι] και του χρισαι Syrmg
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:25 καὶ γνώσῃ καὶ συνήσεις ἀπὸ ἐξόδου λόγου τοῦ ἀποκριθῆναι καὶ τοῦ οἰκοδομῆσαι Ἰερουσαλὴμ ἕως χριστοῦ ἡγουμένου ἑβδομάδες ἑπτὰ καὶ ἑβδομάδες ἑξήκοντα δύο· καὶ ἐπιστρέψει καὶ οἰκοδομηθήσεται πλατεία καὶ τεῖχος, καὶ ἐκκενωθήσονται οἱ καιροί.
And thou-shall-acquaint and thou-shall-send-together off of-a-way-out of-a-forthee of-the-one to-have-been-separated-off and of-the-one to-have-house-built-unto to-an-Ierousalêm unto-if-which of-anointed of-leading-unto sevens seven and sevens sixty two; and it-shall-beturn-upon and it-shall-be-house-built-unto broadlets and a-lineationeedness, and they-shall-be-en-emptied-out the-ones times.
9:25 χριστου] χρ̅υ̅ B* χυ̅ Bb | δυο] + ε (seq spat ad fin lin) A | τειχος] περιτειχος A
(O) καὶ γνώσῃ καὶ διανοηθήσῃ καὶ εὐφρανθήσῃ καὶ εὑρήσεις προστάγματα ἀποκριθῆναι, καὶ οἰκοδομήσεις Ἰερουσαλὴμ πόλιν Κυρίῳ.
And thou-shall-acquaint and thou-shall-be-en-mulled-through-unto and thou-shall-be-goodly-centered and thou-shall-find to-arrangings-toward-to to-have-been-separated-off, and thou-shall-house-build-unto to-an-Ierousalêm to-a-city unto-Authority-belonged.
9:25 αποκριθηναι] + και του διανοηθηναι Syrmg
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:26 καὶ μετὰ τὰς ἑβδομάδας τὰς ἑξήκοντα δύο ἐξολοθρευθήσεται χρίσμα, καὶ κρίμα οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ· καὶ τὴν πόλιν καὶ τὸ ἅγιον διαφθερεῖ σὺν τῷ ἡγουμένῳ τῷ ἐρχομένῳ, ἐκκοπήσονται ἐν κατακλυσμῷ· καὶ ἕως τέλους πολέμου συντετμημένου τάξει ἀφανισμοί.
And with to-the-ones to-sevens to-the-ones to-sixty to-two it-shall-be-destructeed-out-of an-anointing-to, and a-separating-to not it-be in unto-it; and to-the-one to-a-city and to-the-one to-hallow-belonged it-shall-degrade-through together unto-the-one unto-leading-unto unto-the-one unto-coming; they-shall-have-been-felled-out in unto-a-down-sloshing-of-to, and unto-if-which of-a-finisheedness of-a-war of-having-had-come-to-be-cut-together unto-an-arranging, un-manifestings-to-of.
Note: it-shall-degrade-through together unto-the-one unto-leading-unto unto-the-one unto-coming : i.e. the risen Iêsous Anointed using Titus to bring the seige and destruction of Jerusalem in 70 A.D.
Note: they-shall-have-been-felled-out in 03 : pr. and in 02.
Note: unto-a-down-sloshing-of-to : referring to final destruction of Jerusalem and the temple area with the pouring out of the 7th vial Rev_16:16-21; which also brings an abrupt finish to the war at Armagedon.
Note: Gr. TACEI (unto-an-arranging) is Paradigm (unto-an-arranging/it-shall-arrange).
Note: un-manifestings-to-of in 03 : unto-un-manifestings-to-of in 02 03C1 03C2.
9:26 εξολεθρευθ. AQΓ | και την πολιν] την δε π. Q | εκκοπησονται] pr και AQ | συ̅|τετετμημενου (sic) A | αφανισμοις BabAQ
(O) καὶ μετὰ ἑπτὰ καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα καὶ ἑξήκοντα δύο ἀποσταθήσεται χρίσμα καὶ οὐκ ἔσται, καὶ βασιλεία ἐθνῶν φθερεῖ τὴν πόλιν καὶ τὸ ἅγιον μετὰ τοῦ χριστοῦ, καὶ ἥξει ἡ συντέλεια αὐτοῦ μετ' ὀργῆς καὶ καιροῦ συντελείας· ἀπὸ πολέμου πολεμηθήσεται.
And with to-seven and to-seventy and to-sixty to-two it-shall-be-stood-off an-anointing-to and not it-shall-be, and a-ruling-of of-placeedness-belongings-to it-shall-degrade to-the-one to-a-city and to-the-one to-hallow-belonged with of-the-one of-anointed, and it-shall-arrive, the-one a-finishing-together-of of-it, with of-a-stressing and of-a-time of-a-finishing-together-of; off of-a-war it-shall-be-warred-unto.
9:26–27 πολεμου . . . ερημωσιν] α´ς´ πολεμος τετμηται ερημωσεων και δυναμωσει συνθηκην πολλοις εβδομας μια ημισυ δε της εβδομαδος παυσεται θυσια και δωραν και επι της αρχης των βδελυγματων ερημωθησεται και εως συντελειας και τομης και σταξει επι το ηρημωμενον 87mg et (sub ς´) Syrmg
9:26 δυο] + εβδομαδας Syrmg | μετα του χριστου και εξει] λαος ηγουμενου ερχομενου 87mg et (sub α´) Syrmg | ÷ του χριστου Syr | και ηξει η συντελεια . . . συντελειας] ς´ και η προθεσμια αυτου εν επικλυσμω και εως της προθηεσμιας Syrmg | καιρου] pr εως Syr
(426 B.C.)
Dan 9:27 καὶ δυναμώσει διαθήκην πολλοῖς ἑβδομὰς μία· καὶ ἐν τῷ ἡμίσει τῆς ἑβδομάδος ἀρθήσεταί μου θυσία καὶ σπονδή, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸ ἱερὸν βδέλυγμα τῶν ἐρημώσεων, καὶ ἕως τῆς συντελείας καιροῦ συντέλεια δοθήσεται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐρήμωσιν.
And it-shall-en-able to-a-placement-through unto-much, a-seven one; and in unto-the-one unto-half of-the-one of-a-seven it-shall-be-lifted of-me a-surging-unto and a-libationing, and upon to-the-one to-sacred an-abhorrering-to of-the-ones of-en-solitudings, and unto-if-which of-the-one of-a-finishing-together-of of-a-time a-finishing-together-of it-shall-be-given upon to-the-one to-an-en-solituding.
Note: unto-the-one unto-half of-the-one of-a-seven : See Dan_8:13-15 & Dan_12:11.
Note: of-a-seven in 03 : + it-shall-cease-down (to-surgerlets 03C1C2: to-a-surgerlet 02) and (to-surgings-unto 03C1C2 : to-a-surging-unto 02) and unto-if-which of-a-winglet off of-an-un-manifesting-to-of and unto-if-which of-a-finishing-together-of and of-a-hasteneeing it-shall-arrange upon (unto-an-un-manifesting-to-of : of-an-un-manifesting-to-of 02), and it-shall-en-able to-a-placement-through unto-much, a-seven one; and in unto-the-one (unto-half 03C1C2 : to-half 02) of-the-one of-a-seven in 02 03C1C2.
9:27 εβδομαδος] + καταπαυσει θυσιαστηρια (-ριον A) και θυσιας (-σιαν A) και εως πτερυγιου απο αφανισμου και εως συντελειας και σπουδης ταξει επι αφανισμω (-σμου A) και δυναμωσει διαθηκην πολλοις εβδομας μια· και εν τω ημισει (-σι Ba -συ A) της εβδομαδος Bab mg A | το ιερον] τον ιερ. A | ερημωσεων] + εσται A | της συντελειας] om της A | subscr orasiß iáA
(O) καὶ δυναστεύσει ἡ διαθήκη εἰς πολλούς· καὶ πάλιν ἐπιστρέψει, καὶ ἀνοικοδομηθήσεται εἰς πλάτος καὶ μῆκος καὶ κατὰ συντέλειαν καιρῶν, καὶ μετὰ ἑπτὰ καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα καιροὺς καὶ ξβ´ ἐτῶν ἕως καιροῦ συντελείας πολέμου, καὶ ἀφαιρεθήσεται ἡ ἐρήμωσις ἐν τῷ κατισχῦσαι τὴν διαθήκην ἐπὶ πολλὰς ἑβδομάδας· καὶ ἐν τῷ τέλει τῆς ἑβδομάδος ἀρθήσεται ἡ θυσία καὶ ἡ σπονδή, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸ ἱερὸν βδέλυγμα τῶν ἐρημώσεων ἔσται ἕως συντελείας, καὶ συντέλεια δοθήσεται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐρήμωσιν.
And it-shall-able-of, the-one a-placement-through, into to-much; and unto-furthered it-shall-beturn-upon, and it-shall-be-house-built-up-unto into to-a-broadeedness and to-a-longeedness and down to-a-finishing-together-of of-times, and with to-seven and to-seventy to-times and of-sixty-two of-yeareednesses unto-if-which of-a-time of-a-finishing-together-of of-a-war, and it-shall-be-sectioned-along-off-unto the-one an-en-solituding in unto-the-one to-have-force-held-down to-the-one to-a-placement-through upon to-much to-sevens; and in unto-the-one unto-a-finisheedness of-the-one of-a-seven it-shall-be-lifted the-one a-surging-unto and the-one a-libationing, and upon to-the-one to-sacred an-abhorrering-to of-the-ones of-en-solitudings it-shall-be unto-if-which of-a-finishing-together-of, and a-finishing-together-of it-shall-be-given upon to-the-one to-an-en-solituding.
9:26–27 πολεμου . . . ερημωσιν] α´ς´ πολεμος τετμηται ερημωσεων και δυναμωσει συνθηκην πολλοις εβδομας μια ημισυ δε της εβδομαδος παυσεται θυσια και δωραν και επι της αρχης των βδελυγματων ερημωθησεται και εως συντελειας και τομης και σταξει επι το ηρημωμενον 87mg et (sub ς´) Syrmg
9:27 ετων] ετη Syr | ΕΡΗΜΩΣΙΣ Syrmg | ÷ βδελυγμα . . . επι την ερημωσιν Syr ÷ επι την ερ. 87 (deest V)
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:1 Ἐν ἔτει τρίτῳ Κύρου βασιλέως Περσῶν λόγος ἀπεκαλύφθη τῷ Δανιήλ, οὗ τὸ ὄνομα ἐπεκλήθη Βαλτασάρ· καὶ ἀληθινὸς ὁ λόγος, καὶ δύναμις μεγάλη καὶ σύνεσις ἐδόθη αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ ὀπτασίᾳ.
In unto-a-yeareedness unto-third of-a-Kuros of-a-ruler-of of-Persians a-forthee it-was-shrouded-off unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl, of-which the-one a-naming-to it-was-called-upon-unto a-Baltasar; and un-secluded-belonged-to the-one a-forthee, and an-ability great and a-sending-together it-was-given unto-it in unto-the-one unto-a-beholding-unto.
10:1 superscr ορασις ια´ A
(O) Ἐν τῷ ἐνιαυτῷ τῷ πρώτῳ Κύρου τοῦ βασιλέως Περσῶν πρόσταγμα ἐδείχθη τῷ Δανιήλ, ὃς ἐπεκλήθη τὸ ὄνομα Βαλτασάρ· καὶ ἀληθὲς τὸ ὅραμα καὶ τὸ πρόσταγμα, καὶ τὸ πλῆθος τὸ ἰσχυρὸν διανοηθήσεται τὸ πρόσταγμα· καὶ διενοήθην αὐτὸ ἐν ὁράματι.
In unto-the-one unto-a-being-in-unto-it unto-the-one unto-most-before of-a-Kuros of-the-one of-a-ruler-of of-Persians an-arranging-toward-to it-was-en-showed unto-the-one unto-a-Daniêl, which it-was-called-upon-unto the-one a-naming-to a-Baltasar; and un-secludinged the-one a-seeeeing-to and the-one an-arranging-toward-to, and the-one a-repleteedness the-one force-held it-shall-be-en-mulled-through-unto to-the-one to-an-arranging-toward-to; and I-was-en-mulled-through-unto to-it in unto-a-seeeeing-to.
10:1 προσταγμα εδειχθη] α´ ρημα απεκαλυφθη Syrmg | και το πληθος . . . ορακατι] α´ και στρατεια μεγαλη συνησει το ρημα και συνεσις αυτω εν τη ορασει 87mg α´ κ. στρ. μεγ. συνησει συν το ρ. και συνησει αυτο εν τ. ορ. Syrmg | ÷ αυτο εν οραματι 87 Syr
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:2 ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐγὼ Δανιὴλ ἤμην πενθῶν τρεῖς ἑβδομάδας ἡμερῶν·
In unto-the-ones unto-dayednesses unto-the-ones-thither I a-Daniêl I-was grieving-unto to-three to-sevens of-dayednesses;
10:2 εβδομας B* (-madaß Ba (fort) b)
(O) ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις ἐγὼ Δανιὴλ ἤμην πενθῶν τρεῖς ἑβδομάδας·
In unto-the-ones unto-dayednesses unto-the-ones-thither I a-Daniêl I-was grieving-unto to-three to-sevens;
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:3 ἄρτον ἐπιθυμιῶν οὐκ ἔφαγον, καὶ κρέας καὶ οἶνος οὐκ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου, καὶ ἄλιμμα οὐκ ἠλειψάμην, ἕως πληρώσεως τριῶν ἑβδομάδων ἡμερῶν.
to-an-adjustation of-passionings-upon-unto not I-had-devoured, and a-meat and a-wine not it-had-came-into into to-the-one to-a-becutteeing-to of-me, and to-a-smearing-along-to not I-smeared-along, unto-if-which of-an-en-filling of-three of-sevens of-dayednesses.
Note: to-an-adjustation : used to refer to a processed food staple, most frequently a loaf of bread.
10:3 αλειμμα Bab
O reads Gr. Dan 10:3 ἄρτον ἐπιθυμιῶν οὐκ ἔφαγον, καὶ κρέας καὶ οἶνος οὐκ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου, ἔλαιον οὐκ ἠλειψάμην, ἕως τοῦ συντελέσαι με τὰς τρεῖς ἑβδομάδας τῶν ἡμερῶν.
to-an-adjustation of-passionings-upon-unto not I-had-devoured, and a-meat and a-wine not it-had-came-into into to-the-one to-a-becutteeing-to of-me, to-an-oillet not I-smeared-along, unto-if-which of-the-one to-have-finished-together-unto to-me to-the-ones to-three to-sevens of-the-ones of-dayednesses.
Note: to-an-adjustation : used to refer to a processed food staple, most frequently a loaf of bread.
10:3 επιθυμιων] ς´ επιθυμητον Syrmg | οινον 87
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:4 ἐν ἡμέρᾳ εἰκοστῇ καὶ τετάρτῃ τοῦ μηνὸς τοῦ πρώτου, καὶ ἐγὼ ἤμην ἐχόμενα τοῦ ποταμοῦ τοῦ μεγάλου, αὐτός ἐστιν Τίγρις Ἑδδέκελ.
In unto-a-dayedness unto-twentieth and unto-fourth of-the-one of-a-month of-the-one of-most-before, and I I-was being-held of-the-one of-a-drinkationing-of of-the-one of-great, it it-be a-Tigris a-Heddekel.
10:4 Εδδεκελ] Ενδεκελ A superscr σύ
O reads Gr. Dan 10:4 καὶ ἐγένετο τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τετάρτῃ καὶ εἰκάδι τοῦ μηνὸς τοῦ πρώτου, καὶ ἐγὼ ἤμην ἐπὶ τοῦ χείλους τοῦ ποταμοῦ τοῦ μεγάλου, ὅς ἐστι Τίγρης.
And it-had-became unto-the-one unto-a-dayedness unto-the-one unto-fourth and unto-a-twentieth of-the-one of-a-month of-the-one of-most-before, and I I-was upon of-the-one of-a-rimmeedness of-the-one of-a-drinkationing-of of-the-one of-great, which it-be a-Tigrês.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:5 καὶ ἦρα τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς μου καὶ ἴδον, καὶ ἰδοὺ ἀνὴρ εἷς ἐνδεδυμένος βαδδείν, καὶ ἡ ὀσφὺς αὐτοῦ περιεζωσμένη ἐν χρυσίῳ Ὠφάζ,
And I-lifted to-the-ones to-eyes of-me and I-had-seen, and thou-should-have-had-seen, a-man one having-had-come-to-be-sunk-in to-baddein', and the-one a-loin of-it having-had-come-to-be-en-girded-about in unto-a-goldlet of-an-Ôfaz,
Note: to-baddein' : transliterated from Hebrew, meaning a kind of linen.
10:5 ειδον Bab : item 7 bis, 8 | βαδδιν A
O reads Gr. Dan 10:5 καὶ ἦρα τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς μου καὶ εἶδον, καὶ ἰδοὺ ἄνθρωπος εἷς ἐνδεδυμένος βύσσινα καὶ τὴν ὀσφὺν περιεζωσμένος βυσσίνῳ, καὶ ἐκ μέσου αὐτοῦ φῶς·
And I-lifted to-the-ones to-eyes of-me and I-had-seen, and thou-should-have-had-seen, a-mankind one having-had-come-to-be-sunk-in to-linened-belonged-to and to-the-one to-a-loin having-had-come-to-be-en-girded-about unto-linened-belonged-to, and out of-middle of-it a-light;
10:5 βυσσινα] α´ εξαιρετα ς´ λινα Syrmg | περιεζωσμενος] + ην Syr
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:6 καὶ τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ ὡσεὶ θαρσείς, καὶ τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ὡσεὶ ὅρασις ἀστραπῆς, καὶ οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτοῦ ὡσεὶ λαμπάδες πυρός, καὶ οἱ βραχίονες αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ σκέλη ὡς ὅρασις χαλκοῦ στίλβοντος, καὶ ἡ φωνὴ τῶν λόγων αὐτοῦ ὡς φωνὴ ὄχλου.
and the-one an-en-capsuling-to of-it as-if a-tharseis, and the-one looked-toward of-it as-if a-seeeeing of-a-gleaming-along, and the-ones eyes of-it as-if lamps of-a-fire, and the-ones more-short of-it and the-ones legs as a-seeeeing of-a-copper of-glimmering, and the-one a-sound of-the-ones of-forthees of-it as a-sound of-a-crowd.
Note: a-tharseis : transliterated from Hebrew, meaning beryl.
10:6 ωσει 2°, 3°] ως A
O reads Gr. Dan 10:6 καὶ τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ ὡσεὶ θαλάσσης, καὶ τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ὡσεὶ ὅρασις ἀστραπῆς, καὶ οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ αὐτοῦ ὡσεὶ λαμπάδες πυρός, καὶ οἱ βραχίονες αὐτοῦ καὶ οἱ πόδες ὡσεὶ χαλκὸς ἐξαστράπτων, καὶ φωνὴ λαλιᾶς αὐτοῦ ὡσεὶ φωνὴ θορύβου.
and the-one a-becutteeing-to of-it as-if a-flourisheredness, and the-one looked-toward of-it as-if a-seeeeing of-a-gleaming-along, and the-ones eyes of-it as-if lamps of-a-fire, and the-ones more-short of-it and the-ones feet of-it as-if a-copper gleaming-along-out, and a-sound of-a-speaking-unto of-it as-if a-sound of-a-tumult.
10:6 ωσει ορασις αστραπης] α´ ως χρυσολιθος [τουτεστι μαργαριτης ομοιος χρυσω] Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:7 καὶ ἴδον ἐγὼ Δανιὴλ μόνος τὴν ὀπτασίαν, καὶ οἱ ἄνδρες οἱ μετ' ἐμοῦ οὐκ ἴδον τὴν ὀπτασίαν, ἀλλ' ἢ ἔκστασις μεγάλη ἐπέπεσεν ἐπ' αὐτούς, καὶ ἔφυγον ἐν φόβῳ.
And I-had-seen I a-Daniêl stayeed to-the-one to-a-beholding-unto, and the-ones men the-ones with of-ME not they-had-seen to-the-one to-a-beholding-unto, other or a-standing-out great it-had-fallen-upon upon to-them, and they-had-fled in unto-a-fearee.
O reads Gr. Dan 10:7 καὶ εἶδον ἐγὼ Δανιὴλ τὴν ὅρασιν τὴν μεγάλην ταύτην, καὶ οἱ ἄνθρωποι οἱ ὄντες μετ' ἐμοῦ οὐκ εἴδοσαν τὴν ὅρασιν ταύτην, καὶ φόβος ἰσχυρὸς ἐπέπεσεν ἐπ' αὐτούς, καὶ ἀπέδρασαν ἐν σπουδῇ.
And I-had-seen I a-Daniêl to-the-one to-a-seeeeing to-the-one to-great to-the-one-this, and the-ones mankinds the-ones being with of-ME not they-hath-had-seen to-the-one to-a-seeeeing to-the-one-this, and a-fearee force-held it-had-fallen-upon upon to-them, and they-had-en-apartated-off in unto-a-hasteneeing.
10:7 εν σπουδη] α´ κρυφη Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:8 καὶ ἐγὼ μόνος ὑπελείφθην καὶ ἴδον τὴν ὀπτασίαν τὴν μεγάλην ταύτην, καὶ οὐχ ὑπελείφθη ἐν ἐμοὶ ἰσχύς, καὶ ἡ δόξα μου μετεστράφη εἰς διαφθοράν, καὶ οὐκ ἐκράτησα ἰσχύος.
And I stayeed I-was-remaindered-under and I-had-seen to-the-one to-a-beholding-unto to-the-one to-great to-the-one-this, and not it-was-remaindered-under in unto-ME a-force-holding, and the-one a-reckonedness of-me it-had-been-beturned-with into to-a-degradedness-through, and not I-secured-unto of-a-force-holding.
10:8 και εγω] καγω A | μονος υπελ. μονος B* (non inst μονος 2° Bb) υπελ. μονος A | δοξα] εξεις A
O reads Gr. Dan 10:8 καὶ ἐγὼ κατελείφθην μόνος καὶ εἶδον τὴν ὅρασιν τὴν μεγάλην ταύτην, οὐκ ἐνκατελείφθη ἐν ἐμοὶ ἰσχύς, καὶ ἰδοὺ πνεῦμα ἐπεστράφη ἐπ' ἐμὲ εἰς φθοράν, καὶ οὐ κατίσχυσα.
And I I-was-remaindered-down stayeed and I-had-seen to-the-one to-a-seeeeing to-the-one to-great to-the-one-this, not it-was-remaindered-down-in in unto-ME a-force-holding, and thou-should-have-had-seen, a-currenting-to it-had-been-beturned-upon upon to-ME into to-a-degradedness, and not I-force-held-down.
10:8 ουκ ενκ.] pr και Syr | ε|κατελειηφθη 87 | επεστραφη πνευμα Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:9 καὶ ἤκουσα τὴν φωνὴν τῶν λόγων αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐν τῷ ἀκοῦσαί με αὐτοῦ ἤμην κατανενυγμένος, καὶ τὸ πρόσωπόν μου ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν.
And I-heard to-the-one to-a-sound of-the-ones of-forthees of-it, and in unto-the-one to-have-heard to-me of-it I-was having-had-come-to-be-dintered-down, and the-one looked-toward of-me upon to-the-one to-a-soil.
10:9 με] + φωνην ρηματων A
O reads Gr. Dan 10:9 καὶ οὐκ ἤκουσα τὴν φωνὴν λαλιᾶς αὐτοῦ· ἐγὼ ἤμην πεπτωκὼς ἐπὶ πρόσωπόν μου ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν.
And not I-heard to-the-one to-a-sound of-a-speaking-unto of-it; I I-was having-had-come-to-fall upon to-looked-toward of-me upon to-the-one to-a-soil.
10:9 πεπτωκως] ς´ κεκαρωμενος Syrmg vid (cf Field)
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:10 καὶ ἰδοὺ χεὶρ ἁπτομένη μου, καὶ ἤγειρέν με ἐπὶ τὰ γόνατά μου.
And thou-should-have-had-seen, a-hand fastening of-me, and it-roused to-me upon to-the-ones to-knees of-me.
10:10 μου 2°] + και ταρσους χειρων μου A
O reads Gr. Dan 10:10 καὶ ἰδοὺ χεῖρα προσήγαγέ μοι, καὶ ἤγειρέ με ἐπὶ τῶν γονάτων ἐπὶ τὰ ἴχνη τῶν ποδῶν μου.
And thou-should-have-had-seen, to-a-hand it-had-led-toward unto-me, and it-roused to-me upon of-the-ones of-knees upon to-the-ones to-trackeedness-belongings-to of-the-ones of-feet of-me.
10:10 ηγειρε] α´ εκινησε Syrmg | τα ιχνη των ποδων μου] τους ταρους των χειρων μου Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:11 καὶ εἶπεν πρὸς μέ Δανιήλ, ἀνὴρ ἐπιθυμιῶν, σύνες ἐν τοῖς λόγοις οἷς ἐγὼ λαλῶ πρὸς σέ, καὶ στῆθι ἐπὶ τῇ στάσει σου, ὅτι νῦν ἀπεστάλην πρὸς σέ. καὶ ἐν τῷ λαλῆσαι αὐτὸν πρός με τὸν λόγον τοῦτον ἀνέστην ἔντρομος.
And it-had-said toward to-me, Daniêl, a-man of-passionings-upon-unto, thou-should-have-had-sent-together in unto-the-ones unto-forthees unto-which I I-speak-unto toward to-thee, and thou-should-have-had-stood upon unto-the-one unto-a-standing of-thee, to-which-a-one now I-had-been-set-off toward to-thee. And in unto-the-one to-have-spoken-unto to-it toward to-me to-the-one to-a-forthee to-the-one-this I-had-stood-up trembleed-in.
O reads Gr. Dan 10:11 καὶ εἶπέν μοι Δανιήλ, ἄνθρωπος ἐλεεινὸς εἶ· διανοήθητι τοῖς προστάγμασιν οἷς ἐγὼ λαλῶ ἐπὶ σέ, καὶ στῆθι ἐπὶ τοῦ τόπου σου, ἄρτι γὰρ ἀπεστάλην ἐπὶ σέ. καὶ ἐν τῷ λαλῆσαι αὐτὸν μετ' ἐμοῦ τὸ πρόσταγμα τοῦτο ἔστην τρέμων.
And it-had-said unto-me, Daniêl, a-mankind besectionated-belonged-to thou-be; thou-should-have-been-en-mulled-through-unto unto-the-ones unto-arrangings-toward-to unto-which I I-speak-unto upon to-thee, and thou-should-have-had-stood upon of-the-one of-an-occasion of-thee, thus-to-a-one too-thus I-had-been-set-off upon to-thee. And in unto-the-one to-have-spoken-unto to-it with of-ME to-the-one to-an-arranging-toward-to to-the-one-this I-had-stood trembling.
10:11 ανθρωπος ελεεινος] ανηρ επιθυμιων Syrmg | επι του τοπου σου] ς´ επι της βασεως σου Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:12 καὶ εἶπεν πρὸς μέ Μὴ φοβοῦ, Δανιήλ· ὅτι ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης ἡμέρας ἧς ἔδωκας τὴν καρδίαν σου τοῦ συνεῖναι καὶ κακωθῆναι ἐναντίον τοῦ θεοῦ σου, ἠκούσθησαν οἱ λόγοι σου, καὶ ἐγὼ ἦλθον ἐν τοῖς λόγοις σου.
And it-had-said toward to-me, Lest thou-should-fearee-unto, Daniêl; to-which-a-one off of-the-one of-most-before of-a-dayedness of-which thou-gave to-the-one to-a-heart of-thee of-the-one to-have-sent-together and to-have-been-en-wedge-wedged to-ever-a-oned-in of-the-one of-a-Deity(Elohim) of-thee, they-were-heard the-ones forthees of-thee, and I I-had-came in unto-the-ones unto-forthees of-thee.
10:12 om οτι απο της πρωτης ημερας A | κακωθηναι] pr του A | του θεου] pr κυ̅ A
O reads Gr. Dan 10:12 καὶ εἶπεν πρὸς μέ Μὴ φοβοῦ, Δανιήλ· ὅτι ἀπὸ τῆς ἡμέρας τῆς πρώτης ἧς ἔδωκας τὸ πρόσωπόν σου διανοηθῆναι καὶ ταπεινωθῆναι ἐναντίον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου, εἰσηκούσθη τὸ ῥῆμά σου, καὶ ἐγὼ εἰσῆλθον τῷ ῥήματί σου.
And it-had-said toward to-me, Lest thou-should-fearee-unto, Daniêl; to-which-a-one off of-the-one of-a-dayedness of-the-one of-most-before of-which thou-gave to-the-one to-looked-toward of-thee to-have-been-en-mulled-through-unto and to-have-been-en-low-belonged-to to-ever-a-oned-in of-Authority-belonged of-the-one of-a-Deity(Elohim) of-thee, it-was-heard-into the-one an-uttering-to of-thee, and I I-had-came-into unto-the-one unto-an-uttering-to of-thee.
10:12 εισηκουσθη] pr και Syr | εισηλθον] ηλθον Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:13 καὶ ὁ ἄρχων βασιλείας Περσῶν ἱστήκει ἐξ ἐναντίας μου εἴκοσι καὶ μίαν ἡμέραν· καὶ ἰδοὺ Μειχαὴλ εἷς τῶν ἀρχόντων ἦλθεν βοηθῆσαί μοι, καὶ αὐτὸν κατέλειπον ἐκεῖ μετὰ τοῦ ἄρχοντος βασιλείας Περσῶν.
And the-one firsting of-a-ruling-of of-Persians it-had-come-to-have-had-stood out of-ever-a-oned-in of-me to-twenty and to-one to-a-dayedness; and thou-should-have-had-seen, A-Meichaêl one of-the-ones of-firsting it-had-came to-have-holler-ran-unto unto-me, and to-it I-had-remaindered-down thither with of-the-one of-firsting of-a-ruling-of of-Persians.
10:13 εισστηκει Bab | εικοσι] pr και A | Μιχαηλ BbA : item 21 | αρχοντων] + των πρωτων A | katelipon Bb
O reads Gr. Dan 10:13 καὶ ὁ στρατηγὸς βασιλέως Περσῶν ἀνθειστήκει ἐναντίον μου εἴκοσι καὶ μίαν ἡμέραν· καὶ ἰδοὺ Μιχαὴλ εἷς τῶν ἀρχόντων τῶν πρώτων ἐπῆλθε βοηθῆσαί μοι, καὶ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖ κατέλιπον μετὰ τοῦ στρατηγοῦ τοῦ βασιλέως Περσῶν.
And the-one an-amass-leader a-ruler-of of-Persians it-had-come-to-have-had-ever-a-one-stood to-ever-a-oned-in of-me to-twenty and to-one to-a-dayedness; and thou-should-have-had-seen, a-Michaêl one of-the-ones of-firsting of-the-ones of-most-before it-had-came-upon to-have-holler-ran-unto unto-me, and to-it thither I-had-remaindered-down with of-the-one of-an-amass-leader of-the-one of-a-ruler-of of-Persians.
10:13 βασιλεως] βασιλειας Syrmg | και αυτον . . . Περσων] α´ καγω περιεσσευθην εκει πλησιον βασιλεως Π. 87mg Syrmg | κατελιπον] post λ ras aliq 87? (fort prius -λειπ.)
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:14 καὶ ἦλθον συνετίσαι σε ὅσα ἀπαντήσεται τῷ λαῷ σου ἐπ' ἐσχάτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ὅτι ἔτι ἡ ὅρασις εἰς ἡμέρας.
And I-had-came to-have-sent-together-to to-thee to-which-a-which it-shall-off-ever-a-one-unto unto-the-one unto-a-people of-thee upon of-most-bordered of-the-ones of-dayednesses, to-which-a-one if-to-a-one the-one a-seeeeing into to-dayednesses.
10:14 om ετι A | η ορασις] om η A
O reads Gr. Dan 10:14 καὶ εἶπέν μοι Ἦλθον ὑποδεῖξαί σοι τί ὑπαντήσεται τῷ λαῷ σου ἐπ' ἐσχάτου τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἔτι γὰρ ὥρα εἰς ἡμέρας.
And it-had-said unto-me, I-had-came to-have-en-showed-under unto-thee to-what-one it-shall-under-ever-a-one-unto unto-the-one unto-a-people of-thee upon of-most-bordered of-the-ones of-dayednesses, if-to-a-one too-thus an-houredness into to-dayednesses.
10:14 και ειπεν 871 de 87✱ non liq | ωρα] ορασις Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:15 καὶ ἐν τῷ λαλῆσαι αὐτὸν μετ' ἐμοῦ κατὰ τοὺς λόγους τούτους ἔδωκα τὸ πρόσωπόν μου ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν.
And in unto-the-one to-have-spoken-unto to-it with of-ME down to-the-ones to-forthees to-the-ones-these I-gave to-the-one to-looked-toward of-me upon to-the-one to-a-soil.
O reads Gr. Dan 10:15 καὶ ἐν τῷ αὐτὸν λαλῆσαι μετ' ἐμοῦ τὰ προστάγματα ταῦτα ἔδωκα τὸ πρόσωπόν μου ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν καὶ ἐσιώπησα.
And in unto-the-one to-it to-have-spoken-unto with of-ME to-the-ones to-arrangings-toward-to to-the-ones-these I-gave to-the-one to-looked-toward of-me upon to-the-one to-a-soil and I-muted-unto.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:16 καὶ ἰδοὺ ὡς ὁμοίωσις υἱοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἥψατο τῶν χειλέων μου· καὶ ἤνοιξα τὸ στόμα μου καὶ ἐλάλησα, καὶ εἶπα πρὸς τὸν ἑστῶτα ἐναντίον ἐμοῦ Κύριε, ἐν τῇ ὀπτασίᾳ σου ἐστράφη τὰ ἐντός μου ἐν ἐμοί, καὶ οὐκ ἔσχον ἰσχύν.
And thou-should-have-had-seen, as an-en-alonged-belonging of-a-son of-a-mankind it-fastened of-the-ones of-rimmeednesses of-me; and I-opened-up to-the-one to-a-becutteeing-to of-me and I-spoke-unto, and I-said toward to-the-one to-having-hath-had-come-to-stand to-ever-a-oned-in of-ME, Authority-belonged(Adon), in unto-the-one unto-a-beholding-unto of-thee it-had-been-beturned the-ones in-unto-the-one-which of-me in unto-ME, and not I-had-held to-a-force-holding.
10:16 και I°] + κατενυγην και Bab(mgg)A | om και ηνοιξα το στομα μου A | εμου] μου A
O reads Gr. Dan 10:16 καὶ ἰδοὺ ὡς ὁμοίωσις χειρὸς ἀνθρώπου ἥψατό μου τῶν χειλέων· καὶ ἤνοιξα τὸ στόμα μου καὶ ἐλάλησα, καὶ εἶπα τῷ ἑστηκότι ἀπέναντι μου Κύριε· καὶ ὡς ὅρασις ἀπεστράφη ἐπὶ τὸ πλευρόν μου ἐπ' ἐμέ, καὶ οὐκ ἦν ἐν ἐμοὶ ἰσχύς·
And thou-should-have-had-seen, as an-en-alonged-belonging of-a-hand of-a-mankind it-fastened of-me of-the-ones of-rimmeednesses; and I-opened-up to-the-one to-a-becutteeing-to of-me and I-spoke-unto, and I-said unto-the-one unto-having-had-come-to-stand off-in-ever-a-one of-me, Authority-belonged(Adon); and as a-seeeeing it-had-been-beturned-off upon to-the-one to-a-side of-me upon to-ME, and not it-was in unto-ME a-force-holding;
10:16 ΗΝΟΙΞΑ Syrmg | ως ορασις απεστραφη . . επ εμε] . . . εστραφη τα εντος μου εν μοι εμοι ς´ εν τη ορασει εστρεβλωθη τα μελη μου εν εμοι Syrmg | επ εμοι] εν εμοι Syr
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:17 καὶ πῶς δυνήσεται ὁ παῖς σου, κύριε, λαλῆσαι μετὰ τοῦ κυρίου μου τούτου; καὶ ἐγὼ ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν οὐ στήσεται ἐν ἐμοὶ ἰσχύς, καὶ πνεῦμα οὐχ ὑπελείφθη ἐν ἐμοί.
And unto-whither it-shall-able, the-one a-child of-thee, Authority-belonged(Adon), to-have-spoken-unto with of-the-one of-authority-belonged(adon) of-me of-the-one-this? And I off of-the-one now not it-shall-stand in unto-ME, a-force-holding, and a-currenting-to not it-was-remaindered-under in unto-ME.
10:17 πνευμα] πνοη A
O reads Gr. Dan 10:17 καὶ πῶς δυνήσεται ὁ παῖς λαλῆσαι μετὰ τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ; καὶ ἐγὼ ἠσθένησα, καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἐμοὶ ἰσχὺς καὶ πνεῦμα οὐ κατελείφθη ἐν ἐμοί.
and unto-whither it-shall-able, the-one a-child, to-have-spoken-unto with of-the-one of-authority-belonged(adon) of-it? And I I-un-vigored-unto, and not it-be in unto-ME a-force-holding and a-currenting-to not it-was-remaindered-down in unto-ME.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:18 καὶ προσέθετο καὶ ἥψατό μου ὡς ὅρασις ἀνθρώπου, καὶ ἐνίσχυσέν με·
And it-had-placed-toward and it-fastened of-me as a-seeeeing of-a-mankind, and it-force-held-in to-me;
O reads Gr. Dan 10:18 καὶ προσέθηκε καὶ ἥψατό μου ὡς ὅρασις ἀνθρώπου, καὶ κατίσχυσέ με,
And it-placed-toward and it-fastened of-me as a-seeeeing of-a-mankind, and it-force-held-down to-me,
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:19 καὶ εἶπέν μοι Μὴ φοβοῦ, ἀνὴρ ἐπιθυμιῶν, εἰρήνη σοι· ἀνδρίζου καὶ ἴσχυε. καὶ ἐν τῷ λαλῆσαι αὐτὸν μετ' ἐμοῦ ἴσχυσα, καὶ εἶπα Λαλείτω ὁ κύριός μου, ὅτι ἐνίσχυσάς με.
and it-had-said unto-me, Lest thou-should-fearee-unto, a-man of-passionings-upon-unto, a-joinifying unto-thee; thou-should-man-to and thou-should-force-hold. And in unto-the-one to-have-spoken-unto to-it with of-ME I-force-held, and I-said, It-should-speak-unto, the-one authority-belonged(adon) of-me, to-which-a-one thou-force-held-in to-me.
O reads Gr. Dan 10:19 καὶ εἶπέν μοι Ἄνθρωπος ἐλεεινὸς εἶ, μὴ φοβοῦ, ὑγίαινε· ἀνδρίζου καὶ ἴσχυσαι. καὶ ἐν τῷ λαλῆσαι αὐτὸν μετ' ἐμοῦ ἴσχυσα καὶ εἶπα Λαλησάτω ὁ κύριός μου, ὅτι ἐνίσχυσέ με.
and it-had-said unto-me, A-mankind besectionated-belonged-to thou-be, lest thou-should-fearee-unto, thou-should-health; thou-should-man-to and thou-should-have-force-held. And in unto-the-one to-have-spoken-unto to-it with of-ME I-force-held and I-said, It-should-have-spoken-unto, the-one authority-belonged(adon) of-me, to-which-a-one it-force-held-in to-me.
10:19 ελεεινος] επιθυμιων Syrmg | υγιανε (post αι ras aliq 87?)] ειρηνη σοι Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:20 καὶ εἶπεν Εἰ οἶδας ἵνα τί ἦλθον πρὸς σέ; καὶ νῦν ἐπιστρέψω τοῦ πολεμῆσαι μετὰ τοῦ ἄρχοντος Περσῶν· καὶ ἐγὼ εἰσεπορευόμην, καὶ ἄρχων τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἤρχετο.
And it-had-said, If thou-had-come-to-see so to-what-one I-had-came toward to-thee? And now I-shall-beturn-upon of-the-one to-have-warred-unto with of-the-one of-firsting of-Persians; and I I-was-traversing-into-of, and firsting of-the-ones of-Hellên' it-was-coming;
10:20 ειπεν] + μοι A | επιστρεφω A | του αρχοντος] αρχοντω̅| A | εισεπορευομην] εξεπορευομην A | αρχων] pr ο BabA
O reads Gr. Dan 10:20 καὶ εἶπεν πρὸς μέ Γινώσκεις τί ἦλθον πρὸς σέ; καὶ νῦν ἐπιστρέψω διαμάχεσθαι μετὰ τοῦ στρατηγοῦ βασιλέως τῶν Περσῶν· καὶ ἐγὼ ἐξεπορευόμην, καὶ ἰδοὺ στρατηγὸς Ἑλλήνων εἰσεπορεύετο.
And it-had-said toward to-me, Thou-acquaint to-what-one I-had-came toward to-thee? And now I-shall-beturn-upon to-battle-through with of-the-one of-an-amass-leader of-a-ruler-of of-the-ones of-Persians; and I I-was-traversing-out-of, and thou-should-have-had-seen, an-amass-leader of-Hellên' it-was-traversing-into-of.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 10:21 ἀλλ' ἢ ἀναγγελῶ σοι τὸ ἐντεταγμένον ἐν γραφῇ ἀληθείας, καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν εἷς ἀντεχόμενος μετ' ἐμοῦ περὶ τούτων ἀλλ' ἢ Μειχαὴλ ὁ ἄρχων ὑμῶν.
other or I-shall-leadeeer-up unto-thee to-the-one to-having-had-come-to-be-arranged-in in unto-a-scribing of-an-un-secluding-of, and not it-be one being-ever-a-one-held with of-ME about of-the-ones-these other or a-Meichaêl the-one firsting of-ye.
10:21 περι] υπερ A | η 2°] ημιν A
O reads Gr. Dan 10:21 καὶ μάλα ὑποδείξω σοι τὰ πρῶτα ἐν ἀπογραφῇ ἀληθείας· καὶ οὐθεὶς ἦν ὁ βοηθῶν μετ' ἐμοῦ ὑπὲρ τούτων ἀλλ' ἢ Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἄγγελος.
And such I-shall-en-show-under unto-thee to-the-ones to-most-before in unto-a-scribing-off of-an-un-secluding-of; and not-from-one it-was the-one holler-running-unto with of-ME over of-the-ones-these other or a-Michaêl the-one a-leadeeer.
10:21 ο αγγελος] ο αρχων υμων Syrmg
(424 B.C.; Vision History 426 B.C.)
Dan 11:1 καὶ ἐγὼ ἐν ἔτει πρώτῳ Κύρου ἔστην εἰς κράτος καὶ ἰσχύν.
And I in unto-a-yeareedness unto-most-before of-a-Kuros I-had-stood into to-a-securement and to-a-force-holding.
11:1 ετει] pr τω B* (improb Bab)
(O) Καὶ ἐν τῷ ἐνιαυτῷ τῷ πρώτῳ Κύρου τοῦ βασιλέως εἶπέν μοι ἐνισχῦσαι καὶ ἀνδρίζεσθαι
And in unto-the-one unto-a-being-in-unto-it unto-the-one unto-most-before of-a-Kuros of-the-one of-a-ruler-of it-had-said unto-me to-have-force-held-in and to-man-to,
11:1 Κυρου του βασιλεως] α´ _Δαρειου του Μηδου Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:2 Καὶ νῦν ἀλήθειαν ἀναγγελῶ σοι· ἰδοὺ ἔτι τρεῖς βασιλεῖς ἀναστήσονται ἐν τῇ Περσίδι, καὶ ὁ τέταρτος πλουτήσει πλοῦτον μέγαν παρὰ πάντας· καὶ μετὰ τὸ κρατῆσαι αὐτὸν τοῦ πλούτου αὐτοῦ ἐπαναστήσεται πάσαις βασιλείαις Ἑλλήνων.
And now to-an-un-secluding-of I-shall-leadeeer-up unto-thee; thou-should-have-had-seen, if-to-a-one three rulers-of they-shall-stand-up in unto-the-one unto-a-Persis, and the-one fourth it-shall-wealth-unto to-a-wealth to-great beside to-all; and with to-the-one to-have-secured-unto to-it of-the-one of-a-wealth of-it it-shall-stand-up-upon unto-all unto-rulings-of of-Hellên'.
(O) Καὶ νῦν ἦλθον τὴν ἀλήθειαν ὑποδεῖξαί σοι· ἰδοὺ τρεῖς βασιλεῖς ἀνθεστήκασιν ἐν τῇ Περσίδι, καὶ ὁ τέταρτος πλουτήσει πλοῦτον μέγαν παρὰ πάντας· καὶ ἐν τῷ κατισχῦσαι αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ πλούτῳ αὐτοῦ ἐπαναστήσεται παντὶ βασιλεῖ Ἑλλήνων.
And now I-had-came to-the-one to-an-un-secluding-of to-have-en-showed unto-thee; thou-should-have-had-seen, three rulers-of they-had-come-to-ever-a-one-stand in unto-the-one unto-a-Persis, and the-one fourth it-shall-wealth-unto to-a-wealth to-great beside to-all; and in unto-the-one to-have-force-held-down to-it in unto-the-one unto-a-wealth of-it it-shall-stand-up-upon unto-all unto-a-ruler-of of-Hellên'.
11:2 και εν τω κατισχυσαι . . . Ελληνων] α´ και κατα την ισχυν αυτου εν τω πλουτω αυτου διεγερει παντας συν τους βασιλεις (fort τοις βασιλευσι) των Ελλ. ς´ και εν τω ενισχυσαι αυτον εν τω πλουτω αυτου διεγερει παντας προς την βασιλειαν της γης των Ελλ. Syrmg | Ελληνων] adnot τουτεστιν Ελλαδος (ΕΛΛΑΔΟΣ) Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:3 καὶ ἀναστήσεται βασιλεὺς δυνατός, καὶ κυριεύσει κυρίας πολλῆς, καὶ ποιήσει κατὰ τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ.
And it-shall-stand-up, a-ruler-of able, and it-shall-authority-belong-of of-an-authoritying-unto of-much, and it-shall-do-unto down to-the-one to-a-determining-to of-it.
(O) καὶ στήσεται βασιλεὺς δυνατός, καὶ κυριεύσει κυρείας πολλῆς, καὶ ποιήσει καθὼς ἂν βούληται.
And it-shall-stand, a-ruler-of able, and it-shall-authority-belong-of of-an-authoritying-of of-much, and it-shall-do-unto down-as ever it-might-purpose.
11:3 κυρειας] κυριας 87✱vid
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:4 καὶ ὡς ἂν στῇ, ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ συντριβήσεται καὶ διαιρεθήσεται εἰς τοὺς τέσσαρας ἀνέμους τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καὶ οὐκ εἰς τὰ ἔσχατα αὐτοῦ οὐδὲ κατὰ τὴν κυρείαν αὐτοῦ ἣν ἐκυρίευσεν· ὅτι ἐκτιλήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἑτέροις ἐκτὸς τούτων.
And as ever it-might-have-had-stood the-one a-ruling-of of-it it-shall-have-been-rubbed-together and it-shall-be-sectioned-along-through-unto into to-the-ones to-four to-winds of-the-one of-a-sky, and not into to-the-ones to-most-bordered of-it not-then-also down to-the-one to-an-authoritying-of of-it to-which it-authority-belonged-of; to-which-a-one it-shall-be-pulled-out the-one a-ruling-of of-it, and unto-different out-unto-the-one-which of-the-ones-these.
11:4 τεσσαρας BabA | κυρειαν] κυριαν A | τουτων] + δοθησεται A
(O) καὶ ἐν τῷ ἀναστῆναι αὐτὸν συντριβήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ καὶ μερισθήσεται εἰς τοὺς τέσσαρας ἀνέμους τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, οὐ κατὰ τὴν ἀλκὴν αὐτοῦ οὐδὲ κατὰ τὴν κυρείαν αὐτοῦ ἣν ἐδυνάστευσε· ὅτι ἀποσταθήσεται ἡ βασιλεία αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἑτέρους διδάξει ταῦτα.
And in unto-the-one to-have-had-stood-up to-it it-shall-have-been-rubbed-together, the-one a-ruling-of of-it, and it-shall-be-portioned-to into to-the-ones to-four to-winds of-the-one of-a-sky, not down to-the-one to-a-hauleeing-along of-it not-then-also down to-the-one to-an-authoritying-of of-it to-which it-abled-of; to-which-a-one it-shall-be-stood-off the-one a-ruling-of of-it, and to-different it-shall-veer-veerate to-the-ones-these.
11:4 κυρειαν] κυριαν 87✱vid
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:5 καὶ ἐνισχύσει ὁ βασιλεὺς τοῦ νότου· καὶ εἷς τῶν ἀρχόντων αὐτῶν ἐνισχύσει ἐπ' αὐτῶν καὶ κυριεύσει κυρίαν πολλήν.
And it-shall-force-hold-in, the-one a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-tropic; and one of-the-ones of-firsting of-them it-shall-force-hold-in upon of-them and it-shall-authority-of to-an-authoritying-unto to-much.
11:5 εις των αρχοντων αυτων ενισχυσει επ αυτων] ενισχ. επ αυτων εις των αρχ. αυτου A | κυριαν (-ρειαν Bab) πολλην] κυριειας πολλης επ εξουσιας αυτου A
(O) καὶ ἐνισχύσει βασιλείαν Αἰγύπτου, καὶ εἷς ἐκ τῶν δυναστῶν κατισχύσει αὐτὸν καὶ δυναστεύσει δυναστείᾳ μεγάλῃ ἡ δυναστεία αὐτοῦ.
And it-shall-force-hold-in to-a-ruling-of of-an-Aiguptos, and one out of-the-ones of-ablers it-shall-force-hold-down to-it and it-shall-able-of unto-an-abling-of unto-great, the-one an-abling-of of-it.
11:5 και ενισχυσει . . . κατισχυσει αυτον] ς´ και επικρατησει του βασιλεως του νοτου και των αρχοντων αυτου και κατισχυσει επ αυτον Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:6 καὶ μετὰ τὰ ἔτη αὐτοῦ συμμιγήσονται, καὶ θυγάτηρ βασιλέως τοῦ νότου εἰσελεύσεται πρὸς βασιλέα τοῦ βορρᾶ τοῦ ποιῆσαι συνθήκας μετ' αὐτοῦ· καὶ οὐ κρατήσει ἰσχύος βραχίονος, καὶ οὐ στήσεται τὸ σπέρμα αὐτοῦ, καὶ παραδοθήσεται αὕτη καὶ οἱ φέροντες αὐτήν, καὶ ἡ νεᾶνις καὶ ὁ κατισχύων αὐτὴν ἐν τοῖς καιροῖς.
And with to-the-ones to-yeareednesses of-it they-shall-be-en-mingled-together, and a-daughter of-a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-tropic it-shall-come-into toward to-a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-north of-the-one to-have-done-unto to-a-placement-together with of-it; and not it-shall-secure-unto of-a-force-holding of-more-short, and not it-shall-stand, the-one a-whorling-to of-it, and it-shall-be-given-beside the-one-this and the-ones bearing to-it and the-one a-new-belonging and the-one force-holding-down to-it in unto-the-ones unto-times.
11:6 συμμιγησονται] αποσυμμιγησονται A | θυγατηρ] pr η A | βασιλεως] βασιλευς A
(O) καὶ εἰς συντέλειαν ἐνιαυτῶν ἄξει αὐτούς, καὶ εἰσελεύσεται βασιλεὺς Αἰγύπτου εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τὴν βορρᾶ ποιήσασθαι συνθήκας· καὶ οὐ μὴ κατισχύσῃ, ὅτι ὁ βραχίων αὐτοῦ οὐ στήσει ἰσχύν, καὶ ὁ βραχίων αὐτοῦ ναρκήσει καὶ τῶν συμπορευομένων μετ' αὐτοῦ, καὶ μενεῖ εἰς ὥρας.
And into to-a-finishing-together-of of-being-in-unto-its it-shall-lead to-them, and it-shall-come-into, a-ruler-of of-an-Aiguptos, into to-the-one to-a-ruling-of to-the-one of-a-north to-have-done-unto to-placements-together; and not lest it-might-have-force-held-down, to-which-a-one the-one more-short of-it not it-shall-stand to-a-force-holding, and the-one more-short of-it it-shall-numb-unto and of-the-ones of-traversing-together-of with of-it, and it-shall-stay into to-hourednesses.
11:6 και εισελευσεται . . . μενει εις ωρας] και θυγατηρ βασιλεως του νοτου εισελευσεται προς βασιλεα του βορρα του ποιησαι συνθηκας μετ αυτου και ου κρατησει ισχυος βραχιονος και ου στησεται το σπερμα αυτου (fort αυτης) και παραδοθησεται αυτη και οι προσαγοντες αυτην και η νεανις και ο κατισχυων αυτην εν τω καιρω: ς´ . . . του ποιησαι ομονοιαν και ου στησεται προς την ισχυν του βραχιονος και ουχ υποστησεται (?υπομενει) ουδε προς το σπερμα αυτου Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:7 καὶ στήσεται ἐκ τοῦ ἄνθους τῆς ῥίζης αὐτῆς τῆς ἑτοιμασίας αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἥξει πρὸς τὴν δύναμιν, καὶ εἰσελεύσεται εἰς τὰ ὑποστηρίγματα τοῦ βασιλέως τοῦ βορρᾶ, καὶ ποιήσει ἐν αὐτοῖς καὶ κατισχύσει.
And it-shall-stand out of-the-one of-a-placeedness-up of-the-one of-a-rootedness of-it of-the-one of-a-readying-unto of-it, and it-shall-arrive toward to-the-one to-an-ability, and it-shall-come-into into to-the-ones to-stablishings-under-to of-the-one of-a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-north, and it-shall-do-unto in unto-them and it-shall-force-hold-down.
Note: of-a-placeedness-up : a flower, a bloom, a highest point, a surfacing, etc.
11:7 στησεται] αναστησεται BbA | της ετοιμασιας] επι της ετ. A | om en A
(O) καὶ ἀναστήσεται φυτὸν ἐκ τῆς ῥίζης αὐτοῦ καθ' ἑαυτόν, καὶ ἥξει ἐπὶ τὴν δύναμιν αὐτοῦ ἐν ἰσχύι αὐτοῦ βασιλεὺς βορρᾶ, καὶ ποιήσει ταραχὴν καὶ κατισχύσει.
And it-shall-stand-up, a-plant, out of-the-one of-rootedness of-it, down to-self, and it-shall-arrive upon to-the-one to-an-ability of-it in unto-a-force-holding of-it, a-ruler-of of-a-north, and it-shall-do-unto to-a-stirring and it-shall-force-hold-down.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:8 καί γε τοὺς θεοὺς αὐτῶν μετὰ τῶν χωνευτῶν αὐτῶν, πᾶν σκεῦος ἐπιθυμητὸν αὐτῶν, ἀργυρίου καὶ χρυσίου, μετὰ αἰχμαλωσίας οἴσει εἰς Αἴγυπτον· καὶ αὐτὸς στήσεται ὑπὲρ βασιλέα τοῦ βορρᾶ.
And too to-the-ones to-deities(elohim) of-them with of-the-ones of-moltened-of of-them, to-all to-an-equipeedness to-passioned-upon of-them of-a-silverlet and of-a-goldlet, with of-a-spear-capturing-unto it-shall-bear into to-an-Aiguptos; and it it-shall-stand over to-a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-north.
11:8 αυτων I°] + καταστρεψει BabA
(O) καὶ τοὺς θεοὺς αὐτῶν καταστρέψει μετὰ τῶν χωνευτῶν αὐτῶν, καὶ τοὺς ὄχλους αὐτῶν μετὰ τῶν σκευῶν τῶν ἐπιθυμημάτων αὐτῶν, τὸ ἀργύριον καὶ τὸ χρυσίον, ἐν αἰχμαλωσίᾳ ἀποίσουσιν εἰς Αἴγυπτον· καὶ ἔσται ἔτος βασιλεῖ βορρᾶ.
And to-the-ones to-deities(elohim) of-them it-shall-beturn-down with of-the-ones of-moltened-of of-them, and to-the-ones to-crowds of-them with of-the-ones of-equipeednesses of-the-ones of-passionings-upon-to of-them, to-the-one a-silverlet and to-the-one to-a-goldlet, in unto-a-spear-capturing-unto they-shall-bear-off into to-an-Aiguptos; and it-shall-be a-yeareedness unto-a-ruler-of of-a-north.
11:8 αυτων 4°] αυτου 87✱vid
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:9 καὶ εἰσελεύσεται εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ βασιλέως τοῦ νότου, καὶ ἀναστρέψει εἰς τὴν γῆν αὐτοῦ.
And it-shall-come-into into to-the-one to-a-ruling-of of-the-one of-a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-tropic, and it-shall-beturn-up into to-the-one to-a-soil of-it. it-shall-come-into
(O) καὶ εἰσελεύσεται εἰς βασιλείαν βασιλεὺς Αἰγύπτου ἡμέρας, καὶ ἐπιστρέψει ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν αὐτοῦ,
And it-shall-come-into into to-a-ruling-of, a-ruler-of of-an-Aiguptos, to-dayednesses, and it-shall-beturn-upon upon to-the-one to-a-soil of-it,
11:9 ϗ βασιλευς Syr | Αιγυπου 87
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:10 καὶ οἱ υἱοὶ αὐτοῦ συνάξουσιν ὄχλον ἀνὰ μέσον πολλῶν, καὶ ἐλεύσεται ἐρχόμενος καὶ κατακλύζων, καὶ παρελεύσεται καὶ καθίεται καὶ συνπροσπλακήσεται ἕως τῆς ἰσχύος αὐτοῦ.
And the-ones sons of-it they-shall-lead-together to-a-crowd up to-middle of-much, and it-shall-come, coming and down-sloshing-of-to, and it-shall-come-beside and it-shall-sit-down and it-shall-have-been-braided-toward-together unto-if-which of-the-one of-a-force-holding of-it.
11:10 ανα μεσον] δυναμεω̅| A | ελευσεται] εισελευσεται A | ερχομενος] αρχ. A | καθιειται A | συνπροσπλακησεται (συμπρ. Bb)] προσυμπλακησονται A
(O) καὶ ὁ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ· καὶ ἐρεθισθήσεται, καὶ συνάξει συναγωγὴν ὄχλου πολλοῦ, καὶ εἰσελεύσεται κατ' αὐτὴν κατασύρων. παρελεύσεται καὶ ἐπιστρέψει· καὶ παροξυνθήσεται ἐπὶ πολύ.
and the-one a-son of-it; and it-shall-be-irked-to, and it-shall-lead-together to-a-leading-together of-a-crowd of-much, and it-shall-come-into down to-it dragging-down. It-shall-come-beside and it-shall-beturn-upon; and it-shall-be-sharpened-beside upon to-much.
11:10 και εισελευσεται . . . κατασυρων (κατὰ σύρων 87)] ς´ και ελευσεται ερχομενη και κατακλυζουσα Syrmg | επι πολυ] α´ εως κραταιωματος αυτης Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:11 καὶ ἀγριανθήσεται βασιλεὺς τοῦ νότου, καὶ ἐξελεύσεται καὶ πολεμήσει μετὰ βασιλέως τοῦ βορρᾶ, καὶ στήσει ὄχλον πολύν, καὶ παραδοθήσεται ὄχλος ἐν χειρὶ αὐτοῦ·
And it-shall-be-field-belonged a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-tropic, and it-shall-come-into and it-shall-war-unto with of-a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-north, and it-shall-stand to-a-crowd to-much, and it-shall-be-given-beside a-crowd in unto-a-hand of-it;
Note: it-shall-be-field-belonged : used to refer to going wild, i.e. into survival mode.
11:11 βασιλευς του νοτου και] και ο βασ. του νοτου A | του βασιλεως] om του A | οχλος] pr ο A
(O) καὶ ὀργισθήσεται βασιλεὺς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ ἐξελεύσεται καὶ πολεμήσει μετὰ βασιλέως βορρᾶ, καὶ στήσει ὄχλον πολύν, καὶ παραδοθήσεται ἡ συναγωγὴ εἰς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ·
And it-shall-be-stressed-to a-ruler-of of-an-Aiguptos, and it-shall-come-into and it-shall-war-unto with of-a-ruler-of of-a-north, and it-shall-stand to-a-crowd to-much, and it-shall-be-given-beside the-one a-leading-together into to-the-ones to-hands of-it;
11:11 Αιγυπτου] του νοτου Syrmg (item 15) | ϗ και εξελευσεται 87 Syr | ϗ και στησε οχλον πολυν (λυ sup ras: fort prius πολλ . . ) 87 ϗ οχλον π. Syr
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:12 καὶ λήμψεται τὸν ὄχλον, καὶ ὑψωθήσεται ἡ καρδία αὐτοῦ, καὶ καταβαλεῖ μυριάδας, καὶ οὐ κατισχύσει.
and it-shall-take to-the-one to-a-crowd, and it-shall-be-en-lofteed the-one a-heart of-it, and it-shall-cast-down to-myriads, and not it-shall-force-hold-down.
11:12 ληψεται Bb | υψωθησεται] υπερυψωθησεται A
(O) καὶ λήψεται τὴν συναγωγήν, καὶ ὑψωθήσεται ἡ καρδία αὐτοῦ, καὶ ταράξει πολλοὺς καὶ οὐ μὴ φοβηθῇ.
and it-shall-take to-the-one to-a-leading-together, and it-shall-be-en-lofteed the-one a-heart of-it, and it-shall-stir to-much and not lest it-might-have-been-feareed-unto.
11:12 ου] αυ 87ed
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:13 καὶ ἐπιστρέψει βασιλεὺς τοῦ βορρᾶ καὶ ἄξει ὄχλον πολὺν ὑπὲρ τὸν πρότερον, καὶ εἰς τὸ τέλος τῶν καιρῶν ἐνιαυτῶν ἐπελεύσεται εἰσόδια ἐν δυνάμει μεγάλῃ καὶ ἐν ὑπάρξει πολλῇ.
And it-shall-beturn-upon, a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-north, and it-shall-lead to-a-crowd to-much over to-the-one to-more-before, and into to-the-one to-a-finisheedness of-the-ones of-times of-being-in-unto-its it-shall-come-upon, waylets-into, in unto-an-ability unto-great and in unto-a-firsting-under unto-much.
11:13 βασιλευς] pr ο A | αξει] εξει A
(O) καὶ ἐπιστρέψει βασιλεὺς βορρᾶ καὶ συνάξει πόλεως συναγωγὴν μείζονα παρὰ τὴν πρώτην κατὰ συντέλειαν καιροῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ, καὶ εἰσελεύσεται εἰς αὐτὴν ἐπ' αὐτὸν ἐν ὄχλῳ πολλῷ καὶ ἐν χρήμασι πολλοῖς.
And it-shall-beturn-upon, a-ruler-of of-a-north, and it-shall-lead-together of-a-city to-a-leading-together to-more-great beside to-the-one to-most-before down to-a-finishing-together-of of-a-time of-a-being-in-unto-it, and it-shall-come-into into to-it upon to-it in unto-a-crowd unto-much and in unto-affordings-to unto-much.
11:13 κατα συντελειαν . . . επ αυτον] και εις το τελος των καιρων ενιαυτων ελευσεται ερχομενος Syrmg | αυτην] αυτο 87✱vid
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:14 καὶ ἐν τοῖς καιροῖς ἐκείνοις πολλοὶ ἐπαναστήσονται ἐπὶ βασιλέα τοῦ νότου, καὶ οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν λοιπῶν τοῦ λαοῦ σου ἐπαρθήσονται τοῦ στῆσαι ὅρασιν, καὶ ἀσθενήσουσιν.
And in unto-the-ones unto-times unto-the-ones-thither much they-shall-stand-up-upon upon to-a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-tropic, and the-ones sons of-the-ones of-plagues of-the-one of-a-people of-thee they-shall-be-lifted-upon of-the-one to-have-stood to-a-seeeeing, and they-shall-un-vigor-unto.
11:14 των λοιπων] των λοιμων A
(O) καὶ ἐν τοῖς καιροῖς ἐκείνοις διάνοιαι ἀναστήσονται ἐπὶ τὸν βασιλέα Αἰγύπτου, καὶ ἀνοικοδομήσει τὰ πεπτωκότα τοῦ ἔθνους σου, καὶ ἀναστήσεται εἰς τὸ ἀναστῆσαι τὴν προφητείαν, καὶ προσκόψουσι.
And in unto-the-ones unto-times unto-the-ones-thither en-mullings-through-unto they-shall-stand-up upon to-the-one to-a-ruler-of of-an-Aiguptos, and it-shall-house-build-up-unto to-the-ones to-having-had-come-to-fall of-the-one of-a-placeedness-belonging-to of-thee, and it-shall-stand-up into to-the-one to-have-stood-up to-the-one to-a-declaring-before-of, and they-shall-fell-toward.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:15 καὶ εἰσελεύσεται βασιλεὺς τοῦ βορρᾶ, καὶ ἐκχεεῖ πρόσχωμα καὶ συνλήμψεται πόλεις ὀχυράς, καὶ οἱ βραχίονες τοῦ βασιλέως τοῦ νότου στήσονται, καὶ ἀναστήσονται καὶ οἱ ἐκλεκτοὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ οὐκ ἔσται ἰσχὺς τοῦ στῆναι.
And it-shall-come-into, a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-north, and it-shall-pour-out to-an-en-pouring-toward-to and it-shall-take-together to-cities to-holdationed, and the-ones more-short of-the-one of-a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-tropic they-shall-stand, and they-shall-stand-up, and the-ones forthed-out of-it, and not it-shall-be a-force-holding of-the-one to-have-had-stood.
11:15 βασιλευς] pr ο A | συλληψεται Bb συλλημψ. A | στησονται] pr ου A | om και 6° A
(O) καὶ ἐπελεύσεται βασιλεὺς βορρᾶ, καὶ ἐπιστρέψει τὰ δόρατα αὐτοῦ καὶ λήψεται τὴν πόλιν τὴν ὀχυράν, καὶ οἱ βραχίονες βασιλέως Αἰγύπτου στήσονται μετὰ τῶν δυναστῶν αὐτοῦ, καὶ οὐκ ἔσται αὐτῷ ἰσχὺς εἰς τὸ ἀντιστῆναι αὐτῷ.
And it-shall-come-upon, a-ruler-of of-a-north, and it-shall-beturn-upon to-the-ones to-shanks of-it and it-shall-take to-the-one to-a-city to-the-one to-holdationed, and the-ones more-short of-a-ruler-of of-an-Aiguptos they-shall-stand with of-the-ones of-ablers of-it, and not it-shall-be unto-it a-force-holding into to-the-one to-have-had-ever-a-one-stood unto-it.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:16 καὶ ποιήσει ὁ εἰσπορευόμενος πρὸς αὐτὸν κατὰ τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ, καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ἑστὼς κατὰ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ· καὶ στήσεται ἐν τῇ γῇ τοῦ σαβείρ, καὶ τελεσθήσεται ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτοῦ.
And it-shall-do-unto, the-one coming-into, toward to-it down to-the-one to-a-determining-to of-it, and not it-be having-hath-had-come-to-stand down to-looked-toward of-it; and it-shall-stand in unto-the-one unto-a-soil of-the-one of-a-sabeir, and it-shall-be-finished-unto in unto-the-one unto-a-hand of-it.
Note: of-a-sabeir : transliterated from Hebrew, meaning a-reckoning-in.
11:16 στησεται] στησονται A | τη γη] om τη A | σαββειρ A | τελεσθησεται] συντελεσθ. A
(O) καὶ ποιήσει ὁ εἰσπορευόμενος ἐπ' αὐτὸν κατὰ τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ, καὶ οὐκ ἔσται ὁ ἀνθεστηκὼς ἐναντίον αὐτοῦ· καὶ στήσεται ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ, καὶ ἐπιτελεσθήσεται πάντα τὰ ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτοῦ.
And it-shall-do-unto, the-one coming-into, upon to-it down to-the-one to-a-determining-to of-it, and not it-shall-be the-one having-had-come-to-ever-a-one-stand to-ever-a-oned-in of-it; and it-shall-stand in unto-the-one unto-a-spacedness, and it-shall-be-finished-upon-unto all the-ones in unto-the-ones unto-hands of-it.
11:16 εν τη χωρα] + της θελησεως Syr (cf Hier) εν γη ενδοξω Syrmg | και επιτελεσθησεται . . . αυτου] ς´ και αναλωθησονται δια των χειρων αυτου Syrmg | om τα Syr
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:17 καὶ τάξει τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ εἰσελθεῖν ἐν ἰσχύι πάσης τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ, καὶ εὐθεῖα πάντα μετ' αὐτοῦ ποιήσει· καὶ θυγατέρα τῶν γυναικῶν δώσει αὐτῷ τοῦ διαφθεῖραι αὐτήν, καὶ οὐ μὴ παραμείνῃ, καὶ οὐκ αὐτῷ ἔσται.
And it-shall-arrange to-the-one to-looked-toward of-it to-have-had-came-into in unto-a-force-holding of-all of-the-one of-a-ruling-of of-it, and to-straight to-all with of-it it-shall-do-unto; and to-a-daughter of-the-ones of-women it-shall-give unto-it of-the-one to-have-degraded-through to-it, and not lest it-might-have-stayed-beside, and not unto-it it-shall-be.
(O) καὶ δώσει τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ἐπελθεῖν βίᾳ τὸ ἔργον αὐτοῦ, καὶ συνθήκας μετ' αὐτοῦ ποιήσεται· καὶ θυγατέρα ἀνθρώπου δώσει αὐτῷ εἰς τὸ φθεῖραι αὐτήν, καὶ οὐ πείσεται καὶ οὐκ ἔσται.
And it-shall-give to-the-one to-looked-toward of-it to-have-had-came-upon unto-a-dureeatedness to-the-one to-a-work of-it, and to-placements-together with of-it it-shall-do-unto; and to-a-daughter of-a-mankind it-shall-give unto-it into to-the-one to-have-degraded to-it, and not it-shall-sure and not it-shall-be.
11:17 το εργον] pr παν Syr
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:18 καὶ ἐπιστρέψει τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ εἰς τὰς νήσους καὶ συλλήμψεται πολλάς, καὶ καταπαύσει ἄρχοντας ὀνειδισμοῦ αὐτῶν· πλὴν ὀνειδισμὸς αὐτοῦ ἐπιστρέψει αὐτῷ.
And it-shall-beturn-upon to-the-one to-looked-toward of-it into to-the-ones to-isles and it-shall-take-together to-much, and it-shall-cease-down to-firsting of-a-reproaching-to-of of-them; to-beyond, a-reproaching-to-of of-it it-shall-beturn-upon unto-it.
11:18 συλληψεται Bb | ονειδισμος] pr ο A
(O) καὶ δώσει τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν καὶ λήψεται πολλούς, καὶ ἐπιστρέψει ὀργὴν ὀνειδισμοῦ αὐτῶν ἐν ὅρκῳ κατὰ τὸν ὀνειδισμὸν αὐτοῦ.
And it-shall-give to-the-one to-looked-toward of-it upon to-the-one to-a-flourisheredness and it-shall-take to-much, and it-shall-beturn-upon to-a-stressing of-a-reproaching-to-of of-them in unto-a-fencee down to-the-one to-a-reproaching-to-of of-it.
11:18 πολλους] incep πολο 87✱ (πολλ. 871)
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:19 καὶ ἐπιστρέψει τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν ἰσχὺν τῆς γῆς αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀσθενήσει καὶ πεσεῖται, καὶ οὐχ εὑρεθήσεται.
And it-shall-beturn-upon to-the-one to-looked-toward of-it into to-the-one to-a-force-holding of-the-one of-a-soil of-it, and it-shall-un-vigor-unto and it-shall-fall, and not it-shall-be-found.
11:19 ισχυν] αρχην A
(O) ἐπιστρέψει τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ κατισχῦσαι τὴν χώραν αὐτοῦ, καὶ προσκόψει καὶ πεσεῖται, καὶ οὐχ εὑρεθήσεται.
It-shall-beturn-upon to-the-one to-looked-toward of-it into to-the-one to-have-force-held-down to-the-one to-a-spacedness of-it, and it-shall-fell-toward and it-shall-fall, and not it-shall-be-found.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:20 καὶ ἀναστήσεται ἐκ τῆς ῥίζης αὐτοῦ φυτὸν τῆς βασιλείας ἐπὶ τὴν ἑτοιμασίαν αὐτοῦ παραβιβάζων, πράσσων δόξαν βασιλείας· καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις συντριβήσεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐν προσώποις οὐδὲ ἐν πολέμῳ.
And it-shall-stand-up out of-the-one of-a-rootedness of-it, a-plant of-the-one of-a-ruling-of, upon to-the-one to-a-readying-unto of-it beside-step-stepping-to, practicing to-a-reckonedness of-a-ruling-of; and in unto-the-ones unto-dayednesses unto-the-ones-thither it-shall-have-been-rubbed-together, and not in unto-looked-toward not-then-also in unto-a-war.
11:20 της βασιλειας (-λιας hic et A)] om της A | ταις ημεραις εκειναις sup ras Bb?
(O) καὶ ἀναστήσεται ἐκ τῆς ῥίζης αὐτοῦ φυτὸν βασιλείας εἰς ἀνάστασιν, ἀνὴρ τύπτων δόξαν βασιλέως· καὶ ἐν ἡμέραις ἐσχάταις συντριβήσεται, καὶ οὐκ ἐν ὀργῇ οὐδὲ ἐν πολέμῳ·
And it-shall-stand-up out of-the-one of-a-rootedness of-it, a-plant of-a-ruling-of, into to-a-standing-up, a-man strikering to-a-reckonedness of-a-ruler-of; and in unto-dayednesses unto-most-bordered it-shall-have-been-rubbed-together, and not in unto-a-stressing not-then-also in unto-a-war;
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:21 στήσεται ἐπὶ τὴν ἑτοιμασίαν αὐτοῦ· ἐξουδενώθη, καὶ οὐκ ἔδωκαν ἐπ' αὐτὸν δόξαν βασιλείας· καὶ ἥξει ἐν εὐθηνίᾳ, καὶ κατισχύσει βασιλείας ἐν ὀλισθρήμασιν.
It-shall-stand upon to-the-one to-a-readying-unto of-it; it-was-en-not-then-also-oned-out, and not they-gave upon to-it to-a-reckonedness of-a-ruling-of; and it-shall-arrive in unto-goodly-froming-unto, and it-shall-force-hold-down of-a-ruling-of in unto-en-slippings-to.
11:21 ολιθρημασιν B* ολισθρ. Bab ολοθρη. Bb?c ολισθημασιν A
(O) καὶ ἀναστήσεται ἐπὶ τὸν τόπον αὐτοῦ εὐκαταφρόνητος, καὶ οὐ δοθήσεται ἐπ' αὐτὸν δόξα βασιλέως· καὶ ἥξει ἐξάπινα, κατισχύσει βασιλεὺς ἐν κληροδοσίᾳ αὐτοῦ.
and it-shall-stand-up upon to-the-one to-an-occasion of-it, goodly-centered-down, and not it-shall-be-given upon to-it a-reckonedness of-a-ruler-of, and it-shall-arrive out-off-so, it-shall-force-hold-down, a-ruler-of, in unto-a-lot-giving-unto of-it.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:22 καὶ βραχίονες τοῦ κατακλύζοντος κατακλυσθήσονται ἀπὸ προσώπου αὐτοῦ καὶ συντριβήσονται, καὶ ἡγούμενος διαθήκης·
And more-short of-the-one of-down-sloshing-of-to they-shall-be-sloshed-of-to off of-looked-toward of-it and they-shall-have-been-rubbed-together, and leading-unto of-a-placement-through;
11:22 κατακλυσθησονται] pr και A
(O) καὶ τοὺς βραχίονας τοὺς συντριβέντας συντρίψει ἀπὸ προσώπου αὐτοῦ.
And to-the-ones to-more-short to-the-ones to-having-had-been-rubbed-together it-shall-rub-together off of-looked-toward of-it.
11:22 βαρχιονας 87ed
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:23 καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν συναναμίξεων πρὸς αὐτὸν ποιήσει δόλον, καὶ ἀναβήσεται καὶ ὑπερισχύσει αὐτοὺς ἐν ὀλίγῳ ἔθνει.
and off of-the-ones of-minglings-up-together toward to-it it-shall-do-unto to-a-guile, and it-shall-step-up and it-shall-force-hold-over to-them in unto-little unto-a-placeedness-belonging-to.
11:23 αυτους] αυτου A
(O) καὶ μετὰ τῆς διαθήκης καὶ δήμου συνταγέντος μετ' αὐτοῦ ποιήσει ψεῦδος, καὶ ἐπὶ ἔθνος ἰσχυρὸν ἐν ὀλιγοστῷ ἔθνει
And with of-the-one of-a-placement-through and of-a-locality of-having-had-been-arranged-together with of-it it-shall-do-unto to-a-falseedness, and upon to-a-placeedness-belonging-to to-force-held in unto-most-little unto-a-placeedness-belonging-to
11:23 εν ολιγοστε εθνει] ς´ ως εν ολιγω εθνει ησυχη Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:24 καὶ ἐν εὐθηνίᾳ καὶ ἐν πίοσι χώραις ἥξει, καὶ ποιήσει ἃ οὐκ ἐποίησαν οἱ πατέρες αὐτοῦ καὶ οἱ πατέρες τῶν πατέρων αὐτοῦ· προνομὴν καὶ σκῦλα καὶ ὕπαρξιν αὐτοῖς διασκορπιεῖ, καὶ ἐπ' Αἴγυπτον λογιεῖται λογισμοὺς καὶ ἕως καιροῦ.
And in unto-a-goodly-froming-unto and in unto-plumpinged-of unto-spacednesses it-shall-arrive, and it-shall-do-unto to-which not they-did-unto, the-ones fathers of-it and the-ones fathers of-the-ones of-fathers of-it; to-a-parceleeing-before and to-flayed and to-a-firsting-under unto-them it-shall-scatter-through-to, and upon to-an-Aiguptos it-shall-forthee-to to-fortheeings-to-of and unto-if-which of-a-time.
11:24 πιοσι] πλιοσιν A | om αυτοις A | διασκορπισει A | λογισμους] διαλογισμους A + αυτου A
(O) ἐξάπινα ἐρημώσει πόλιν, καὶ ποιήσει ὅσα οὐκ ἐποίησαν οἱ πατέρες αὐτοῦ οὐδὲ οἱ πατέρες τῶν πατέρων αὐτοῦ· προνομὴν καὶ σκῦλα καὶ χρήματα αὐτοῖς δώσει, καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν πόλιν τὴν ἰσχυρὰν διανοηθήσεται καὶ οἱ λογισμοὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς μάτην.
out-of-so it-shall-en-solitude to-a-city, and it-shall-do-unto to-which-a-which not they-did-unto, the-ones fathers of-it not-then-also the-ones fathers of-the-ones of-fathers of-it; to-a-parceleeing-before and to-flayed and to-affordings-to unto-them it-shall-give, and upon to-the-one to-a-city to-the-one to-force-held it-shall-be-en-mulled-through-unto and the-ones fortheeings-to-of of-it into to-follied.
11:24 και επι τ. πολιν τ. ισχυραν] α´ και επι τα οχυρωματα Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:25 καὶ ἐξεγερθήσεται ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτοῦ καὶ ἡ καρδία αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ βασιλέα τοῦ νότου ἐν δυνάμει μεγάλῃ, καὶ ὁ βασιλεὺς τοῦ νότου συνάψει πόλεμον ἐν δυνάμει μεγάλῃ καὶ ἰσχυρᾷ σφόδρα· καὶ οὐ στήσεται, ὅτι λογιοῦνται ἐπ' αὐτὸν λογισμούς.
And it-shall-be-roused-out the-one a-force-holding of-it and the-one a-heart of-it upon to-a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-tropic in unto-an-ability unto-great, and the-one a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-tropic it-shall-fasten-together to-a-war in unto-an-ability unto-great and unto-force-held to-vehemented; and not it-shall-stand, to-which-a-one they-shall-forthee-to upon to-it to-fortheeings-of-to.
11:25 επι] και A | εν 2°] pr και A
(O) καὶ ἐγερθήσεται ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτοῦ καὶ ἡ καρδία αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸν βασιλέα Αἰγύπτου ἐν ὄχλῳ πολλῷ, καὶ ὁ βασιλεὺς Αἰγύπτου ἐρεθισθήσεται εἰς πόλεμον ἐν ὄχλῳ ἰσχυρῷ σφόδρα λίαν· καὶ οὐ στήσεται ὅτι διανοηθήσεται ἐπ' αὐτὸν διανοία.
And it-shall-be-roused the-one a-force-holding of-it and the-one a-heart of-it upon to-the-one to-a-ruler-of of-an-Aiguptos in unto-a-crowd unto-much, and the-one a-ruler-of of-an-Aiguptos it-shall-be-irked-to into to-a-war in unto-a-crowd unto-force-held to-vehemented to-exceedingly; and not it-shall-stand to-which-a-one it-shall-be-en-mulled-through-unto upon to-it an-en-mulling-through-unto.
11:25 διανοίᾳ Syr
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:26 καὶ φάγονται τὰ δέοντα αὐτοῦ καὶ συντρίψουσιν αὐτόν, καὶ δυνάμεις κατακλύσει, καὶ πεσοῦνται τραυματίαι πολλοί.
And they-shall-devour to-the-ones to-binding of-it and they-shall-rub-together to-it, and to-abilities it-shall-down-slosh-of-to, and they-shall-fall, wounded-belongers much.
11:26 αυτον] αυτου A
(O) καὶ καταναλώσουσιν αὐτὸν μέριμναι αὐτοῦ καὶ ἀποστρέψουσιν αὐτόν, καὶ παρελεύσεται, καὶ κατασυριεῖ, καὶ πεσοῦνται τραυματίαι πολλοί.
And they-shall-other-along-up-down to-it, portion-memoriednesses of-it, and they-shall-beturn-off to-it, and it-shall-come-beside, and it-shall-drag-down, and they-shall-fall, wounded-belongers much.
11:26 παρελευσεται Syr
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:27 καὶ ἀμφότεροι οἱ βασιλεῖς, αἱ καρδίαι αὐτῶν εἰς πονηρίαν, καὶ ἐπὶ τραπέζῃ μιᾷ ψευδῆ λαλήσουσιν, καὶ οὐ κατευθυνεῖ· ὅτι ἔτι πέρας εἰς καιρόν.
And more-around the-ones rulers-of, the-ones hearts of-them into to-an-en-necessitating-unto, and upon unto-a-four-footedness unto-one to-falsinged they-shall-speak-unto, and not it-shall-straighten-down; to-which-a-one if-to-a-one an-acrossment into to-a-time.
(O) καὶ δύο βασιλεῖς μόνοι δειπνήσουσιν ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ καὶ ἐπὶ μιᾶς τραπέζης φάγονται, καὶ ψευδολογήσουσι καὶ οὐκ εὐοδωθήσονται· ἔτι γὰρ συντέλεια εἰς καιρόν.
And two rulers-of stayeed they-shall-meal-unto upon to-the-one to-it and upon of-one of-a-four-footedness they-shall-devour, and they-shall-false-forthee-unto and not they-shall-be-goodly-en-wayed; if-to-a-one too-thus a-finishing-together-of into to-a-time.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:28 καὶ ἐπιστρέψει εἰς τὴν γῆν αὐτοῦ ἐν ὑπάρξει πολλῇ, καὶ ἡ καρδία αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ διαθήκην ἁγίαν, καὶ ποιήσει καὶ ἐπιστρέψει εἰς τὴν γῆν αὐτοῦ.
And it-shall-beturn-upon into to-the-one to-a-soil of-it in unto-a-firsting-under unto-much, and the-one a-heart of-it upon to-a-placement-through to-hallow-belonged, and it-shall-do-unto and it-shall-beturn-upon into to-the-one to-a-soil of-it.
(O) καὶ ἐπιστρέψει ἐπὶ τὴν χώραν αὐτοῦ ἐν χρήμασι πολλοῖς, καὶ ἡ καρδία αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὴν διαθήκην τοῦ ἁγίου· ποιήσει καὶ ἐπιστρέψει ἐπὶ τὴν χώραν αὐτοῦ.
And it-shall-beturn-upon upon to-the-one to-a-spacedness of-it in unto-affordings-to unto-much, and the-one a-heart of-it upon to-the-one to-a-placement-through of-the-one of-hallow-belonged; it-shall-do-unto and it-shall-beturn-upon upon to-the-one to-a-spacedness of-it.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:29 εἰς τὸν καιρὸν ἐπιστρέψει καὶ ἥξει ἐν τῷ νότῳ, καὶ οὐκ ἔσται ὡς ἡ πρώτη καὶ ἡ ἐσχάτη.
Into to-the-one to-a-time it-shall-beturn-upon and it-shall-arrive in unto-the-one unto-a-tropic, and not it-shall-be as the-one most-before and the-one most-bordered.
11:29 και η εσχατη] και ως η εσχ. A
(O) εἰς καιρόν ἐπιστρέψει καὶ εἰσελεύσεται εἰς Αἴγυπτον, καὶ οὐκ ἔσται ὡς ἡ πρώτη καὶ ἡ ἐσχάτη.
Into to-a-time it-shall-beturn-upon and it-shall-come-into into to-an-Aiguptos, and not it-shall-be as the-one most-before and the-one most-bordered.
11:29 ϗ επιστρεψει 87 Syr
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:30 καὶ εἰσελεύσονται ἐν αὐτῷ οἱ ἐκπορευόμενοι Κίτιοι, καὶ ταπεινωθήσεται, καὶ ἐπιστρέψει καὶ θυμωθήσεται ἐπὶ διαθήκην ἁγίαν· καὶ ποιήσει καὶ ἐπιστρέψει, καὶ συνήσει ἐπὶ τοὺς καταλιπόντας διαθήκην ἁγίαν.
And they-shall-come-into in unto-it, the-ones traversing-out-of Kit-belonged, and it-shall-be-en-low-belonged-to, and it-shall-beturn-upon and it-shall-be-en-passioned upon to-a-placement-through to-hallow-belonged; and it-shall-do-unto and it-shall-beturn-upon, and it-shall-send-together upon to-the-ones to-having-had-remaindered-down to-a-placement-through to-hallow-belonged.
11:30 εν] pr οι A | οι εκπορ.] pr και A | καταλειποντας A
(O) καὶ ἥξουσι Ῥωμαῖοι καὶ ἐξώσουσιν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐμβριμήσονται αὐτῷ, καὶ ἐπιστρέψει, καὶ ὀργισθήσεται ἐπὶ τὴν διαθήκην τοῦ ἁγίου· καὶ ποιήσει καὶ ἐπιστρέψει, καὶ διανοηθήσεται ἐπ' αὐτοὺς ἀνθ' ὧν ἐγκατέλιπον τὴν διαθήκην τοῦ ἁγίου.
And they-shall-arrive, Rômê-belonged, and they-shall-push-out-unto to-it and they-shall-in-tauten-unto unto-it, and it-shall-beturn-upon, and it-shall-be-stressed-to upon to-the-one to-a-placement-through of-the-one of-hallow-belonged; and it-shall-do-unto and it-shall-beturn-upon, and it-shall-be-en-mulled-through-unto upon to-them ever-a-one of-which they-had-remaindered-down-in to-the-one to-a-placement-through of-the-one of-hallow-belonged.
11:30 ÷ και επιστρεψει (superscr ÷) και οργισθησονται 87 ÷ και επιστρ. κ. οργισθησεται Syr
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:31 καὶ σπέρματα ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἀναστήσονται καὶ βεβηλώσουσιν τὸ ἁγίασμα τῆς δυναστείας, καὶ μεταστήσουσιν τὸν ἐνδελεχισμόν, καὶ δώσουσιν βδέλυγμα ἠφανισμένον.
And whorlings-to out of-it they-shall-stand-up and they-shall-step-step-of to-the-one to-a-hallow-belonging-to of-the-one of-an-abling-of, and they-shall-stand-with to-the-one to-an-elongating-in-of, and they-shall-give to-an-abhorrering-to to-having-had-come-to-be-un-manifested-to.
Note: they-shall-en-step-step-of : used to refer to a person overstepping what is allowable.
11:31 και I°] pr και βραχιονες A | αναστησοται B* (-σονται Bab) | δυναστειας] δυναμεως A | ενδελεχισμον] ενδελεχιστον A
(O) καὶ βραχίονες παρ' αὐτοῦ στήσονται καὶ μιανοῦσι τὸ ἅγιον τοῦ φόβου, καὶ ἀποστήσουσι τὴν θυσίαν, καὶ δώσουσι βδέλυγμα ἐρημώσεως.
And more-short beside of-it they-shall-stand and they-shall stain-belong to-the-one to-hallow-belonged of-the-one of-a-fearee, and they-shall-stand-off to-the-one to-a-surging-unto, and they-shall-give to-an-abhorrering-to of-an-en-solituding.
11:31 ΒΔΕΛΥΓΜΑ ΕΡΗΜΩΣΕΩΣ Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:32 καὶ οἱ ἀνομοῦντες διαθήκην ἐπάξουσιν ἐν ὀλισθρήμασιν· καὶ λαὸς γινώσκοντες θεὸν αὐτοῦ κατισχύσουσιν καὶ ποιήσουσιν,
And the-ones un-parceleeing-unto to-a-placement-through they-shall-lead-upon in unto-en-slippings-to; and a-people acquainting to-a-Deity(Elohim) of-it they-shall-force-hold-down and they-shall-do-unto,
11:32 οι] λαοι A | επαξουσιν] εξαξουσιν A | ολισθρημασιν] ολισθημασιν A | γινωσκων A
(O) καὶ ἐν ἁμαρτίαις διαθήκης μιανοῦσιν ἐν σκληρῷ λαῷ· καὶ ὁ δῆμος ὁ γινώσκων ταῦτα κατισχύσουσι καὶ ποιήσουσι,
And in unto-un-adjustings-along-unto of-a-placement-through they-shall-stain-belong in unto-stiffened unto-a-people; and the-one a-locality the-one acquainting to-the-ones-these they-shall-force-hold-down and they-shall-do-unto,
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:33 καὶ οἱ συνετοὶ τοῦ λαοῦ συνήσουσιν εἰς πολλά, καὶ ἀσθενήσουσιν ἐν ῥομφαίᾳ καὶ ἐν φλογὶ καὶ ἐν αἰχμαλωσίᾳ καὶ ἐν διαρπαγῇ ἡμερῶν.
and the-ones sendable-together of-the-one of-a-people they-shall-send-together into to-much, and they-shall-un-vigor-unto in unto-a-sabre and in unto-a-blaze and in unto-a-spear-capturing-unto and in unto-a-snatching-through of-dayednesses.
11:33 του λαου] λαου μου A
(O) καὶ ἐννοούμενοι τοῦ ἔθνους συνήσουσιν εἰς πολλούς, καὶ προσκόψουσι ῥομφαίᾳ καὶ παλαιωθήσονται ἐν αὐτῇ, καὶ ἐν αἰχμαλωσίᾳ καὶ ἐν προνομῇ ἡμερῶν κηλιδωθήσονται.
and being-en-mulled-in-unto of-the-one of-a-placeedness-belonging-to they-shall-send-together into to-much, and they-shall-fell-toward unto-a-sabre and they-shall-be-en-past-belonged in unto-it, and in unto-a-spear-capturing-unto and in unto-a-parceleeing-before of-dayednesses they-shall-be-en-tarnished.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:34 καὶ ἐν τῷ ἀσθενῆσαι αὐτοὺς βοηθηθήσονται βοήθειαν μικράν, καὶ προστεθήσονται ἐπ' αὐτοὺς πολλοὶ ἐν ὀλισθρήμασιν.
And in unto-the-one to-have-un-vigored-unto to-them they-shall-be-holler-ran-unto to-a-holler-running-of to-small, and they-shall-be-placed-toward upon to-them much in unto-en-slippings-to.
11:34 προς] επ A
(O) καὶ ὅταν συντρίβωνται, συνάξουσιν ἰσχὺν βραχεῖαν, καὶ ἐπισυναχθήσονται ἐπ' αὐτοὺς πολλοὶ ἐπὶ πόλεως καὶ πολλοὶ ὡς ἐν κληροδοσίᾳ.
And which-also they-might-be-rubbed-together, they-shall-lead-together to-a-force-holding to-short, and they-shall-be-led-together-upon upon to-them much upon of-a-city and much as in unto-a-lot-giving-unto.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:35 καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν συνιέντων ἀσθενήσουσιν τοῦ πυρῶσαι αὐτοὺς καὶ τοῦ ἐκλέξασθαι καὶ τοῦ ἀποκαλυφθῆναι ἕως καιροῦ πέρας· ὅτι ἔτι εἰς καιρόν.
And off of-the-ones of-sending-together they-shall-un-vigor-unto of-the-one to-have-en-fired to-them and of-the-one to-have-forthed-out and of-the-one to-have-been-shrouded-off unto-if-which of-a-time to-an-acrossment; to-which-a-one if-to-a-one into to-a-time.
11:35 om και 2° A
(O) καὶ ἐκ τῶν συνιέντων διανοηθήσονται εἰς τὸ καθαρίσαι ἑαυτοὺς καὶ εἰς τὸ ἐκλεγῆναι καὶ εἰς τὸ καθαρισθῆναι ἕως καιροῦ συντελείας· ἔτι γὰρ καιρὸς εἰς ὥρας.
And out of-the-ones of-sending-together they-shall-be-en-mulled-through-unto into to-the-one to-have-cleansed-to to-selves and into to-the-one to-have-had-been-forthed-out and into to-the-one to-have-been-cleansed-to unto-if-which of-a-time of-a-finishing-together-of; if-to-a-one too-thus a-time into to-hourednesses.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:36 καὶ ποιήσει κατὰ τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ· καὶ ὑψωθήσεται ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ μεγαλυνθήσεται ἐπὶ πάντα θεόν, καὶ λαλήσει ὑπέρογκα, καὶ κατευθυνεῖ μέχρις οὗ συντελεσθῇ ἡ ὀργή· εἰς γὰρ συντέλειαν γίνεται.
And it-shall-do-unto down to-the-one to-a-determining-to of-it; and it-shall-be-en-lofteed the-one a-ruler-of and it-shall-be-greatened upon to-all to-a-deity(el), and it-shall-speak-unto to-over-bulked, and it-shall-straighten-down of-lest-whilst of-which it-might-have-been-finished-together-unto the-one a-stressing; into too-thus to-a-finishing-together-of it-becometh.
11:36 υψωθησεται ο βασιλευς κ. μεγαλυνθησεται] υψ. και μεγ. ο βασ. A | θεον] + και επι τον θν̅ των θεων A | μεχρις του B* (μ. ου Bb)
(O) καὶ ποιήσει κατὰ τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ ὁ βασιλεύς, καὶ παροργισθήσεται καὶ ὑψωθήσεται ἐπὶ πάντα θεόν, καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν θεὸν τῶν θεῶν ἔξαλλα λαλήσει, καὶ εὐοδωθήσεται ἕως ἂν συντελεσθῇ ἡ ὀργή· εἰς αὐτὸν γὰρ συντέλεια γίνεται.
And it-shall-do-unto down to-the-one to-a-determining-to of-it, the-one a-ruler-of, and it-shall-be-stressed-beside-to and it-shall-be-en-lofteed upon to-all to-a-deity(el), and upon to-the-one to-a-Deity(El) of-the-ones of-deities(êlim) to-othered-out it-shall-speak-unto, and it-shall-be-goodly-en-wayed unto-if-which ever it-might-have-been-finished-together-unto the-one a-stressing; into to-it too-thus a-finishing-together-of it-becometh.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:37 καὶ ἐπὶ παντὸς θεοῦ τῶν πατέρων αὐτοῦ οὐ συνήσει, καὶ ἐπιθυμίᾳ γυναικῶν, καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶν θεὸν οὐ συνήσει· ὅτι ἐπὶ πάντας μεγαλυνθήσεται.
And upon of-all of-a-deity(elohim) of-the-ones of-fathers of-it not it-shall-send-together, and unto-a-passioning-upon-unto of-women, and upon to-all to-a-deity(eloah) not it-shall-send-together; to-which-a-one upon to-all it-shall-be-greatened.
Note: of-all of-a-deity(elohim) in 03 : to-all to-deities(elohim) in 02 03C1 03C2.
Note: to-all in 03 : to-all in 02.Eloah
11:37 παντος θεου] παντας θεους BabA | om ου I° A | επιθυμια] επιθυμιαν A | παν] παντα A
(O) καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς θεοὺς τῶν πατέρων αὐτοῦ οὐ μὴ προνοηθῇ, καὶ ἐν ἐπιθυμίᾳ γυναικὸς οὐ μὴ προνοηθῇ· ὅτι ἐν παντὶ ὑψωθήσεται, καὶ ὑποταγήσεται αὐτῷ ἔθνη ἰσχυρά.
And upon to-the-ones to-deities(elohim) of-the-ones of-fathers of-it not lest it-might-have-been-en-mulled-before-unto, and in unto-a-passioning-upon-unto of-a-woman not lest it-might-have-been-en-mulled-before-unto; to-which-a-one in unto-all it-shall-be-en-lofteed, and it-shall-have-been-arranged-under unto-it placeedness-belongings-to force-held.
11:37 τους θεους] τον θεον Syr
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:38 καὶ θεὸν μαωζεὶν ἐπὶ τόπου αὐτοῦ δοξάσει, καὶ θεὸν ὃν οὐκ ἔγνωσαν οἱ πατέρες αὐτοῦ δοξάσει ἐν χρυσῷ καὶ ἀργύρῳ καὶ λίθῳ τιμίῳ καὶ ἐν ἐπιθυμήμασιν.
And to-a-deity(eloah) of-maôzein' upon of-an-occasion of-it it-shall-reckon-to, and to-a-deity(eloah) to-which not they-had-acquainted, the-ones fathers of-it, it-shall-reckon-to in unto-a-gold and unto-a-silver and unto-a-stone unto-value-belonged and in unto-passionings-upon-to.
Note: of-maôzein' : transliterated from Hebrew, meaning en-holdationings-to.
11:38 μαωζει A | δοξασει I°] pr ου A | χρυσιω A
(O) ἐπὶ τὸν τόπον αὐτοῦ κινήσει, καὶ θεὸν ὃν οὐκ ἔγνωσαν οἱ πατέρες αὐτοῦ τιμήσει ἐν χρυσίῳ καὶ ἀργυρίῳ καὶ λίθῳ πολυτελεῖ. καὶ ἐν ἐπιθυμήμασι
Upon to-the-one to-an-occasion of-it it-shall-move-unto, and to-a-deity(eloah) to-which not they-had-acquainted, the-ones fathers of-it, it-shall-valuate-unto in unto-a-goldlet and unto-a-silverlet and unto-a-stone unto-much-finishinged. And in unto-passionings-upon-to
11:38 κινησει] κινηθησεται Syrfort <sup></sup>
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:39 καὶ ποιήσει τοῖς ὀχυρώμασιν τῶν καταφυγῶν μετὰ θεοῦ ἀλλοτρίου, καὶ πληθυνεῖ δόξαν, καὶ ὑποτάξει αὐτοῖς πολλούς, καὶ γῆν διελεῖ ἐν δώροις.
And it-shall-do-unto unto-the-ones unto-en-holdationings-to of-the-ones of-fleeings-down with of-a-deity(eloah) of-other-belonged, and it-shall-repleten to-a-reckonedness, and it-shall-arrange-under unto-them to-much, and to-a-soil it-shall-have-sectioned-through in unto-gifts.
11:39 οχυρωκασι B
(O) ποιήσει πόλεων καὶ εἰς ὀχύρωμα ἰσχυρὸν ἥξει μετὰ θεοῦ ἀλλοτρίου· οὗ ἐὰν ἐπιγνῷ, πληθυνεῖ δόξαν καὶ κατακυριεύσει αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ πολύ, καὶ χώραν ἀπομεριεῖ εἰς δωρεάν.
it-shall-do-unto of-cities and into to-an-en-holdationing-to to-force-held it-shall-arrive with of-a-deity(eloah) of-other-belonged; of-which if-ever it-might-have-had-acquainted-upon, it-shall-repleten to-a-reckonedness and it-shall-authority-belong-down-of of-it upon to-much, and to-a-spacedness it-shall-portion-off-to into to-a-giftedness.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:40 καὶ ἐν καιροῦ πέρατι συνκερατισθήσεται μετὰ τοῦ βασιλέως τοῦ νότου, καὶ συναχθήσεται ἐπ' αὐτὸν ὁ βασιλεὺς ὁ τοῦ βορρᾶ ἐν ἅρμασιν καὶ ἱππεῦσιν καὶ ἐν ναυσὶν πολλαῖς, καὶ εἰσελεύσονται εἰς τὴν γῆν καὶ συντρίψει καὶ παρελεύσεται.
And in of-a-time unto-an-acrossment it-shall-be-horned-together-to with of-the-one of-a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-tropic, and it-shall-be-led-together upon to-it the-one a-ruler-of of-the-one of-a-north in unto-liftings-along-to and unto-horsers-of and in unto-boats unto-much, and they-shall-come-into into to-the-one to-a-soil and it-shall-rub-together and it-shall-come-beside.
11:40 καιρου] τω καιρω A | συγκεκρατισθ. Bab| με B* (μετα Bab) | επ αυτον] μετ αυτου A | ο βασιλευς ο] βασιλευς A | αρμασι, ιππευσι, ναυσι Bb | ιππευσιν] pr εν A | εισελευσεται A
(O) καὶ καθ' ὥραν συντελείας συγκερατισθήσεται αὐτῷ ὁ βασιλεὺς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ ἐποργισθήσεται αὐτῷ βασιλεὺς βορρᾶ ἐν ἅρμασι καὶ ἐν ἵπποις πολλοῖς καὶ ἐν πλοίοις πολλοῖς, καὶ εἰσελεύσεται εἰς χώραν Αἰγύπτου.
And down to-an-houredness of-a-finishing-together-of it-shall-be-horned-together-to unto-it the-one a-ruler-of of-an-Aiguptos, and it-shall-be-stressed-upon-to unto-it, a-ruler-of of-a-north, in unto-liftings-along-to and in unto-horses unto-much and in unto-floatlets unto-much, and it-shall-come-into into to-a-spacedness of-an-Aiguptos.
11:40 ΣΥΝΚΕΡΑΤΙΣΘΗΣΕΤΑΙ Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:41 καὶ εἰσελεύσεται εἰς τὴν γῆν τοῦ σαβαείν, καὶ πολλοὶ ἀσθενήσουσιν· καὶ οὗτοι διασωθήσονται ἐκ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ, Ἐδὼμ καὶ Μωὰβ καὶ ἀρχὴ υἱῶν Ἀμμών.
And it-shall-come-into into to-the-one to-a-soil of-the-one of-a-sabaein, and much they-shall-un-vigor-unto; and the-ones-these they-shall-be-saved-through-to out of-a-hand of-it, an-Edôm and a-Môab and a-firsting of-sons of-an-Ammôn.
Note: of-a-sabein : transliterated from Hebrew, meaning a-reckoning-in.
(O) καὶ ἐπελεύσεται εἰς τὴν χώραν μου, καὶ πολλαὶ σκανδαλισθήσονται· καὶ αὗται διασωθήσονται ἐκ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ, Ἐδὼμ καὶ Μωὰβ καὶ κεφάλαιον υἱῶν Ἀμμών.
And it-shall-come-upon into to-the-one to-a-spacedness of-me, and much they-shall-be-cumbered-to; and the-ones-these they-shall-be-saved-through-to out of-a-hand of-it, an-Edôm and a-Môab and a-headlet of-sons of-an-Ammôn.
11:41–42 ϗ και πολλαι (ϗ 87) . . . χειρος (χειρων Syr) αυτου (ϗ 87) . . . εν γαις (sic 87 et ut vid Syr) γαιαις 87 Syr
11:41 Μωαμ 87
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:42 καὶ ἐκτενεῖ τὴν χεῖρα ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ γῆ Αἰγύπτου οὐκ ἔσται εἰς σωτηρίαν.
And it-shall-stretch-out to-the-one to-a-hand upon to-the-one to-a-soil, and a-soil of-an-Aiguptos not it-shall-be into to-a-savioring-unto.
11:42 χειρα] + αυτου A
(O) καὶ ἀποστελεῖ χεῖρα αὐτοῦ ἐν ταῖς γαίαις, καὶ ἐν χώρᾳ Αἰγύπτου οὐκ ἔσται ἐν αὐτῇ διασῳζόμενος.
And it-shall-set-off to-a-hand of-it in unto-the-ones unto-soilings-unto, and in unto-a-spacedness of-an-Aiguptos not it-shall-be in unto-it being-saved-through-to.
11:41–42 ϗ και πολλαι (ϗ 87) . . . χειρος (χειρων Syr) αυτου (ϗ 87) . . . εν γαις (sic 87 et ut vid Syr) γαιαις 87 Syr
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:43 καὶ κυριεύσει ἐν τοῖς ἀποκρύφοις τοῦ χρυσοῦ καὶ τοῦ ἀργύρου, καὶ ἐν πᾶσιν ἐπιθυμητοῖς Αἰγύπτου καὶ Λιβύων καὶ Αἰθιόπων, ἐν τοῖς ὀχυρώμασιν αὐτῶν.
And it-shall-authority-belong-of in unto-the-ones unto-hidened-off of-the-one of-a-gold and of-the-one of-a-silver, and in unto-all unto-passioned-upon of-an-Aiguptos and of-Libuians and of-Aithiopians, in unto-the-ones unto-en-holdationings-to of-them.
11:43 του χρυσου και του αργυρου] του χρυσιου κ. του αργυριου (υ I° in αργ. sup ras Aa?) A | om εν 2° A
(O) καὶ κρατήσει τοῦ τόπου τοῦ χρυσίου καὶ τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἀργυρίου καὶ πάσης τῆς ἐπιθυμίας Αἰγύπτου, καὶ Λίβυες καὶ Αἰθίοπες ἔσονται ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ αὐτοῦ.
And it-shall-secure-unto of-the-one of-an-occasion of-the-one of-a-goldlet and of-the-one of-an-occasion of-the-one of-a-silverlet and of-all of-the-one of-a-passioning-upon-unto of-an-Aiguptos, and Libuians and Aithiopians they-shall-be in unto-the-one unto-a-crowd of-it.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:44 καὶ ἀκοαὶ καὶ σπουδαὶ ταράξουσιν αὐτὸν ἐξ ἀνατολῶν καὶ ἀπὸ βορρᾶ, καὶ ἥξει ἐν θυμῷ πολλῷ τοῦ ἀφανίσαι πολλούς·
And hearings and hasteneeings they-shall-stir to-it out of-finishings-up and off of-a-north, and it-shall-arrive in unto-a-passion unto-much of-the-one to-have-un-manifested-to to-much;
11:44 αφανισαι] + και του αναθεματισαι A
(O) καὶ ἀκοὴ ταράξει αὐτὸν ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν καὶ βορρᾶ, καὶ ἐξελεύσεται ἐν θυμῷ ἰσχυρῷ καὶ ῥομφαίᾳ ἀφανίσαι καὶ ἀποκτεῖναι πολλούς·
And a-hearing it-shall-stir to-it off of-finishings-up and of-a-north, and it-shall-come-out in unto-a-passion unto-force-held and unto-a-sabre to-have-un-manifested-to and to-have-killed-off to-much;
(424 B.C.)
Dan 11:45 καὶ πήξει τὴν σκηνὴν αὐτοῦ Ἐφαδανὼ ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν θαλασσῶν εἰς ὄρος σαβαεὶν ἅγιον· καὶ ἥξει ἕως μέρους αὐτοῦ, καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ ῥυόμενος αὐτόν.
and it-shall-en-pitch to-the-one to-a-tenting of-it to-an-efadanô up to-middle of-the-ones of-flourisherednesses into to-a-jutteedness to-a-sabein to-hallow-belonged; and it-shall-arrive unto-if-which of-a-portioneedness of-it, and not it-be the-one tracting to-it.
Note: to-an-efadanô : transliterated from Hebrew, meaning a pavilion.
Note: to-a-sabein : transliterated from Hebrew, meaning a-reckoning-in.
11:45 Εφαδανω] Ενφα̅|δανω (nisi potius εν Φ.) A | σαβαειν] σαβειν A | μερους] + ορους A
(O) καὶ στήσει αὐτοῦ τὴν σκηνὴν τότε ἀνὰ μέσον τῶν θαλασσῶν καὶ τοῦ ὄρους τῆς θελήσεως τοῦ ἁγίου· καὶ ἥξει ὥρα τῆς συντελείας αὐτοῦ, καὶ οὐκ ἔσται βοηθῶν αὐτῷ.
and it-shall-stand of-it to-the-one to-a-tenting to-the-one-which-also up to-middle of-the-ones of-flourisherednesses and of-the-one of-a-jutteedness of-the-one of-a-determining of-the-one of-hallow-belonged; and it-shall-arrive, an-houredness of-the-one of-a-finishing-together-of of-it, and not it-shall-be holler-running-unto unto-it.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 12:1 Καὶ ἐν τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ ἀναστήσεται Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἄρχων ὁ μέγας, ὁ ἑστηκὼς ἐπὶ τοὺς υἱοὺς τοῦ λαοῦ σου· καὶ ἔσται καιρὸς θλίψεως, θλίψις οἵα οὐ γέγονεν ἀφ' ἧς γεγένηται ἔθνος ἐν τῇ γῇ ἕως τοῦ καιροῦ ἐκείνου· ἐν τῷ καιρῷ ἐκείνῳ σωθήσεται ὁ λαός σου πᾶς ὁ γεγραμμένος ἐν τῇ βίβλῳ.
And in unto-the-one unto-a-time unto-the-one-thither it-shall-stand-up, a-Michaêl the-one firsting the-one great, the-one having-had-come-to-stand upon to-the-ones to-sons of-the-one of-a-people of-thee; and it-shall-be a-time of-a-pressing, a-pressing which-belonged not it-hath-had-come-to-become off of-which it-had-come-to-become, a-placeedness-belonging-to, in unto-the-one unto-a-soil unto-if-which of-the-one of-a-time of-the-one-thither; in unto-the-one unto-a-time unto-the-one-thither it-shall-be-saved-to the-one a-people of-thee all the-one having-had-come-to-be-scribed in unto-the-one unto-a-paper.
12:1 om γεγονεν αφ ης B* (hab Bab mgA) | εν τη γη] επι της γης A | εν 3°] pr και A | πας] + ο ευρεθεις A
(O) Καὶ κατὰ τὴν ὥραν ἐκείνην παρελεύσεται Μιχαὴλ ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ μέγας, ὁ ἑστηκὼς ἐπὶ τοὺς υἱοὺς τοῦ λαοῦ σου· ἐκείνη ἡ ἡμέρα θλίψεως, οἵα οὐκ ἐγενήθη ἀφ' οὗ ἐγενήθησαν ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης· καὶ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ὑψωθήσεται πᾶς ὁ λαὸς ὃς ἂν εὑρεθῇ ἐγγεγραμμένος ἐν τῷ βιβλίῳ.
And down to-the-one to-an-houredness to-the-one-thither it-shall-come-beside, a-Michaêl the-one a-leadeeer the-one great, the-one having-had-come-to-stand upon to-the-ones to-sons of-the-one of-a-people of-thee; the-one-thither the-one a-dayedness of-a-pressing, which-belonged not it-was-became off of-which they-were-became unto-if-which of-the-one of-a-dayedness of-the-one-thither; and in unto-the-one-thither unto-the-one unto-a-dayedness it-shall-be-en-lofteed all the-one a-people which ever it-was-found having-had-come-to-be-scribed-in in unto-the-one unto-a-paperlet.
12:1 παρελευσε| 87
(424 B.C.)
Dan 12:2 καὶ πολλοὶ τῶν καθευδόντων ἐν γῆς χώματι ἐξεγερθήσονται, οὗτοι εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον, καὶ οὗτοι εἰς ὀνειδισμὸν καὶ εἰς αἰσχύνην αἰώνιον·
And much of-the-ones of-resting-down in of-a-soil unto-an-en-pouring-to they-shall-be-roused-out, the-ones-these into to-a-lifing to-aged-belonged, and the-ones-these into to-reproaching-to-of and into to-a-shamening to-aged-belonged;
12:2 εξεγερθησονται] εγερθησονται A
(O) καὶ πολλοὶ τῶν καθευδόντων ἐν τῷ πλάτει τῆς γῆς ἀναστήσονται, οἱ μὲν εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον, οἱ δὲ εἰς ὀνειδισμόν, οἱ δὲ εἰς διασπορὰν καὶ αἰσχύνην αἰώνιον·
And much of-the-ones of-resting-down in unto-the-one unto-a-broadeedness of-the-one of-a-soil they-shall-stand-up, the-ones indeed into to-a-lifing to-aged-belonged, the-ones then-also into to-a-reproaching-to-of, the-ones then-also into to-a-whorleeing-through and to-a-shamening to-aged-belonged;
(424 B.C.)
Dan 12:3 καὶ οἱ συνιέντες λάμψουσιν ὡς ἡ λαμπρότης τοῦ στερεώματος, καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν δικαίων τῶν πολλῶν ὡς οἱ ἀστέρες εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας καὶ ἔτι.
and the-ones sending-together they-shall-lamp as the-one an-en-lampness of-the-one of-an-en-stabling-to, and off of-the-ones of-course-belonged of-the-ones of-much as the-ones stars into to-the-ones to-ages and if-to-a-one.
12:3 λαμψουσιν] εκλαμψουσιν A
(O) καὶ οἱ συνιέντες φανοῦσιν ὡς φωστῆρες τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, καὶ οἱ κατισχύοντες τοὺς λόγους μου ὡσεὶ τὰ ἄστρα τοῦ οὐρανοῦ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα τοῦ αἰῶνος.
and the-ones sending-together they-shall-manifest as lighters of-the-one of-a-sky, and the-ones force-holding-down to-the-ones to-forthees of-me as-if the-ones en-starrings of-the-one of-a-sky into to-the-one to-an-age of-the-one of-an-age.
12:3 συνιε|εντες 87
(424 B.C.)
Dan 12:4 καὶ σύ, Δανιήλ, ἔμφραξον τοὺς λόγους καὶ σφράγισον τὸ βιβλίον ἕως καιροῦ συντελείας, ἕως διδαχθῶσιν πολλοὶ καὶ πληθυνθῇ ἡ γνῶσις.
And thou, Daniêl, thou-should-have-hedged-in to-the-ones to-forthees and thou-should-have-sealed-to to-the-one to-a-paperlet unto-if-which of-a-time of-a-finishing-together-of, unto-if-which they-might-have-been-veer-veerated, much, and it-might-have-been-repletened, the-one an-acquainting.
12:4 τους λοιπους και σφραγισον το βιβλιον] το βιβλ. κ. σφρ. τους λογους A
(O) καὶ σύ, Δανιήλ, κάλυψον τὰ προστάγματα καὶ σφράγισαι τὸ βιβλίον ἕως καιροῦ συντελείας, ἕως ἂν ἀπομανῶσιν οἱ πολλοὶ καὶ πλησθῇ ἡ γῆ ἀδικίας.
And thou, Daniêl, thou-should-have-shrouded to-the-ones to-arrangings-toward-to and thou-should-have-sealed-to to-the-one to-a-paperlet unto-if-which of-a-time of-a-finishing-together-of, unto-if-which ever they-might-have-raved-off, the-ones much, and it-might-have-been-repleted the-one a-soil of-an-un-coursing-unto.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 12:5 Καὶ ἴδον ἐγὼ Δανιήλ, καὶ ἰδοὺ δύο ἕτεροι ἱστήκεισαν, εἷς ἐντεῦθεν τοῦ χείλους τοῦ ποταμοῦ καὶ εἷς ἐντεῦθεν τοῦ χείλους τοῦ ποταμοῦ.
And I-had-seen I a-Daniêl, and thou-should-have-had-seen, two different they-had-come-to-have-had-stood, one in-also-from of-the-one of-a-rimmeedness of-the-one of-a-drinkationing-of and one in-also-from of-the-one of-a-rimmeedness of-the-one of-a-drinkationing-of.
12:5 ειδον Bab | ειστηκεισαν Bab
(O) Καὶ εἶδον ἐγὼ Δανιήλ, καὶ ἰδοὺ δύο ἕτεροι εἱστήκεισαν, εἷς ἔνθεν τοῦ ποταμοῦ καὶ εἷς ἔνθεν.
And I-had-seen I a-Daniêl, and thou-should-have-had-seen, two different they-had-come-to-have-stood, one in-from of-the-one of-a-drinkationing-of and one in-from.
12:5 δυο ετεροι] adnot ο νομος και οι προφηται 87mg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 12:6 καὶ εἶπεν τῷ ἀνδρὶ τῷ ἐνδεδυμένῳ τὰ βαδδείν, ὃς ἦν ἐπάνω τοῦ ὕδατος τοῦ ποταμοῦ Ἕως πότε τὸ πέρας ὧν εἴρηκας τῶν θαυμασίων;
And it-had-said unto-the-one unto-a-man unto-the-one unto-having-had-come-to-be-sunk-in to-the-ones to-baddein', which it-was upon-up-unto-which of-the-one of-a-water of-the-one of-a-drinkationing-of, Unto-if-which whither-also the-one an-acrossment of-which thou-had-come-to-utter of-the-ones of-marvel-to-belonged?
Note: to-baddein' : transliterated from Hebrew, meaning a kind of linen.
12:6 ειπεν] ειπον A | βαδδι (in fin lin) Avid
(O) καὶ εἶπα τῷ ἑνὶ τῷ περιβεβλημένῳ τὰ βύσσινα τῷ ἐπάνω Πότε οὖν συντέλεια ὧν εἴρηκάς μοι τῶν θαυμαστῶν καὶ ὁ καθαρισμὸς τούτων;
And I-said unto-the-one unto-one unto-the-one unto-having-had-come-to-be-casted-about to-the-ones to-linened-belonged-to unto-the-one upon-up-unto-which, Whither-also accordingly a-finishing-together-of of-which thou-had-come-to-utter unto-me of-the-ones of-marvel-to-belonged and the-one a-cleansing-to-of of-the-ones-these.
12:6 ÷ και ο καθαρισμος (÷ 87) τουτων 87 Syr
(424 B.C.)
Dan 12:7 καὶ ἤκουσα τοῦ ἀνδρὸς τοῦ ἐνδεδυμένου τὰ βαδδείν, ὃς ἦν ἐπάνω τοῦ ὕδατος τοῦ ποταμοῦ, καὶ ὕψωσεν τὴν δεξιὰν αὐτοῦ καὶ τὴν ἀριστερὰν αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, καὶ ὤμοσεν ἐν τῷ ζῶντι τὸν αἰῶνα ὅτι εἰς καιρὸν καιρῶν καὶ ἥμισυ καιροῦ· ἐν τῷ συντελεσθῆναι διασκορπισμόν, γνώσονται πάντα ταῦτα.
And I-heard of-the-one of-a-man of-the-one of-having-had-come-to-be-sunk-in to-the-ones to-baddein', which it-was upon-up-unto-which of-the-one of-a-water of-the-one of-a-drinkationing-of, and it-en-lofteed to-the-one to-right-belonged of-it and to-the-one to-more-un-bounded of-it into to-the-one to-a-sky, and it-en-oathed in unto-the-one unto-lifing-unto to-the-one to-an-age to-which-a-one into to-a-time of-times and to-half of-a-time; in unto-the-one to-have-been-finished-together-unto to-a-scattering-through-of, they-shall-acquaint to-all to-the-ones-these.
Note: to-baddein' : transliterated from Hebrew, meaning a kind of linen.
Note: to-more-un-bounded : used to refer to the left hand or side as liberated to do tasks not assigned to the right.
12:7 βαδδιν A | τον αιωνα] pr εις A | καιρων] και καιρους AΓ | ημισυ] pr εις A | συντελεσθηναι] συντελεσαι A | διασκορπισμον] + λαου ηγιασμενου και A + χειρος λαου αγιου Γ | ταυτ[α παντα] Γvid
(O) καὶ ἤκουσα τοῦ περιβεβλημένου τὰ βύσσινα, ὃς ἦν ἐπάνω τοῦ ὕδατος τοῦ ποταμοῦ Ἕως καιροῦ συντελείας· καὶ ὕψωσε τὴν δεξιὰν καὶ τὴν ἀριστερὰν εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν, καὶ ὤμοσε τὸν ζῶντα εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα θεὸν ὅτι εἰς καιρὸν καὶ καιροὺς καὶ ἥμισυ καιροῦ ἡ συντέλεια χειρῶν ἀφέσεως λαοῦ ἁγίου, καὶ συντελεσθήσεται πάντα ταῦτα.
And I-heard of-the-one of-having-had-come-to-be-casted-about to-the-ones to-linened-belonged-to, which it-was upon-up-unto-which of-the-one of-a-water of-the-one of-a-drinkationing-of, Unto-if-which of-a-time of-a-finishing-together-of; and it-en-lofteed to-the-one to-right-belonged and to-the-one to-more-un-bounded into to-the-one to-a-sky, and it-en-oathed to-the-one to-lifing-unto into to-the-one to-an-age to-a-Deity to-which-a-one into to-a-time and to-times and to-half of-a-time the-one a-finishing-together-of of-hands of-a-sending-off of-a-people of-hallow-belonged, and it-shall-be-finished-together-unto all the-ones-these.
Note: to-more-un-bounded : used to refer to the left hand or side as liberated to do tasks not assigned to the right.
12:7 του περιβεβλημενου . . . ος ην] adnot ο χριστος 87mg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 12:8 καὶ ἐγὼ ἤκουσα καὶ οὐ συνῆκα, καὶ εἶπα Κύριε, τί τὰ ἔσχατα τούτων;
And I I-heard and not I-sent-together, and I-said, Authority-belonged(Adon), what-one the-ones most-bordered of-the-ones-these?
12:8 και εγω] καγω A | om ου Bab | τα εσχατα] om τα A
(O) καὶ ἐγὼ ἤκουσα καὶ οὐ διενοήθην παρ' αὐτὸν τὸν καιρόν, καὶ εἶπα Κύριε, τίς ἡ λύσις τοῦ λόγου τούτου, καὶ τίνος αἱ παραβολαὶ αὗται;
And I I-heard and not I-was-en-mulled-through-unto beside to-it to-the-one to-a-time, and I-said, Authority-belonged(Adon), what-one the-one a-loosing of-the-one of-a-forthee of-the-one-this, and of-what-one the-ones castings-beside the-ones-these?
12:8 τινος] τινες (?τι) Syr
(424 B.C.)
Dan 12:9 καὶ εἶπεν Δεῦρο Δανιήλ, ὅτι ἐνπεφραγμένοι καὶ ἐσφραγισμένοι οἱ λόγοι, ἕως καιροῦ πέρας
And it-had-said, Thou-should-be-en-hithered-of, Daniêl, to-which-a-one having-had-come-to-be-hedged-in and having-had-come-to-be-sealed-to the-ones forthees, unto-if-which of-a-time to-an-acrossment
12:9 εμπεφραγμ. Bab
(O) καὶ εἶπέν μοι Ἀπότρεχε, Δανιήλ, ὅτι κατακεκαλυμμένα καὶ ἐσφραγισμένα τὰ προστάγματα, ἕως ἂν (Dan 12:10) πειρασθῶσι καὶ ἁγιασθῶσι πολλοί,
And it-had-said unto-me, Thou-should-circuit-off, Daniêl, to-which-a-one having-had-come-to-be-shrouded-down and having-had-come-to-be-sealed-to the-ones arrangings-toward-to, unto-if-which ever (Dan 12:10) they-might-have-been-across-belonged-to and they-might-have-been-hallow-belonged-to much,
(424 B.C.)
Dan 12:10 ἐκλεγῶσιν καὶ ἐκλευκανθῶσιν καὶ πυρωθῶσιν πολλοί, καὶ ἀνομήσωσιν ἄνομοι· καὶ οὐ συνήσουσιν ἄνομοι, καὶ οἱ νοήμονες συνήσουσιν.
they-might-have-had-been-forthed-out and they-might-have-been-whitened-out and they-might-have-been-en-fired much, and they-might-have-un-parceleed-unto, un-parceleed; and not they-shall-send-together, un-parceleed, and the-ones en-mullinged-of they-shall-send-together.
12:10 om και εκλευκανθωσιν A | πυρωθωσιν] + και αγιασθωσιν BabA | ανομησωσιν (-σουσιν Γvid)] ανοησουσιν A | συνησουσιν I°] νοησουσιν A | ανομοι 2°] pr παντες Bab mgAΓ
(O) καὶ ἁμάρτωσιν οἱ ἁμαρτωλοί καὶ οὐ μὴ διανοηθῶσι πάντες οἱ ἁμαρτωλοί, καὶ οἱ διανοούμενοι προσέξουσιν.
and they-had-un-adjusted-along, the-ones un-adjusted-along, and not lest they-might-have-been-en-mulled-through-unto all the-ones un-adjusted-along, and the-ones being-en-mulled-through-unto they-shall-hold-toward.
12:10 και οι διανοουμενοι προσεξουσιν] ς´ και οι επιστημονες συνησουσι 87mg Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 12:11 καὶ ἀπὸ καιροῦ παραλλάξεως τοῦ ἐνδελεχισμοῦ καὶ δοθήσεται βδέλυγμα ἐρημώσεως, ἡμέραι χίλιαι διακόσιαι ἐνενήκοντα.
And off of-a-time of-an-othering-beside of-the-one of-an-elongating-in-of and it-shall-be-given an-abhorrering-to of-an-en-solituding, dayednesses thousand two-hundred ninety.
12:11 και δοθησεται] αφ ου αναστη η θυσια δια παντος και ετοιμασθη δοθηναι A του δοθηναι Γ | βδελυγμα] pr το AΓ | ερημωσεως] pr της A | ημεραις χιλιαις διακοσιαις A | ενενηκοντα] τεσσερακοντα Ba mg (corr -σαρ) non inst Bb
(O) ἀφ' οὗ ἂν ἀποσταθῇ ἡ θυσία διὰ παντὸς καὶ ἑτοιμασθῇ δοθῆναι τὸ βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως, ἡμέρας χιλίας διακοσίας ἐνενήκοντα.
Off of-which ever it-might-have-been-stood-off the-one a-surging-unto through of-all and it-might-have-been-readied-to to-have-been-given the-one an-abhorrering-to of-the-one of-an-en-solituding, dayednesses thousand two-hundred ninety.
12:11 ΤΗ (sic) ΕΡΗΜΩΣΕΩΣ Syrmg | ημεραι χιλιαι και διακοσιαι και ενεν. Syrtxt [ημ] δισχιλιαι και διακ. και ενεν. Syrmg
(424 B.C.)
Dan 12:12 μακάριος ὁ ὑπομένων καὶ φθάσας εἰς ἡμέρας χιλίας τριακοσίας τριάκοντα πέντε.
Bless-belonged the-one staying-under and having-priored into to-dayednesses to-thousand to-three-hundred to-thirty to-five.
12:12 υπομενων] υπομεινας A
(O) μακάριος ὁ ἐμμένων, καὶ συνάξει εἰς ἡμέρας χιλίας τριακοσίας τριάκοντα πέντε.
Bless-belonged the-one staying-in, and it-shall-lead-together into to-dayednesses to-thousand to-three-hundred to-thirty to-five.
(424 B.C.)
Dan 12:13 καὶ σὺ δεῦρο καὶ ἀναπαύου· ἔτι γὰρ ἡμέραι εἰς ἀναπλήρωσιν συντελείας, καὶ ἀναστήσῃ εἰς τὸν κλῆρόν σου εἰς συντέλειαν ἡμερῶν.
And thou thou-should-be-en-hithered-of and thou-should-cease-up; if-to-a-one too-thus dayednesses into to-an-en-filling-up of-a-finishing-together-of, and thou-shall-stand-up into to-the-one to-a-lot of-thee into to-a-finishing-together-of of-dayednesses.
12:13 δευρυ Avid | ημεραι] + και ωραι BabΓ + εισιν A | συντελειας] + και αναπαυση AΓ | subscr ορασις ί\ A
(O) καὶ σὺ βάδισον, ἀναπαύου· ἔτι γάρ εἰσιν ἡμέραι καὶ ὧραι εἰς ἀναπλήρωσιν συντελείας, καὶ ἀναπαύσῃ καὶ ἀναστήσῃ ἐπὶ τὴν δόξαν σου εἰς συντέλειαν ἡμερῶν.
And thou thou-should-have-stepped-to, thou-should-cease-up; if-to-a-one too-thus they-be dayednesses and hourednesses into to-an-en-filling-up of-a-finishing-together-of, and thou-shall-cease-up and thou-shall-stand-up upon to-the-one to-a-reckonedness of-thee into to-a-finishing-together-of of-dayednesses.
12:13 ÷ ετι γαρ . . . συντελειας 87 Syr
Subscr in litt maiusc Δανιηλ κατα τους ό ·| εγραφη εξ αντιγραφου.|εχοντος την υποσημει|ωσιν ταυτην· Εγρα|φη εκ των τετραπλων.|εξ ων και παρετεθη:— 87 (similiter Syr)